PDF Meridian SL 1 Engineering Update
User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 642
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
ENGINEERING HANDBOOK Update Package PO71 3374 Prepared by: Meridian 1 Product Marketing Santa Clara, CA Issue: April 1990 FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY telemanuals.com Meridian 1 Engineering Handbook Table Of Contents Chapter Description Page 1 ................................................ .................................................l-l 2 ............................................... ..........................................2-l 3 ................................................ ......................................... 4 ................................................ .......................................4 1 5 ................................................ ....................................... ............................................... ................................ 7 ................................................ ....................................7-l 8 ................................................ .....................................8-l 9 ................................................T 10.............................................. 11 .............................................. ........................................................9-l .................................. .......................................... 1 telemanuals.com l-l Chapter Introduction 1 Meridian 1 Communication Systems are a family of digital multiplex voice and data switching systems, built upon a foundation of state-of-the art digital switching equipment and advanced software program control. Meridian 1 Communication Systems have a range of System Options available, providing sophisticated voice and data services for PBX and private CO applications for up to 60,000 users. The Meridian 1 is the single source solution to the complexities of today’s business environment and represents the merger of the functionality of existing Meridian 1, Meridian SL-100, and Meridian systems into a single, modular communications product portfolio. It offers various system options that are tailored to meet the application requirements of small, medium, and large sized business organizations. The Purpose of this handbook is two-fold: 1. To focus on capabilities and services that have evolved from the Meridian SL-1 architecture (Meridian 1 System Options and 71). 2. To provide a consolidated source of selective reference material to assist sales engineers and product support personnel in their everyday work tasks. The Engineering Handbook is NOT a replacement for existing documentation such as Northern Telecom Practices and feature Documents, which have their own specific use. Instead it is structured specifically to address the business applications of the Meridian 1. Modular organization of the Engineering Handbook has been selected for ease of use. Engineering Handbook telemanuals.com l-2 System Architecture Chapter 1: INTRODUCTION discusses the purpose and organization of the handbook Chapter 2: SYSTEM OVERVIEW provides a general overview of the foundation upon which Meridian 1 SL-1 is built Chapter 3: PRODUCT EVOLUTION chronicles the timetable of events that have evolved for over a decade to the introduction of Meridian 1 Chapter 4: SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE details the various elements that make up the system architecture Chapter 5: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION describes the capabilities ofthe Meridian 1 System Options 2 and various members of the Meridian product family 1 A, 5 1, and Chapter 6: MERIDIAN DATA SERVICES outlines the data products and services that are currently available on Meridian 1 Chapter 7: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION provides configuration and compatibility parameters for both hardware and software, along with capacity guidelines Chapter 8: ORDERING INFORMATION details ordering and packaging information of Meridian 1 Chapter 9: TRAFFIC discusses various aspects of traffic engineering for consideration in system configuration Chapter 10: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS consolidates the technical specifications that support Meridian 1 SL-1 Chapter 11: LIST OF TERMS provides a glossary of terms widely used in the digital communications environment -The Meridian 1 Engineering Handbook was developed to provide useful and usable information. Your suggestions are solicited so that the most effective use can be derived from this handbook. Please direct all correspondence to: Northern Telecom Inc. 2305 Mission College Blvd. Santa Clara, CA 95054-1591 Attn: Meridian 1 Engineering Handbook Engineering Handbook telemanuals.com 2-1 Chapter 2: System overview . Contents Modular packaging System enhancements System organization Common Equipment Network Peripheral Equipment System options System option 21 System option 51 System option 61 System option 71 Features and services Meridian software Desktop products Meridian 1 SL-1 digital set Meridian attendant console System administration Meridian 1 data services Meridian networking solutions Meridian Networked ACD Meridian Mail Meridian LANSTAR 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-7 2-7 2-8 2-8 2-9 2-9 2-10 2-10 2-11 2-l 1 2-12 Meridian 1 Communication Systems consolidate the functionality of the Meridian PBX portfolios into a single SL-1, Meridian SL-100, and Meridian product line. -The design approach to the Meridian 1 architecture, combined with modular components, has produced extremely flexible system options that are adaptable to many applications in the business environment. and 7 1, based on the Meridian SL- 1 The Meridian 1 system options 2 architecture, provide advanced voice features, data connectivity and local area network communications, and sophisticated information services for PBX applications ranging in size from 30 to 10,000 users, Engineering Handbook telemanuals.com 2-2 System Overview The foundation for each Meridian 1 system option is a voice and data switched digital sub-system under software control. It is comprised of a Central Processing Unit (CPU), memory store, and a digital switching network that uses time division multiplexing and pulse code modulation techniques. Peripheral interfaces are used to connect a wide array of telephones, trunks, and terminals. Modular packaging System hardware provisioning is based upon a highly modular packaging scheme that uses an advanced aluminum die-casting process. The basic unit of packaging is called the Universal Equipment Module, or UEM. Each module contains all hardware required (such as backplane, card cage, power supply, cabling) to support a specific system function, such as CPU, Network, or Peripheral Equipment The UEM has removeable front and rear covers with locking latches for easy access to its contents. In addition, the UEM is designed to provide universal support for a wide variety of card cages and structures to allow the integration of special applications and features, such as Meridian Mail, into the system. The Universal Equipment Modules are both mechanically superior and aesthetically attractive, and provide an advanced packaging platform for the future. are stacked one on top of another to form a column. Each column may The contain up to four An expansion kit is provided to interconnect the columns in a multi-column system to ensure compliance to FCC regulations. At the base of each column of is the pedestal. The pedestal houses cooling fans, air filters, a power distribution assembly (including the circuit breakers and power switches) and a System Monitor circuit. At the top of each column is a top cap assembly which consists of two air exhaust grills and a thermal sensor assembly. System expansion simply requires adding one or more The modular packaging scheme also provides for low cost, easy expansion from one system type to another. For example, the card cage assembly of a UEM containing common equipment for a small system may be removed and replaced with the card cage assembly designed for larger systems. In addition, Peripheral Equipment, which is the bulk of the system investment, is common to all systems and may be retained when expanding from one system option to another. The power distribution arrangement follows the modular design concept of the UEM packaging. Each module is truly universal in terms of power and cooling, and contains its own multi-output power converter to supply all necessary voltages. The system is designed so that there are no restrictions as a result of power or thermal constraints. Any circuit card can go in any slot, and all modules can be filled to capacity with any (logically) valid combination of cards, with virtually no engineering requirements. Both AC-powered and traditional DC-powered system options are available, providing flexibility to meet a wide variety of customer needs. Part of the power architecture includes a System Monitor designed to provide enhanced power, cooling, and general system monitoring capabilities. The System Monitor interfaces to the CPU through a Serial Data Interface (SDI), for intelligent error and status reporting. Engineering Handbook telemanuals.com System Overview 2-3 System enhancements The comprehensive open architecture ensures continual growth in capacity and capability to address ongoing demands imposed by business communication and information management needs. Building on the strength of the original SL-1 architecture, this approach has enabled a smooth evolution to occur that takes full advantage of new technology as it becomes available, allowing customers to protect their installed investment while at the same time benefiting from these new technologies and features. The development of Meridian 1 introduces major enhancements to the network and peripheral areas of the system. The implementation of microprocessor technology to the peripheral circuit cards and their associated support interfaces creates a new set of Intelligent Peripheral Equipment. The on-board microprocessors off-load processing functions previously performed by the CPU, resulting in an increase in system real time capacity. In addition, they provide increased system diagnostic capabilities for an improvement in maintainability. Where possible, hardware switch selection is replaced with software-controlled selection of circuit card options. The on-board microprocessors also allow for circuit card parameters to be changed without requiring hardware revisions. Parameters are stored on the system disk drive unit, and are downloaded to the circuit card at system reload or upon user command. The new cards also make use of on-board intelligence by reporting their product code, serial number, release number, and manufacture location, assisting maintenance and inventory control. The Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) provides an increase in density on associated peripheral circuit cards. For example, the digital line card provides 16 voice and 16 data ports , for a total of 32 ports, and the analog line card provides 16 ports. Since the IPE Module holds 16 cards, the maximum number of peripheral ports (or terminal numbers) per module is 12. The overall impact is a 300 percent increase in peripheral density. Network capacity is enhanced through the introduction of the Superloop Network card, which interfaces to four regular network loops to extend 120 timeslots per superloop to the IPE. This increased bandwidth and larger pool of timeslots improves the network traffic capacity by 25 percent for each 120 bundle. For high traffic or non-blocking applications, up to four superloops may be assigned to each IPE Module. Alternatively, since the PE address range has been increased such that up to 1024 may be assigned to each superloop, low traffic applications may have one superloop serving up to two IPE Modules. Other enhancements include a migration to the DS-30 signaling method used by other Northern Telecom switching products, providing a commonality of signaling schemes throughout the Meridian 1 Communication Systems family so that growth beyond 10,000 ports is possible without a change in PE type. Together, the new signaling scheme, the additional processing capabilities, and the increased addressing and termination capacity, provide a ready platform for the integration of ISDN Basic Rate Access (BRA). telemanuals.com 2-4 System Overview System organization Each system option is organized around three functional partitions: Common Equipment (which includes the system software), circuit-switched Network, and Peripheral Equipment. Common Equipment The Common Equipment is comprised of the following components: Central Processing Unit (CPU) which, under software control, provides the computing power for system operation. Read/Write (R/W) random access memory stores all operating software programs and data unique to the particular SL- 1 system option including switching sequences, features, class-of-service information, and quantity and type of peripheral devices. Serial Data Interface (SDI) provides an communications link for administration and maintenance on either a local or remote basis. Mass Storage Unit (MSU) provides for high speed loading of the system operating software and data into the R/W memory. Network The Network consists of: digital switching matrix for circuit-switched connections to associated peripheral devices two types of Network cards: Existing Meridian SL-1 Network cards, each supporting a dual-loop configuration where each network loop consists of thirty-two 64 Kbps timeslots (30 traffic, 1 signaling, and 1 spare). Meridian 1 Superloop Network cards, providing 120 timeslots of 64 Kbps each, supporting from one to eight segments over one or two IPE modules. Digital service circuits which provide functions such as tones and cadences and conferencing capabilities. Arrangement whereby the network loops are provisioned to suit the following configurations: half network group (up to 16 network loops) full network group (up to 32 network loops) multi-network groups (up to 160 network loops) l l l l Peripheral Equipment Peripheral Equipment (PE) performs the interface function for the telephones, terminals, and trunks that utilize the 64Kbps clear channel bandwidth capability of the circuit-switched network. Where necessary, analog to digital conversion (and vice versa) is accomplished on a per port basis by means of a single channel (coder-decoder) located on the appropriate interface cards. An exception to this is the Meridian family of digital telephones, which reside on the PE, but include built into the set for cost-effective data capabilities. individual telemanuals.com Overview 2-5 The Peripheral Equipment falls into two categories: Existing Meridian SL-1 Peripheral Equipment Meridian 1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment There are two types of Network-to-PE arrangements: Existing Meridian SL-1 Network cards interface to a peripheral buffer associated with existing Meridian SL-1 PE cards. Meridian 1 Superloop Network cards interface to a controller associated with Meridian 1 IPE cards. Both types of network cards can be housed in the same Network Module. However, IPE cards and existing PE cards reside in their own respective modules and cannot be intermixed. Figure 2-1 System organization Network Equipment Peripheral Equipment -- Engineering Handbook telemanuals.com 2-6 System Overview System options Four Meridian 1 system options, based on the Meridian SL-1 architecture, may be selected to meet various applications. System option 21 System option 21 consists of a single CPU with error correcting memory and up to 28 loops (service circuits reduce this to a maximum of 24 voice/data loops). Also contained within the module are ten IPE slots and an interface, the Receiver (DTR) card, which provides 120 timeslots to those cards and eight DTR circuits. up to 800 ports is achieved through the addition of Superloop Network cards and IPE Modules/cards. Existing dual loop network cards continue to be supported and a module designed to support Meridian SL- 1 Peripheral Equipment connects to these cards. Another version, system option using AC power and supporting 160 ports in a single-module-only configuration, is also available to address small system applications. A field upgrade kit can be utilized should growth beyond the single module be required. System option 51 System Option 51 consists of a module containing CPU and half network group functions, as well as the number of or PE Modules required to support up to 1000 ports. CPU functions are supported using the Omega processor and the eight network slots which are configurable with either dual loop network cards or Superloop Network cards, to support a maximum of 16 loops (service circuits reduce this to 14 voice/data loops). System option 61 System option 61 adds a CPU/Network Module to the system option 51 configuration to produce a fully redundant configuration, capable of supporting up to 2000 ports. This system option provides a full network group with up to 28 loops (assuming duplicated service circuits) to support voice/data requirements and the ability to process up to 32,000 busy-hour call completions. System option 71 System option 7 1 is a fully redundant CPU/memory configuration capable of supporting up to 10,000 ports connected to (up to) five network groups. Again, both Meridian SL-1 dual loop networks and associated peripherals are supported along with the Superloop Network card. Assuming duplicated service circuits on each network group, 140 of the available 160 loops may be equipped to support voice/data requirements. With the exception of system option all system options listed above are available either AC or DC power arrangement. Engineering Handbook telemanuals.com System Overview 2-7 Features and services Meridian 1 capabilities range from voice and data communications for a single site, to sophisticated multi-site networking, to high capacity tandem switching applications. The Meridian 1 portfolio offers a complete family of desktop products, a full complement of voice and data communications options, easy to use system administration capabilities, and an extensive array of call processing features. Networking capabilities range from simple off-premise extensions to local area networks, to sophisticated corporate networks deploying ISDN Primary Rate Access (PRA), Call management applications range from simple call distribution to sophisticated call center management and reporting tools. Meridian 1 Communication Systems extend the high performance and reliability of fully digital communications across the business spectrum, to manufacturers, the financial community, educational institutions, government, hospitals, emergency services, the entertainment and hospitality industries, and any other organization that relies on fast, efficient communications. The versatility and flexibility of the Meridian 1 provide optional configurations to meet the application requirements of various business organizations. Application driven technology helps reduce, control, and forecast operating costs, enhance and increase service levels to customers, increase new business opportunities, introduce new products, and help streamline business processes to run more efficiently. Meridian software Meridian software offers the same features and functions on all SL- 1 system options ranging from small 30 port systems to systems accommodating 10,000 ports. A comprehensive selection of features addresses the needs of all business organizations. Virtually every industry application (such as lodging, hospitals, finance, education, manufacturing, multi-tenant) benefits from the many time- and money-saving specialized features of the Meridian 1 Communication Systems. Some of these features are: Basic Automatic Route Selection (BARS) lowers long distance charges by automatically placing calls over the most economical route available. Call Detail Recording (CDR) provides cost accounting information for billing back to departments or individuals. Call records are available for both internal and external calls. In addition, CDR provides information that can assist in the management of network efficiencies. Call Party Name Display (CPND) provides users equipped with display telephones with the source of a call, the reason for its redirection (such as answer, busy), and even the identification of the party who forwarded the call. Multi-Tenant allows the resale of Meridian services and features to tenants at the same facility, with either shared or dedicated access to facilities. Flexible Dialing Plans allow selection of up to 7-digit extensions and permit enormous flexibility in designing network dialing plans for multiple sites. Engineering Handbook telemanuals.com 2-8 System Overview Many other time and money saving applications can be deployed with auxiliary processors for sophisticated system management and administration, for inbound call center management and reporting, for conference bridges and specialized network functions. Northern Telecom’s commitment to ongoing software feature development keeps system capabilities current with state of the art functionality to address ongoing market requirements. A single software development stream ensures that all features are exercised on all installations, small or large, single site or multi-site: Desktop products Today’s advanced Meridian 1 line of products includes a telephone or terminal for every business communications need. The Meridian Digital Telephone portfolio brings the powerful value-added features and services of Meridian 1 to every desktop. Simple access to voice messaging, data communications, least cost routing, and other call processing features ensures a full return on the communications investment . The modular design of the telephone portfolio delivers the ultimate flexibility to configure a set for every user in the business organization. The modular units can be factory or field installed to meet initial or later needs. Optional 2 x 24 LCD displays deliver enhanced functionality such as identification of incoming call information. Key expansion modules enable the portfolio to cover user applications from a single line to 60 lines. In addition, all Meridian Digital Telephones support asynchronous data adapters. The Meridian product portfolio enables feature key configurations to suit specific application requirements. The software commands (such as add, move, and change) are simplified because all sets use identical line cards, whether they are equipped for voice only or voice and data. Data can be added to the Meridian Digital Telephone simply by installing the data option into the base of the set. Voice and data signals are transmitted over a single twisted pair to a single voice/data port on the digital telephone line card. Meridian 1 SL-1 digital sets The Meridian 1 digital set portfolio includes: The single line telephone which has one line key and five programmable feature keys. The standard business telephone which has eight line/feature keys and can connect with the optional data module. The M26 16 performance-plus telephone which has 16 programmable keys as well as fixed feature keys. The M2616 can be software-assigned with free communications. Optional key expansion modules can extend this set to provide 38 to 60 line/feature keys. The M2216 ACD telephone which comes with dual headset jacks that enable high-volume call handling capability of telemarketing group needs. Model 1 Engineering Handbook telemanuals.com System Overview 2-9 has two RJ-32 ports for modular headsets; Model 2 has one RJ-32 port for an supervisor headset and one PJ-327 port for a carbon agent headset. secure telephone which prevents the telephone from being used as a passive listening device in any environment in which confidential information is discussed. M2317 intelligent telephone which has a built-in liquid crystal display, 11 programmable line/feature keys, and five soft keys to provide easy access to numerous features, including step-by-step prompts for optional Meridian Mail voice messaging. The touchphone which has a unique touch-sensitive liquid crystal display that provides access to many features, including a customized directory of more than 250 dial-by-name entries. Meridian attendant console One of the key benefits of Meridian 1 is the efficiency and speed of call processing combined with ease of use at the central answering position(s). The Meridian attendant console is the optimum attendant interface for efficient high volume call processing. Large, easy-to-read indicators and a 4 x 40 liquid crystal display provide essential information required for processing calls and personalizing call answering. The alphanumeric display provides for immediate viewing of call source and destination information. Loop keys and Incoming Call Indicator keys allow the attendant the option to handle calls in sequence or to prioritize answering for specific trunk groups. An optional Busy Lamp Field provides the attendant with user status at a glance. The Meridian attendant console also supports attendant Message Center options. The attendant console can be connected to an IBM PC or PS2) or compatible to provide electronic Directory, Dial by Name, and Text Messaging functions to further enhance communications efficiency. All call processing features can be accessed using the computer keyboard. Multiple PC adjuncts can be networked in a multiple-console environment along with the ability to print messages and directories locally or at departmental printers. The central answering position can become a streamlined and efficient message center with all the tools needed to provide a consistently accurate and timely exchange of information. System administration System Management is a vital link in ensuring the continuing effectiveness of the Meridian 1 Communication Systems. Meridian Manager-provides a user-friendly, PC-based management system to address operations and administrative functions. Meridian Manager includes three optional modules: Station Administration allows easy implementation of all telephone set software commands (such as add, move, and change). Traffic Reporting provides easy to understand reports on Meridian 1 system performance. Specific analysis of processor, operator, loop, and trunk traffic Engineering Handbook telemanuals.com 2-10 System Overview are automated, assuring the ability to easily and efficiently optimize Meridian 1 resources. Work Order System provides planning management and control of telephones inventory, as well as related financial statements, and a master telephone directory. Meridian 1 data services The Meridian 1 data product line is the most comprehensive one available with any communications system today. It allows terminals, workstations, and personal. computers to easily communicate with a wide range of hosts, local area networks printers, modems and other devices via cost-effective standard telephone wiring. Meridian data services provide broad connectivity which allows users to access multiple networks, applications, and computers from a single terminal. Data switching on the Meridian 1 platform is and cost effective. Host computer resources can be shared and therefore more efficiently utilized, with fewer requirements for expensive and inflexible nailed up connections. Existing data terminals and intelligent workstations, regardless of type, connect via industry standard interfaces such as RS232, RS422, and V.35. Meridian 1 supports both asynchronous and synchronous data switching. Most models of terminals and PCs can be directly connected to the Meridian 1 without a requirement for data modules. Where the user application also calls for voice communications, these terminals can interface through a Meridian Digital Telephone Data Adapter. Meridian networking solutions Network solutions can be simple off-premise extensions, or very sophisticated to accommodate complex networking requirements for a large corporation. Meridian 1 networking solutions can be implemented for initial requirements and upgraded later to accommodate future growth. Northern Telecom’s Electronic Switched Network is a comprehensive private networking solution that ties separate corporate communications systems into one unified private network with features such as consistent dialing plans and advanced call routing to reduce communication costs and optimize network performance. With the implementation of ISDN on the Meridian 1, corporations have even more powerful tools to substantially improve networking with even more flexibility to integrate voice and data communications that best fit their organizational needs. ISDN introduces powerful new features and services to further enhance network performance to achieve even greater system flexibility. . Meridian Customer Defined Networking further extends Northern Telecom’s network solutions portfolio by offering customers greater control and flexibility in hybrid networks. An unprecedented level of network service interworking is provided with MCDN, allowing corporations to customize network design to ensure the best application of advanced technology and service options for complex networking applications. Engineering Handbook telemanuals.com System Overview 1 The link that connects corporate users to the many ISDN network services is ISDN Primary Rate Access Meridian 1 and ISDN PRA provide access to local exchange carriers through Northern Telecom DMS-100 switch and AT&T ESS. It provides access to inter-exchange carriers and U.S. Sprint using Northern Telecom DMS-250 switch and to-AT&T on the ESS switch, and to private network nodes such as Meridian 1 systems. Meridian 1 offers multi-national customers the ability to access other public exchanges internationally. International PRA provides connectivity to public exchanges, such as ITT System 12, Alcatel and Siemens EWSD. ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) is a highly versatile 64 Kbps link between Meridian 1 systems to cost-effectively integrate small remote locations more closely with headquarters so any Meridian 1 can enjoy advanced ISDN services. Meridian Link allows the Meridian 1 and the host computer to communicate with each other in order to provide integration of voice and data communications to support sophisticated applications. For example, users can pop-up a screen of customer history simultaneously upon presentation of that incoming call to the customer service agent. Meridian Link supports defacto industry standards, such as X.25,3270 SNA and LAPB for connectivity to IBM, Digital Equipment Corporation, and Hewlett-Packard computers. Meridian Networked ACD Businesses with just two locations, or multi-national organizations with multiple sites can reap the benefits and advantages of Meridian Networked ACD. The system manages the call traffic as specified by the guidelines, allowing the maximization of all resources and control of operating expenses. Automatic load balancing optimizes and prioritizes calls across the network so that callers who have been waiting the longest will get answered first. If business requirements demand 24-hour operation, advantage can be taken of resources in different time zones, thus improving customer service and increasing productivity. The powerful Meridian features and benefits can be applied to the entire Meridian ACD network. Network Ovefflow Routing provides peak period service across the network, and network-wide information becomes available to agents and supervisors. Meridian Mail The unique integration of Meridian Mail to the Meridian 1 Communication Systems gives it powerful voice messaging and voice processing capabilities. Meridian Mail delivers numerous functions with flexibility and integration between them to provide a powerful office automation and marketing tool. Voice messaging allows for non-simultaneous verbal communication. The telephone-answering function forwards incoming calls to the messaging system under no-answer 2-12 System Overview situations. Callers still receive personal attention by hearing a personalized greeting whereupon they can simply leave a message with the Voice Mail function, or at the press of a button, be transferred to an attendant, or another designated answering position. Optionally, callers can route themselves to any another person by inputing the proper extension. Message Waiting notification advises users to collect their messages. The automated attendant answers calls with a recorded announcement. Call routing enables the callers to route themselves to an extension number or an information mailbox to listen to prerecorded information Interactive voice response allows callers to retrieve or leave information on a host computer via the telephone keypad. The Meridian Mail networking option supports from 2 to 500 Meridian Mail systems in remote locations. It enables users at remote sites to reply to voice messages and utilize distribution lists that contain users on other systems across the network. All features are presented and operate transparently to the user. The Meridian Mail system is installed within the Meridian 1 Communication Systems module. Its multi-module design can expand to meet growth requirements. Meridian Mail can expand from 4 ports, 5 hours, to 48 ports, 240 hours of storage and can support up to 3,700 users, depending upon the application Integration to the Meridian 1 system is through the Meridian Link for superior integration and digital connectivity for voice quality. Connectivity to a network loop on a network card eliminates the need for additional hardware such as line cards. Meridian Mail can share the battery back-up and power supply of the Meridian 1 for cost efficiency. Meridian LANSTAR Meridian LANSTAR provides a most effective data network transport and topology network. It connects large numbers of for creating an establishment-wide local users that may be spread over long distances to create a manageable and effective LAN. With LANSTAR bridged via the Meridian customers can implement LAN to WAN networking (local area networking to wide area networking). Based on a star topology, LANSTAR uses inexpensive standard unshielded pair telephone wiring to provide a high speed 2.5 Megabit communications link between the transport hub and network users. The modular design allows even small networks to take advantage of superior distance and capabilities. LANSTAR LANSTAR 40 Megabit data transport supports up to 1,344 users connected to the hub in a true physical and logical star topology. Users can be widely dispersed up to 609.6 m (2,000 ft) away from the LANSTAR hub for a network span of 1219.2 m System Overview 2-13 With the newly announced fiber optic interface, multiple LANSTAR hubs can be interconnected to provide even greater distance capabilities for very large, geographically dispersed networks. The LANSTAR FDDI Interface allows access to a fiber backbone, providing very high-speed communications between each LANSTAR hub. Users have dedicated access between the workstation and the hub, and there is no connection for network access as there is with Ethernet or Token Ring. The star topology minimizes wiring problems and complexities. Fault isolation is easy, and a problem at one connection cannot affect anything else on the network; therefore, network reliability is very high. Engineering Handbook 2-14 System Overview Engineering Handbook 3-l Chapter 3: Product evolution Contents The Digital World The Intelligent Universe OPEN World Meridian Meridian 1 System evolution Common Equipment enhancements Network enhancement Peripheral Equipment enhancements Software evolution Software Generic 101 Software Generic Software Generic Software Generic Software Generic Xl4 Software Generic Software Generic Software Generic X09 Software Generic Xl 1 Generic Xl 1 Release 2 Generic Xl 1 Release 4 Generic Xl 1 Release 5 Generic Xl 1 Release 7 Generic Xl 1 Release 8 Generic Xl 1 Release 10 Generic Xl 1 Release 11 Generic Xl 1 Release 12 Generic Xl 1 Release 13 1 Release 14 Generic Generic Xl 1 Release 15 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-7 3-7 3-8 3-l 1 3-l 3-l 1 3-l 2 3-l 2 3-l 3 3-l 3 3-l 4 3-l 5 3-l 5 3-15 3-l 6 3-l 7 3-18 3-18 3-19 3-19 3-20 3-20 3-21 3-22 Engineering Handbook 3-2 Product evolution In the early seventies Northern Telecom recognized the need for a versatile the-art product that could adapt readily and quickly to changing conditions, a product that would give it an edge in a very competitive marketplace. The SL-1 PABX (Private Automatic Branch Exchange) emerged, featuring a digital switching matrix under computer control. The foresight of the original development team continues to pay dividends. The challenge was to design a system that would meet current needs while retaining the ability to evolve without obsolescence. The key aspect of the system design is a modular, highly flexible architecture in which the primary system elements can be independently changed in whole or in part to address changing market requirements. The system met an immediate demand for a full range of voice and data processing features in a cost-effective package. Besides functioning as a Private Branch Exchange it also included key telephone and custom calling features. These advances were achieved by incorporating several notable industry firsts. A high level software language (HLL) provided significant advantages over assembler language in terms of simplicity and implementation. It also permitted improved, simpler ways for users to communicate system. To complement the advanced PBX features, a custom LSI chip was incorporated into a proprietary electronic telephone and its associated peripheral interface. From a human factors point of view, replacing the conventional telephone with a new electronic set was a prerequisite for more effective business communications services. The SL-1 electronic telephone provided simple, direct selection of features, and unambiguous system responses to indicate the progress of calls. The main objective to reduce the size of interconnecting cable as compared to those used for existing key telephone sets, was achieved by using a form of distributed control in the SL-1 set. The six-conductor line cord in the latter permitted systems to be pre-cabled irrespective of the eventual use of either SL-1 or conventional type single line telephones at a terminal location. Another industry first was the utilization of the on a per port basis to take full advantage of digital technology. Ongoing silicon enhancements could be introduced without affecting more centralized equipment in the system. Peripheral equipment was packaged in increments of four line circuits and two circuits on associated individual cards. The first system shipment was in 1975, and the product has continued to evolve, incorporating new technologies as they became available. As a result, a continuous stream of enhancements has introduced a series of system models, each building upon its predecessor with improvements in performance and capabilities. All models in the product family share similar technology and hardware, as well as software. They differ only in hardware packaging and the number of peripheral terminations that they support. The wide variety of available models ensures that users can select the system and features best suited to meet their specific needs. Engineering Handbook Product evolution The Digital World In 1976, Northern Telecom became the first corporation to commit publicly, with the Digital World announcement, to producing a complete line of digital switching, business communications and transmission systems. Every major telecommunications manufacturer has since followed this lead. Today, Northern Telecom is the principal supplier of fully digital systems in the world. Its family of digital business communications systems is among the world’s most advanced multi- function integrated voice and data switching systems. The Intelligent Universe In 1979, Northern Telecom unfolded the Intelligent Universe to announce the threshold of a new era for its product capabilities. Envisioned were new applications of digital technology to create efficient, harmonious global networks of simultaneous voice and data transmission that allow major office communication functions to be undertaken in a single integrated system. In addition, the formation of sophisticated networks would evolve to provide comprehensive communications through intelligent terminals in which information can be organized, stored, accessed, and received from any source in the world. OPEN World In 1982, Northern Telecom announced the OPEN World for information management systems, The OPEN (Open Protocol Enhanced Networks) World was an extension of Northern Telecom’s proven expertise in the key areas of digital technology, semiconductors, software, and integrated communications capability. It presented a commitment to providing a planning framework, new products, features and services for the OPEN World. Northern Telecom’s announcement of OPEN World promised to create integrated communication networks that open the technological barriers to user-controlled systems. The SL-1 would act as the hub for such systems, giving the user the opportunity to install whatever equipment is most cost-effective for the application. The OPEN World concept encompasses the following five key criteria: continuity, compatibility, congeniality, control, and cost-effectiveness. Meridian On February 14, 1985, Northern Telecom, in keeping with the OPEN World promise, announced major enhancement capabilities to family of digital switching systems. Under the banner of Meridian SL-1 Integrated Services Network, a new range of sophisticated information management services would evolve including: a local area network (LAN) capability called LANSTAR a unique, high speed 2.56 Mbps pipeline to the desktop using conventional twisted pair wiring distribution a range of fully digital telephones to increase the existing terminal portfolio using a new 512 Kbps digital distribution scheme Engineering Handbook 3-4 Product evolution The foregoing enhancements were accomplished through architectural extensions that built upon the existing system foundation. As such, they reemphasized Northern Telecom’s commitment to a continuity program that guards against product obsolescence. Meridian 1 On January Northern Telecom unveiled Meridian 1, a modular communication system encompassing the industry’s first truly global private branch exchange product line. Meridian 1 represents a merger of the functionality of Meridian SL-1 and Meridian Northern Telecom’s current PBX products, into a SL-100, and Meridian single, modular communications product portfolio. Meridian 1 capabilities extend from voice and data features for very small organizations to high capacity advanced tandem networking, very large Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) centers, (up to 4,000 agents), multi-function military agency support, campus communication systems, intelligent network node capabilities, and the bridge to the of the future. The new Meridian 1 provides common hardware and adaptive software for existing can upgrade to the latest voice features, data systems. This means that connectivity, and sophisticated information services for PBX applications ranging in size from 30 to 60,000 ports, the widest range in the industry, while retaining 80 to 90 percent of their equipment. Noteworthy for multi-national corporations, Meridian 1 uses globally adaptive technology that enables it to be sold and used in virtually any country without major hardware modifications. Meridian 1 software is compatible with recognized international communications transmission standards. Additionally, Meridian 1 digital telephone sets can be programmed to give instructions in six languages. Meridian 1 provides a platform for future growth and will be compatible with communications networks of the next century. Underscoring Northern Telecom’s leadership in ISDN, Meridian 1 delivers ISDN primary rate access now. It supports Basic Rate Access (BRA) on large systems and will deliver BRA across the entire product line by the end of 1991. In the future, the new system will use fiber optic technology to provide broadband capability, bandwidth on demand and services such as high speed data and full motion video. -Northern Telecom Meridian 1 introduces a product design consisting of new stackable modules that contain the various system elements. Peripheral Equipment Modules contain line and cards that connect a wide variety of telephone and central office interface circuits. The new modular design offers the ability to grow from a single module through a column of up to four modules into an array of columns that connect with existing equipment to extend and serve applications with up to 60,000 ports. The modular Engineering Handbook Product evolution packaging takes up to 50 percent less floor space than existing systems in cabinets and lets customers add lines and features in a simpler, more cost effective manner than ever before. The core of the product line is an Peripheral Equipment Module that works with both the Meridian SL-1 and SL-100 and has distributed processing, high density line cards, universal trunks, improved self-diagnostics, and an enhanced network architecture. System options provide the ability to select the configuration best suited to meet required business communication application within the 30 1, to 60,000 port range. For applications up to 10,000 ports, system options 6 1, and 7 1, based on the Meridian SL- 1 architecture, are available for use. System evolution In 1975, Northern Telecom introduced the SL-IL as its first member. The system was configured in a single network group arrangement with a choice of one Memory was packaged in modules of 4K or two Central Processing Units words and structured in an N + 1 concept such that a spare module was available in the event of a memory failure. The was introduced in 1976 to address requirements beyond the capacity of the SL-IL. It consisted of a multi-group arrangement for up to network groups, each group capable of accommodating the 16 multiplexed loops provided by the A similar design philosophy and many of the same components were used, the major differences between the two systems being in the area of common equipment. The SLsystem utilized a more powerful and duplicated CPU, a repackaged memory in modules of words, and a centralized powering concept. It was supported by Software Generic 202 which added a number of feature enhancements over the initial system capability. The software was also adapted to the as Generic 102. and In 1978, common equipment enhancements capitalized on technological advances to effect cost reductions and increased system reliability. The result was the introduction of two new systems: SLfor single network group applications for multi-network group applications An increased density memory module storing 64K words of data or program information was introduced, drastically reducing the number of circuit cards required by each system. The enhancement also the memory addressing capability to accommodate ongoing feature incorporation. A redundant memory bank was introduced to complement the duplicate processor capability already available. Each processor was able to access both memory banks, with the flow of information to the active processor controlled by an arbitrator, a significant improvement over the conventional use of a single memory bank with duplicate spares. In addition, the concept of segmented busses was incorporated to allow Engineering Handbook 3-6 Product evolution recovery of call processing functions by reconfiguring the system hardware to isolate faults. A significant breakthrough in equipment packaging was made in 1978. Although expandable to some 400 lines, the emerged to address the 100 line and below market. Spare mounting space in the equipment cabinet was utilized to accommodate a mini-network shelf and a magnetic tape transport. Shelf positions were thereby freed for peripheral equipment, enabling a single CPU to service 200 PE terminations in a single cabinet configuration. Out of the SL- 1 technology, the SL- 10 packet switching system emerged. Of significance is that the powerful processor utilized for data transmission in the SL-10 was adapted to the SL-1 to form a new family member, The latter was introduced in 1980, expanding the call processing capability through an also provided more memory increase in CPU real time capacity. The SLstorage to allow further penetration into the 2000-5000 line range. This system was introduced in 1982 and with it the concept of front and rear cabinet access to take advantage of hardware repackaging and a subsequent reduction in footprint. A single cabinet supports a typical configuration 250 lines/40 trunks with expansion to a 400 line marketing limit by means of an additional peripheral cabinet. and Major changes to the SL-1 product line also occurred in 1984 with the introduction of these four new family members. Model Configuration SL-1s 32 to 120 lines Single CPU-single memory sub-system SL-1 MS 80 to 400 lines Single CPU-single memory sub-system SL-1 N 100 to 1500 lines Single or dual CPU, single network group, duplicated memory sub-system SL-1 XN up to 5000 lines Dual CPU, network group, duplicated memory sub-system The systems were the result of an extensive development program that enhanced the major elements of the architecture. Engineering Handbook Product evolution 3-7 Common Equipment enhancements The Common Equipment (CE) enhancements consisted of redesigning the Central Processing Unit (CPU) and Memory sub-systems. microprocessor A new type of central processor, based upon the technology but with a much simpler architecture, was introduced for single network group applications. Elimination of much of the discrete logic previously employed in separate Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) and Sequencer (SEQ) cards plus housed utilization of 64K EPROMS to store the firmware resulted in the on a single card. Thus the benefits of fewer components, less power requirements, along with a reduction in footprint were achieved without sacrificing performance. Indeed the reverse since the new microprocessor increased processing speed by as much as 55 percent over the equivalent earlier CPU models. The introduction of 64 Random Access Memory (RAM) chips permitted memory packaging in 192K modules as opposed to the previously available 64K modules. Additionally, the functions of the Memory Controller, formerly a separate card, were incorporated in the new memory module design. Two design types were developed, one incorporating automatic error correction and detection capability for systems using single memory subsystems (S and MS), and the other using conventional 17 bit per word formatting (16 data plus 1 parity) for the duplicated memory subsystems (N and Further, two versions of each type in and 192K modules were made available to facilitate memory addressing through efficient hardware provisioning for each SL-1 family member. Network enhancement Enhancements to the switching network were made primarily to address the requirements imposed by data communications on the SL-1 system. The existing network architecture was designed for applications in what was then a predominantly analog world. As such, to simplify the path search algorithm, available time slots or channels through the network were selected on a pair basis. Thus a call originating on 4, for example, always terminated on 5 to complete the connection. This arrangement is certainly adequate for voice switching requirements. However, the recognition of the PBX as a viable hub to control the switching of integrated voice and data demanded improvements over the original design. __ Network enhancement achieved the following: Removed the time slot matching pair constraint by selecting available channels on an individual basis. Thus the varying traffic requirements imposed by switching voice and data can be readily addressed by allocating network resources accordingly to meet the specific needs of each. Doubled the number of links on the network backplane so that the associated equipment shelf could accommodate twice as many network loops. This was accomplished by the design of a new network card containing two loops as opposed to the single loop per card employed previously. Thus the number of network loops was doubled (16 to 32) within a network group. To complement Engineering Handbook 3-8 Product evolution this increase in traffic handling capability, the junctures, which are merely extensions of the originating and terminating loops between network groups, were also doubled (from 4 to 8 one-way junctures from one network group to each other). Peripheral Equipment enhancements Introduction of Very Large Scale Integration (VLSI) components was instrumental in providing significant benefits from the PE enhancement program. In particular, a new custom filter chip, allocated on a per port basis, enabled peripheral card to the most density to be doubled. Initial application of the chip, designated widely used PE cards, the SL-1 and line types, resulted in footprint savings and a reduction in per line power consumption. The next phase of the to the CO Trunk, DID Trunk and Message Waiting program introduced the Line Cards respectively again doubling the number of ports per card compared to their previous counterparts. The met the transmission standards for digital PBX mat are recommended by the U. S. Electronics Industries Association These standards cover return loss, longitudinal balance, gain variation, idle channel noise, and other transmission characteristics. Compliance to U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Part 15 regulations was mandatory for the continued marketing of the SL- 1, which is classified as a Class A computing device. These regulations cover Electromagnetic Interference and Radio Frequency Interference requirements and were addressed at both the circuit card and system levels under the PE enhancement program. At the circuit card level, and were minimized through design practices that tackled the problem at the source. Use of CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) components, isolated circuit traces, and multilayer backplanes were contributing factors. From the system point of view, a new equipment cabinet was designed utilizing elaborate shielding techniques to prevent and RFI being emitted from the SL- 1 equipment contained therein. Not all facets of the enhancements were applicable to all systems. Instead, portions of the program were adapted as appropriate to benefit product application, a further indication of the modularity and flexibility of the SL- 1 design. Meridian Meridian Major system enhancements were incorporated in 1986 as signified by the introduction of Meridian and A Common Equipment enhancement program, supported by Meridian Software Generic X 11 Release 8, provided new key operating elements which resulted in significant improvements to system operating parameters. The following new components were identical for use NT and XT systems: Central Processing Unit a new CPU, contained on two printed circuit cards, provided in excess of fifty percent more real time capacity compared to that previously available on Meridian Random Access Memory A new memory design increased significantly the software address range and eliminated the 64 K word page address partitions incorporated on earlier models Engineering Handbook Product evolution of SL-1. The memory utilized 256K dynamic random access memory chips to permit as much as 768K words of storage on a single circuit card. Mass storage sub-system A new mass storage system, designed to replace the previous magnetic tape transport, provided 75 percent more storage capability through the provision of a pair of floppy disks as a standard product offering. An optional 10 Mbyte Winchester hard disk was also made available to further expand storage capacity. Since the mass storage subsystem design was independent of the new CPU design, it could be incorporated on other system models supported by Xl 1 Release 8 software. Besides additional storage capability, implementation significantly reduced the time associated with administration and maintenance routines. Figure 3-1 Components common to systems New CPU 768K Memory Cards Dual Floppy Drives Optional Hard Disk Generic 1 Release 8 Meridian In 1987, Meridian was introduced to address the requirements of the small PBX market. Packaged in a small, attractive, modular cabinet, the system provides the functionality and feature capability of the much larger members of the Meridian SL-1 portfolio. In addition to a tiered arrangement of equipment shelves for flexible expansion, Meridian SL-1 ST also introduced peripheral enhancements that were later adapted to the larger systems. enhancements included the introduction of a line card and a split PE shelf accommodating a dual-loop buffer which in turn housed a dual-port receiver. Expansion beyond the capabilities of the initial cabinet was accomplished by means of an ST expansion cabinet utilizing similar packaging techniques. These same packaging concepts were also adapted for Remote Peripheral Equipment applications through the introduction of a new RPE cabinet that provides existing feature capabilities in a much smaller hardware configuration. Meridian The Meridian was introduced in 1988 to address the needs of smaller sized organizations requiring the added reliability of control redundancy. Packaged in a small modular cabinet similar to the Meridian .. Engineering Handbook 3-10 Product evolution redundancy. Packaged in a small modular cabinet similar to the Meridian SLthe RT utilized the dual CPU and memory duplicate configuration of the NT system. The Meridian could be expanded by adding the same tiers designed for Meridian expansions. Meridian 1 Communication Systems system options and 71 Unveiled at global launch events on January 30, 1990, these systems combine the Meridian SL-100, and Meridian into functionality of the Meridian a single, modular product line to address system applications ranging 30 to. 60,000 ports. Based upon the Meridian SL-1 architecture for applications up to and 71 introduce the following 10,000 ports, Meridian 1 system options enhancements and features: Modular equipment packaging Superloop Intelligent Peripheral Equipment 300 percent increase in peripheral display 25 percent increase in network traffic capacity Seamless growth from 30 to 10,000 ports ISDN-ready for Basic Rate Access, in addition to present Primary Rate capabilities Increased self-diagnostic capabilities Extensive system and power monitoring, with intelligent reporting Reduction of system engineering rules and constraints Simplified installation and maintenance Flexible power system architecture Effective total platform for continued growth and evolution, in keeping with Northern Telecom Evergreen philosophy System evolution since product introduction is shown in Figure 3-2. Engineering Handbook Product evolution 3-11 Figure 3-2 System evolution MERIDIAN 1 21 . system option 51 I I COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS Software evolution Several software generics were introduced throughout the years to support the various features. Software Generic 101 From a software point of view, Generic 101 was introduced to support the systems. In addition to many standard features and services inherent in the system, optional software packages provided multi-customer and advanced SL-1 set features. Multi-customer was unique in that it allowed a single SL-1 system to serve up to 32 different customers, each with independent feature complements, numbering plans, and peripheral equipment. The advanced feature package provided Auto Dial, Call Forward, Override, Ring Again, Speed Call, and Voice Call capability to the SL-1 telephone user. The typical application of the system was in the 100 1000 line range. Software Generic Generic 202 was introduced in 1976 to form the base for the SL-1 VL system. The software added a number of feature enhancements over the initial system capability and was adapted to SL- 1 L as Generic 102. Engineering Handbook 3-12 Product evolution Software Generic Significant changes were made to the software in 1977. The following major feature complements were made available under Generic Call Detail Recording (CDR) Allows the recording, on a per call basis, of details related to incoming and outgoing calls such as the calling and called parties, time, and duration. The information is assembled by the software and stored as call records on either a g-track magnetic tape mounted in a CDR cabinet, hard-copy device such as a teletypewriter, or external unit conforming to RS-232-C interface. Downstream processing of the collected data permits usage reports to be generated. Recorded Announcement (RAN) Provides an interface to a Recorded Announcement machine and the capability of flexibly defining the intercept treatment for various call situations. Time and Date Provides the capability of displaying and modifying the system time and date from the attendant console. Do-Not-Disturb Provides the capability for the attendant to make any individual directory number appear busy to incoming calls while maintaining it free for originating calls. End-to-End Signaling Allows the use of the SL- 1 electronic telephone on an established outgoing end-to-end connection to utilize the pushbutton dial pad to effect signaling. Software Generic Generic was also introduced in 1978 with the addition of further optional feature groups. Automatic Number Identification Provides the facility to automatically identify a station originating an outgoing toll signaling to a central call and to send this information by Multi-Frequency toll-ticketing system. The feature is implemented by a combination of software and hardware, the latter consisting of an MF sender, on the trunk group. switching network bus, interfacing to an associated Route Selection Works in conjunction with the predetermined trunks. Engineering Handbook feature to route toll calls automatically over Product evolution 3-l 3 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Provides automatic selection of least expensive and efficient trunk routes under software control for outgoing calls. The ARS mechanism is accessed by dialing a special access code and arranged to route advance a call over up to eight trunk routes under two time schedules. Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) Increases the range of the multiplex loop between the CE and PE by using type carrier facilities. The 2.048 Mbps local network loop is converted to a’ 1 Mbps format for transmission to a remote location and then reconverted back to 2.048 Mbps to interface to the RPE. Do-Not-Disturb: Group Allows the attendant to place a group of directory numbers into a Do-Not-Disturb mode so that they appear busy to all incoming calls, but to originate calls. Make Set Busy (MSB) Allows an SL-1 telephone user to busy out the set for incoming calls to all DN appearances but free to originate calls. The demand for additional system features was so great that in 1979, a split in the Software Generic occurred to address specific market segments. Business Generic formed the foundation for the separate generic streams to evolve. Software Generic Xl 4 Generic Xl4 was introduced for SL-1 interface to the Autovon (Automatic Voice Network) to present Northern Telecom with a key marketing strength in supplying the military and government market with a proven cost-effective system. The SL-1 Autovon system provides full-featured PABX capabilities combined with requirements of the Defense Communications Agency (DCA) Circular specifications, such as precedence and pre-emption of calls. Software Generic Generic was aimed specifically at the Hotel/Motel communications management market. The full business features of were incorporated with new features designed to provide additional hotel administration and management functions such as: -Room Number Correlation Single Digit Access to Special Services Message Waiting Vacant Room Restriction Supervisory Attendant Console Toll Terminal Access Engineering Handbook 3-14 Product evolution Music-On-Hold System Call Park Room Status Control Class-of-Service Recorded Overflow Announcement Software Generic Additionally, Generic was introduced as the premium Business Generic, adding the following major capabilities. Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Provides a means of sharing service among a group of answering positions such that calls are served in the order of their arrival. A number of administration capabilities are available for effective agent/supervisor communication. The flexibility of providing stand-alone ACD, combined PABX service, or a split among the two can be configured utilizing a single SL- 1 system. ARS Priority Queuing Provides an improvement to the ARS feature by introducing a flexible service assignment of one of four priority levels for the access of least cost routes by each user. Authorization Code Allows selected users to temporarily override the access restriction assigned to any station or trunk by entering an authorization code. CDR Charge Account Code Allows a charge account code to be entered before dialing or during an established call to allow billing of calls to other than station directory numbers. Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) Allows customers with multiple locations to centralize their attendant services at a single facility. Operation is compatible with AT&T Technical Advisory Manual 10 with the SL-1 system serving as either a main or remote CAS installation. Digit Display Provides for the display of information relative to normal call processing and feature activation on any SL- 1 telephone equipped with a digit display. Dial Intercom Allows stations to be accessed by abbreviated dialing and be arranged into separate intercom groups within the SL-1 network. Engineering Handbook Product evolution 3-15 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Allows selected users to access the SL-1 from the external public network by dialing a special directory number from type telephone. Message Center Allows an incoming call to be automatically routed to a message center if not answered at the original destination. A message waiting indication alerts the station user, who can then access the center for message retrieval. 2500 Set Features Provides a subset of features, formerly available only to SL-1 telephones, to be utilized on single line sets. A Special Prefix Code (SPRE) is used in conjunction with the to activate the following features: Call Forward (All Calls) Speed Call (User and/or Controller) Permanent Hold Software Generic X09 Software Generic was introduced in 1980 to support the and additionally provide enhancements to the ACD feature by adding load management administration and report capabilities. Software Generic 1 A new business Generic stream Xl 1 was utilized to support under 711, Release 1, which provided all the feature capabilities of its predecessors and added new capabilities aimed towards the small system user. These new capabilities were: Attendant Overflow Position Mini-CDR History File System Memory Automatic Recovery (SMART) Attendant Administration Automatic Set Relocation with the exception of mini-CDR and SMART, were These feature later made available to the LE, VLE, and XL systems. - - Generic X11 Release 2 Xl 1 Release 2 was in early 1983 to add the following feature enhancements to the M, LE, VLE and XL systems. Engineering Handbook 3-16 Product evolution Call Park Provides the capability for attendant or station user to place a call in a held state (park) where it can be retrieved by dial access from any console or telephone set in the system. System Speed Call Allows the creation of a System Speed Call list (or lists) for access by any assigned station set irrespective of any class-of-service restrictions. Recorded Overflow Announcement Allows incoming calls that are delayed in answering by the attendant to be routed to a recorded message notifying the caller accordingly. Flexible Code Restriction Allows the customer to specify whether stations with toll-denied class of service will be allowed or denied access to outgoing trunk routes based on specific number patterns and/or the number of digits dialed. Extensions to the ACD capabilities were announced in 1983 with the formation of an additional feature group Package D. The latter is utilized for large ACD operations that require sophisticated management reports and flexible dynamic resource allocation capabilities. ACD-D uses an auxiliary data system (Digital Equipment Corporation PDP-11 minicomputer) attached to the SL- 1 to provide a comprehensive administration capability that includes status displays, reports, and load management functions. Generic 1 Release 4 In 1984, Xl 1 Release 4 became the business software standard and incorporated the Autovon capability previously only available on X14. The following additional option groups became available. Flexible Hotline Provides the capability to assign any single pre-determined destination to be telephone when the latter goes automatically rung from an associated off-hook. Deluxe Hold Adds two capabilities for calls placed on hold in multiple (single call arrangement) directory number environments: Individual Hold held condition is indicated at the normal 120 ipm on the SL- 1 telephone that placed the call on hold only. All other appearances of the DN receive a slow flicker (50 ms off every 2 seconds). Exclusive Hold allowed users with multiple appearance to place calls on hold under the control only of their particular telephone. All other appearances of the DN do not indicate the held call and are excluded from entering it. Engineering Handbook Product evolution 7 Automatic Line Selection Allows the SL-1 telephone to automatically select a line in a prioritized order when the handset is lifted. 500 Set Features Provides rotary dial access to the Speed Call, Call Forward, and Permanent Hold features. Distinctive Ring Allows calls over specified trunk routes to distinctively ring stations as opposed to the standard audible signaling arrangement. Integrated Voice Messaging System (IVMS) Expanded previous SL-1 capabilities to. include voice store and forward (VSF) messaging. Generic Release 5 Xl 1 Release 5 was introduced during the second quarter of 1985. It consists of all the capabilities of Release 4 plus the following feature enhancements. Business features Interface to EPSCS (Enhanced Private Switched Communications Service) a Private Network of AT&T which uses the No. 1 ESS as a switching host Departmental LDN feature allows up to four different departments to be identified by their own spccilic listed directory number Data Port Hunting allows up to 128 data access modules to be assigned in a trunk group Privacy Override allows multiple-appearance, single-call-arrangement directory numbers assigned to SL- 1 telephones to have class-of-service control of privacy Enhanced End-to-End Signaling allows this capability to be invoked on all calls to and from the SL-1 telephone Call Register Enhancement allows a separate logical memory page to be assigned to both call registers and trunk timing blocks, thereby increasing the number of call registers from 1200 to approximately 1500 Double Density Trunks (CO and DID) and Message Waiting Line Cards allows twice as many circuits to be packaged card compared to their single density counterparts Memory Enhancement increases the amount of memory available on the in the areas of Program Store and Protected Data Store Engineering Handbook 3-18 Product evolution ESN features Number Recognition for feature removes the need to use two additional CO trunks to terminate a call at a company owned location Incoming Trunk Group Exclusion associated with the feature, provides the capability to deny the routing of incoming trunk calls to specific prefix codes Multiple DID Office Code Screening for NARS supports on-net to off-net conversion for sites having varying numbering schemes Generic 1 Release 7 Xl 1 Release 7 was introduced to support the following feature capabilities: Controlled Class of Service (CCOS), formally introduced for the Hotel/Motel industry, was applied to the business environment to allow a station’s level of access to the external network to be changed. to a predetermined system level using a controlling SL-1 telephone. Multi-Tenant Service allows each of the 32 customer groups within the Meridian SL-1 to be partitioned into 5 12 tenants to facilitate resale of services. Automatic Trunk Maintenance provides a means of periodically testing network resources by measuring facility loss and noise parameters to prevent underutilization due to poor performance or service outage. Associated hardware to provide tone detection capabilities was also introduced. Station Category Indication (SCI) allows the attendant to selectively answer internal calls in accordance with a predetermined priority status. Generic 1 Release 8 Xl 1 Release 8 provided additional system capabilities as follows: Digital Trunk Interface (DTI), formerly introduced on Meridian and XN, was extended to include the smaller sized MS system and also NT and XT models. Last Number Redial allows users to simply redial the last number dialed without having to key in the digits again. Pretranslation provides a means of utilizing Speed Call lists to implement a flexible dialing plan. Supervisory Console allows one attendant in each customer group to function in a supervisory capacity when the associated console is placed in a position-busy mode. Eleven-Digit Translation extends the previous three- or four-digit translation mechanism to eliminate potential routing conflicts when utilizing the feature. Sixty-three Attendant Consoles are allowed for each customer group compared to the previous fifteen. Station-to-Station Call Waiting allows internal calls to enter the call waiting state via a new station class of service. Engineering Handbook Product evolution 3-19 Generic Xl 1 Release Another major announcement was the availability of Xl 1 Release 10 for the first quarter of 1988. This software release introduced new business opportunities in key vertical markets such as lodging, health care, telemarketing, and the federal government. In addition, Generic Xl 1 Release 10 culminated the development program, embarked upon in 1984, to recombine the Hotel/Motel Generic (X37) into a single stream business offering. Thus users in the lodging environment utilized features formerly only available to the business segment, and vice versa. Generic Xl 1 Release 10 introduced a total of 16 new feature options, partitioned typically for vertical markets, but additionally available to all users of this software base. Hospitality/health care Automatic Wakeup Room Status Message Registration Property Management System Interface Background Terminal Federal systems telemarketing Station Loop Pre-emption- ACD Enhancements Line Load Control Call Overflow by Time in Queue Dialed Number Identification Service General business Call Party Name Display Call Forward No Answer/Hunt by Call Type Second Level Call Forward No Answer Six Party 2500 Set Conference Enhanced Hotline Station-to-Station Call Detail Recording Malicious Call Trace Generic X11 Release 11 The introduction of ISDN Primary Rate Access available in 1988 with the revision of Xl capability was made 11 as the supporting software. Another enhancement to the system features was the ability to perform digit manipulation on incoming direct-in dial calls. Engineering Handbook 3-20 Product evolution Generic Xl 1 Release 12 Generic Xl 1 Release 12 was introduced in November, 1988, to offer another subset of powerful features to Meridian SL-1. The delivery ISDN services, console and ACD enhancements, further data networking flexibility, specific features for Health Care and Hotel markets, additional business feature offerings and memory expansion for the Meridian SL-1 ST all combined to bring new services. The following features were provided with this release: Automatic Call Distribution Auxiliary Security (ACD-D) Automatic Call Distribution Priority Agent Enhanced Music (EMUS) Directed Call Pick-up (DCP) Call-by-Call Service (CBC) ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) ISDN Advanced Features ISDN Core Signaling (ICS) Generic 1 Release 13 The availability of Xl 1 Release 13 in March, 1989, added numerous additional business features and system enhancements. The existing four-digit numbering scheme was expanded to accommodate up to a seven-digit dialing plan to alleviate potential conflicts with directory number assignments. The expanded numbering plan also met the needs of large single system applications which may otherwise exhaust their numbering capacity. Expanded software parameters addressed the requirements for additional networking routing capabilities with the BARS, NARS, Autovon, and Coordinated Plan features. Other feature paramaters expanded included additional Call Pickup Groups, Speed Call lists, Group Call members, and Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers. In addition, other enhancements to existing features included Distinctive Ring for Dial Intercom, Speed Call/Auto Dial with Authorization Code using one key stroke, and an enhancement to the Call Party Name Display. ISDN features supported by X 11 Release 13 include: Network Call Party Name Display (NCPND) which providesnetwork-wide visual display of name and number over PRA facilities. Display of Non-PRA Calls which uses the trunk route access code and member number instead of CLID on the terminating telephone set display when network calls are routed over non-ISDN facilities. Call Redirection/Call Forward All Calls enhancements which provide information updates for both the calling and called telephones display for CLID and NCPND under those calling conditions. Engineering Handbook Product evolution 3-21 Back-up D-Channel provides redundancy for the D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI) circuit card automatic switchover, if necessary, to the back-up unit in the event of failure. ISDN Applications Protocol interworking with DEC VAX and to facilitate message exchange between Meridian SL-1 and the DEC computer to support applications such as telemarketing, message desk, and support center operations. Generic Release 14 Announced in December, 1989, 1 Release 14 provides base software necessary to support further members of the Meridian Digital Telephone portfolio, which are: single-line digital set multi-line set with eight programmable feature keys and optional display M2616 with 16 programmable keys, software controlled hands-free capability, and the flexibility to add on a display and two 22-button key modules M2016 Secure telephone for government applications software capacity expansion, introduced with Release 13, is In addition, extended to change the upper limit parameters on the following features: Private Line Routes Dial Intercom Group Trunk Routes Customer Groups Network Authorization Codes Pretranslation Groups New features added to the system include: Switchhook Flash facilitates the emulation of the SL-1 as a key system behind a switching office to permit call transfer. No-Hold Conference allows a station user to set up a conference call without losing voice contact with the original party such as in an emergency call. Telemarketing enhancements in ACD environment namely Audible Tone for Agent Observe and Data Agent Log-in features. Flexible Incoming Tones to be applied under varying call conditions. Audible Reminder of Held Calls extends to proprietary telephones. The Permanent Hold capability on telephones of alerting users periodically of the held call situation. Night Key for DID Digital Manipulation permits different call treatments to be implemented either after hours or during specific times during normal business hours. Engineering Handbook 3-22 Product evolution ISDN enhancements provide additional capabilities including Network Call sets, and the ability to maintain Redirection, Network Ring Again for trunk service in the event of a signaling channel failure using the ISL. Generic 1 Release 15 Introduced in January, 1990, to support Meridian 1 system options 71, Xl 1 Release 15 additionally provides the following new features and enhancements. and Business features Busy Lamp Field enhancement for the M2250 attendant console displays, in addition to the busy/idle status of system users, the reason for user absence and an alternate extension number to utilize. CDP Routing enhancement provides more flexibility to network dialing plans and alternate routings by allowing incoming DID calls to be routed over CO, WATS, and Tie trunks when a distant steering code is used. Flexible Feature Codes provide customers the ability to define their own access codes for system features. Remote Call Forward allows all incoming calls to a station to be automatically forwarded to a preselected number that may be remotely defined. Time Forced Disconnect permits a customer to specify the maximum duration of a call permitted on a trunk route basis. Two-step Call Forward No Answer allows the dialed extension to have a Message Waiting class of service assigned for forwarding the call to a Message Center. Recorded Announcement enhancements provide compatibility with associated RAN equipment that permit message lengths of 512 seconds. Console Presentation Groups provides greater flexibility to the Multi-Tenant feature by allowing attendant consoles to be defined at the tenant level rather than the customer level. Attendant Alemative Answering allows any call presented to a console loop key to be forwarded to a customer-defined directory number when the attendant is not available to answer. Hotel feature enhancements include additional levels of restriction to be applied to the Controlled Class-of-Service feature and an extension of the number of to 500 in a five-minute period. Automatic Wake-up calls from Telemarketing enhancements Network ACD uses ISDN PRA or ISL hardware to quickly and efficiently route calls to available agents within a network of SL-1 systems. Enhanced Overflow allows customers to optimize resources and service level by adding more flexibility in defining call overflow patterns within the system. ACD Screen enhancements provide new display messages on associated M22 16 ACD digital telephones that give agents and supervisors clear and simple instructions for feature activation. Engineering Handbook Product evolution 3-23 enhancements Network Message Center capabilities are enhanced by the ability to serve multiple or ISL remote locations with centralized messaging facilities over associated paths. Software evolution since product introduction is shown in Figure 3-3. of product evolution is depicted in Table 1. A summary Figure 3-3 Software evolution Business Generic 1975 x01 (L) 1977 Split 1978 Split I Government 1979 I A, LE, VLE Generic x14 Hotel/Motel Generic x37 R L S 1 1980 1982 Xl 1 R L S 1 ( M ) 1 X37 RLS 4 1985 1986 RLS7 Xl 1 RLS 8 1987 9 X l 1 RLS R L S 1 0(ST) 1988 Xl 1 RLS 11 (ISDN) X 3 7 R L S 5 , (6) M e r g e X11 1989 1990 X11 RLS 13 RLS 14 RLS 15 (System options Engineering Handbook 3-24 Product evolution Table Product evolution summary Year 1975 1976 Model/Event SL-1 L SL-1 Digital World 1977 1978 SL-1 LE Hardware Software Front access cabinet Single density PE line trunk 4K Memory card Generic X01 Multi-customer Centralized power cabinet Digit display console 8K Memory card Generic Feature enhancements CDR cabinet RAN trunk Generic Call Detail Recording Recorded Announcement Do Not Disturb (individual) End-to-End Signaling Time and Date 64K Memory card Local/remote RPE Interface MF sender Generic Remote Peripheral Equipment Call Forward Override Again Speed Call, Voice Call Automatic Number Identification Do Not Disturb (group) Make Set Busy Automatic Route Selection 1979 Intelligent Universe Generic Dial Intercom 2500 Set Features Digit Display Direct Inward System Access (DISA) CDR Charge Account Authorization Code Message Center Automatic Call Distribution ARS Cueing Generic - Hotel/Motel Generic Xl4 Autovon Engineering Handbook -- Product evolution 3-25 Table 3-1 continued Product evolution summary Year 1980 Model/Event SL-1 XL 1981 SL-1 CPU 1982 SL-1 M Hardware SL-10 Processor Add-on Data Module (ADM) Data Line Card Software Generic X09 ACD Package B, Cl, C2 Generic 610 Electronic Switched Network Hospital/Clinic . Automatic Wake-up Room Status Displayphone Front & rear access cabinet Open World Generic Xl 1 Release 1 Attendant Administration Automatic Set Relocation History File Xl 1 Release 2 Call Park System Speed Call Recorded Overflow Announcement Flexible Code Restriction ESN enhancements Multi-Channel Data (MCDS) SL-1 displayphone PC Interface card I/F Module (AIM) ACD Auxiliary Processor 1983 Xl 1 Release 3 ACD-D Stored Number Redial Network Call Transfer Integrated Messaging System ESN enhancements 1984 SL-1s SL-1 MS Double density PE line card 4-port trunk card SWG Coax Elimination SL-1 N SL-1 XN 3270 protocol converter Module (ASIM) Memory card -continued- Xl 1 Release 4 Autovon enhancements Integrated Voice Messaging System Flexible Hot Line 500 Set Features Distinctive Ring Hold enhancements Auto Line--Select ,’ Engineering Handbook 3-26 Product evolution Table 3-1 continued Product evolution summary Year 1985 Model/Event Meridian Hardware System 36 gateway Computer to PBX interface (DTI) Digital Trunk lnte Packet Transport Equipment Digital telephones X.25 gateway pad Integrated Services Digital Line Card (ISDLC) Software Xl 1 Release 5 EPSCS interface ESN enhancements Department LDN Privacy Override Enhanced EES . Xl 1 Release 7 Multi-Tenant Service Automatic Trunk Maintenance Controlled COS Station Category Indication 1986 Meridian SL-1 NT CE enhancements new processor 768K Memory card Meridian SL-1 XT disk storage Line Unit (AILU) BALUNS Fast TDS Xl 1 Release 8 Last Number Redial Supervisory Console Pretranslation 11 -Digit Translation 63-console capability Station-to-Station Call Waiting 1987 Meridian SL-1 ST Xl 1 Release 9 ACD enhancements Trunk verification from STN PE enhancements card Meridian Mail Meridian LANSTAR Engineering Handbook Dual Loop Buffer Split PE shelf Daughterboard DTR New 50A Rectifier Interface (RILC) PTE cabinet ST expansion cabinet M2317 digital telephone Macintosh II interface RPE cabinet PRA interface card Xl 1 Release 10 Call Party Name Display Dialed No. ID Service (DNIS) Call Forward by Call Type Line Load Control Malicious Call Trace Optional Delay Internal CDR Conference 6 Hotel/Motel features Product evolution 3-27 Table 3-1 continued Product evolution summary Year Hardware Model/Event Meridian SL-1 RT CE enhancements Message Waiting card New dual processor 766K Memory card Secure Telephone Meridian Mail M P,SP option M3000 Plus Touchphone I/F Line Unit (AILU) Meridian Mail option SDI card ST memory expansion SL-1 console line card High Speed Data Module (HSDM) Ml 250 Meridian cabinet Meridian cabinet Meridian 1989 Software Xl 1 Release 11 Incoming Digit Conversion ACD-D security Directed Call Pick-up Xl 1 Release ACD Priority Agent enhancement Enhanced Music option CDR Calling Line ID Night Service by Time of Day Meridian Mail Voice menus ACD MAX Release 1 attendant console Mail option S Xl 1 Release 13 Capacity Expansion (phase 1) Applications Protocol Mail option X Xl 1 Release 14 Capacity Expansion (phase 2) Audible Reminder of Held Call Switchhook Flash Flexible Incoming Tones Night Key for DID No Hold Conference Telemarketing features Network Ring Again modular terminals ACD MAX Release 2 Meridian Mail PC 1990 Meridian 1 Communication Systems System options 61, 71 M2250 attendant console Universal equipment packaging Xl 1 Release 15 Flexible Feature Codes Network ACD enhancements Shared Tenant Services Hospitality features Engineering Handbook 4-1 Chapter 4: System architecture Contents Meridian modular architecture Control Switching Peripherals Software architecture Firmware Software Office data Resident programs Non-resident programs Service change and print routines Maintenance diagnostics Traffic Equipment data dump Software audit Hardware architecture Common equipment Central Processing Unit (CPU) Mass Storage Unit Output (l/O) interfaces Input Memory Unprotected Data Store (UDS) Protected Data Store (PDS) Program Store (PS) Network equipment Loops and Superloops Network organization Peripheral equipment PCM Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) I Network/peripheral configuration Enhanced network configurations Superloop network configurations One segment per superloop 4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-7 4-7 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-10 4-10 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-13 4-15 4-17 Engineering Handbook telemanuals.com 4-2 System Architecture Two segments per superloop Four segments per superloop Eight segments per superloop One segment per Two segments per Power equipment 4-18 4-19 segments per superloop per superloop 4-20 4-22 4-23 4-25 Meridian 1 modular architecture An important characteristic of Meridian 1 systems is a modular system architecture. It utilizes an efficient and flexible approach, employing modular construction in all areas of hardware and software, and state-of-the-art commercial and custom components. The result is a system which is highly flexible in terms of operational, maintenance, and administrative characteristics. As demands dictate, any module may be enhanced, singularly or in combination with other modules. Each system is organized around three functional areas: Control, Switching, and Peripherals. Control The Control complex provides the sequences required by the system to process voice and data call connections, monitor call activity, and perform system administration, maintenance, and testing. It is composed of two elements: the Central Processing Unit (CPU) which directs lower level subsystems in the hierarchy, and the system memory which stores the operating programs. Switching The switching function is performed by the network equipment, which interconnects terminal devices for communication with each other. The network architecture is based on the concept of a digital multiplexed loop. A loop is a bidirectional path between Network and terminal device which transmits voice, data and information. Peripherals Peripheral equipment provides the analog and digital interfaces for all peripheral devices, and performs analog to digital conversion of all input signals before switching is performed by the Network. Additionally, peripheral equipment circuits provide the supervisory and transmission functions needed for trunks connected to the external telecommunications network. Meridian 1 systems use a star topology for connecting peripheral devices to the switching equipment, an approach which permits uniform distributed wiring methods. This approach provides significant benefits in the area of administration, installation, maintenance, and reliability. Engineering Handbook telemanuals.com System Architecture 4-3 Figure 4-1 Meridian 1 modular architecture Control CPU I Firmware Software , Peripherals Software architecture The adaptability of software control provides a complete array of services and features tailored to meet changing requirements. Call processing, maintenance, and administration of Meridian 1 systems are controlled by software programs stored either as firmware programs, as software programs resident in system memory, or as non-resident programs on disk. The information which describes system configuration and associated peripheral equipment is termed office data. This data resides in the system memory and on disk. Firmware These are fundamental programs consisting of hard-wired logic instructions stored in Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM) which manipulate data in the central processor and control input/output operations, error diagnostic and recovery routines. Software Software programs consist of instruction sequences that control call processing, peripheral equipment, administration and maintenance functions. These sequences are interpreted by the firmware programs into machine instructions. Several generic software programs with optional feature packages are to satisfy varying requirements. Office data The office data describes the characteristics of the system in terms of configuration and call dependent information such as features and services. Office data is arranged into blocks defining peripheral equipment, system configuration and transient data. These data blocks permit configuration of Meridian 1 systems to specific customer needs. Engineering Handbook telemanuals.com 4-4 System Architecture Resident programs Resident programs are programs always available in memory during system operation. Firmware programs control other resident programs and provide all CPU arithmetic operations. The other resident programs are those which are automatically loaded into the system memory from the disk drive at system up. Once loaded, these programs remain in memory. Non-resident programs Non-resident programs are the overlay programs stored on disk which are loaded into the “overlay area” of system memory when required to perform specific tasks. Only one overlay program may be loaded at a time and is removed from the overlay area when no longer required. Overlay programs can be loaded automatically, under program control, or manually, via an administrative terminal. Once the user has logged into the system, commands for specific overlay programs are processed by the overlay loader program. When loaded, the overlay program assumes control. Only one administrative terminal can input into the overlay area at a time. More than one device, however, can receive output simultaneously. A terminal may be configured as an input only or output only device. Overlay programs provide the system interface for maintenance, service change, and traffic measurement. Each overlay program is independent and has its own specific set of commands and formats. Overlay programs may be concurrently with normal call processing without interfering with system There are five main categories of overlay programs: Service change and print routines Maintenance diagnostics Traffic Equipment data dump Software audit Service change and print routines Service changes do not generally require hardware intervention. Instead, the service administration programs are used to create or modify all aspects of the system from individual feature key assignments to complete system configurations. There are also programs and print routines for retrieving the data from the system to check the status of data assignments. Maintenance diagnostics These programs are the primary instruments for maintenance purposes. Individual programs are used for automatically or manually testing the Common Equipment (CE) and Peripheral Equipment The programs may be loaded into the overlay area at the request of maintenance personnel, or as part of a daily maintenance routine automatically initiated by the system at a specified time. In addition, Engineering Handbook System Architecture 4-5 background and signaling diagnostic routines can occupy the overlay area when it is not in use. Traffic All systems are equipped with traffic data accumulation programs. There is also a resident traffic print program which examines the schedules, transfers data from accumulating to holding registers in accordance with schedules, and prints the traffic data. In addition, there is a traffic overlay program which is used to query and modify schedules, options, and thresholds. Equipment data dump After making service changes, the changes must be transferred to disk in order to save them. When the equipment data dump program is invoked, all the office data in the read/write memory is written to the system disk. The data dump program is also used to install a new generic version or issue and capture protected data store information which may be changed by the user, such as speed call lists. The program may be invoked automatically during a midnight routine or on a conditional basis (i.e., data dump only occurs if a software service change has been made). It may also be invoked manually via the input/output (I/O) interface to the system. Software audit program monitors system operation and gives an indication of the general state of the system operation. The program is concerned mainly with the system software. When a software problem is encountered, the program attempts to clear the problem automatically. Engineering Handbook 4-6 System Architecture Hardware architecture Each Meridian 1 system is composed of the following hardware subsystems: Common equipment (CE) provides device control, software execution, and memory functions of the system Network equipment (NET) performs the switching function under CPU control Peripheral equipment provides the interface for line and trunk circuits Terminal equipment telephone sets and attendant consoles Power equipment provides electrical voltages required to operate equipment Common equipment Common Equipment (CE) consists of one or Central Processing Units memory circuits, and mass storage devices which control the operation of the system. The CE communicates over a common control bus which carries a constant flow of program instructions and data under direct control of the CPU. The digitized speech signals follow a separate path on a network switching bus which allows communications links to be established between any of the peripheral devices. The Central Processing Unit (CPU) provides the computing power essential for the entire system operation. The system memory stores all operating software programs and data unique to a particular Meridian 1 system, including switching sequences, features, class of service information, and quantity and types of terminals. The Mass Storage Unit provides high speed loading of the operating programs and data into memory. The digital service circuits provide functions such as dial and ringing tones, and call conferencing capabilities. The Serial Data Interface (SDI) provides an communications link for administration and maintenance on either a local or remote basis. The network circuit cards provide a digital matrix for switched connections to associated peripheral devices. Central Processing Unit (CPU) The CPU performs the control and switching sequences required by the system. The software that directs these functions is loaded into the system memory from the mass storage unit by the CPU. Information flows between the CPU, I/O devices, and the system memory over the CPU bus. The data required by the CPU to perform its control and switching functions is held during system operation in Random Access Memory (RAM) and fed to the CPU via the CPU bus. The operating data is loaded into the RAM from floppy diskettes on system power-up. The CPU function is performed by circuit cards which include Read-Only-Memory firmware that contains fault clearing programs and instructions to control the loading of system memory from the mass storage unit. Engineering Handbook System Architecture 4-7 Meridian 1 system options 5 1, and 71 incorporate the following CPU design: 24-bit data words plus l-bit parity 24-bit linear addressing that permits memory allocation to be assigned on a contiguous basis 16M words subdivided for up to 12M words of physical memory space and a remainder of 4M words for I/O spaces asynchronous (handshake) bus operation 16 file registers used to hold address and data for all operations a sense (interrupt) input line to indicate that a particular device (tape, PE, etc.) requires action by the CPU a trap facility which, when activated by an external signal, causes the CPU to immediately begin executing instructions starting at a particular address; this facility is used to enter a recovery routine when a fault is detected. Meridian 1 system option 21 uses a 16-bit processor for small sized business applications. Mass Storage Unit A Floppy Disk Unit equipped with two disks and a Multi-Disk Unit (MDU) with additional hard disk is used for high speed loading of the resident data into system memory. The loading process is operating programs and controlled by instructions held in the Read-Only-Memory (ROM) firmware. When loading is complete, the diskettes remain in the mass storage unit to provide a nonvolatile store for automatic loading purposes in the event of software being erased from memory during a power failure. Non-resident software is loaded from the disk automatically or by manual request when required. The Mass Storage Interface (MSI) card is designed to interface with external devices that are compatible with the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI). This storage capability is provided by the following hardware configurations: Floppy Disk Unit two 3.5” 1.2 Mbyte floppy disk drives (providing 2.4 Mbytes of formatted capacity) as a standard system offering AA Multi Disk Unit a hard disk drive with 20 Mbytes of formatted capacity. When this option is equipped, the floppy disks are used for backup and system loading. Input Output (l/O) interfaces -- There are various methods of communicating with Meridian 1 systems. A family of Serial Data Interface (SDI) circuit cards provides from one to four communication channels which conform to EIA Data Interchange Standard RS-232-C. I/O addressing is under switch control of the card and allows up to 16 RS-232-C compatible devices, such as terminals, to communicate with the system. The devices are used to input commands and/or receive responses from the system during administration and maintenance procedures. Engineering Handbook 4-8 System Architecture Memory Firmware, software, and data stored in a read/write Random Access Memory (RAM). The memory is a critical part of the stored program control system. It contains the memory stores of all of the basic operating instructions for the system, plus data on the configuration of the particular application being served. Memory utilization is dependent upon what features are programmed into the system and the number of peripheral terminations being served. The memory is split into four segments to facilitate processor address purposes and permit a functional separation of programs . Unprotected Data Store (UDS) These pages hold the transient or unprotected data that is required during call processing. Included are the timing queues and call registers. Protected Data Store (PDS) This protected data store holds the office data blocks that are particular to specific installations. Program Store (PS) Allocations within the Program Store are as follows: This portion of the memory is a non-volatile Read Only Memory Firmware (ROM) used for storage of all system firmware. The ROM is programmed during manufacture and the instructions are permanent and indestructible. It stores the basic rules of operation necessary to initialize system and bring it into a working state. A recovery or “trap sequence” is included in firmware which is automatically invoked in response to power-on, system reset, or when certain faults are detected. Overlay -This portion of the memory may be loaded with various non-resident programs as required during automatic diagnostics, service order change, traffic measurement, or maintenance. Software The remainder of this memory page is reserved for all of the system software such as the call processing and optional programs. Additional software storage capability is provided by the incremental addition of more memory pages within this category. Input Output addresses There are no RAM modules utilized for this page. Instead the address range is reserved for Input/Output (I/O) device addresses. These devices include signaling for peripheral equipment along with magnetic tape and terminal assignments. Engineering Handbook System Architecture 4-9 Network equipment Network equipment consists of network circuit cards which perform the digital switching of voice and data signals, peripheral signalling cards which perform scanning and signal distribution, and service circuit cards, such as tone and digit switches, which provide call progress tones and outpulsing as instructed by the and Time Division CPU. Network circuits employ Pulse Code Modulation Multiplexing to perform switching function. Loops and Superloops Network equipment interfaces with peripheral equipment via digital multiplexed loops. A loop is a bidirectional path between Network equipment (NET) and Peripheral equipment for voice, data and signalling information. Upon commands from the CE, the network establishes a path, linking a specific input to a specific output. Meridian 1 systems provide two network circuit cards, QPC414 Network card which provides 2 loops per card, and the Super-loop Network card which provides 4 loops per card, grouped together in an entity called a permits all 120 timeslots provided by the network card to be shared among the peripheral devices served by the superloop, providing higher traffic capacity and simplified traffic engineering. network loop plays an important role in the Meridian 1 The flexibility of architecture. Besides ability to increase circuit-switched bandwidth on an incremental card basis for cost-effective growth, application may be varied for value added services. The network structure allows for the full connectivity of all devices irrespective of how they connect to the system. The network loop is a key element in the implementation of Primary Rate Access and Digital Trunk Interface (DTI). The PRA offers twenty-three 64-Kbps B channels and one D channel; it connects to nodes (such as interexchange carriers, local exchange carriers) or private network facilities (such as or host computers). The DTI provides a digital link of 24 channels each of which may be flexibly allocated for both voice and data communications. The DTI uses the North American T- 1 standard (DS- 1 format); each equipped link is assigned an associated network loop. Network organization Network loops are organized into groups. Systems are configured as half, full, or multiple group machines. A half network group machine provides up to 16 loops, a full group system provides up to 32 loops, while a multiple group system provides up to 160 loops. Engineering Handbook 4-10 System Architecture For applications beyond the traffic handling capability of the single network group, additional switching stages are introduced to form a multi-group arrangement. These connecting paths, provided by the Module, are merely an extension of the originating and terminating network loop involved in a call. There are eight one way junctors from each group to all others. Since each path provides thirty connecting channels, a total of 480 connection paths exist from one group to another, 240 in each direction. Five network groups may be interconnected to constitute a fully configured digital switching matrix. Peripheral equipment Peripheral Equipment (PE) consists of peripheral controller cards which provide the timing and control sequences for peripheral circuits, analog and digital line and trunk cards, which provide the interfaces for terminal devices, and circuit cards which provide Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) and Primary Rate Access (PRA) services. The peripheral controller performs the first stage of multiplexing signals from the terminals, which are then passed on to the network for digital switching. The peripheral controller also transmits timing signals, and carries out other functions associated with the control of the peripheral circuits. The analog line card converts incoming analog signals into digital signals which are then passed on to the peripheral controller. This conversion is accomplished by an integrated encoder/decoder (codec) chip. There is a codec for each port on the line card. Conversion from digital back to analog is also performed by the codec for outgoing signals. For digital telephones, the codec is located within the telephone set itself. PCM Pulse Code Modulation is used to convert analog signals to digital signals. The PCM method converts the analog signal to digital by sampling the amplitude of the analog signal at a rate of twice the highest signal frequency and converting the amplitude of each sample into a series of coded pulses. The PCM sampling frequency standard for telecommunications is 8 KHz. Companding (compressing expanding) PCM is a standard technique for using words to efficiently represent the wide dynamic range of voice and data signals. Two standards for am internationally recognized: Mu-255 law for North American applications A-law for international service Meridian 1 codecs conform to both standards and are software selectable (in Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Modules) for use in North America and internationally. The codecs are also designed to pass signals up to 3.4 KHz with minimum time delay and low phase distortion, a requirement for the proper transmission of data signals. Engineering Handbook System Architecture Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) In a local operating environment, the peripheral equipment may be housed up to ft) from the common equipment. The RPE feature extends this range 15.2 m approximately 112.6 km (70 miles) between local and remote facilities. This extension is made possible by converting the multiplexed loop signals to a form compatible with the commonly used T-l type digital transmission system. Any medium conforming to DS- 1 format (1.544 Mbps) may be used to link local and remote sites, including digital microwave radio and fiber optic transmission systems. Allocation of circuit-switched bandwidth may also be made on a network loop basis or Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) circuits. These to Primary Rate Access optional services are based on the standard T-l format (DS-1 24 channel) used in digital transmission networks. The PRA offers twenty-three 64-Kbps B channels and one D channel; it connects to ISDN nodes (such as interexchange carriers, local exchange carriers) or or host computers) private network facilities (such as The DTI allows for the replacement of 24 conventional analog trunks by a single 1 digital link. Each of 24 channels provides up to 56 Kbps for voice and synchronous data transmission, or up to 19.2 Kbps for asynchronous data. Network/peripheral configuration The allocation of peripheral equipment to the network loop determines the traffic handling capability of the switching network. The lower the number of terminations, the higher the loop traffic capacity. The quantity and type of terminal assignments are allocated to optimize the traffic handling capabilities of the switching network. A universal PE bus structure permits any mix of PE card types to be located in a PE module. Provisioning of PE cards and their associated density (number of ports) determines the network loop to PE module configuration. Complete modularity permits voice and data modules to be segregated so that the specific traffic patterns of one may be met without impeding the other. Figure 4-2 shows the arrangement between the network peripheral equipment. Engineering Handbook QPC574 Existing Meridian SL-1 Hardware Meridian 1 Hardware 120 IS 16 DS-30X 2.56 Trk card I I Trk Card 2.56 120 TS system 10 21A and 21 Only) Digital Line Card System Architecture 4-13 Enhanced network configurations For peripheral equipment housed in modules, network capacity may allocated in single loop mode and dual loop mode. In single loop mode, one peripheral equipment module is connected to one network loop, yielding a maximum concentration of 160 terminations to 30 time slots. In dual loop mode, half of the PE cards in a module use one loop, and the other half use another loop, yielding two maximum concentrations of 80 terminations to 30 time slots. Engineering Handbook 4-14 System Architecture Figure 4-3 Single and dual loop configurations PE OR SHELF Two Network Loops Connected To One PE Shelf Containing Single, Double, or Quad Density PE Circuit Packs PE OR SHELF QPC659 BFR Operation PE One Network Loop Connected To Two Shelves Containing Single, Double, or Quad Density PE Circuit Packs OR SHELF QPC659 BFR Circuit Pack Set For Single Operation , I QPC414 ENET Circuit Pack PE OR SHELF Network Loop Network Loop Operation PE OR SHELF PE OR SHELF QPC659 BFR -- Lpy Circuit Pack Set For Dual Loop Operation I Engineering Handbook PE OR SHELF Combined Single And Dual Loop Connections To Three PE Shelves Containing Single Or Double Density PE Circuit Packs Circuits I System Architecture Superloop network configurations The Superloop Network card combines four regular network loops to make 120 timeslots available to PE cards housed in Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Modules. This increased bandwidth and larger pool of timeslots increases the network traffic capacity by 25% for each 120 bundle. The Intelligent PE Module is divided into segments of 4 card slots. These segments are numbered O-3. Segment 0 consists of PE slots O-3, segment 1 consists of card slots 4-7, segment 2 consists of card slots 8-11, and segment 3 consists of card slots 12-15. A superloop may be assigned from one to eight Intelligent PE segments. A number of different superloop to segment configurations are possible. The configuration chosen depends upon system traffic requirements and the specific PE cards used. Figures 4-4 through 4-9 illustrate different superloop-to-segment configurations. Note that the TN-to-timeslot concentration figures provided are nominal, and may vary from segment to segment (see Figure 4-4). Engineering Handbook 4-16 System Architecture Figure 4-4 Intelligent Peripheral Module segmentation Segment 0 Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Trunk Cards: Line Cards: Digital Line Card 16 to 32 Analog Line Card 16 Message Waiting Line Card 16 Universal Trunk Card 8 E&M Trunk Card 4 TN density: P e r s e ment 16 to 128 Per module 64 to 512 Maximum TN density assumes all slots equipped with Digital Line Cards with 16 voice and 16 data provisioned. Typical mix of line and trunk cards yields a nominal density of 64 per segment, 256 per IPE module. Engineering Handbook System Architecture One segment per superloop In this configuration, 1 segment is assigned to one superloop (see Figure 4-5). In instances where the segment is populated with Digital Line Cards with all 16 voice and all 16 data provisioned, the one segment per superloop to 128 configuration provides a virtual non-blocking (120 environment (see Figure 4-4). Four Superloop Network cards and one Controller-4 card are used to implement a one segment per superloop configuration. Figure 4-5 One segment per superloop configuration 0 Segment 2 Segment 1 I Segment I Slot 6 Slot 3 I 12 controller 14 I I Network Segment 3 I Network Card Network Card Network Card -- Engineering Handbook 4-18 System Architecture Two segments per superloop In this configuration, 2 segments are assigned to one superloop (see Figure 4-6). In instances where the segment is populated with Digital Line Cards with enabled, Analog Line Cards, Waiting no data Line Cards, or or Trunk cards, the two segment per superloop configuration will provide a virtual non-blocking (120 timeslots to 32128 environment (see Figure 4-4). For instances where half of the data on Digital Line Cards are enabled, this configuration still provides a low concentration of to timeslots (120 timeslots to 196 and a very low probability of blocking. Two Superloop Network cards and one Controller-2 card are used to implement a two segment per superloop configuration. Figure 4-6 Two segments per superloop configuration Segment 0 - Engineering Handbook Segment 1 Segment 2 - Segment 3 System Architecture 4-19 Four segments per superloop In this configuration, 4 segments are assigned to one superloop (see Figure 4-7). In Line Cards, instances where the segment is populated with Analog Line Cards, Message Waiting Line Cards, or or Trunk cards, the 4 segment per superloop configuration environment will provide a medium concentration (120 timeslots to 64-256 (see Figure 4-4). In instances where half of the data on Digital Line Cards are enabled, this configuration provides a concehtration of 120 timeslots One Superloop Network card and one to 384 Controller-2 card are used to implement a four segment per superloop configuration. Figure 4-7 our segments per superloop configuration 1 Segment 0 r Segment 1 Segment 2 I Segment 3 r Card Engineering Handbook System Architecture Eight segments per superloop In this configuration, 8 segments are assigned to one superloop (see Figure 4-8). In Digital Line Cards, instances where the segment is populated with Analog Line Cards, Message Waiting Line Cards, or or Trunk cards, the 8 segment per superloop configuration will provide a high concentration (120 timeslots to 128-512 environment (see Figure 4-4). In instances where half of the data on Digital Line Cards are enabled, this configuration provides a concentration of 120 timeslots to 768 One Superloop Network card and two Controller-2 cards are used to implement an eight segment per superloop configuration. Engineering Handbook System Architecture 4-21 Figure 4-8 Eight segments per superloop configuration Segment 0 I Segment 1 Segment 0 I Segment Segment 2 Segment 3 I Segment 2 I Engineering Handbook 4-22 System Architecture One segment per segments per superloop In this configuration, one segment is assigned to one superloop and an additional three segments are assigned to another superloop (see Figure 4-9). This configuration provides a virtual non blocking environment for the single segment served by the first superloop and a medium concentration of to timeslots for the three segments assigned to the additional superloop, as described in the preceding examples. Two Superloop Network cards and one Controller-2 card are used to implement a one and three segment per superloop configuration. Figure 4-9 One segment per segments per superloop configuration Serves segment 0 Engineering Handbook Serves segments l-3 System Architecture 4-23 Two segments per segments per superloop In this configuration, 2 segments are assigned to one superloop and an additional 6 segments are assigned to another Figure 4-10). This configuration provides a virtual non blocking environment for the two segments served by the to timeslots when some data first superloop (or a very low concentration of are enabled) and a medium concentration of to timeslots for the three segments assigned to the additional superloop, as described in the preceding examples. Two Superloop Network cards and two Controller-2 cards are used to implement a one and three segment per superloop configuration. Engineering Handbook 4-24 System Architecture Figure 4-10 Two segments per Segment 0 segments per superloop configuration Segment 1 , Engineering Handbook Segment 2 I‘ Segment 3 System Architecture 4-25 Power equipment Meridian systems feature a modular power distribution architecture which parallels the modular design concept of the Universal Equipment Module. Meridian 1 power systems provide the following features: AC-powered and DC-powered System Options, providing flexibility to meet a wide range of customer requirements A distributed, modular power architecture, with power supplies located in each Module, rather than in separate, centralized power shelves All DC systems are available as complete systems, with rectifiers provided by Northern Telecom, or can be equipped for’customer-provided external power A new System Monitor has been designed to provide enhanced power, cooling, and general system monitoring capabilities. This new System Monitor interfaces to the CPU via a Serial Data Interface card, for intelligent error and status reporting Maintenance messages that indicate the location of power faults and status down to the specific column and module Equipment modules that are truly universal, in terms of power and cooling. Meridian 1 systems are designed to eliminate power and thermal limitations; any card can go in any slot, and all modules can be filled to capacity with any logically valid combination of cards, with virtually no engineering rules A universal quick-connect power wiring harness is used to distribute input voltages and monitor signals to power supplies located in each Module An advanced cooling system which employs forced air impellers. The velocity of the impellers is automatically adjusted to meet the cooling requirements of the system Fuses are eliminated, as the system exclusively uses circuit breakers for input power protection Modular backup capabilities Though the AC and DC systems have, within the modules, different internal power components, the internal architecture and distribution methods are very similar. AC and DC systems differ primarily in the power components external to the UEM. See Figures 4-10 and 4-l 1 for block diagrams of the AC and DC powering schemes. As shown in Figure 4-11, AC-powered systems require absolutely no external power components or rectifiers at all, and can plug directly into the commercial AC (utility) power. If reserve power is required with an AC system, an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), along with its associated batteries (either internal or external to the unit), is installed in series with the main commercial feed. Thus while AC systems especially well-suited for applications that do not require reserve power, they are also recommended for small to medium sized systems (Option 21 through 61) that do require reserve power, with backup times ranging from 15 minutes up to 8 hours. In addition even AC systems long-term backup requirements can benefit from a UPS with short-term backup, as the UPS 4-26 System Architecture typically provides power conditioning during normal operation, as well as reserve power during short outages or blowouts. As shown in figure 4-12, AC-powered systems always require external rectifiers to convert the commercial AC power into the standard DC for distribution within the system. Batteries are generally present-in DC systems, as the traditional telecommunications powering method is for the rectifiers to continuously charge a bank of batteries, while the system power rails “float” in parallel on the battery voltage. However, batteries are only required if reserve power is needed. Also shown in Figure 12 is a junction box, which is sometimes used if the distance from the rectifiers to the system is greater than approximately 50’. See NTP Power Engineering, for detailed guidelines. summary, all System Options, in all sizes, are available in both AC-powered and DC-powered choice of which powering scheme to use is determined primarily by reserve power requirements and preferences, and by existing power equipment at the installation site. Figure 1 AC Power external components Inverter AC input AC POWERED SYSTEM (with reserve power Required Optional System Architecture Figure 4-12 DC Power external components AC inp DC POWERED SYSTEM (with reserve power) Required optional 4-27 Product description Chapter 5: Product description Contents Introduction Universal Equipment Modules Meridian 1 System Options Module Descriptions CPU module CPU/Network module Network module Common/Peripheral Equipment module Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module Peripheral Equipment Module Intergroup Module Meridian Mail Module Miscellaneous Equipment Circuit Cards Cabling Description Terminal equipment Power Equipment Introduction The purpose of this section is to provide a description of the Meridian 1 product line. This information does not replace the Northern Telecom Publications For a list of the available please refer to the index 5-l 5-3 5-5 5-14 5-14 5-16 5-18 5-21 5-24 5-26 5-30 5-31 5-33 5-38 5-49 5-50 5-53 5-60 Figure lent modules Product description 5-3 Universal Equipment Modules The Meridian 1 System is comprised of Universal Equipment Modules each containing everything needed (card cage assembly, power supply, I/O cabling, etc) to support a specific system function. These are assembled up to four high on a pedestal, to form a column. The pedestal contains a central Power Distribution Unit cooling fans, air filters, and a System Monitor circuit. At the top of each column is a Top Cap, which consists of two air exhaust grilles and a thermal sensor assembly that works in conjunction with the System Monitor. Systems are comprised of one or more columns. Each module is available in both AC and DC versions, to support the AC- and powered System Options. All functional cards and cardcages are identical, however; the only difference in the modules is the power distribution and the type of power supply or converter used. The different modules and their base product codes are listed below: . CPU module CPU/Network module . Network Equipment module . Common/Peripheral Equipment module Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module Peripheral Equipment module . Remote Peripheral Equipment Carrier module module . Meridian Mail module l l l l The Universal Equipment Modules are constructed of die cast aluminum, providing strength and durability. For ease of access these new modules feature removable front and rear panels . All cable routing between the module and the Main Distribution Frame is handled through the rear of the module. Cable exit can occur at the top, to access overhead cable racks, or at the bottom to take advantage of raised floors. Universal Equipment Modules are assembled on a pedestal, that provides a central Power Distribution Unit, cooling units and system monitoring functions. The pedestal can be equipped with either leveling feet or casters. Modules are shipped three high on a pedestal. Modules are assembled in columns to maximize floor Kits to maintain EM1 space; Adjacent modules require integrity. Each of these Universal Equipment Modules is available in AC or DC power module which does not require a power card. versions, except for the Having two power options gives customersthe flexibility to choose the optimal configuration to meet their business needs. 5-4 Product description Figure Meridian 1 Packaging Elements Universal Equipment Universal Equipment Module -Pedestal 2 Column Product description Meridian 1 System Options The Meridian 1 is available in several options. The use of the Universal Equipment Modules allows for seamless growth from one option to another option by adding or replacing Universal Equipment Modules or card cages. The options are selected depending upon the application, line size, customer requirements. The options are listed below with a brief description of each: Meridian 1 System Option 21A (Single CPU-l module only) Meridian 1 System Option 21 (Single CPU) Meridian 1 System Option 51 (Single CPU, Half Network Group) Meridian 1 System Option 61 (Dual CPU, Full Network Group) Meridian 1 System Option 71 (Dual CPU, Multiple Network Groups) l l l l l Meridian 1 System Option The Meridian 1 System Option 21A is a special version of the Sysytem Option 21, with its power distribution, monitoring and cooling optimized for single-module operation. the option 21A utilizes the standard Common/Peripheral Equipment Module, but with a different System Monitor, Pedestal, and Top Cap. Figure 5-3 shows a typical system configuration. Figure 5-3 System Option 21A Module 5-6 Product description The following specifications apply to System Option 21A: Power AC only Typical Number of Ports 160 Maximum Number of Ports 320 Maximum Number of Modules 1 AC Input Voltage 208 V ac 1 Number of Number of Network Loops * 6 or 10 two service loops Number of Eight DTMF channels Cooling Fan in Top Cap Memory 768K Data Storage Floppy Disk Unit Software 1011 Generic Hardware Features Loops plus No Power Distribution Unit Contains System Monitor Note: To expand Option 21A to Option 21, it is necessary to replace several of the power distribution and cooling elements in the pedestal and top cap, as well as upgrading the system monitor. Meridian 1 System Option 21 The Meridian 1 System Option 21 is a single CPU system, with error memory, based on the Common/Peripheral Equipment Module. This module contains: 3 CPU-type slots for CPU, Memory/Peripheral and Floppy Disk Interface Cards; 6 Superloop Network slots plus a combination card serving the resident Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Superloop slots; and 10 resident IPE card slots. A card is generally equipped in one of the Superloop Network slots, using 2 of the 4 loops available, so the total network capacity for voice/data additional standard ENET traffic is 1 Superloop for the 10 resident IPE slots plus superloops). loops for PE expansion (or any suitable combination of The System Option 21 can use the standard Pedestal, with power distribution and cooling for up to 4 modules per column, or a 2-module pedestal with cooling fans optimized for 1 or 2 module system operation. Figure 5-4 shows a typical system configuration. Product description 5-7 Figure 5-4 System Option 21 5-8 Product description The following specifications apply to System Option 21: Power AC or DC Maximum Number of Ports 800 Input Voltage 208 V ac or -48 V Number of 1 Number of Network Loops 6 Superloops or 10 ENET Loops plus two service loops Cooling Fan Impellers in pedestal Memory 768K Storage Media Floppy Disk Unit Software 1011 Generic Hardware Features Standard Power Distribution Unit Contains System Monitor Product description 5-9 Meridian 1 System Option 51 The Meridian 1 System Option 5 1 is a single CPU system with parity-protected memory, plus a half network group of switching capacity, and is based on a single CPU/Network Module. Figure shows a typical system configuration. Figure System Option 51 Product description The following specifications apply to System Option 5 1: Power AC or DC Maximum Number of Ports 1000. V ac or -48 V dc Input Voltage Number of 1 Number of Network Loops 16 Cooling Fan Impellers in pedestal Memory 768K Storage Media Floppy Disk Unit or Multi Disk Unit Software 1111 Generic Hardware Features One Half Network Group, Standard Power Distribution Unit Contains System Monitor Meridian 1 System Option 61 The Meridian 1 System Option 61 is a dual CPU system with “hot standby” processing capability and fully redundant memory, plus a full network group of switching capacity. The System Option 61 uses two CPU/Network Modules as its common equipment base. Figure 5-6 shows a typical configuration. Product description 5-I 1 Figure 5-6 System Option 61 I CPU/NET Module Optional Module CPU/NET Module Optional Module 4 5-12 Product description Specifications for System Option 61: Power AC or DC Maximum Number of Ports 2000 Input Voltage 208 V ac or -48 V dc Number of 2 Number of Network Loops 32 Cooling Fan Impellers in pedestal Memory 768K Storage Media Floppy Disk Unit or Multi Disk Unit Software 1111 RIs.15 Generic Hardware Features One Network Group, Standard Power Distribution Unit and Contains System Monitor Product description 5-13 Meridian 1 System Option 71 The Meridian 1 System Option 71 is a dual CPU system with “hot standby” processing capabilities and fully redundant memory, plus up to 5 full network groups of switching capacity. The System Option 71 uses for its common equipment base two CPU Modules (in columns), two or more Network Modules, and an Intergroup Module for space switching between network groups. Figure 5-7 shows a typical system configuration. Figure 5-7 System Option 71 5-14 Product description Specifications for System Option 71: Power AC or DC Maximum Number of Ports 10,000 Input Voltage 208 V ac or -48 V dc Number of 2 Number of Network Loops 160 Cooling Fan Impellers in pedestal Memory 1.5 Mbyte Storage Media Floppy Disk Unit or Multi Disk Unit Software 1211 Generic Hardware Features Up to five Network Groups, Standard Power Distribution Unit and Contains System Monitor Module descriptions CPU module The CPU module uses the CPU and Memory cards currently housed in the Meridian SL-1 XT shelf to provide system control and storage of data CPU module and programs for the Meridian 1 System Option 71. Each houses one CPU; two are required for the Meridian 1 System Option 71. For configuration flexibility the CPU module is available with an AC power supply option or a DC power supply option. These power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the Modules. module is designed to accommodate AC power supplies. One The Common Equipment Power Supply AC is required for the module. The module is designed to accommodate DC power supplies. One is required for the Common Equipment Power Supply DC module. Configuration guidelines: CPU Modules are located side by side on the columns. l level of adjacent Product description 5-15 Figure 5-8 CPU module with circuit cards CPU Module l The CPU module contains 17 card slots which support the following: slots l-2 : Memory slot 3: CMA slot 4: CPU Interface slot 5: CPU Function slot 6: slot 7: or FDI slots 8-12: Segmented Bus Extender (SBE) , slot 14: Clock Controller slot 15-17: or Digital Trunk Interface Rate Interface (PRI) Product description CPU/Network module The CPU/Network module uses the CPU and Memory circuit cards housed in the Meridian SL-1 NT and RT shelves to provide system control and storage of data and programs for Meridian 1 System Option 5 1 and 61. module houses one CPU and up to 16 network loops, with one Each CPU/Net module used in System Options 51 and two used in System Option 6 For configuration flexibility the CPU/Network module is available with an AC power supply option or a DC power supply option. These-power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the Modules. The module is designed to accommodate one Common Equipment Power Supply AC The Power Supply DC l . l module is designed to accommodate one Common Equipment 1 AB). guidelines: For a half group, single CPU system, one module is required (Meridian 1 System Option 51). For a full group, dual CPU system, two Modules are required (Meridian 1 System Option 61). These Modules must be located on top of each other in the same column. Product Figure 5-9 CPU/Network module with circuit cards CPU/Network Module Module Slots 1 8 Superloop Network or Network QPC414 or or, SDI, or PRI, or DTI CE . * The Network-type include the SDI, Sup contains 17 card slots which support the following: slots 1 8: network cards* slot 9 : Clock Controller or Serial Data Interface (SDI) slot 10: Peripheral Signaling slot 11: 3-Port Extender (3PE) Disk Interface slot 12: Mass Storage Interface slot 13: slot 14: CPU Function slot 15: CPU Interface __ slot 16: Changeover Memory Arbitrator (CMA) slot 17: Memory slot 18: Superloop Network Card, the QPC 414 Network Card, and cards. 5-18 Product description Network module The Network module contains the network shelf backplane from the Meridian SL-1 Network Enhanced systems but is housed in a module configuration. This module will support the current Meridian SL- 1 network circuit cards along with two new network circuit cards: Network card Conference/Tone and Digit Switch card l l The new Network card will interface to four network loops (120 time slots) and may also be used in the existing Meridian SL-1 Enhanced Network shelves. The Conference (QPC444) and the Tone and Digit Switch circuit cards card which will require two may be replaced by the loops (one card slot), instead of the four loops (two card slots) currently required with the Meridian SL- 1 systems. For configuration flexibility the Network module is available with an AC power option or a DC power option. These power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the modules. The Network module is designed to accommodate the one Common Equipment Power Supply AC The module is designed to accommodate one Common Equipment Power Supply DC The Network module will permit eight QPC414 cards or four Network cards, or any combination for a total of 16 network loops per module. Usually 14 voice/data loops are available when one Conference/Tone and Digit Switch card is configured in the module. Card slots 5 12 are used for the network cards. The Network card will always use four loops (120 time slots) and will always begin with an even numbered loop that is a multiple of four (Example 12, etc...). See configuration guidelines for Network and ENET card placement rules. Product description 5-19 Each module will provide 16 ENET loops or four Superloops, one half a modules are required for a complete network group network group. Two of 32 loops. The Network modules are designated as: *Group 0 module 0 , Group 0 module 1 *Group 1 module 0 , Group 1 module 1 (continued) *Group 2 module 0 , Group 2 module 1 *Group 3 module 0 , Group 3 module 1 *Group 4 module 0 , Group 4 module 1 The Group and module numbers are determined by the switch settings on the Three Port Extender (3PE) card. The module may be utilized to support Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) card. In this configuration one common and/or a Primary Rate Interface equipment power supply is required to power up to six cards. Configuration guidelines: The Modules do not have a left and right hand version as with the Meridian SL-1 network shelves. In a full network group configuration, the Modules must always be one on top of the other. The terminal number O-O-O-O is software reserved and may not be used for any PE terminal numbers. To avoid using this TN it is recommended you assign loop 0 as a Conference loop and loop 1 for a TDS loop (card slot 5). A maximum of 10 Modules (5 network groups) (System Option 71 A maximum of 6 cards per When the Superloop Network card is used, the card slot to the left or right may or Superloop Network). The empty not be used for other network cards card slots may house cards, if two card slots are adjacent to each other, or other type cards that do not require network addressing etc...). All cabling will exit the module from the rear, via I/O panels. All faceplate cables must go to the every module and terminate on I/O panels, when exiting module. The contains 15 card slots which support the following: slots 1: 3PE slots 2-3: Switch (IGS) 1, or slot 4: Peripheral Signaling slots 5-12: Network Cards slot 13: or 5-20 Product description (continued) slot 14: slot 15: not used l The module I/O Panels have functions: 24 pin J slot connectors are for Network to Peripheral Equipment connections when the Network and PE are not in a contiguous row. D25 connector J slots are connections. connector J slots are for connections. Figure 5-l 0 Network module with circuit cards Network Module Net Product description 5-21 Common/Peripheral Equipment module The module is utilized to house common, network and peripheral equipment circuit cards for the Meridian 1 System Options 21A and 21. The module is available in-two versions, AC or DC power. These power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the modules. The module requires one Common Equipment Power Supply AC . The module requires one Common Equipment Power Supply DC l This module is divided into two sections: Common Equipment (CE) Peripheral Equipment (PE) l There are 10 Common Equipment (CE) and 10 Peripheral Equipment card slots. The CPU functions are provided by card slots l-3. The Network Equipment functions are provided by card slots 3-10. The CPU circuit card in CE card slot 2. used in the Meridian system, is installed The module uses two specially designed circuit cards for Meridian System Options 21A and 2 1 only. Memory/Signaling card card l l The circuit card installed in CE card slot 3 provides the peripheral signaling functions in addition to providing the memory and miscellaneous CPU equipment functions. circuit card will provide the Controller card functions The for the Intelligent PE cards installed in the module, along with a Superloop Network and Receiver functions, for Meridian 1 System Options The card is installed in CE card slot 10. This card also provides a Superloop for all ten Intelligent PE cards, and eight DTR circuits. Superloop networks and/or (QPC414) are used whenexpansion is required by adding more PE Modules. Disk Interface circuit card be For uniformity, it is recommended that installed in CE card slot 1. This card provides the CPU interface to the Mass Storage Device. A Floppy Disk Unit may replace the and Mass storage device in some systems. This FDU may be installed in CE card slots 7-9 or in PE card slots 10. 5-22 Product description CE card slots 4-9 provide an interface to twelve loops when ENET circuit cards are used, and 24 loops if Superloop Network circuit cards are used. A new Conference/Tone and Digit Switch circuit card is used to provide conference/tone and digit switch functions. The Conference/Tone and Digit Switch circuit card may be installed in CE card slots 4-9 (preferably, use slot 4 for XCT). This circuit card interfaces to two ENET loops on the backplane. module uses the new Intelligent Peripheral Equipment cards only, to The and 21. provide trunk and station interface in Meridian 1 System Meridian 1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment circuit cards may be installed in card slots O-9. Configuration guidelines: The Receiver card is always assigned as virtual card slot 10. Product description 5-23 Figure 1 module with circuit cards Equipment Module Digital Line, or Analog Line, or Universal Trunk, or Trunk, Receiver 5-24 Product description Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module The Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module uses the new Meridian 1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment cards only and may be used with Meridian 1 System Options 1. With an upgrade assembly the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment modules may be used with all existing Meridian SL-1 systems. The Intelligent PE module is available in two versions, AC or DC power. These power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the modules. The module is designed to accommodate AC power supplies. One is required for the Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC module along with one Ringing Generator AC AA) when 500 or 2500 sets are to be supported by the module. module is designed to accommodate DC power supplies. One The Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC is required for the module along with one Ringing Generator DC when 500 or 2500 sets are to be supported by the module. The module may only be connected to a Superloop Network circuit card. It houses one Controller card and up to 16 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment circuit cards. The card slots are numbered from 0 Intelligent PE module supports to 15, for a total of 16 PE card slots. The 16 PE circuit cards, giving a capacity of 256 Integrated Voice/Data (IVD) lines (512 although a typical configuration includes a mixture of Digital lines, Analog lines, Trunks and Receiver (DTR) circuit cards. All cable connections to the MDF are made in the rear of the module through an I/O panel. To serve all 16 PE card slots, 12 PE cables are required to the MDF (three per segment). Configuration guidelines: . Only Intelligent Peripheral Equipment cards may be installed in the Intelligent PE module. The card slots are universal card slots. The Intelligent PE module does not have any limitations or restrictions on card placement. l l Product description 5-25 Figure 5-l 2 Intelligent PE module with circuit cards Slots 0 15 may be Digital Line Cards Line Cards. Trunks, Trunks, Receiver 5-26 Product description Peripheral Equipment module The Peripheral Equipment module uses the PE circuit cards currently housed in PE shelves for the Meridian SL-1 systems. It provides the interface to the system for module-may only be connected to an ENET trunks and stations. The 1 System Options (QPC414) circuit card and may be used and the Meridian NT, RT, ST, N, and XN systems. It houses one Peripheral Buffer circuit card (QPC659) and up to ten existing peripheral equipment circuit cards. For configuration flexibility the Peripheral Equipment module is available with an AC power supply option or a DC power supply option. These power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the Modules. The module is designed to accommodate AC power supplies. One Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC is required for the module along with one Ringing Generator AC when 500 or 2500 sets are to be supported by the module. The module is designed to accommodate DC power supplies. One Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC is required for the module along with one Ringing Generator DC when 500 or 2500 sets are to be supported by the module. All cable connections to the MDF are made in the rear of the module through an panel. Seven PE cables are required to the MDF for all 10 card slots. Configuration guidelines: . For cabling restraints and ease of expansion the PE module should always be located as the top module in a column. . Only QPC414 Enhanced Network circuit cards may be connected to the PE module. The PE module is the only module that may be used to house PE cards RPE Carrier module at the remote location. when used with the When the Meridian Data Service ADM, ASIM RILC, or AILC are required, the PE module must be used. l l System Option 21A must be upgraded to Option 21 if an added. -- module is I/O Product description Figure 5-13 PE module with circuit cards 5-28 Product description Remote Peripheral Equipment Carrier module The RPE Carrier module is used to extend the Network to PE interconnection distance between local and remote sites. It accommodates two network loops. For configuration flexibility the Remote Peripheral Equipment Carrier module is available with an AC power option or a DC power option. These power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the modules The supplies. the RPE Carrier module is designed to accommodate AC power is required for One Common Equipment Power Supply AC module. RPE Carrier module is designed to accommodate DC power The supplies. One Common Equipment DC is required for the module. Configuration guidelines: Since each RPE Carrier module serves two network loops, the number of modules required per system depends on the number of peripheral devices and traffic requirements at the remote site. The RPE backplane contains 12 card slots which support the following: slot 1: DTI slot 2: 1.5 Mb Converter slot 3: 2 Mb Converter slot 4: Carrier Interface slot 5: Remote Peripheral slot 6: Local Carrier Buffer slot 7: Carrier Interface slot 8: 2 Mb Converter slot 9: 1.5 Mb Converter slot 10: Carrier Maintenance slots 11-12: DTI l l Product description 5-29 Figure 5-l 4 RPE Carrier module with circuit cards 5-30 Product description module The module provides a path for of traffic between the network groups in Meridian 1 System Option 7 1. Faceplate cables from Segmented and Inter-Group Switch circuit Bus Extender (SBE), System Clock cards are connected to the module. These faceplate cables are accessed from the front of the module, not the rear. module does not require any power card for operation. Therefore it module The Figure 5 module IGS 1 0 IGS 1 IGSO 4 SCGO J14 3 J 3 Configuration guidelines: The module is always located as the top module of the column containing CPU 1 for the Meridian 1 System Option The Terminating Plug should be installed in the unused J slot connectors. l l Product description 5-31 Meridian Mail module The Meridian Mail module uses the circuit cards housed in the Meridian Mail Option for the Meridian SL- 1 systems. The Meridian Mail module may only be connected to an ENET circuit card. and may be used in and the Meridian NT, RT, ST, Meridian 1 System Options N, and XN systems. For configuration flexibility the Meridian Mail module is available with an AC power supply option or a DC power supply option. These power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the Modules. The Meridian Mail module is designed to accommodate AC power supplies. Two Common Equipment Power Supplies AC are required Meridian Mail module. for the The Meridian Mail module is designed to accommodate DC power supplies. Two Common Equipment Power Supplies AC are required for the Meridian Mail module. Configuration guidelines: Meridian 1 System Option 21A must be upgraded to Meridian 1 System Option Meridian Mail module is equipped. 21 when the l 5-32 Product description Figure 6 Meridian Mail module with circuit cards MERIDIAN MAIL MODULE CKT BRKR HARD DISK MODULE TAPE DRIVE HARD DISK MODULE RS-232 Circuit breakers \ Availability I Equipment Hard Disk Modules: Processor (Meridian 1 (multiple Memory (single Enhanced Single Computer Board Signal (Meridian or DMS-100) Product description 5-33 Miscellaneous equipment Pedestal The pedestal is a base unit made of die-cast construction and houses the power distribution unit, system monitor, blower unit, and fan unit connector. The pedestal is approximately 3 1.5 inches wide by 25.50 inches deep by 10 inches high and weighs 30 lbs empty. Leveling feet are provided for up to four tiers, while a caster option is provided for up to two tiers. Input power for the system is brought into and distributed by the pedestal. A Power Distribution Unit located in the pedestal contains an filter and one 30 amp circuit breaker. One pedestal distributes the input power for one column. Also located in the pedestal are two forced air impellers and a reusable dust filter. The impellers are protected by two 1 amp circuit breakers. Configuration guidelines: One pedestal required per column. l System Monitor The System Monitor card controls and monitors the status of all power-related hardware and functions, such as column thermal status, power supply operation, blower operation, power fail transfer, circuit breakers, external rectifiers, batteries, and Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) systems. The same system monitor is used in both AC and DC systems. One System Monitor is installed in the pedestal of each column. The System Monitor located in the column containing the Module, acts as the master system monitor while the monitors located in other columns act as slaves. master will poll the slaves and report their status to the CPU. The master System Monitor is connected to the CPU by means of an port located on an card. The slave System Monitors are connected in a daisy chain fashion to the master by means of an 8-conductor RI type connector and are numbered O-63. Any power message reported to the CPU by the System Monitor is output to the maintenance TTY. All power messages include the following information: status or fault indication, hardware type, column number, Module number, and Power Supply unit number. telemanuals.com 5-34 Product description Figure 5-17 System Monitor location UNIVERSAL MODULE POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT \ EXTENDED SYSTEM MONITOR 206061 telemanuals.com Product description 5-35 Blankfaceplates Blank faceplates may be inserted into any unoccupied shelf slot position, though, except for power slots, they are not required for cooling. Three different sizes are available: 0.875 in. for card slots. . 1 in. for common equipment card slots. 2 in. for dual common equipment card slots, and for the Ringing Generator slot in the and PE modules if the Ringing Generator is not equipped. l l Top cap The top cap is mounted on the top module of each column. EM1 shielding, air exits, and I/O cable exits. It provides additional The top cap is approximately 31.5 inches wide by 22 inches deep by 3 inches high and weighs 8 lbs. It consists of a front and a rear air exhaust grills, each secured by two clips underneath the edge of the grill. Three versions of the top cap are available: AC systems DC systems l l . Meridian 1 System Option 21A only telemanuals.com 5-36 Product description Expansion kit The Expansion kit bolts modules together for side-by-side expansion when in a contiguous row. The Expansion kits maintain shielding against as as provide additional cable routing space in.multi-column systems. See Figures and 5-19 below. Figure 5-l 8 Expansion kit Expansion Kits well telemanuals.com Product description 5-37 Figure 5-l 9 Expansion kit internal view Expansion Kit I telemanuals.com 5-38 Product description Circuit cards System functions in the Meridian 1 are performed by components mounted on circuit cards. These circuit cards are specific as to their function but do share some common features. Circuit cards are 12.5 inches by 10 inches and are marked with the part number on each faceplate. Some circuit cards have optional switches located on the card itself, and if this is the case, the faceplate will be marked with a graphic symbol to indicate their presence. Other faceplate features may include Enable/Disable switches and cable connectors. All circuit cards status include two locking devices, one at the top and one at the bottom to hold the circuit card in the module. Meridian 1 includes the addition of several new circuit cards which may be installed in the Universal Equipment Modules. These circuit cards are able to transmit their status, identity, and vintage to the CPU. This greatly improves remote maintenance capabilities and inventory control. The Meridian 1 also supports several existing circuit cards. The following is a list of some of the most commonly used existing circuit cards and the new circuitcards supported by Meridian 1: Table Meridian 1 circuit cards PEC code Description PEC code Description Segmented Bus Extender Remote Peripheral Switch Primary Interface 2M Baud Converter Fbppy Disk interface Carrier Maintenance Rate D-Channel Handler Baud Converter B DX Signaling Carrier Interface Memory OPX Line Card Changeover and Memory Arbitrator Release Link Trunk Card Enhanced Network Console Monitor (supervisory) QPC471 C QPC841 A QPC71 F Controller Tone Detector CPU Function Asynchronous Interface 4 Port Serial Data lnt 4 Mass Loop Signaling Trunk Card Storage Interface Data Line Card Product description 5-39 Table 5-l Meridian 1 circuit cards (continued) PEC code Description AC Controller-4 PEC code Description AD Controller-2 Digital Line Card Analog Message Waiting Line Card Superloop Network Card E&M Trunk Card Universal Trunk Card Conference/Tone and Digit Switch Receiver Card Memory/Signaling System Monitor Mini System Monitor Fbppy Disk Unit AA SDI Paddle Board Multi Disk Trunk CPU Interface Card Peripheral Signaling Switch QPC441 C Bus Terminating Unit Integrated Services Digital Line Card Enhanced Serial Data Interface 16 Port Card Line CPU with Dual Loop Buffer 3 Port Extender RS-232 4 Port Interface Line Card Local Carrier Buffer 16 Port Message Waking Line Card 5-40 Product description Meridian 1 new common equipment circuit cards Floppy Disk Unit The Floppy Disk Unit is used to load the programs and office data into the system memory. The FDU contains two floppy drives is controlled by Each floppy d&e has a formatted the QPC742 Floppy Disk Interface capacity of 1.44 MB. The FDU occupies two adjacent card slots in the CPU, Network, or PE Module. It is powered through the cable connecting it to the Floppy Disk Interface Configuration guidelines: One per system. The FDU can be connected to a maximum of two l l Multi Disk Unit The Multi Disk Unit (MDU) is used to load the programs and office data into the system memory. The MDU contains the following: l l l Two 3.5inch floppy drives which are connected to the SCSI interface through the SCSI/floppy controller; each drive has a formatted capacity of 1.44 MB A 3.5inch hard disk drive which has a built-in SCSI interface and requires a minimum capacity of 20 MB An SCSI/Floppy Controller The MDU occupies three adjacent card slots in the CPU or Network Module and and 12V from the module. The MDU is controlled by the QPC584 requires Mass Storage Interface. The MDU can be connected to a maximum of two Configuration guidelines: . One per system. Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Z-Port The card is a paddle board that may be installed in the rear of a and Module. The card is approximately 12 inches by 4.5 inches and is similar in appearance to a BTU card. It provides an interface to the CPU for up to two I/O devices. -The addressing, (0 15) is backwards compatible with the QPC841 card. The addressing is set by address switches and the data rates are; 300,600, 4800 or 9600 bps. The data is transmitted and received as 8-bit serial data with no parity. Product description 5-41 The number of Serial Data Interface ports required in a system depends on the software options selected by the customer. The following software options require or QPC841 ports: . ACD package D (ACD-D) Auxiliary Processor Link (APL) Call Detail Recording (CDR) List . Call Detail Recording (CDR) Tape Property Management System Interface System Monitor l l l Configuration guidelines: . The card does not support the TELETYPE (20 ma current loop) interface, or 110 baud rate. It may only be installed in the rear of a or module. . The address of the cannot conflict with existing addresses. The valid or QPC841 ports are; 0 15. Two maximum per module. Three maximum per module. If more than seven ports are required use the QPC841 card. l l l l Superloop Network card The Superloop Network card employees a new DS30 interface which reduces the number of wires required to interface to the Intelligent PE Modules. This new interface is a proprietary DS-30 based format known as DS-30Y and allows the connection of four 2.56 Mbps loops. The Superloop Network card is connected by a cable to the new Controller card located in the Intelligent PE Controller cards over Modules, and may be connected to one or two separate cables. Provided on the card is a Motorola 68010 microprocessor which is used to control the card, and in addition provides new maintenance available on the ENET card. It receives signaling messages directly from the CPU but will send signaling messages to the CPU by means of the Peripheral Signaling card. The Superloop Network card may be used in conjunction with the ENET card to provide equivalent network switching functions in existing Meridian SL-1 ST, NT, XT, or RT systems. It provides an interface to four loops on the network bus instead of the two loop interface provided by the ENET card. The number of loops served by a network shelf or Module remains the same however the Superloop Network frees up additional network card slots which may be used for circuit cards 5-42 Product description (continued) that do not require access to the network bus (for example, Serial Data Interface [SDI] or Digital Trunk Interface [DTI] cards). For example: When upgrading a Meridian SL-1 to the new Intelligent Peripheral Equipment a Serial Data Interface (SDI) card may occupy the card slot to the left or the right of the Superloop Network card installed in a Meridian SL-1 enhanced network shelf. A new overlay program (97) is added to allow the definition configuration of the Superloop. New commands are added to existing maintenance diagnostics to allow access to and control of the new maintenance functions provided by the Superloop Network card. Configuration guidelines: Superloop Network cards may be used in existing Meridian SL-1 ST, RT, NT and XT systems. 16 networks per enhanced network shelf or module. When installed in an Network Module, the loop number will always be an even number (for example and it does not matter if it is the left or right hand card slot. In the Network Module, the odd-numbered network card slots are considered left hand and the even-numbered network card slots are right hand. l l l Conference/Tone and Digit Switch The new card provides the functionality of the Tone and Digit Switch and QPC444 Conference cards on one circuit card and occupies one card slot on the network shelf backplane or module. One loop is assigned to the conference function and one is assigned to the Tone and Digit and Switch functions. This circuit card interfaces to two ENET loops on the backplane. card contains PROM S that provide 256 tones thus eliminating the The need for special international cards. These new tones may be defined by means of a software package is equipped. The tone new overlay program (56) if the choices are downloaded to the card upon initialization. If the FTC software package is not equipped, then the system will automatically assign normal defaults. Configuration guidelines: The card may be installed in the following existing systems: Meridian SL-1 ST, RT, NT, XT and Meridian 1 System Options 61 and 71. l Product description 5-43 Memory/Signaling card The Memory/Signaling card may only be used in the Meridian 1 System Option 21A and 21. This card combines the functions of the memory, miscellaneous, and peripheral signaling cards. These cards that were separate functions for the Meridian SL-1 have been combined to reduce the footprint of the Meridian 1 System Option 21A and 21. The memory features include 768K of RAM with error detection and correction. The miscellaneous portion of the card provides the CPU interrupt function and fault monitoring. The peripheral signaling features include: the signaling interface between the CPU and the peripheral equipment, generation and distribution of timing signals used by the networks for speech path switching. Configuration guidelines: . Used only with the Module. . One Memory/Signaling card is required per occupies card slot 3. Module and it card The card may only be used in the Meridian 1 System Option 21A and 21. This card combines the functions of the Superloop Network, Controller Receiver cards to reduce the footprint of the Meridian 1 card and the System Option 21A and 21. The function of this card is the same as the Controller card, Receiver card, and Superloop network card which were described previously. The maintenance display function of the Controller card is not provided. Configuration guidelines: . The card is always assigned as 28. . One card is required per Module. Use only with the Module in card slot 10. l 8 DTR circuits assigned to virtual card slot 10 of IPE. 5-44 Product description System Monitor The System Monitor monitors the status of power-related hardware such as column thermal status, power supplies, fan operation, power fail transfer, circuit breakers, and One System Monitor is installed in the pedestal of each column. The System Monitor, located in the column containing the Module, acts as the master system monitor while the system monitors located in other columns act as and report slaves. The master System Monitor will poll the slave System their status to the CPU. The master System Monitor is connected to the CPU by means of an RS-232C port located on an card. The slave System Monitors are connected in a daisy chain fashion to the master System Monitor by means of an conductor RJ type connector and are numbered O-63. Any power message reported to the CPU by the System Monitor is output to the maintenance TTY, and power messages include the following information: hardware type, System Monitor number, Module number and Power Supply number. A system alarm LED is located in the Top Cap of the column affected. Configuration guidelines: . The System Monitor is used in all systems except for the Meridian 1 System Option 21A. l System Monitor Option 21 A The System Monitor Option 21A provides an interface to Power Supply, the CPU, and the thermal communicate and monitor the switches. In the event of failure, the System Monitor Option 21A is notified and the appropriate alarm is set. A system alarm LED located below the top cap lights to indicate CPU failure. Configuration Guidelines: The is used only in the Meridian 1 System Option 21A. Product description 5-45 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment circuit cards The Meridian 1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment circuit cards have been reduced in width to only inch. These new PE cards have the capability to send specific card information to the CPU. When asked through a maintenance program, the information may contain the PE card (PEC) code and the vintage of that card. This will greatly aid in the inventory and maintenance of a Meridian 1 system. The Meridian 1 Peripheral Equipment is connected to the Network equipment through the Controller card for Intelligent Peripheral Equipment or the Peripheral Buffer for the Peripheral Equipment Modules Modules Controller circuit cards are used with Superloop Network circuit cards, while Peripheral Buffer cards are used with ENET circuit cards. The two circuit cards serve basically the same function, that is the connection point for shelf/module to network communications. The however does have some additional maintenance capabilities that the Peripheral Buffer does not have, such as a maintenance status display on the faceplate. Controller Card The Controller card provides the primary interface and control functions between the Network and up to 16 Meridian 1 Intelligent PE cards. It will switch PCM voice and data from the DS-30X loops of the Network to the 30Y loops of the PE cards. IPE Module and interfaces to the The card is installed in the network card by means of a cable. The circuit card consists of a mother/daughter assembly which is installed in a dedicated card slot marked in the center of the IPE Module. card is a Motorola 68010 microprocessor which is used for Located on the control functions, message format conversions (DS-30X loop to DS-30Y loop), and to perform new maintenance functions. A maintenance display located on the card will indicate the status of the card. One faceplate of the card is required per IPE Module. The may only be connected to a Network card and cannot be installed in the IPE Module. is available in two configurations: Controller-2 (Cont-2) and The Controller-4 (Cont-4). The Cont-2 allows the connection of up to two Network cards to a single module, while the Cont-4 allows the connection of up to four Superloop Network cards to a single module. 5-46 Product description (Continued) Once connected to the the Intelligent PE Module is divided into logical segments. Each segment consists of four PE circuit card slots. These segments are numbered O-3. Segment 0 consists of PE slots O-3, segment 1 consists of card slots 4-7, segment 2 consists of card slots 8-l 1, and segment 3 consists of card slots 1215. One Superloop Network card maybe assigned from one to eight segments on one or two Intelligent PE Modules. Several different to segment arrangements are possible. The following figure shows possible Superloop Network to Controller card configurations. The Superloop Network to Controller card configuration chosen will depend upon system traffic requirements and hardware usage. Controller card configuration information in Overlay 97. This program allows for the assignment of Controller card numbers (l-95) and the Controller card location codes. Both of these parameters are used to identify the location of the Controller card. Configuration guidelines: The Controller-4 card is used when you assign more than two Superloops per module. high traffic conditions or Non-blocking requirements). . The Controller-2 card is used in all other configurations. l Digital Line Card The Digital Line card may be installed in an IPE or module only and interface up to 16 M2000 series or M3000 digital telephones. provides 16 voice and 16 data ports which allows any set connected to transmit voice and data simultaneously over one pair of wires. Configuration guidelines: One per 16 digital terminals. Used only with the Intelligent PE Module or It l l Module. Product description 5-47 Analog Line Cards . . Analog Line Analog Message Waiting Line Cards The Analog Line Card and the Analog Message Waiting Line Cards may be installed in and Modules only. Both the Analog Line Card and the Analog Message Waiting Line Card interfaces up to sixteen 500 or 2500 type sets and performs analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion. The Analog Message Waiting Line Card will additionally provide the interface to the -150 V supply to light Message Waiting lamps located on the sets connected to the card. Configuration guidelines: . Used only with the Intelligent PE Module or Module. Universal Trunk Card The Universal Trunk card may be installed in a or Module only and provides the interface to the following types of trunk circuits: Central Office (CO, FAX, WATS, Japan CO) loop or ground start 2-way TIE trunk loop dial repeating or automatic incoming dial . Direct Inward Dial (DID) Paging Equipment Recorded Announcement equipment . Music Equipment l l l The card interfaces up to eight of the previously mentioned trunk operations as defined in the system’s circuits. It will also support A- law and configuration record. New prompts have been added to Overlay Programs 14 and 16 to allow the configuration of the Universal Trunk card. 5-48 Product description (Continued) Configuration guidelines: . One required for every eight of the above listed trunk types. . Used only with the Intelligent PE Module or Module. E&M Trunk Card The E&M Trunk card interfaces up to four trunk circuits. It will also support A-law and p-law operations as defined in the system’s configuration record. New prompts are added to Overlay Programs 14 and 16 which will allow the configuration of the Universal Trunk card. The E&M Trunk card may only be installed in the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module or the Common/Peripheral Equipment Module and provides the interface to the following types of circuits: l l l l l E 4-wire DX Paging Equipment Dictation Equipment Configuration guidelines: . Used only with the Intelligent PE Module or Module. Receiver The Receiver card provides a total of eight channels of Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) or Multi Frequency detection and it may be installed in or Module. An overlay program is used to any card slot in an determine the function of the card. Configuration guidelines: . Required when 2500 sets, used. Used only with the l DID trunks, Digitone-Tie trunks or DISA Intelligent PE Module or Module. Product description 5-49 Cabling The cables are differentiated by the cabling method used. Two types of cables are available Intra-module and Inter-module. Intra-module cables are cables that connect to different cards within a module, or cables that go to the I/O connector panels at the rear of the module. Intra-module cables are not shielded. These cables are typically round and use bail locks or screws to prevent accidental removal. Inter-module cables are cables that are routed internally between modules. These cables are used primarily for interconnecting the following subsystems together: . CPU to CPU . CPU to Network . Network to Network . Network to Peripheral Equipment See Table 5-2 for a list of some of the most commonly-used cables and their associated PEC codes. Product codes shown the 2 digit alpha suffix have several lengths available. Table 5-2 PEC codes for cables Product description Software description The Meridian 1 Superloop and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment is supported on X11 release 15 and future Xl 1 Releases. The Meridian 1 System Option 21A and 6 1 by software 21 is supported by software generic 1011”; System Options 1 generic “1111” and System Option 71 by software generic “1211”. In addition, three new software options are introduced to provide the extended configuration capabilities required by the new hardware. These options are: Software Option 203 (see Note l Allows the configuration of Superloops and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment. This option is applicable to all System Options and to Meridian SL-1 systems extended to use Superloops and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment. Software Option 204 (See Note 2) Allows the configuration of the combined Conference/Tone and Digit card, Applies to all System Options and Meridian SL-1 systems using l Software Option 205 (See Notes 1 and 2) Provides the configuration overlay LD97. Required for Software Options 203 and Any system using Superloops and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment requires Software Options 203 and 205. 2: Any system using the new Conference/Tone requires Software Options 204 and 205. Digit card Software download The new circuit cards introduced with the Meridian 1 System Options take advantage of the benefits offered by distributed processing, enabling significant savings in CPU real time to be realized while maintaining compatibility with existing Meridian SL-1 Systems (the real time savings do not apply to existing Meridian SL-1 Systems unless Superloops and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment are used). The new Superloop network card, the Controller-2 and Controller-4 cards, and Intelligent Peripheral cards contain microprocessors to provide the off-loading of work that was previously done by the CPU and the flexibility to change parameters without hardware revisions. The opportunity has also been taken to significantly increase the self diagnostic and system diagnostic capabilities through use of the board microprocessors, resulting in improvements in maintainability. Product description (Continued) This flexibility is achieved through software downloading. The program store for the processors contained on the new cards is stored on the new 3.5inch floppy diskettes or on the hard disk drive and is downloaded to the pack (in broadcast mode) following a system reload (sysload) or optionally by means of an overlay program command. Thus, downloadable software upgrades are possible without the need to reload the system and, in the event that similar Intelligent Peripherals have different requirements, selective upgrades are possible. Typical CPU functions relieved by this capability are the handling of telephone set ringing, which takes place on the Controller card and Dial pulse digit collection, handled by the Intelligent Peripheral cards. The Peripheral Signaling Card is bypassed, since all CPU output signaling messages are handled directly by the Superloop network card, avoiding a potential bottleneck, significantly enhancing message handling. Whenever possible, hardware switch selection on these cards has been removed and the on-board microprocessors allow the soft selection of options. These new cards make further use of this intelligence by being capable of reporting, following a command from Overlay 32, their pack Product Code, serial number, release number, and manufacture location, greatly assisting inventory control and maintenance. Another capability, that of reporting the presence of a card and function following insertion in the Module, is achieved through the Controller-2 and Controller-4 card continually scanning the module for such events (also applies if card is removed; its absence is reported). Configuration extensions Since the new Intelligent Peripheral Equipment extends the number of Peripheral circuit cards per shelf from 10 to 16 (card slots O-15) and the number of per card has increased from 16 to 32, all overlay programs relating to the provisioning of peripheral equipment have been modified to allow for these expanded parameters (within the constraints of currently available circuit card densities). In addition, a new overlay (LD97) is introduced which provides for the definition of Intelligent Peripheral Equipment system parameters (such as law for maintenance threshold levels, peripheral software download options or switchhook flash timers), and the configuration of the new Superloop network cards, Intelligent Peripheral Equipment controller cards, the and Digit Switch card and the combined Superloop and receiver card. 5-52 Product description Maintenance enhancements Maintenance diagnostic Overlays and 45 have undergone significant revision and extension to exploit the capabilities’of the Superloop network card, Controller card and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment cards. In addition to greatly enhanced self diagnostic abilities (due to the on-board microprocessors), expanded commands within these overlays provide improved, easy to use manual testing and trouble shooting tools to the craftsman, enabling rapid identification of trouble areas and faulty hardware. Test capabilities include: Testing the timeswitch memory on the Superloop network card Generation of test patterns to test different segments of the system: Superloop Network to Controller Superloop Network to Superloop Network Controller to Superloop Network Controller to Controller Superloop Network to self through backplane, Controller or Controller and terminal Controller to self through terminal Controller or Superloop Network to self through special test channel l l l l Interrogation of cards to reveal function, release, serial number and manufacture location code Interrogation of digital telephone sets to reveal type, code, color and release Overlay 45 (The background signalling diagnostic program) now provides improved test progress information to the craftsperson and is able to identify and report the card requiring replacement following the detection of a fault. Also, if the program is interrupted, it will restart where it was interrupted. Conversion Automatic in-line conversion allows upgrading to release 15 from release 12 and beyond. Reconfiguration of the data structures occurs during the SYSLOAD sequence to take account of changes made to accommodate new features. To assist with the reconfiguration of terminal equipment to the new overlay 25 has been modified to allow on single, double, and quad density peripheral equipment to be moved to Superloops. Product description 5-53 Terminal equipment To the user, the telephone is the most visible part of the business communications system. Meridian1 systems support a wide range of telephones, including multiline and single line telephones, as well as digital sets with key and display functions and data transmission capabilities. A range of options for attendant call processing and message center applications is also available. In addition, a number of other add-on devices are available to extend and enhance the features of telephones and consoles. Add-on devices include key/lamp modules, lamp field arrays, handsets, and handsfree units. Digital Telephones Analog-to-digital conversion takes place in the set itself rather than in the associated peripheral line card. This eliminates attenuation, distortion, and noise generated over telephone lines, and results in a voice quality that is exceptionally clear and crisp. Signaling and control functions are also handled digitally. An eight-bit microprocessor in the telephone set monitors all keypad and hookswitch operations and sends messages to communicate to the system any change in status. Lamp indications, ringing, and handsfree operation are controlled by messages sent from the system to the telephone set. Time Compression Multiplexing (TCM) is used to integrate the voice, data, and signaling information over a single pair of telephone wires. TCM compresses the continuous bit stream between the system and digital set into bursts and leaves sufficient space between bursts for data to be received without interference from the far end: the system sends one burst of 20 data bits to the digital set; the set processes the bits and sends a similar burst back to the system. This cycle is repeated 8000 times per second. Every transmitted burst is compressed into two 64 Kbps traffic channels plus two 16 Kbps signalling channels. This technique, often referred to as transmission, provides a total bandwidth of 5 12 Kbps. For applications where data communications is required, Meridian 1 digital telephones offer an integrated data option that can be field installed to provide simultaneous voice and data communications over single pair wiring to a port on a digital line card. The Asynchronous Data Option provides data communications at speeds up to 19,200 bits per second from an ASCII terminal or desktop computer. Data calls are performed entirely from the data terminal keyboard. Other features such as Speed Calling and King Again (which notifies the user when a busy terminal screen. computer port is free) are selected from a menu displayed The data option hardware is placed inside the telephone and uses the same pair of wires used for voice calls. 5-54 Product description .. Meridian Digital Telephones M2006 Single Line Telephone The Meridian 1 M2006 digital provides six programmable keys. Key zero (‘0’) functions as the directory number key, and the five remaining keys are programmable for software feature access. The comes standard with on-hook dialing, message waiting LED, Hold/Release Keys, and independent volume/tone controls. The set also accepts the new Programmable Data Adapter and External Alerter Interface options. Both of these options require an external power source. M2008 Multi-line Telephone The Meridian M2008 digital set is equipped with eight keys which can be programmed for any combination of directory numbers or software features. The set comes standard with on-hook dialing, Message waiting LED, Hold/Release keys, and independent volume/tone control. The can also be equipped with an optional 2x24 alphanumeric LCD display, and it accepts the new Programmable Data Adapter and External Alerter Interface options. All add-on options require an external power source. M2616 Multi-Line Telephone The M2616 digital set has 16 programmable keys for any combination of directory number and software feature assignments. It also comes standard with on-hook dialing, message waiting LED, Hold/Release keys, independent volume control, and two-way handsfree capability. (Note that the handsfree function on the M2616 is unique in that it is software assignable.) Also, the M2616 accepts the new 2x24 alphanumeric LCD display module, accommodates up to two 22-key Meridian Key Expansion Modules, and can be configured with Programmable Data Adapter and External Alerter Interface. Secure Telephone The is a secure digital telephone, meeting the security requirement for Class-2 as described by TSG (Telephone Security Group) standards. The set has 16 keys which can be programmed for any combination of directory numbers or software features. It comes standard with on-hook dialing, message status LED, Hold/Release keys, and independent volume/tone can also be equipped with an optional 2x24 alphanumeric control. The LCD display, key expansion module, and it accepts the Programmable Data Adapter option. This set requires an external power source. Telephones There are two versions of the M22 set: M22 and 2. Optimized for ACD environments, these 16-key programmable multi-line dialing, message sets come standard with a 2x24 alphanumeric display, waiting LED, Hold/Release keys, independent volume control, and dual headset jacks, one of which can be user at the set level for ‘talk/listen’ only supervisor monitoring. and one PJ-327 jack to accommodate standard carbon headsets. For those applications requiring handset operation, the jacks on Model -1 have an interface option which provides the electrical properties required to use a DKS handset. The PJ-327 jack on Model-2 can accommodate a carbon handset. Product description 5-55 (continued) The sets also accommodate up to two, 22-key Meridian Key expansion Modules, and can be equipped with the Programmable Data Adapter and External Interface options. The Model-l set is loop powered for the Display option only. The Model-2 set requires an. external power source for all options. M2317 provides 11 programmable keys for any combination of features and directory numbers, 5 context sensitive softkeys, handsfree conversation alphanumeric display. Release and Hold capability and a 2 keys are color coded as are changeable key caps to distinguish lines from features. Large for each key provide a distinctive indication of call status and feature activation. A built-in speaker permits the user to leave the handset in place until the called party is on the line. Meridian M3000 Touchphone The M3000 Touchphone is a digital telephone which provides complete communications control by means of a unique touch-sensitive liquid crystal display. It provides access to the full complement of calling features to meet the demanding requirements of business decision-makers. The LCD screen indicates which features can be used at any given time and a feature “Explain” provides access to a built-in user guide. The Meridian Touchphone is equipped with a full list of standard features. Six lines can be configured as directory numbers, private lines, and intercoms. Handsfree with automatic answerback is built-in. A private Directory of over 100 names and numbers permits the dialing of voice, data, and intercom calls by simply touching a name on the LCD screen. Display Module The Display Module available as an option with the M2008, M2616 and is a 2 line by 24 character liquid crystal display by which can display the name and extension of callers from within the system or network. It simplifies feature use with interactive prompts and messages in either English or French. A second version of the 2x24 LCD display presents ACD screen information. The ACD Display Module can be added to the M2008, M2616, or sets for use in an ACD environment. (Note that this display comes standard on the Also, the ACD Display Module is available in six languages: English, French-European, French-Canadian, Dutch, Spanish, and German. 5-56 Product description Meridian Key Expansion Module The Meridian Key Expansion Module is a modular 22-key unit which connects and sets, providing access to 22 additional to the M2216, key/lamp pairs for access to directory numbers and/or software features. Each key has an associated LCD indicator for call status and feature activation information. A maximum of two Key Expansion Modules can be added per set. The module is connected electrically to the set via a ribbon connector, and mounts physically on the set’s footstand base. The footstand must be ordered separately and is available in two versions: Footstand-one accommodates a configuration (16 button set plus one key module) l l Footstand-two accommodates a 60-key configuration (16 button set plus two key modules) Programmable Data Adapter The Meridian Programmable Data Adapter (MPDA) is a new asynchronous M2616, data card which fits into a slot in the base of the and sets. Any ASCII terminal, PC, or Macintosh can then be directly connected to the telephone via the built-in RS232 interface. Data capability is provided by the MPDA, working in conjunction with the digital interface chip residing in the telephone. Data calls can be placed from the telephone keypad, via keyboard dialing, or using the ‘AT command’ dialing feature. Two primary enhancements of the new data adapter are the addition of Script file capability and enhanced ‘AT command’ support. Additional data features supported are: asynchronous transmission at 19,200 bps data call origination and termination via keyboard dialing, AT dialing, and keypad dialing. . Speed call capability Modem Pool calling External Alerter Interface The External Alerter Interface module provides a connection interface to standard remote alerting devices. Power Supply Board The Power Supply Board is a printed circuit board mounts inside volt wall-mount the telephone and receives its power from either a 1 transformer or closet power supply. the plug-in transformer is single winding, and is equipped with a 10 foot cord of 22AWG two-conductor stranded and twisted wire with a modular duplex adapter. l l l Product description Other Digital Telephones M2009 provides the benefits of multiple lines and feature flexibility with nine programmable keys. has a built-in handsfree capability and provides eleven feature keys which can be assigned in any combination of lines and features. The 12th key is the key. secretarial offers 18 keys for the additional lines and features required environments. typical Attendant Consoles The Ml250 and M2250 attendant consoles incorporate design improvements based Attendant Console, and are functionally compatible with the on the QCW4. The Ml250 is driven and powered by SL-1 line cards and is compatible with QCW4 console cabling schemes. The a digital version of the Ml250 with additional features and display options, is driven and powered by a digital line card and has a modified cabling scheme. 5-58 Product description Figure M2008 Modular Telephone Speaker ssage Waiting Function keys control key LCD indicators Main extension Product description 5-59 Figure 5-21 M2616 Modular Telephone Speaker Re lease key Message Waiting \ Function keys Microphone Volume' control key LCD indicators \ Main extension Figure 5-22 Modular Telephone Product description Power equipment AC power distribution The internal AC power system consists of the following main elements: Pedestal Power Distribution Unit . Module to Module Power Harness Module Power Distribution Unit (MPDU) AC Power Supplies l l The AC line cord enters the Pedestal and connects to a terminal block located in the PDU. From the terminal block, the AC voltage passes through a line filter and a main Column circuit breaker, which provides power to the four modules and the Blower Unit. The System Monitor runs off a small AC power supply in the PDU. The module to module harnesses distribute AC power to each module by means of which contain circuit breakers for safe operation and easy the maintenance. There are three different AC power supplies that provide power to the common equipment, peripheral equipment, and combined common/peripheral equipment modules. In addition, there is a ringing generator that provides AC ringing (and message waiting lamp voltages) when required for the peripheral equipment modules. There are no additional external power components required for AC-powered systems. Reserve power, if needed, is accomplished through the use of an external Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). DC power distribution The internal DC power system consists of the following main elements: Pedestal Power Distribution Unit . Module to Module Power Harness DC Power Converters l l The power cables enter the Pedestal and connect to an internal terminal block located beneath the PDU. From there, the DC voltage enters the PDU, which has five circuit breakers one for each module and one for the Blower Unit. The System Monitor runs off a small DC-DC converter in the PDU. The module to module harnesses distribute DC power directly to the converters in each module, which contain on/off switches for easy maintenance. Circuit breaker protection is provided in the Pedestal. Product description 5-61 (Continued) There are three different DC power converters that provide power to all of the common equipment, peripheral equipment, and combined common/peripheral equipment modules, as well as a ringing generator that provides AC ringing (and message waiting lamp voltages) when required for the peripheral equipment modules. AC Rectifiers The external portion of DC-powered systems is generally referred to as the “power plant”, and consists of the rectifiers and distribution equipment, as well as reserve batteries if required. 1, and 6 1, Northern Telecom offers a power For Meridian 1 System Options 2 plant based on the Rectifier, with an output capacity of 30A per up to 3 rectifiers are rectifier. For systems with power requirements of up to contained in a 4’6” open relay rack and are joined together with a wall-mount rectifier/battery connection and distribution box This configuration is generally adequate to power 2 full columns of 8 modules. For expansion, a second may be added, with up to 3 additional rectifiers in a 2nd rack. For System Option 71, as well as larger System Option 61 configurations, Northern offers the QCA 13 power plant based on the J Rectifier, with an output are contained in the prime cabinet capacity of 50A per rectifier. Up to 4 for a total of 200A. A supplemental power cabinet holds 4 additional rectifiers, and a 2nd supplemental cabinet holds 2 rectifiers, for a total of 10 rectifiers and a total QCA13 system capacity 500 A. Customer-provided power is an option for all Meridian 1 systems. The QBL12 Battery Distribution Box is connect a wide variety of power equipment to the system. In addition to serving as an interface point between the NT-supplied Meridian 1 and the customer-supplied power equipment, the wall-mounted QBL12 provides positive and negative for input rectifier connections and up to 24 fused 30A outputs to feed up to 12 columns of equipment, as well as monitoring and reporting capabilities. For more detailed information on the Meridian 1 power equipment and provisioning, see NTP 553-3001-152, Power Engineering. -- 5-62 Product description 6-1 Chapter 6: Meridian Data Services Contents Applications and connectivity Components and benefits Data Se -terminal connectivity Meridian Programmable Data Adapter (MPDA) Asynchronous Data Option for Meridian Digital Telephones (ADO) Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (EAILU) Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module (ASIM) High-Speed Data Module (HSDM) High-Speed Data Card/High Speed Data System Add-on Data Module (ADM) with Meridian Extension (A0345240) Data Services -host connectivity Add-on Data Module (ADM) 1 Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module (ASIM) High-Speed Data Module (HSDM) Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (EAILU) or High-Speed Data System High-Speed Data Card (HSDC) Multi-Channel Data System (MCDS) Integrated Services Digital Network-Applications Protocol IBM connectivity Personal Computer Interface Card (PCI) Coax Elimination and Switching System (CESS) Baluns Macintosh Connectivity Direct RS-422 connection Meridian SL laser printer software package Hayes Interbridge R-Server -Data Services Wide Area Networking High-Speed Data Module (HSDM) Modem pooling Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) QPC472 Primary Rate Access (PRA) Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) Strategic Alliances Program Apple Computer, Inc. Data General 6-2 6-2 6-4 6-5 6-7 6-9 6-l 1 6-14 6-15 6-17 6-19 6-21 6-21 6-21 6-22 6-22 6-23 6-25 6-27 6-29 6-30 6-32 6-35 6-37 6-38 6-40 6-41 6-41 6-42 6-42 6-43 6-46 6-48 6-51 6-52 6-52 6-55 Engineering Handbook 6-2 Meridian Data Services Digital Equipment Corporation Hewlett-Packard Company NCR Prime Computer, Inc. Unisys (Sperry) Wang Laboratories Inc. Data Services applications Regional Bank Network Banking industry application Eastern College Network University application defense contractor Aerospace industry application Computer industry application -workstation manufacturer Third party compatibility testing program Data products and product codes 6-57 6-59 6-61 6-63 6-65 6-67 6-69 6-69 . 6-71 6-73 6-75 6-76 6-78 Applications and connectivity The architecture of the Meridian 1 Private Branch Exchange was specifically developed to accommodate the rapidly expanding requirements for data as well as voice communications. Since its introduction, the SL-1 product line has evolved and improved to include a wide portfolio of data communications capabilities. Northern Telecom is serving today’s demands for data connectivity without causing its huge installed base of PBX systems to become obsolete. Old and new, all systems are able to take advantage of the full family of data product offerings. Flexibility Northern Telecom’s commitment to OPEN World (Open Protocol Enhanced Networks) ensures that customers will always be able to achieve maximum functionality and compatibility in data processing and data communications, especially in multi-vendor environments. A single terminal can access multiple hosts, networks, and applications. Meridian Data Services is a family of hardware and software products that attach personal computers, terminals, host computers, and other data communications devices to Northern Telecom’s Meridian Data Services products enable a PC or terminal device to communicate, through the Meridian 1, to printers, host computers and other computers, Local Area Networks resources via standard telephone wiring. -Included in this Chapter are all of the products from Services products that can help efficiently manage resources and allow for easier, faster and more convenient access to information. Components and benefits Meridian Data Services provides a comprehensive group of products that connect your data devices to the same telephone wiring you have installed for your Meridian Digital Telephones. In this manner, Data Services provides you with Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-3 multiple host access, direct connectivity, efficient resource management, port contention, increased distance, easier moves and changes, and improved data call handling. Meridian Data Services provide the following advantages. Multiple host access Meridian Data Services provides broad connectivity which allows users to access multiple networks, applications, and hosts from a single terminal. This eliminates the need for multiple terminals on a desk and redundant networks. Direct connectivity Meridian Data Services has the unique advantage of providing direct connections without the use of data modules for ASCII terminals, PCs, Macintosh computers, protocol converters, modems, X.25 and many different computers. The result is reduced costs. Efficient resource management There are tremendous advantages in using a single unified system for both voice and data communications. Perhaps the most obvious benefit is the inherent efficiency of managing resources as part of one system. Resources such as cabling, transmission lines, host computer ports, terminals, personal computers, and peripherals may be administered more intelligently within a single network and a single cabling arrangement. Meridian 1 call accounting functions can be used to optimize system performance and network management. Port contention Port contention means that many users may share scarce computer resources on an as-needed basis. This is especially important where many users do not need a dedicated computer connection. Port contention can be successfully implemented due to Meridian 1 convenience features such as port hunting, auto dial, and ring again. A single number can provide access to a hunt group of host ports. Traffic management functions of the Meridian 1 allow a precise allocation of resources, so that users can have the level of service they need, without having ports and connections which are idle most of the day. Increased distance -- Terminal and PC users can be located almost 2438.4 m (8000 (2.4 km (1 miles) end-to-end) from a host computer, eliminating RS-232 distance restrictions. Easier moves and changes As all Meridian 1 SL-1 data devices use standard telephone wiring, which is often already in place, installation and on-going moves and changes are less costly and are quickly accomplished. Engineering Handbook 6-4 Meridian Data Services Improved data call handling Many Meridian 1 voice calling features are applicable to data. For instance, port hunting, call forwarding, ring again and traffic statistics provide easier data calling and measurement. Data Services terminal connectivity Meridian 1 Data Services provides a comprehensive set of data connectivity options for terminal users. The customer may achieve the complete integration of voice and data communications with Meridian Digital Telephones. The options available are: Meridian Programmable Data Adapter (MPDA) Asynchronous Data Option (ADO) Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (EAILU) Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module (ASIM) High-Speed Data Module (HSDM) with Meridian Extension (A0345240) Each of these products provides a simple, economical connection to the Meridian the standard RJ-11 jack. Installing a data interface can be as simple as plugging in a telephone. Features For the terminal user, establishing a data connection through the Meridian 1 is analogous to making a voice call. Data calling allows many convenience features normally associated with voice calling, as well as other features which are unique to the Meridian 1. Keyboard dialing may be used to make data calls from asynchronous terminals, where the user enters the destination number from the terminal keyboard instead of using a telephone keypad. The Meridian 1 provides prompts and menu choices to simplify the call setup. Auto Dial allows one-step data calling to a frequently called destination. The user hits a single key and the predetermined number is automatically dialed. Speed Call provides abbreviated dialing (l-3 digits) to any of several destinations. Hot Line is similar to auto dial, except that the terminal connects to the host computer automatically when the terminal is turned on. This feature is especially useful for synchronous terminal users who desire a up connection. Hot Line may be configured with the High-Speed Data Module and the Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module. Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-5 is automatic speed adjustment between the terminal or host port and the Meridian 1. The carriage return sent by a user to the system to request access to Meridian Data Services is used by the Meridian. 1 to determine speed and parity of the terminal. Important data call processing features are also provided by the Meridian 1 software. Ring Again allows the user to queue for a busy port or service. As soon as a port is available, the user is alerted and the data call completed after a-one-key confirmation by the user. Data Port Hunting allows a Directory Number to be assigned to a group of data ports, so a data call will hunt to the first available port. Meridian Programmable Data Adapter (MPDA) The Meridian Modular Telephones provide a simple solution for voice and data communications. The MPDA is installed inside the digital telephone (at the factory or as a field upgrade). Digitized voice and asynchronous data are multiplexed at the telephone set and transmitted over a single twisted pair of wires to the Meridian 1. Asynchronous RS-232 The MPDA supports asynchronous terminals and all types of personal computers. It supports transmission speeds up to 19.2 Kbps; transmission speeds are automatically matched in the Meridian 1 by the feature. Integral to the digital set Residing in the base of the Meridian Modular Telephones, the MPDA takes up no additional space on the desktop. The MPDA may be installed into the digital set in the field, with no changes to wiring or to the line card. Supports M2006, M2008, M2616, and Operation The user may place data calls directly from the terminal keyboard. The Meridian 1 provides prompts and menu choices to simplify data calling, as well as the features of autodialing, speed calling and ring again. Personal computer users with the appropriate communications software can simplify data calling by creating automatic log-on script In its Hayes compatible the MPDA obeys the AT commands for dialing. Wiring The Meridian Modular Telephone requires only one twisted pair of wires to connect to the SL-1 (for both voice and data support). The Meridian Modular Telephone may be located up to 1066.8 m (3,500 from the Peripheral Equipment module of the Meridian 1. 6-6 Meridian Data Services An RS-232 cable is required to connect the asynchronous terminal or MS-DOS PC cable is to the MPDA; in order to connect a Macintosh, an RS-232 to DIN8 or required depending on the type of Macintosh computer. (See “Macintosh Connectivity” in this Chapter). Interface cards The Meridian Modular Telephone interfaces to the Integrated Services Digital Line Card The ISDLC supports 8 digital sets and resides in a PE Module of the Meridian 1. The Meridian Modular Telephone also the Digital Line Card which resides in the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module. Power Power is provided by a wall mount power supply. Figure 6-1 Meridian Programmable Data Adapter (MPDA) Macintosh 15.2 m (50 QPC723 Converter Synchronous Host Terminal MUX Meridian Data Services 6-7 Asynchronous Data Option for Meridian Digital Telephones (ADO) The Meridian M3000 Touchphone and Meridian M2000 Digital Telephones provide a simple solution for voice and data communications. The Asynchronous Data Option (ADO) is installed inside the digital telephone (at the factory or as a field upgrade). Digitized voice and asynchronous data are multiplexed at the telephone set and transmitted over a single twisted pair of wires to the Meridian 1. The ADO M2317, and telephones. Supports the Asynchronous RS-232 The Asynchronous Data Option supports asynchronous terminals and all types of personal computers. It supports transmission speeds up to 19.2 Kbps; transmission feature. speeds are automatically matched in the Meridian 1 by the Integral to the digital set Residing in the base of the M2000 or M3000 Series Digital Telephone Sets, the ADO takes up no additional space on the desktop. The Data Option may be installed into the digital set in the field, with no changes to wiring or to the line card. Operation The user may place data calls directly from the terminal keyboard. The Meridian 1 provides prompts and menu choices to simplify data calling, as well as the features of autodialing, speed calling and ring again. The M3000 Touchphone additionally has a touch sensitive LCD display, with a built-in directory which may be used to place data calls. Personal computer users with the appropriate communications software can simplify data calling by creating automatic log-on script files. In its Hayes compatible mode, the Asynchronous Data Option obeys the AT commands for dialing. Wiring The Digital Telephone requires only one twisted pair of wires to connect to the Meridian 1 (for both voice and data support). The Digital Telephone may be located up 1066.8 m (3,500 from the Peripheral Equipment module of the Meridian 1. An RS-232 cable is required to connect the asynchronous terminal or MS-DOS PC to the ADO; in order to connect a Macintosh, an RS-232 to DIN8 or DB9 cable is required depending on the type of Macintosh computer. (See “Macintosh Connectivity” in this Chapter). Interface cards The Digital Telephone Set interfaces to the Integrated Services Digital Line Card The ISDLC supports 8 digital sets and resides in a PE module. 6-8 Meridian Data Services Power Power is provided by a wall mount power supply (the M3000 already has the required power supply). Figure 6-2 Asynchronous Data Option (ADO) J-lost Connectivity Terminal Meridian 1 Host Synchronous Host ASCII Terminal Multiplexor Remote MUX Meridian Data Services 6-9 Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (EAILU) The Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (EAILU) is a simple, low-cost means of connecting ASCII data terminals, teleprinters, word processors, or personal computers to the Meridian 1. The EAILU is available in two versions: Male version (A0344336) Female version (A0344337) A single cable connects your asynchronous ASCII data terminal directly to a telephone jack. The EAILU provides a fully digital connection with no boxes, no bulky cables, and no electrical plugs since the EAILU obtains the necessary power from the terminal unit on pin 4 or 20. Simply plug one end of the EAILU into the standard RS-232 connector of an asynchronous terminal or MS-DOS PC. Then plug the other end into your telephone jack. Operation With your data terminal connected to the Meridian 1, your data calls now have convenience features like speed calling,. auto dialing, even the option of queueing on busy facilities such as computer ports and modem pools. All are accessed directly from your terminal keyboard by responding to simple menus and prompts. In addition to data terminals, the EAILU also provides an inexpensive means of bringing teleprinters, word processors, and personal computers into a Meridian 1 network. Asynchronous host connectivity The EAILU can also be used to achieve direct connections to host computers located up to 1219.2 m (4000 ft) from the switch. (Otherwise the RILC (QPC723) can be used for a direct RS-232 connection to asynchronous ports). When used for asynchronous host computer connections, the EAILU must be the enhanced version and must interface to E vintage (or higher) of the Asynchronous Interface Line Card (AILC, QPC430). Wiring Since the The EAILU is a compact EIA RS-232 to RS-422 cable line driver. EAILU communicates with the Meridian 1 through an RS-422 interface, your data can be located up to 1219.2 m (4,000 ft) away switch. The EAILU allows communication at speeds up to 19.2 Kbps. Direct connectivity The EAILU connects directly to the DTE RS-232 connector (DB-25) without the need for an extra data module. The are interconnected with two-pair wires (4 wires), and reside in the EPE Module. There is no need to use an RS-232 cable for the interconnection. 6-10 Meridian Data Services Interface cards The EAILU connects to the Asynchronous Interface Line Card on the Meridian 1. Four ports reside on The EAILU enables users of RS-232 Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) to operate in a full duplex mode through the AILC. The EAILU resides in (only) the EPE module of the Meridian 1. Power and connections The EAILU requires no local power supply. Connections: EAILU (A0344336 male version, A0344337 female version) for terminal and host connectivity up to 1219.2 m (4000 ft) from the Peripheral Equipment module RILC for direct RS-232 asynchronous host connectivity Multi Channel Data System (MCDS) for high density asynchronous host connectivity Figure 6-3 Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit Meridian 1 ASCII Terminal Meridian Data Services 6-11 Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module (ASIM) 1 The Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module is a stand-alone data module for RS-232 terminals which operate in either the asynchronous and synchronous modes. The ASIM may also be used to interface with a host computer which has RS-232 ports. Asynchronous or synchronous ASIM supports asynchronous speeds up to 19.2 Kbps and synchronous speeds up to 56 Kbps. Asynchronous /synchronous switch The unit has an easily accessible switch which allows the user to choose either asynchronous or synchronous operation. Physical The ASIM is a desk top unit with a dial keypad and feature keys. Operation Meridian 1 data call processing features such as Auto Dial, Speed Call, Ring Again are supported by keyboard dialing in asynchronous mode and by feature keys on the ASIM in synchronous mode. The ASIM may only interface to Data Terminal Equipment; it may not be used to interface to Data Communications Equipment (e.g. modems). Wiring The ASIM requires one twisted pair of wires and may be located up to 1219.2 m (4000 ft) from the Peripheral Equipment cabinet of the Meridian 1. A type telephone may also be attached to the voice jack. An 232 cable is required to connect the ASIM to the terminal. Virtual leased line capability The ASIM works with the Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) to provide Virtual leased line capability. Virtual leased line uses existing T-l facilities to provide the availability of leased data lines at a lower overall cost. When configured for virtual leased line mode (via two switches on the unit), the ASIM will, on detection of a drop in the connection, hotline continuously to re-establish the connection. For virtual leased line capability, use ASIM 1) vintage D or greater and DTI (QPC472) vintage C or later. Asynchronous host mode capability The ASIM has been enhanced to provide asynchronous host mode capability. This feature suppresses the sending of prompts and responses to an asynchronous host computer which is accessing the ASIM to place a data call. In effect, asynchronous host mode permits blind dialing by suppressing the prompts and responses normally 2 Meridian Data Services associated with keyboard dialing. This setting can be used when the host computer dialing is not any response until the far end answers. This feature is not applicable to dialing by synchronous host computers, since these computers require the use of the hotline feature or keypad dialing to place data calls. For asynchronous host mode capability, use ASIM vintage D or greater. Interface cards The ASIM interfaces to the in a PE module. Data Line Card which resides Power The ASIM is equipped with a AC input power supply. 220V AC and AC power supplies also available . Meridian Data Services 6-13 Figure 6-4 asynchronous applications Meridian 1 1219.2 m 4PDLC RS-232 Terminal Host QPC732 Line Card QPC452 I or q Sync Host Network QPC723 I --- with 2500 set Figure 6-5 synchronous virtual leased line applications Meridian 1 Meridian RS-232 QPC 3270 Terminals 472 1D Sync Host End Computer Processor Engineering Handbook 6-14 Meridian Data Services High-Speed Data Module (HSDM) (QMT21) The High-Speed Data Module (HSDM) is a data module to be used with data terminal equipment in a Northern Telecom High Speed (up to 56 Kbps) or ISDN (up to 64 Kbps) environment. The HSDM provides connectivity to the Meridian 1 for local communications, as well as for wide-area~communications over Primary Rate Interface or T-l links to other NT switches. The HSDM is capable of operating with other data modules using the Data Module to Data Module using the T-Link (DM-DM) protocol as well as with data units for the Version 2 protocol. High-speed transmission The High-Speed Data Module will support speeds up to 64 Kbps clear channel data transmission, giving a customer access to ISDN services. Since an ASIM can only communicate at speeds up to 56 Kbps using a customer needing ASIM functionality today but wanting V.35 capability or easy migration to an ISDN environment in the future would be interested in the High-Speed Data Module. and virtual leased line capability The High-Speed Data Module supports both RS-232 and V.35 interfaces. The virtual leased line capability allows customers to gain the benefits of private line service (dedicated access and high availability) while avoiding private line charges. For more information on virtual leased line capability, see HSDM Host Access in this Chapter. setting The HSDM includes a switch to indicate connection to a Meridian 1 Data Module or to a Meridian 1 SL-lOO/DMS-100 Data Unit. This switch is used to insure interworking in applications involving synchronous, half-duplex data transmission at speeds less than 56 Kbps. Physical The High-Speed Data Module is a desk top unit with a dial keypad and feature keys. The appearance of the HSDM to the 1 is similar to the Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module. Wiring A single twisted pair wire is needed for data applications. Additionally, an extra jack is provided for connection to a 2500 set. Interface cards The High-Speed Data Module connects to a port on the 4-Port Data Line Card which resides in a Peripheral Equipment module. Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-15 Power The HSDM is equipped with a AC input power supply. 220V AC and AC power supplies are also available . High-Speed Data Card/High Speed System The High Speed Data Card (HSDC) is the circuit board equivalent of two (2) High Speed Data Modules conveniently mounted together in a compact rack (the existing MCDS cabinet) with a common power supply which is referred to as a High Speed Data System (HSDS). This will save space and energy compared to individual enclosures. The High Speed Data System (HSDS) is aimed at providing high density connectivity to synchronous hosts but can also be used for asynchronous host connections. The HSDS consists of the following components: MCDS Shelf QSD27 MCDS Power MCDS Power QPC918 4portlinecard QPC432 MCDS Desk Cab QCA77 (optional) MCDS Rack Cab QCA76 (optional) Features The High Speed Data Card will provide identical features/functions as the High Speed Data Module. The essentials include: synchronous connectivity up to 64 Kbps asynchronous connectivity up to 19.2 Kbps RS232 or V.35 interface virtual leased line capability, which allows the HSDC to emulate lease-line operation Interface cards The High Speed Data System connects to a 4 port data line card (QPC432) which resides in the Peripheral Equipment. For technical specifications on the MCDS the “Host Connectivity in this Chapter. Multi Channel Data System, refer to Engineering Handbook 6-16 Meridian Data Services Figure 6-6 High-Speed Data Module applications SL-1 SL-1 Connections per Shelf One or Two Shelves per Rack Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6 - 1 7 Add-on Data Module (ADM) The QMT12 (V.35 interface) Add-on Data Module (ADM) may be co-located with the SL- 1 set to provide integrated voice and data communications for synchronous used as a stand-alone interface to host or asynchronous terminals. It can also computers, printers and modems. The QMT12 provides the V.35 interface and supports speeds up to 56 Kbps in the synchronous mode only. DTE or DCE The ADM is flexible in that it can interface to data terminal equipment (DTE) such as computers or terminals, and data communications equipment (DCE) such as modems and some host computer ports. A switch setting determines the functionality of the ADM. (The ASIM is recommended for DTE-only requirements). The ADM is recommended as the primary choice where a customer requires a synchronous Kbps, DCE link. Physical The Add-on Data Module is a desktop unit similar in style to the SL-1 set and other add-on units (such as the handsfree unit). The ADM includes a Data Speed Selector, a Data Option Switch (for choosing other parameters), and several indicator lamps. Operation The ADM can be set to the desired transmission rate by the user. In the ADM asynchronous mode, the terminal keyboard may be used for placing data calls, with the features of Auto Dialing, Speed Calling, and Ring Again. In the co-located or synchronous mode, the SL-1 telephone keypad is used to place data calls. Wiring In the co-located mode, the ADM requires only the existing two pair wiring of the SL-1 set to provide simultaneous voice and data communications. In the standalone mode, the ADM requires one pair. A V.35 cable is used to connect to the terminal, printer, host port, or modem (a switch must be set for use with a modem). The ADM may be located up to 1219.2 m (4000 ft) from the PE Module of the Meridian 1. Power The ADM has an internal power supply, which monitors the local AC power input derived through the 24 volt transformer (PO593922 or PO610756 ordered separately) from commercial 110 volts AC. Engineering Handbook 6-18 Meridian Data Services Interface cards A stand-alone ADM interfaces to the located in a PE module. Data Line Card (4PDLC) which is Figure 6-7 Add-on Data Module (ADM) Meridian 1 QPC723 Host Sync .I. SL-1 Set Plus ADM Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-19 EasyLAN with Meridian Extension (A0345240) EasyLAN with Meridian Extension is a low-cost local area network product for MS-DOS PCs in the office. EasyLAN with Meridian Extension allows users to share expensive peripherals such as laser printers, plotters, high-capacity hard disks and tape backup units by using twisted pair wiring and the Meridian 1. EasyLAN with Meridian Extension is a cost-effective solution for companies of any size wishing to share printers distributed among work groups or wishing to support file sharing within a work group. Set-up Any MS-DOS PC connected to the Meridian 1 can access the benefits of EasyLAN with Meridian Extension. Once the data connection is in place and EasyLAN with Meridian Extension software is installed, the end-user needs only to configure the software with the data extension numbers of the other PC users in the group and the port number of the remote PC’s physically attached printer. Key benefits A pop-up dialing menu works with most third-party application software packages to make remote file access and printing transparent to the user. Mnemonic dialing from the user’s directory simplifies access to computer resources. Users can assign names to computer resources (e.g., “bill”) so that they can more easily remember those resources. Users can then simply place a call to the named resource (“bill” for the PC with a laser printer attached) without knowing the data extension of that resource. EasyLAN with Meridian Extension requires only 20 Kbytes of Random Access Memory (RAM) per configured communications port. Since the program runs in background mode, EasyLAN with Meridian Extension can be running while the PC user is working with another application (e.g., spreadsheet). One or more print/disk servers can be configured and shared. These servers need not be dedicated; that is, they can be used for normal PC applications while acting as print/disk servers. Key points Each PC in the network needs its own numbered copy of EasyLAN with Meridian Extension software. The software is not copy-protected, so backup disks can be made, but a code-checking routine in the software prevents duplicate use of the same software diskettes on a network. An EasyLAN with Meridian Extension network can practically include up to 32 users, as that many names and associated data extensions can be configured. Theoretically, an EasyLAN with Meridian Extension network is limited only by the Engineering Handbook 6-20 Meridian Data Services number of data ports available on the Meridian 1. If the practical limit of 32 users seems small, bear in mind that the average number of users on a local area network in 1988 was six to ten. EasyLAN with Meridian Extension supports communications at speeds up to 19.2 Kbps to each PC. Figure 6-8 EasyLAN with Meridian Extension Meridian 1 MS-DOS PC ADM Server Resources MS-DOS PC Hard Printer Engineering Handbook 6-22 Meridian Data Services The ASIM may be conveniently switched between asynchronous and synchronous operation. The ASIM also supports Hotline and Auto-answer features using the telephone keypad. The Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module may only interface to a Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) port. If connection to Data Communication Equipment (DCE) (e.g. synchronous modem) is required, the stand-alone ADM should be used. For more information, see also “Data Services Terminal Connectivity” in this Chapter. Using an ASIM as well as the Digital Trunk Interface (DTI), customers can now set up virtual leased lines between Meridian 1 locations. This arrangement allows customers to gain the benefits of private line service (dedicated access and high availability) while avoiding private line charges. High-Speed Data Module (HSDM) QMT21 The High-Speed Data Module (HSDM) is used for both RS-232 and V.35 interface. It provides all of the functionality of the ASIM but adds the ability to run at speeds of 64 Kbps and to interface to V.35 ports. For more information, see also “Data Services Terminal Connectivity” in this Chapter. The High-Speed Data Module operates in a Northern Telecom ISDN environment the at speeds up to 64 Kbps. Combined with the Primary Rate Interface HSDM provides access to wide-area communications over T- 1 links to other Northern Telecom switches. The HSDM is compatible with units used and DPN-100 environments. within 100 and DMS-100, DMS-250, Along with the ASIM, the HSDM also provides virtual leased line capability. With the High-Speed the Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) or Primary Rate Interface Data Module automatically recovers when the line goes down by hotlining until the connection is re-established. Virtual leased line capability provides dedicated access and high data availability at line charges lower than private lines. Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (EAILU) The Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (EAILU) is a simple, low-cost means of connecting ASCII data terminals or PCs to the Meridian 1. The EAILU is available in two versions: Male version (A0344336) -Female version (A0344337) A single cable connects your asynchronous terminal directly to a modular phone jack. There are no boxes, bulky cables and no electrical plugs since the EAILU obtains its power from the terminal unit’s EIA pin 4 or 20. The EAILU allows speeds up to 19.2 Kbps. Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-23 The EAILU can also be used to provide direct asynchronous host connectivity up to 1219.2 m (4000 from the Meridian 1 Peripheral Equipment Module, without the use of data modules. The EAILU connects to the Asynchronous Interface Line Card on the Meridian 1. The AILC accommodates up to 4 ports. For more information, see also “Data Services Terminal Connectivity” in this Chapter. High-Speed Data Card (HSDC) (QPC918) or High-Speed Data System The High Speed Data Card (HSDC) provides RS232 V.35 Interface for high port density. It is the circuit board equivalent of two (2) High Speed Data Modules conveniently mounted together in a compact rack (the existing MCDS cabinet) with a common power supply which is referred to as a High Speed Data System (HSDS). This saves space and energy compared to individual enclosures. The High Speed Data System (HSDS) is aimed at providing high density connectivity to synchronous hosts but can also be used for asynchronous host connections. The HSDS consists of the following components: MCDS Shelf QSD27 MCDS Power MCDS Power 4 Port line card MCDS Desk Cab MCDS Rack Cab QPC432 Features The High Speed Data Card provides identical features/functions as the High Speed Data Module. The essentials include: synchronous connectivity up to 64 asynchronous connectivity up to 19.2 Kbps RS232 or V.35 interface virtual leased line capability which allows the HSDC to emulate lease-line operation Engineering Handbook 6-24 Meridian Data Services Interface cards The High Speed Data System connects to a 4 Port Data Line Card (QPC432) or the Data Line Card (QPC397). Both cards reside in the.Peripheral Equipment Module of the Meridian 1. For technical specifications on the MCDS Multi Channel Data System, refer to “Data Services Host Connectivity” in this Chapter. Figure 6-9 ADM, EAILU, HSDM, HSDS Terminal Connectivity Connectivity Meridian 1 RS-422 QPC430 4PDLC QPC432 Front Sync Host End Processor Controller P High Speed Data System 56 Kbps HSDM 327X Terminal IBM Cluster DTE Controller Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-25 Multi-Channel Data System (MCDS) The MCDS provides high density asynchronous host connections. It is an asynchronous rack mounted Add-on Data Module system that allows the efficient connection of multiple computer ports.- The MCDS consists of multiple Add-on Data Module equivalent circuit cards which are mounted together in a compact rack with a common power supply. This arrangement provides space savings, and a lower power requirement than with individual Asynchronous, Answer-Only The MCDS provides an asynchronous answer-only interface between multiport computers and the Data Line Cards. The host port cannot originate a data connection using the MCDS . Physical Configuration The MCDS consists of: Desk mount cabinet (QCA77) Rack mount cabinet (QCA76) Shelf (QSD27) MCDS Asynchronous Card (QPC397) Power supply (QSY27) Acting as an Add-on Data Module, each MCDS Asynchronous Card (MCDS-AC) is capable of connecting to 4 computer ports. Each MCDS shelf can accommodate up to 8 MCDS Asynchronous Cards, for a total of 32 ports. Each shelf requires one power supply. An MCDS in a rack-mount cabinet consists of a maximum of two shelves offering a total of 64 ports. The rack has additional room for optional diagnostic equipment. An MCDS in a desktop cabinet comprises one shelf with associated power supply; a total of 32 ports can be configured. Operation The MCDS is designed to operate without operator intervention. Each of its ports can operate independently of the other ports. Each of the sixty-four (64) ports can interface to different host computers operating at different speeds and with different data formats. If desired, all the ports can serve a computer. Wiring Each port of the MCDS is connected using one twisted pair, and the MCDS equipment can be located up to 12 19.2 m (4000 ft) from the PE Module of the connectors Meridian 1. Industry standard 25-pair telephone cables with are used to connect the MCDS to the Main Distribution Frame. RS-232 cables are used to connect the host ports to the MCDS. Engineering Handbook 6-26 Meridian Data Services Interface cards The MCDS interfaces to the 4-Port Data Line Card (4PDLC) which resides in a Peripheral Equipment Module of the Meridian 1. Note: If the customer does not require distances up to 1219.2 m (4000 ft) between the Peripheral Equipment (PE) Module and to the host ports (i.e. the PBX is in the same room as the host computer), the RILC may be a more cost effective alternative for asynchronous host connectivity. Figure 0 Multi-Channel Data System .. Terminal Connectivity Meridian 1 1 q QPC578 4PDLC QPC432 1219.2 m (4000 Macintosh 4PDLC QPC432 QPC430 MS-DOS PC 4PDLC QPC432 4PDLC QPC432 Shelves Engineering Handbook Up to 32 Port Connections per MCDS Shelf One or Two per Rack Meridian Data Services 6-27 Integrated Services Digital Network-Applications Protocol In today’s competitive business environment, success is dependent upon the intelligent application of voice and data communication services to meet strategic business objectives. provides integrated host computer and ISDN Applications Protocol PBX functionality. It is designed to give networks the capability to provide comprehensive solutions to complex business communications problems. ISDN Applications Protocol is a powerful link that brings together the call processing capability of the versatile Meridian 1 with the host computer ability to process vast amounts of information. Together, they combine to create highly efficient corporate communications networks. The intelligent link allows the Meridian 1 to receive messages from a host computer requesting various call processing functions and allows the Meridian 1 to return status messages to the computer that provide real-time information about the progress and status of requested actions. Consequently, now allows users, via their application program, to tie previously separate PBX and computer functions into a single, integrated process. Function is an RS-232 or RS-422 synchronous link, presently based on a Northern Telecom proprietary protocol. It operates at speeds up to 64 Kbps. The functions provided by include the following: Call processing Call status Incoming call notification, Directory number update Integrated messaging System maintenance and administration. ISDN-AP initial applications The following are initial applications being developed by Digital Equipment -Corporation: Telephone Support Center allows an incoming or outgoing call to be associated with a database resident on the VAX such as a customer history file or a telemarketing script. This service allows voice and data calls to be simultaneously and repeatedly transferred. Applications include telemarketing, operations and services, repair and dispatch centers. Directory Look-up and Automated Directory Dialing allows a user to scroll through a corporate or personal directory in a VAX database and place a call to anyone via a single keyboard entry. Engineering Handbook 6-28 Meridian Data Services Automatically Formatted E-Mail Message on Busy or No Answer automatically formats an Electronic-Mail message (To, From, Brief Message) when a voice call placed through the above application is not completed. allows users to forward personalized itinerary and message Message Center instructions to a centralized Message Center. Figure 6-11 Integrated Services Digital Network/Applications Protocol Meridian 1 Signalling Link Sending Command and Status Messages -Call Processing -Applications Messages -Terminal Status Indicators -Systems Maintenance Messages Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-29 IBM connectivity Northern Telecom continues to lead the way in providing switched and dedicated connectivity in IBM environments. Products available for connecting to IBM devices include the following: PC Interface Card for MS-DOS Personal Computer direct connection to the Meridian 1 Coax Elimination and Switching System (CESS) for VT-100 emulation, 3270 host access, and reduction of coaxial cable needs for 3270 terminals EasyLAN with Meridian Extension for cost effective printer and resource sharing among IBM PCs and clones for coax, and dual coax wiring reduction High-Speed Data Module for networking of cluster controllers and front end processors (See “Data Services Terminal Connectivity” and “Data Services Host Connectivity” in this Chapter) RS-232 Interface Line Card direct connection to third-party protocol converters for PC or asynchronous terminal access to IBM computers. (See “Data Line Cards” in this Chapter) Meridian Data Services provides flexible and cost-effective solutions to enhance IBM PC, 3270 terminal, and IBM host data communications. IBM personal computers may be connected to the Meridian 1 by three main methods: the Asynchronous Data Option (ADO) in a Northern Telecom M2000 or M3000 digital telephone the Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (EAILU) if an RS-232 port is provided the PC Interface Card that plugs into an expansion slot on the PC motherboard One may also use an ASIM which, like the EAILU, connects to the PC via the 232 serial port. The ADO, EAILU, and ASIM are discussed in “Data Services After the IBM PC is connected to the Meridian 1, the user can take advantage of the numerous circuit switched applications that the Meridian Data Network provides. For low-cost local area networking, Northern Telecom provides EasyLAN with Meridian Extension that gives MS-DOS PCs connected to the Meridian 1 the ability to share files and printers the two most prevalent uses of Engineering Handbook 6-30 Meridian Data Services In addition to being able to connect IBM PCs to the Meridian 1, a number of ways exist to connect different IBM terminals (see also “Data Services Terminal Connectivity” in this Chapter). This section focuses on coaxial cable reduction and replacement via twisted pair wiring. Twisted pair wiring is cost-effective and allows for easier moves and changes compared with coaxial cable. Host computers can be connected to the Meridian 1 in a number of ways including the new High-Speed Data Module that provides 64 Kbps clear channel synchronous transmission (see “Data Services Host Connectivity” section). Personal Computer Interface Card (PCI) The Personal Computer Interface Card (PCI) is a PC expansion card which installs directly inside an MS-DOS compatible personal computer, using any available expansion slot. The card is used to provide an RS-422 connection to the Meridian 1. If the PC has no slots available but is equipped with an RS-232 serial port, the EAILU can be used; alternately, the ASIM or ADO may also be used (see also “Data Services Terminal Connectivity” in this Chapter). Speeds The Card supports asynchronous speeds up to 19.2 Kbps. The card may be used to access asynchronous host computers, printers and other personal computers. The personal computer user may access an IBM host by making a data call through a Meridian l-compatible 3270 Protocol Converter or 3270 Emulator. Northern Telecom has found the Perle and Local Data protocol converters to be compatible with the and AILC. The RILC can also be connected to several other IBM protocol converters. (See “Third Party Compatibility Testing Program” in this Chapter). Communications software The requires a communications software package (such as Crosstalk XVI or Smartcom III). Such software allows the personal computer to emulate an ASCII terminal, so that the user can dial from the keyboard to make data calls. This software may also be used to transfer files between personal computers, or between a personal computer and a host computer. File transfer File transfer from PC to PC and from PC to Macintosh can be performed with either ASCII file transfer (using X-on/X-off flow control) or binary’transfer (using the protocol). Transmission speeds up to 19.2 Kbps are supported by the card (although the PC itself may be limited to 9600 bps). Operation Data calls are placed directly from the personal computer keyboard, allowing access to such features as Auto Dialing, Speed Calling, Ring Again, and Modem Pool Calling. Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-31 Communications software can simplify data calling by allowing the user to create automatic log-on script files. Wiring The PCI requires two twisted pairs, and may be located up to 1219.2 m (4000 ft) from the Meridian 1. One additional pair may be used to connect a Unity series type set. The card provides an extra telephone jack telephone or other for connecting the telephone set. Interface cards The interfaces directly to a port on the Asynchronous Interface Line Card (AILC). The AILC resides in a PE module of the Meridian 1. The telephone set card also requires a port on the appropriate line card. connected via the Table 6-1 connectivity to Meridian 1 IBM (Note 2) n o (Note 2) n o (Note 2) IBM Models 25 use listed dataconnection if the has communications port installed. The EAILU is recommended for best price-performance. Models equipment Note 3: and80 come with a serial (W-232) port installed as standard the PCI is not necessary. Either the EAILU or ADO is recommended instead. PC Interface Card is incompatible with the Model due to a change-in the UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter) used by this particular For more information, Sales and Marketing Bulletin 331-G, March 1988. Engineering Handbook 6-32 Meridian Data Services Coax Elimination and System The Coax Elimination and Switching System access IBM and hosts from a single 3270 terminal. It substantially eliminates the need for coaxial cable between IBM 3270 display terminals and IBM cluster controllers, replacing the coax with standard twisted pair wiring. IBM terminal users can have switched access to asynchronous and IBM hosts and to multiple controllers. The, controller ports can be shared by many additional users through port contention. V T 1 0 0 terminal emulation By using the Coax Elimination and Switching System (CESS), one gains access to the ASCII world from a 3270 terminal. Screen menus assist in the selection of ASCII or IBM mode and any desired call set up parameters. In ASCII mode, the IBM 3270 emulates a DEC VT 100 or VT52 terminal. Reduction of coaxial cabling The Coax Elimination and Switching System enhances the value of an IBM 3270 display terminal and minimizes installation and relocation expenses. By using Coax Interface Modules coaxial cabling can be replaced with standard twisted pair wiring. Standard twisted pair wiring provides flexibility and growth for your data network moves and changes are easier and less expensive to administer. Meridian 1 advantages The Meridian 1 switching capability enhances any data network. Port contention eliminates the requirement to have a dedicated controller port per terminal. In situations where terminals do not need dedicated access, multiple terminals may use the concentration functions of the Meridian 1 to share a smaller number of controller ports. The reduction in the number of ports required results in cost savings. Multiple controllers with different protocols The Multi-Channel Coax System (MCCS) can be connected to multiple cluster BSC). controllers using the same or different protocols (e.g., Operation The Coax Interface Module provides the Hotline feature, as well as keyboard dialing and Auto Dial directly from the terminal keyboard. -System configuration The Coax Elimination and Switching System consists of individual Coax Interface Modules for connection of terminals to the Meridian 1, and a Multi Channel Coax System (MCCS) for connection of cluster controllers to the Meridian 1. The MCCS consists of up to sixteen (16) Coax Interface Cards (CIC). Each CIC has two (2) ports, which means that the MCCS can accommodate a maximum of 32 ports. Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-33 Wiring (switched connection) The IBM 3270 terminal is connected to the CIM via coaxial cable. The CIM is connected to the Meridian 1 via one twisted pair of wires. Additional wire pairs may be used to support an SL-1 set or a standard telephone. The MCCS is connected to the cluster controller via coaxial cable. On the Meridian 1 side, the MCCS connects to the 4PDLC card via twisted pair telephone wiring. Non-switched connection The CIM can be directly connected to a cluster controller port to provide a switched connection between an IBM 3270 terminal and associated cluster controller. This configuration can be employed where there is a need to eliminate a substantial amount of coaxial cable used by terminals with no requirement for switched access to other computers. Inactivity timer The CIM includes an inactivity timer which will drop a terminal user’s connection through the SL-1 after a user-defined period of inactivity. This timer can be used to provide improved access to computer ports by disabling connections which are not being actively used. 112.6 km (70 miles) via RPE Using Remote Peripheral Equipment the IBM cluster controller may be located up to 12.6 km (70 miles) from its terminals. Refer to “Data Services Area Networking” section for more information on RPE. Interface cards The CIM and CIC connect to the 4-Port Data Line Card or to spare data ports on the Data Line Card. These cards reside on a Peripheral Equipment shelf of the Meridian 1. Note that the AC vintage or later of the Coax Interface Card is required for connection to Model 3174 cluster controllers. Terminals supported CESS supports the following IBM terminals and personal computers: 3191 (in 3278 emulation mode) 3178 -3278 (Models 2 through 5) 3279 (Without Program Symbols and Color Convergence), 3 179 (in 3279 emulation mode) 3 180 (in 3278 emulation mode) (in CUT mode, without file transfer or program symbols) IBM PC with IBM coax cards or with IRMA boards (operating in 3278 emulation mode, without file transfer or program symbols) Engineering Handbook 6-34 Meridian Data Services Figure 6-12 Coax Elimination and Switching System (CESS) Multi-Channel FEP Twisted Pair QPC723 CIM IBM Display +VTl 00 Terminal Emulation Engineering Handbook DEC Host Meridian Data Services 6-35 Baluns Baluns (which stands for balanced to unbalanced impedance matching devices) provide a connection via standard twisted pair wiring for many different terminals that otherwise need special cable. The Balun.products are a non-switched data offering. Baluns let you reduce cable requirements and provide easy terminal installation. Baluns free you from the burden and expense of installing and maintaining coax, dual coax, or cable throughout your facilities. You can use ordinary telephone wiring in your building to connect terminals directly to computers. The three different types of Baluns available are listed below. CTP-1 for IBM 3270 devices MVC02031 The CTP-1 Balun is used to connect any IBM 3270 Coax A Device, or any other manufacturers device that supports the same signal characteristics as the Coax A signal, to 24 AWG twisted pair wire. The Baluns are used in pairs. One of the pairs is connected to the terminal and the other is connected to the cluster controller. CTP-2 for IBM System Terminals (MVC02032) The Balun matches the impedance from twinaxial cable to twisted pair cable. This allows signals from any of IBM 536X or 538X System unit and connectable terminals and controllers to be transmitted over one pair of twisted pair cable instead of twinaxial cable. CTP-3 for Wang Office Products (MVC02033) The CTP-3 Balun for Wang systems provide a cost-effective alternative to standard dual coaxial cabling systems. Engineering Handbook 6-36 Meridian Data Services Figure Baluns 3 CTP-1 COAX BALUN TELEX HARRIS, LEE DATA, & MOHAWK DATA) CTP-2 BALUN 5251, OR 5291 TWISTED PAIR MEDIA 24 AWG 1097.3 m 22 AWG 1280.1 m 26 AWG 762 m (25003 CTP-3 DUAL COAX BALUN CTP-3 PAIR MEDIA Engineering Handbook 22 AWG 335.3 m (1 24 AWGz4.3 m (900’) IBM OR Meridian Data Services 6-37 Macintosh Connectivity Northern Telecom, a leader in Macintosh Connectivity, provides a number of solutions for integrating Apple Macintosh products into the circuit-switched data environment of the Meridian 1. With connected to the Meridian users can gain access to multiple host computers and to a wide area network of services provided via connected X.25 and modem pools. Using a A number of ways exist to connect Macintoshes to the Meridian 1. Meridian Modular Telephone equipped with an Asynchronous Data Option (ADO),or MPDA, a Macintosh can be connected to a Meridian network via an 232 to or DIN8 cable (See also “Data Services Terminal Connectivity” in this Chapter). In the absence of Northern Telecom digital telephones, a direct RS-422 cable can be used. The cable connects directly to the Meridian Asynchronous Interface Line Card and allows the Macintosh to be 1219.2 m (4000 ft) from the switch. Figure 6-14 Macintosh connectivity S-422 Direct Connect Meridian Macintosh LocalTalk I Network II I R-Server LocalTalk Meridian SL Laser Printer Software (Asynchronous LaserWriter) Network Multiplex LocalTalk MUX Network Engineering Handbook 6-38 Meridian Data Services Direct RS-422 connection Direct Macintosh connectivity: (A0326760) (A0326761) 1 (A0326762) (A0326763) The Macintosh (and asynchronous terminals which provide the RS-422 interface) can be connected directly to the Meridian 1 without the need for a data module. Both the Macintosh and LaserWriter printer may be connected directly to a port on the Asynchronous Interface Line Card providing a simple and inexpensive connection to the Meridian 1 Asynchronous transmission up to 19.2 Kbps is supported. The Macintosh may be used to access asynchronous hosts, IBM hosts (through third-party protocol converters), packet switching networks (through an X.25 PAD), modem pools and other personal computers. Communication software ASCII terminal emulation software such as MacTerminal must be used. The software used should provide the “long break” function (1.6 seconds) for disconnecting data calls. File transfer File transfer from Mac to Mac and from Macintosh to PC can be performed at speeds up to 19.2 Kbps, with either ASCII transfer (using X-on/X-off flow control) or binary transfer (using a protocol common to both computers, such as Xmodem). Operation The Macintosh user can take advantage of Meridian 1 data call processing features such as Auto Dial, Speed Calling and Ring Again. Data calls are placed using the Mac keyboard. Wiring Direct RS-422 connections require two twisted pair of wires, the the Meridian 1 . Macintosh computer to be located up to 1219.2 m (4000 The Macintosh Plus, SE and II have a DIN8 connector. Macintoshes older than the Macintosh Plus (including the Macintosh 512K) use a DB9 connector. Simple cable connection Meridian Data Services offers cables with DIN8 and DB9 connectors and which terminate in 1 connectors (for direct RS-422 connection) and DB25 connectors Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-39 (for connection to ADO or EAILU). Simply plug the appropriate cable into the Macintosh modem port, and plug the other end of the cable to an ADO or a wall jack to complete the data connection to the Meridian 1 . Interface card The Macintosh interfaces directly to the Asynchronous Interface Line Card (AILC). This card resides on a Peripheral Equipment module of the Meridian 1. Engineering Handbook 6-40 Meridian Data Services Meridian SL laser printer software package Macintoshes not connected to an AppleTalk network now have the ability to share a laser printer by using the Meridian SL laser printer software package. This software package provides laser printer sharing without-the need for a LAN. Using standard phone wire and the Meridian the installation is simple Features and benefits The Meridian SL laser printer software package provides the following advantages: Dial-up access from any Macintosh Standard queueing just like AppleTalk for the LaserWriter via Camp-On Distances up to 2438.4 m (8000 ft) At 19.2 Kbps printing times are nearly equal to AppleTalk. Printing time slows when a modem connection is employed Uses existing Meridian 1 phone wires Readily adapted for other families of modems and other communications equipment by using the included Asynchronous Connection Language facility Set-up Any number of Macintoshes connected to the Meridian 1 via Data Services equipment such as the Direct RS-422 cable can access a Meridian 1 -connected LaserWriter. The LaserWriter is connected to an Asynchronous Interface Line Card (AILC) on the SL-1 by an RS-422 Direct Connect cable. Once the software is setup, there is no appreciable difference between the usual way of printing and the Meridian SL Laser Printer software method, with the exception that the Macintosh does not need to be connected to an Apple talk network. The Macintosh can be located up to 2438.4 m (8000 ft) from the LaserWriter. Requirements One or more Apple Macintosh personal computers with a minimum of 5 12K memory Apple LaserWriter, LaserWriter Plus, LaserWriter II Meridian SL laser printer software package Macintosh Data Services connection RS-422 direct connect or Asynchronous data option/Meridian Programmable Data Adapter LaserWriter connection 1 cable Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-41 Hayes Interbridge AppleTalk is a superb local area network for small centralized groups (up to 32 users and 304.8 m (1000 ft)). To serve the needs of the entire organization, Hayes Interbridge, in conjunction with a Meridian 1, allows for the addition of users to the network at distances up to 2438.4 m (8000 ft), in different buildings, and on different floors. An integrated network Networks that can be reached by a Meridian 1 can be linked-together. Macintosh applications such as InBox (an electronic mail package) will be available to all users. File servers such as AppleShare and laser printers such as the LaserWriter can be accessed by all users across the bridge and through the Meridian 1. Each Interbridge can support the connection of two AppleTalk networks via software supplied with the Interbridge, working in conjunction with a connection to the Meridian 1 provided by an Asynchronous/ Synchronous Interface Module (ASIM) and associated line card port. With AppleTalk local area networks connected to the Meridian 1, each user will have access to multiple host computers and to a wide network of services via X.25 and modem pools also connected to the Meridian 1. R-Server Macintosh users can use the Meridian 1 to join an AppleTalk network on a dial-up basis, using the R-Server terminal server product from Electronics. software provided with the R-Server allows Macintosh users to dial (manually or automatically) through the Meridian 1 to connect to a local R-Server. Remote access (e.g. dial-up access from Mac at home) is also available via inbound modem pooling. The R-Server can connect to the Meridian 1 via the RILC or via the EAILU connected to the AILC. One limitation of R-Server access with the Meridian 1 is that queuing is not supported. For instance, if the R-Server being called is busy, the Mac user would have to re-try the connection at a later time. Despite this limitation, the R-Server is a powerful device for extending the benefits of AppleTalk to local and remote Mac users. Engineering Handbook 6-42 Meridian Data Services Data Services Wide Area Networking With the Meridian 1, you have access to a wide range of services from X.25 public and private networks to remote host computers and’terminals. The following are the various advantages of Data Services Wide Area Networking, High-Speed Data Module (HSDM) with virtual leased line capability offers cost effective data networking Modem pools provide access to a wide variety of services over analog telephone lines Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) extends the capabilities of the Meridian 1 to allow digital wide area voice and data services over T-l carrier communication links Primary Rate Access gives Meridian 1 users ISDN wide area networking features and benefits Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) provides the capability to connect a peripheral equipment shelf up to 12.6 km (70 miles) away from the Meridian 1 via T- 1 carrier facilities High-Speed Data Module (HSDM) QMT21 The High-Speed-Data Module (HSDM) provides all the functionality of the ASIM but adds the ability to support 64 Kbps data transmission for ISDN applications. Upgrading an HSDM from 56Kbps to 64 Kbps requires no change to the module or associated line card; a simple speed selector change is all that is required. The HSDM provides versatile functionality for present and future applications. Within a wide area network, the High-Speed Data Module can provide virtual leased line capability. The virtual leased line capability allows customers to gain the benefits of private line service (dedicated access and high availability) while avoiding private line charges. With the Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) or Primary Rate Interface the Speed Data Module automatically recovers the line when the line goes down by hotlining until the connection is re-established. For connection to V.35 DTE, the HSDM provides a more cost-effective solution than V.35 ADM (QMT12). For more information on HSDM, see also “Data Services Terminal Connectivity” and “Data Services Host Connectivity” in this Chapter. Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-43 Figure 6-15 High-Speed Data Module (HSDM) Meridian 1 Location A Meridian 1 Location B DTI or or64 Terminals Kbps for or PRA I Leased Line II 6 4 Kbps for FEP HOST Modem pooling Modems are required for data communication between remote devices over analog telephone lines. In the Meridian 1, a modem may be used as either a stand-alone modem or as part of a modem pool. Modem Pooling refers to dial-up modems configured in a group for data calling over analog trunks to remote computers (also equipped with modems). Modem pooling allows modems to be shared across all dial-up trunks (analog) as well as among all users. Since many users do not need a dedicated modem for time use, Modem pooling can provide considerable cost savings, while making modem communications available to many more users. The call accounting functions of the Meridian 1 can be used to monitor data calling activity and to better manage system facilities. Users can also take advantage of Meridian 1 features such as hunting and ring again. Substantial cost savings may be achieved by using Automatic Route Selection for outbound modem calls. Modem pools organized by modem type The Modem pools are organized according to modem type, modems of the same speed and transmission mode are placed together in the same pool. Several modem pools may be configured according to the customer’s requirements. Engineering Handbook telemanuals.com 6-44 Meridian Data Services Outbound/inbound modem pooling Outbound modem pools provide shared access to remote data environments for terminal and personal computer users. Inbound modem pools provide shared access and workstation users. Modem to Meridian 1 data services for remote pools can be configured in a variety of ways depending on the individual requirements. If “smart” modems are utilized with the RILC, inbound and outbound modem pools can be configured using the same modems, significantly reducing hardware requirements. Modem pools can also be configured separately. Placing a modem pool call The user places a remote data call by keyboard dialing to the modem pool DN (Directory Number) through the use of a communications software package. The Meridian 1 reserves a modem for the call, prompts the user for the telephone number of the far-end modem, and instructs the reserved modem to place the call. Modem pooling hardware, wiring and interface cards A number of different configurations exist for connecting a modem pool to the Meridian 1. A standard configuration is to set the smart modems up in both an inbound and outbound mode reducing the need for additional hardware. In this configuration, The RILC must be configured as an SL-1 set only. When the RILC is programmed as an SL-1 set, the 1 station hunting for the outbound modem access station hunting for the inbound should be in the opposite direction to the modem access. A standard way to connect modems to the Meridian -1 would be to connect the PBX to a Main Distribution Frame from which a patch panel or octopus cable can be These wiring schemes provide the high density cabling required for the modem pool configuration. (See diagrams). Engineering Handbook telemanuals.com telemanuals.com 6-46 Meridian Data Services Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) QPC471, QPC472 Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) extends the capabilities of the Meridian 1 to allow digital wide area voice and data service. The user with multiple locations can create a single all-digital network, by utilizing Digital Trunk Interface with T-l carrier communications links. Reduced costs with cleaner, faster transmission The primary benefit of DTI is to substantially reduce costs, but DTI also provides cleaner and much higher speed data transmission than is possible using analog trlmks. North American T-l In keeping with Northern Telecom commitment to OPEN WORLD, DTI uses the North American industry standard T-l interface, with the DS-1 signaling format. North American T-l carrier uses a 1.544 Mbps circuit, subdivided into 24 individual channels which can be used for either digital voice or data communications. 24 channels of 56 Kbps Each of these 24 channels can support synchronous transmission up to 56 Kbps or asynchronous transmission up to 19.2 Kbps. Voice or data transmission Each DTI link can be configured to carry all voice, all data, or a mixture of voice and data. Each channel may also be programmed independently for various digital trunk configurations (CO trunks, FX trunks, etc.). Systems supported DTI can be used to communicate voice and data between Meridian 1 systems . DTI can also be used to connect the Meridian 1 to any PBX or Central Office with a suitable T- 1 interface. System requirements The software associated with DTI must be Generic Xl 1 Release 5 or later and must Interface). include software option 75 Hardware configuration DTI consists of two circuit packs: Clock Controller (maximum 2 per system) Digital Trunk or Primary Rate Interface -- Interface The DTI circuit pack uses 2 card slots and is typically located on a Network Shelf. The clock controller is located on the network module of the Meridian 1 System 1 and on the CPU module of the Meridian 1 System option 7 1. The option 5 Engineering Handbook telemanuals.com Meridian Data Services 6-47 standard configuration with a full network group contains two clock controllers for redundancy. The Meridian 1 System option 5 1 (half network group) requires only one clock controller. Wiring Voice and data transmission through DTI circuit pack leaves the Meridian 1 via two twisted pairs of wires. These wires may be directly connected to all available T-l facilities, including cable, microwave, fiber optics, infrared, or satellite links. If DTI is to be connected to a cable T-l facility provided by the local telephone company, a Channel Service Unit may be required. Figure 6-18 Digital Trunk Interface SET Macintosh I I II PC with PCI PC with P C I ASCII CHANNEL BANKS OR T-l INTERFACE Engineering Handbook telemanuals.com 6-48 Meridian Data Services Primary Rate Access (PRA) Meridian ISDN Primary Rate Access stimulates development of new applications that fully utilize ISDN networking services. With added capabilities such as integrated voice and data, network-wide feature transparency, and interworking with host computer databases, ISDN PRA provides a platform for innovative networking services. The following feature rich enhancements enable advanced applications that provide the opportunity to substantially improve worker productivity: conducting simultaneous voice and data teleconferencing activating Ring Again or Call Forwarding across a network notification of a calling party’s identity improving telemarketing and order entry by automatically linking the calling party’s number to a file in a host computer database centralizing message services or call detail recording for many locations ISDN can be added to your Meridian 1 with the simple addition of two circuit packs and selected software options. Primary Rate Interface (PRI) (QPC720) The Primary Rate Interface circuit pack is a new line card that provides a Mbps 24 channel digital link from the Meridian 1 to public and private 1 networks. The PRI allows twenty-four 64 Kbps clear channels, including a 64 Kbps out-of-band signaling channel It can also be configured to support T- 1 facility access, including Extended Super Frame. D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI) (QPC757) The D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI) is a new line card that processes ISDN signaling information on the out-of-band signaling channel for basic call connection services such as call set-up, tear down, and feature activation. It implements the defined ISDN LAP-D link layer protocols. The DCHI also provides a single asynchronous Serial Data Interface (SDI) port. Xl 1 Release 13 software Xl 1 Release 13 software (and later versions) contains the instructions for interpreting Q.931 signaling on the D-channel. 4.931 is the signaling protocol recommended by the CCITT for ISDN Primary Rate Access. It-acts in unison with the DCHI card to switch and route data between devices. Meridian 1 software features Meridian 1 software options 117, 118, 145149 are the feature packages which provide user access to enhanced ISDN services (basic call connection features, network calling services, enhanced trunking, and integrated voice and data). Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-49 Enhanced data networking One of the best inherent benefits that ISDN brings to our customers is an all-digital end to end network. Hence, the Meridian network provides customers with completely digital transmission, high speed private data line replacement, less complex and lower-cost data connectivity, and enhanced wide area networking. Customers will also be able to take advantage of the high speed all digital network for their other data communications requirements, such as coax elimination, 3270 access, X.25 network access, PC to PC networking, and PC to host communication. Figure 6-19 Primary Rate Access (PRA) Meridian 1 Location A 128 Kbps Meridian Location II HSDM Facsimr Clear on each channel Leased Line Replacement Cluster I 3x78 Controller Terminals C I C DI Engineering Handbook 6-50 Meridian Data Services Figure 6-20 Adding to Meridian 1 Meridian 1 Exchange . Exchange Legend: Primary Rate Interface (QPC720) X.1 1 Release 13 software or later version feature options Q.931 software implementation D-Channel Handler Interface (QPC757) Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-51 Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) Remote Peripheral Equipment provides the capability to connect a module (or modules) up to 12.6 km (70 miles) away from the Meridian 1 via T-l carrier facilities. To the Meridian 1, the Remote Peripheral Equipment appears as any other PE Module. The data terminals, data modules and telephones connected via locally to the Meridian 1. the RPE shelf appear to be Two T-l carrier links Two T-l carrier links are required to connect each RPE to the assigned network loop of the Meridian 1. 712.6 km (70 miles) maximum RPE may be located up to 12.6 km (70 miles) from the Meridian 1. RPE carrier shelves at both ends Both a local RPE carrier shelf (at the main Meridian 1 location) and a remote RPE carrier shelf (at the remote facility) are required to accomplish RPE connectivity. Figure 6-21 Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) Host Terminal Connectivity Connectivity Meridian Remote PE Cabinet I II ... Local Carrier Shelf 15.2 m 1 Converter QPC723 Leased-Line Multiplexor MUX Engineering Handbook 6-52 Meridian Data Services Strategic Alliances Program Customers demand that the information industry connect equipment from various suppliers to provide applications in a multi-vendor;multi-media environment. Customers want to have the ability to handle any form of information voice, data, text, graphics and image. Northern Telecom initiated the Strategic Alliances Program in 1982 to encourage close working relationships with leading computer vendors. Northern has developed and maintained these partnerships to jointly deliver benefits to customers by serving their needs for innovative integrated information systems involving many types of equipment, from multiple vendors. As a part of its efforts, Northern Telecom Strategic Alliances Program conducts ongoing connectivity testing with its partners. Northern Telecom connectivity testing program is designed to provide with a wide range of tested, effective connections for a variety of applications. By providing compatibility with multiple computer and connectivity products, the Meridian 1 can accommodate new requirements in a cost-effective manner. Apple Computer, Inc. Apple Computer is one of the largest manufacturers of personal computer workstations. Featuring a broad range of configurations and applications, and great ease of use, Apple Macintosh family of 32-bit computers has been embraced by business and education. Through a cooperative working agreement, Northern Telecom and Apple Computer are committed to the testing and integration of Macintosh technology with the Meridian 1. The Macintosh has access to MS-DOS or other Macintosh personal computers (both standalone and networked) for data exchange and file transfer. In addition, the Macintosh connects to asynchronous host computers, modem pools, IBM hosts via protocol converters and to X.25 gateways, all through the Meridian 1. In an asynchronous environment, speeds up to 19.2 Kbps are supported; in a synchronous environment, speeds up to 64 Kbps may be attained. Northern Telecom Memory Systems Division offers Memorybank, a hard disk subsystem with SCSI interface to Macintosh. With storage capacity up to five Gigabytes, Memorybank is ideal for Local Area Networks. interconnected via the Meridian 1 (see “Macintosh Connectivity” in this Chapter) can use the Memorybank system as a file or disk server. Meridian 1 SL- 100 and DMS- 100 switches also support Macintosh connectivity via and Meridian Data Services product lines respectively. the Supported configurations Macintosh Macintosh Plus, Macintosh SE, Macintosh II and any other models which have built-in RS-422 connections are supported. Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-53 Apple LaserWriter and Apple LaserWriter II printers may also be connected. Meridian SL Laser Printer Software provides for an unlimited number of Macintosh users connected to the Meridian 1 to dial and print to Apple LaserWriter printers attached to the switch locally, via RPE, or cross-country without the need to use an AppleTalk connection or bridge. The LaserWriter connected to the Meridian 1 is selected via the Macintosh Chooser and is used by executing the standard Macintosh PRINT command from any application program. Data modules Macintosh Computers (RS-422) may be connected directly to the AILC card; through Digital Telephones with an ADO, or Modular Telephones with an MPDA. AppleTalk may be bridged via the Hayes Interbridge and the ASIM or HSDM. Macintoshes can dial into an AppleTalk network via a R-Server connected to the RILC. Apple are connected via the EAILU or a direct RS-422 connection. Engineering Handbook 6-54 Meridian Data Services Figure 6-22 Apple Computer, Inc. QPC430 QPC578 RS-232 LaserWriter II I q II Haves QPC432 q or I Leased-Line ì ì ì ì I I MUX Trunks Meridian SL Laser Printer Software (Asynchronous LaserWriter) Engineering Handbook I I Meridian Data Services Data General Northern Telecom and Data General Corporation have completed a program of connectivity and compatibility testing. This program covers Data General major terminal families connected through the. Meridian 1 to Data General MV family of processors. Data General has developed an interface to Northern Telecom Computer to PBX interface (CPI). The 24 channels of CPI each support up to 19.2 Kbps asynchronous communications between Data General Dasher terminalsand DG hosts. The eliminates 24 individual port connections, 6 MCDS Cards (or 24 as well as the individual cabling that would be required to connect to the Meridian 1. A direct connection from the DG RS-422 terminal to the Meridian 1 is available, but this configuration requires expensive shielded wire. With or unshielded twisted pair may be used to provide more cost-effective connections. Supported configurations Data General host models ECLIPSE and 40000 are supported. Data General Dasher D46 1 and D4 11, D210 and D214 are also supported. Models 8, and terminal models D220, D410, are supported. Data General RS-232 terminals All applications on Data General MV series products including CEO (Data General Comprehensive Electronic Office software) are supported. Data General product model number is 4398. Model 4398 is supported under Revision 6.0 or later of Data General’s Advanced Operating System/Virtual Storage Note: The and do not support CPI. Data modules Data General Dasher terminals can be connected to the Meridian 1 via the ADO, ASIM, HSDM, or EAILU. -If the customer has too few data connections to require CPI, then the host can also EAILU, ASIM, HSDM, or MCDS. be connected to the Meridian 1 via the Engineering Handbook 6-56 Meridian Data Services Figure 6-23 Data General Meridian 1 QPC 723 4PDLC QPC 432 E t - 4PDLC QPC 432 r MCDS DG MV Host 1 q QPC 723 q PO QPC452. DG Terminal Modem DG Host Dasher DTI QPC 472 MV Host 4000 8000 -10000 Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-57 Digital Equipment Corporation Northern Telecom and Digital Equipment Corporation have completed a significant amount of product integration and testing. The result is a cost-effective and simplified terminal to host connectivity through the Meridian 1. To connect the Meridian 1 to the VAX, Northern Telecom recommends using the The RILC allows cost-effective connectivity RS-232 Interface Line Card to the VAX by eliminating the need for the ASIM, HSDM and MCDS. The RILC may be connected directly to the VAX Host or may be connected through DEC 200 or 500). Ethernet Terminal Servers Although the RILC eliminates the need for the ASIM, HSDM and MCDS, these modules may still be used for Meridian l/VAX connectivity. The ASIM and HSDM may be required if asynchronous host mode capability is required (see “Data Services Terminal Connectivity” in this Chapter). Supported configurations VAX hosts supported: VAX Series and 1 1 1 VAX Series 1 2000 Digital terminals, PCs and terminal servers supported: VT220, VT 340 II and III, Rainbow 100, Professional 300 and Series, DECServer 200 and 500 Data modules DEC terminals may be connected to the Meridian 1 using ASIM, HSDM, EAILU, or ADO. The DEC hosts may be connected via the RILC, EAILU, ASIM, HSDM, or MCDS. Engineering Handbook 6-58 Meridian Data Services Figure 6-24 Digital Equipment Corporation Meridian 1 QPC432 VT 100,220 with ADO or 340 MCDS VT 100,220 or 340 q RS-232 q 4PDLC QPC432 QPC723 DEC Server 200 or 500 Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-59 Hewlett-Packard Company As a part of Northern Telecom Strategic Alliance with Hewlett-Packard (HP), a series of new connectivity tests between the Meridian 1 and HP Series 925 and 950 computers has been successfully conducted. The HP 3000 Series 900 is the latest addition to HP broad family of compatible business computing systems. The HP Series 925 and 950 are based on HP Precision Architecture and are compatible with the entire HP 3000 family. Tested connections between the Meridian 1 and HP Series 925 and 950 computers involve Northern Telecom RS-232 Interface Line Card and Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (EAILU) and HP new Distributed Terminal Controller (DTC). The RILC provides direct interface to HP DTC, thereby eliminating the need for additional data modules. This interface reduces connection costs while improving resource sharing, The DTC connects asynchronous terminals and serial printers to the 900 Series systems. For a direct, low cost connection of an HP 3000 computer to the Meridian 1, HP has developed the Advanced Terminal Processor (ATP) for the Meridian 1. When used with a breakout box, the ATP for the Meridian 1 will allow the HP 3000 to be connected directly to the AILC. HP standard ATP or Asynchronous Data Communications Controller (ADCC) may be used to interface the HP 3000 to the Meridian 1 via the EAILU or MCDS. These connections expand options for joint users of Meridian 1 Systems and HP 3000 systems who wish to lower costs, improve resource sharing and protect their investments in communication systems. Supported configurations Host: With DTC, HP Series 925 and 950 with operating system 1.1 or higher With ATP, HP 3000 Series 39,4X, 58,6X or 70 Series 37 is not supported With ADCC, HP 3000, Series and 44 PCs: HP 150 A, HP 150 CS, Vectra ES, Vectra Terminals: 239x Series, Printers: 256x, 293x HP 150 Portable Plus, Vectra Portable CS II, Vectra, Vectra Series -- Data modules HP PCs and terminals may be connected to the Meridian 1 by using the EAILU, ADO, ASIM, or HSDM. The HP printers may be connected to the Meridian 1 by using the ASIM or HSDM for HP host printing. The HP Laser Jet must be able to recognize Forced Data Terminal Ready Engineering Handbook 6-60 Meridian Data Services The HP host may be connected to the Meridian 1 by using the RILC, EAILU, ASIM, HSDM, or MCDS. Figure 6-25 Hewlett Packard Company Meridian 1 EAILU MCDS Printer AIL q QPC430 q HP 3000 q Digital Set ADO 925 and 95 QPC578 Breakout Box HP 3000 Series 39, n 70 HSDM MCDS Engineering Handbook ADCC: HP 3000 Series 40, 44 ATP: HP3000 4X,58, 6X, 70 Meridian Data Services NCR Northern Telecom and NCR have completed joint connectivity testing of the Tower XP and NCR PC with the Meridian 1. NCR card. An NCR PC or an IBM PC may be connected to the Meridian 1 via the VT102 terminals may also be connected via an ADO or EAILU. The NCR Tower XP may be connected to the Meridian 1 via an ASIM, HSDM, or an EAILU. These connections support access to modem pools, host computers, terminals, and X.25 PAD S . File transfer from IBM PC to NCR Tower and file access to NCR (both via PC based communication software) are also supported. Tower Supported configurations Host: NCR Tower XP PCs and Terminals: NCR PC, VT102, IBM PC Data modules NCR PC and IBM PC may be connected via the Terminals connect via an EAILU. card, EAILU, or ADO. VT102 The NCR Tower may be connected to an RILC, EAILU, ASIM, or HSDM. Engineering Handbook 6-62 Meridian Data Services Figure 6-26 NCR Meridian 1 RS232 VT1 02 I NCR Tower XP QPC 512 QPC430 IBM PC HOST NCR PC Engineering Handbook NCR Tower XP Meridian Data Services 6-63 Prime Computer, Inc. Northern Telecom and Prime have completed connectivity and compatibility testing to further expand the data connectivity options available to Meridian 1 customers. Northern Telecom RILC may be used to connect the Meridian 1 to Prime Series 50 host computers equipped with an appropriate controller without any additional data modules. An MCDS or ASIM (Vintage C or later) may also be used. terminals may be connected to the Meridian via an EAILU, or Prime ASIM. Although speeds of up to 19.2 Kbps may be achieved, 9.6 Kbps is recommended by Prime for error-free transmission. An IBM PC/AT may be connected via the card with software. Speeds up to 19.2 Kbps are supported in this configuration. 3278 terminals with VT-100 emulation may be connected via the CIM to carry data at 9.6 Kbps. Prime LQP3185 Printer may be connected to the Meridian 1 via an ASIM at speeds up to 9.6 Kbps. Supported configurations Host: Prime 50 Series, Models 6550 with PRIMOS Operating System 20.2.2 or later. Prime Controllers: 1 CS3, PCs and terminals: IBM PC/AT, 3278 with VT-100 Emulation Printers: LQP3 185 Software: PRIMOS, ED, EMACS Data modules Prime 50 Series host computers may be connected to the Meridian 1 using the RILC, ASIM, HSDM, or MCDS. computer may be interfaced to the Meridian 1 via the EAILU, ASIM, Prime or the HSDM. PCs may be connected via the card with software. 3278 terminal access (via VT-100 emulation) requires the CIM. Prime LQP3185 printer may be connected using an ASIM. Engineering Handbook 6-64 Meridian Data Services Figure 6-27 Prime Computer, Inc. Meridian 1 4PDLC QPC 432 or HSDM IBM PC/AT 4PDLC 50 Series I’ 3270 Terminal CIM Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-65 Unisys (Sperry) Northern Telecom and Unisys have completed connectivity testing which demonstrates the Meridian 1 capability to interconnect Sperry UTS 4000 terminals. This configuration will provide low cost, switched access to Sperry 1100 Series mainframes. The UTS 4000 product line consists of five terminals: the UTS 10 (asynchronous), UTS and 60 (all synchronous). UTS 10 terminals may be interfaced to the SL- 1 via an EAILU while UTS and 60 may be interfaced, using an ASIM. In addition, a Sperry PC, UTS 30 or Model 30 Desk Station equipped with chip may be connected directly to the Meridian the Line Interface Circuit Sperry PCs may also be connected with a card attached directly to the AILC. Sperry terminals access 1100 Series mainframes by contending for branch ports on the Sperry terminal multiplexer (T-MUX) which is connected to a Distributed Communications Processor (DCP). Supported configurations Host: Sperry 1100 Mainframe Terminals: Sperry UTS series, Sperry PC File Servers: DOPS 10 and DOPS 20 Data modules The Mainframe may be connected to the Meridian 1 via an ASIM. The UTS Terminals may be connected to the Meridian 1 by using an ASIM. Sperry PCs may be interfaced with the Meridian 1 using an RILC, PCI, or an EAILU. Engineering Handbook 6-66 Meridian Data Services Figure 6-28 Unisys Meridian 1 Series 1100 U DCP I or Sperry P C H & l QPC 430 QPC 723 512 Asynchronous Sperry PC Sperry PC 4PDLC QPC 432 4PDLC 432 DOPS 1 0 20 Sperry PC, UTS 30 or Model 30 with LIC interface Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-67 Wang Laboratories Inc. Northern Telecom and Wang Laboratories Inc. have completed joint connectivity testing of Wang equipment with the Meridian 1. Connections between the Meridian 1 and the Wang VS have been improved by the use of Northern Telecom RILC and Wang Asynchronous Controller products. The Asynchronous Controllers allow Wang and non-Wang asynchronous terminals and printers to use integrated Information Processing, Professional Application Environment (PACE) and Wang OFFICE applications, at speeds of up to 19,200 bits per second. The RILC provides direct connections to these controllers, eliminating the need for additional data modules and reducing connection costs while improving resource sharing. Wang Asynchronous Communications Sub-system (WACS) was developed by Wang and comes with 16 or 32 ports. A WACS model exists for any VS family. which Wang also has an 8 port Enhanced Asynchronous Device Controller provides the same connectivity and speeds to workstations and printers as the 6, 15, 65 and 75E WACS units. The EADC is available for the VS systems. There is also a single port version of the EADC which may be used when only a few terminals need a shared connection to the Wang VS. The single port EADC may be directly connected to the RILC; it is connected to the VS via a Wang dual coaxial cable. Supported configurations Hosts: VS family including VS 6, and 7000 Terminals: Wang Asynchronous VS terminal, Wang PC or IBM PC with Wang 2110A or VT-100 emulation, DEC VT-100, VT- 102 and VT-220 terminals and most ANSI X3.64 compatible asynchronous terminals Printers: PM015 40 cps Daisy Printers, PM019 Color Matrix Printers, PM017 400 cps Printers Applications supported: VS DP, OFFICE, PACE, VS Word Processing, Word Processing Plus (WP PLUS) Data modules Terminals may be connected to the Meridian 1 via the ASIM or EAILU. PCs may be connected via terminal products such as an EAILU or. (if no serial port is card. available) the Host computers may be connected to the Meridian 1 (via appropriate Wang Controllers) by using an ASIM, HSDM, or the RILC. Engineering Handbook 6-68 Meridian Data Services Figure 6-29 Wang Laboratories, Inc. Meridian 1 with 587 QPC q 723 D- - QPC q 723 WACS (16 or 32 ports) I VS-EADC-1 4PDLC QPC432 HSDM Engineering Handbook u Local Terminal Port Meridian Data Services 6-69 Data Services applications Meridian Data Services provides connectivity solutions for many industries, from banking to the education market. Using Meridian Data Services, Northern Telecom customers gain direct connectivity, multiple host access, and port contention features that can assist in efficient use and management of a data network. The following examples demonstrate just some of the innovative data applications that are possible using the Meridian 1 and Meridian Data Services. Banking industry application Regional Bank Network One Northern Telecom customer, a regional bank holding company, is installing an advanced private voice and data network that will use more than 100 Meridian 1 system to interconnect branch offices with the banks data center. The data network will connect IBM PCs, teller terminals, alarm devices, and Automated Teller Machines at branch locations to an RS-232 bridge. The bridge will connect to the High-Speed Data Module, which will in turn be connected to a Meridian 1 System option 21. Small branches will be connected to a main branch facility in the area using T-l. In turn, these larger branches will be connected to the headquarters location through the use of a T-l Multiplexor. The High-Speed Data Module is connected to a line card on a Meridian 1 which is connected to other Meridian via Digital Interface (DTI) and T-l links. The High-Speed Data Module and the line card will operate at 56 Kbps and accommodate IBM System Network Architecture (SNA) protocols. The High-Speed Data Module is also capable of operating at 64 Kbps and when line card will permit 64Kbps combined with the ISDN Primary Rate Interface data transmission across the network. The HSDM allows for advanced functionality today with the added capability for upward migration to an ISDN platform in the future. Engineering Handbook 6-70 Meridian Data Services Figure 6-30 Regional Bank Network Meridian 1 Option 21 LOCAL Meridian 1 Option 71 Head 1 21 r Terminals eridian 1 Option 21 Devices I Voice Applications eridian 1 Option 71 ATM Machines IBM 3725 HOST FEP PC) Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services University application 6-71 Eastern College Network At a leading Northeastern college progressive philosophy in preparing young people for contemporary life is evident from the extensive use of a variety of data processing equipment throughout the college. Voice and data communications are provided by a Northern Telecom SL- 1. Computing power for the college is provided by Digital VAX computers, an IBM 3090, and about 1000 Macintosh and MS-DOS personal computers. Using Meridian Data Services, all of these systems have been tied together in a broad and varied data network allowing almost every course at the college to involve a computer in some way. The SL-1 provides switched access to a variety of computing resources; some examples are provided below. Business learning lab Many Macintosh systems are used to access business simulations located on a host computer.. Macintoshes are connected to the host through the SL- 1, eliminating the need for modems and point-to-point dedicated connections through existing wiring and direct RS-422 connections. Faculty and administrative staff both need to access student records, student work, and business information on computers in several locations. The SL- 1 provides switched access to specific hosts located on campus. Computer workstations anywhere on campus can reach the hosts by simply entering the appropriate phone number. Meridian Data Services reduces the number of DEC VAX host ports and dedicated terminals that are needed through use of the MCDS and port contention and features such as Hotline and Ring Again. For the same reason, a smaller number of protocol converters are needed for access to IBM mainframes. Meridian SL Laser Printer Software automatically connects a Macintosh to any local or remote LaserWriter selected from the Macintosh Chooser, while using any Macintosh application. Each LaserWriter is connected to the switch, via RS-422 directly or through an EAILU. This college represents advanced collegiate teaching techniques using the following advanced tools and Northern Telecom communications equipment. Host interface applications File transfers -HyperCard simulations Engineering Handbook 6-72 Meridian Data Services Figure 6-31 Eastern College with PCI Card 100+ Macintoshes XL Main Cam Series 1 I Terminals On-Line Catalog Astronomical Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-73 Aerospace industry application -defense contractor Another Northern Telecom customer, a leader in aerospace and advanced government systems including the Space Shuttle and the Strategic Defense Initial v e (SDI), needed a reliable data network that would connect a variety of users to a variety of computers. This company chose a Meridian 1 and Meridian Data Services to provide for their diverse data networking needs. The Meridian 1 connects over two hundred users from different project groups within me Software Center of Excellence (SCOE) Lab to different computers such as DEC Data Generals, Sequents, Symbolics, and MS-DOS and Macintosh personal computers. The Northern Telecom Meridian network provides reduced moving and changing costs and improved implementation time of moves. With the Meridian 1 port contention capability, both casual and heavy user can be accommodated efficiently and cost effectively. An Ethernet LAN using Bridge Communications servers is connected to the Meridian 1 with 32 direct RS-232 port connections per server. The Meridian 1 connection enables terminals and PCs not directly connected to the Ethernet LAN to gain switched access to the network, a much more cost-effective connection for users not requiring dedicated access. The Ethernet LAN provides PCs (both IBM and Macintosh computers) high speed access to scientific systems, including SUN, Sequent and Symbolics computers. Data access modules designed to support varying transmission requirements for terminal and host connectivity are used at this company. are used to connect Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Modules terminals within the engineering group to the Meridian 1. Those with MS-DOS personal computers use the Personal Computer Interface Card to connect. Macintosh users gain access to the Meridian 1 through the use of an RS-422 direct connection. The direct connection further reduces communication costs and simplifies hardware requirements. The contractor uses an ADM connected to a 3270 protocol converter to provide access to a remote host computer which houses an electronic mail system for executives. This defense contractor, with the flexibility, the reliability, and the cost savings of advanced technology provided by the Northern Telecom Meridian stands at the threshold of exciting technological innovations. , Engineering Handbook 6-74 Meridian Data Services Figure 6-32 Defense contractor RS-422 Direct Meridian 1 ASCII 85 ASCII DG MV8000 Communications Server 3270 Protocol Server Engineering Handbook Sequent Host Host Meridian Data Services 6-75 Computer industry application -workstation manufacturer A major workstation manufacturer has installed Meridian 1 Systems in most of their sales offices, in the US and around the world; to deliver both voice and data communication services to the desktop. Workstation software automatically places outgoing data calls for access to internal electronic mail, file transfer and on-line product and program information on this company’s data network. These calls go through a modem pool on the Meridian 1 to the public switched network or through an X.25 PAD to a packet switching network. The Meridian 1 automatically selects the least costly route for long distance calls. Users also exchange files using standard communications software at speeds of up to 19.2 Kbps by simply dialing the extension of the receiving workstation and commands at each workstation. executing appropriate send file/receive Figure 6-33 Workstation manufacturer Engineering Handbook 6-76 Meridian Data Services Third party compatibility testing program Northern Telecom Third Party Compatibility Testing Program provides vendors with an opportunity to test their equipment in Northern Telecom Meridian environment. This program provides ever widening solutions for customer data applications with assured compatibility. The following tables list third party products that have been found compatible with the Meridian 1 at the time of this publication. Table 6-2 T-l multiplexors Table 6-3 Protocol converters Engineering Handbook Meridian Data Services 6-77 Table 6-4 Modems Table 6-5 Other products Vendor Raycom Model 5100 Fiber Optic Multiplexor Electronics R-Server Tested With Notes 1988 In preparation Engineering Handbook 6-78 Meridian Data Services Data products and product codes The following tables list all Northern Telecom data products and their product codes. Also, Table 6-10 provides the interface matrix between various products and line cards. Table 6-6 Terminal/host connection Product description Code Add-on Data Module (RS232) QMT8 Add-on Data Module (V.35) High-Speed Data Module QMT21 1 Interface Module Macintosh Cable A0326760 Macintosh Cable A0326761 Macintosh Cable A0326762 Macintosh Cable A0326763 PC Interface Card QPC512 Enhanced Interface Line Unit (Male) A0344336 Enhanced Interface Line Unit (Female) A0344337 Coax Interface Module I Coax Interface Card Data Option (M2000 Series) NT1 Data Option (M3000 Series) NT1 Meridian Programmable Data Option High Speed Data Card Engineering Handbook QPC918 Meridian Data Services 6-79 Table 6-7 Data Line Cards Engineering Handbook 6-80 Meridian Data Services Table 6-8 Shelves/cabinets/cables Product description C o d e Coax Balun Balun MVC02032 MVC02033 Dual Coax Balun Multi-Channel Coax System Multi-Channel Coax System Multi-Channel Coax System Faceplate Multi-Channel Coax System Optional Power BNC Coax Cable 8FT BNC Coax Cable 16FT I Multi-Channel Data System Shelf QSD27 Multi-Channel Data System 11 Ov Power QSY27 Multi-Channel Data System Power QSY32 Multi-Channel Data System Rack Cabinet QCA76 Multi-Channel Data System Desk Cabinet QCA77 I Octopus Cable Female QCAD318 Octopus Cable Male QCAD319 Patch Panel A0336982 Table 6-9 Software Product description Code Meridian SL Laser Printer Software with Meridian Extension Engineering Handbook A0345240 Meridian Data Services Table Product/interface card matrix ADM w/V.35 Mac Direct Connect Modem Pool (Smart) Dumb Modem in, or Sync in/out) 3270 Protocol Converters sys Protocol Converter HSDC X Engineering Handbook 7-1 Chapter System Contents Introduction Autoquote Configuration guidelines Meridian 1 system options hardware provisioning Universal Equipment Modules Power and cooling equipment Common Equipment cards Peripheral Equipment cards Station equipment Software provisioning 1 1 2 13 13 19 28 35 43 46 Introduction System configuration of the Meridian 1 SL-1 system options involves determining the hardware and software necessary to meet the specific requirements of the installation. This determination is based upon parameters related to quantity and type of terminals, telephones, traffic, features, and services. An assessment of these requirements indicates which particular member of the Meridian 1 system family is best suited to address those particular needs. Autoquote The Autoquote mechanism readily provides a system configuration based upon specific input data pertaining to the required parameters. In addition to providing a listing of hardware and software and their associated ordering codes, reports may also be generated to denote traffic, memory, and real time estimations. Engineering rules determine equipment provisioning and the capability exists to specify requirements on an “equipped” and “wired for” basis to address future growth projections. Other services available include the capability to: quote all available software generics and associated optional feature groups -quote all standard hardware items indicate which hardware and software items are on a controlled release basis configure systems to support non-blocking and RPE applications generate configurations for different options using the same input data requirements save and later retrieve input data from one run and modify it for a subsequent run specify the spare capacity available in terms of memory, real time, traffic, and hardware. 7-2 System configuration Configuration guidelines The following reference tables provide information which relates to provisioning and compatibility guidelines are provided to assist in the configuration aspects of Meridian 1 system options and 71. Table 7-1 Meridian 1 system comparison A, Network Traffic Loops TDS 24 1 24 1 1 14 1 1 28 2 2 140 10 10 -- Storage disk disk disk disk disk System configuration 7-3 Table 7-2 Meridian 1 hardware compatibility CODE Common Equipment 21A DESCRIPTION 21 51 61 X X 71 Modules CPU/Network Module AC, Common/Peripheral Equipment Module x DC X CPU Module X x* Network Module Inter Group Module x X -continued * Network Module can be used in these System Options for only, not for network-type cards. cards 7-4 System configuration Table 7-2 Meridian 1 hardware compatibility CODE Common Equipment (continued) 21A 21 51 X X X X X X X X Serial Data Interface paddle board (dual x Floppy Disk Unit X DESCRIPTION 61 71 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Cards Superloop Network Conference/Tone and Digit Switch Receiver Memory/Peripheral Signaling Multi Disk Unit QMM42 Security Data Cartridge QPC43 Peripheral QPC414 X X Signaling Segmented Bus Extender X Intergroup X Switch Network X -continued X X X X System configuration 7-5 Table 7-2 Meridian 1 hardware compatibility CODE Common Equipment (continued) DESCRIPTION QPC417 Ju QPC441 Three-Port Extender 21A 51 61 Board 71 X Clock Controller QPC477 21 X X Bus Terminating Unit Enhanced Serial Data Interface X X X X X X X X X X X X X X QPC579 CPU Function X X X QPC580 CPU Interface X X X QPC581 Changeover and Memory Arbitrator X X X Memory X X X QPC584 Mass Storage Interface X X X QPC687 CPU with X X QPC720 Primary Rate Interface X X X X X QPC742 Floppy Disk Interface X X X X X PC583 --continued 7-6 System configuration Table 7-2 Meridian 1 hardware compatibility Common Equipment (continued) DESCRIPTION 21 QPC757 D-Channel Handler Interface X X QPC841 Four-Port Serial Data Interface X X Q PC939 Read-Only Memory Q PC940 Read-Only Memory X X 51 61 71 x X X X X X X System configuration 7-7 Table 7-3 Meridian 1 hardware compatibility CODE Peripheral Equipment DESCRIPTION 21A 21 51 61 71 X X X X Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module X X X X Remote Peripheral Equipment Module X X X X X X X X X X X Modules Peripheral Equipment Module Cards AD Controller-2 Controller-4 x continued 7-8 Svstem Table 7-3 Meridian 1 hardware compatibility Peripheral Equipment (continued) 21A 21 51 61 71 Digital Line card X X- X X X Analog Line card X X X X X Analog Message Waiting Line card X X X Universal Trunk X X X X X E&M Trunk X X X X X X X X X X DESCRIPTION Receiver x QPC62 1.5 Baud Converter X X X X QPC63 Local Carrier Buffer X X X X QPC65 Remote Peripheral Switch X X X X 2M Baud Converter X X X X Carrier Maintenance X X X X Carrier Interface X X X X E&M/DX Signaling and Paging Trunk X X X X Off-Premises Extension Line X X X X QPC67 QPC192 -continued System configuration 7-9 Table 7-3 Meridian 1 hardware compatibility CODE Peripheral Equipment (continued) DESCRIPTION QPC237 4-wire E&M/DX signaling trunk QPC250 Release QPC297 QPC422 21 51 61 71 X X X X X X X X Attendant Console Monitor X X Tone Detector X X X X Asynchronous Interface Line X X X X QPC432 4-Port Data Line X X X X QPC449 Loop Signaling Trunk X X X X QPC450 Trunk X X X X X X X X X X X X PC430 QPC578 Trunk Integrated Services Digital tine Line QPC594 X QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer X X X X QPC723 RS-232 4-Port Interface Line X X X X X X X X X X X X Line (Message QPC789 Waiting) QPC918 High Speed Data Card : All of above, from QPC71 to QPC918 are only supported via PE 7-10 System configuration Table 7-4 Meridian 1 hardware compatibility power equipment 21A DESCRIPTION CODE 21 51 61 Switched Mode Rectifier AA 71 X Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC X X X X Common Equipment Power Supply DC X X X X Switched Mode Rectifier X X X X X X Junction Box Logic Return Equalizer X X Fan and Sensor Panel Ringing Generator DC X X X X X X X X X X X X Rectifier Rack X X X Common/Peripheral Equipment Power x Supply AC (also used on AC RPE) X X X Common/Peripheral Equipment Power x Supply DC (also used on DC RPE) OAA Power Distribution Unit DC System Monitor System Option continued x -- X System configuration 7-11 Table 7-4 Meridian hardware compatibility CODE power equipment (continued) DESCRIPTION 21 Fan Unit AA 51 61 71 x Rectifier Baffle/Mounting Kit X X Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC X X X X Ringing Generator AC X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Module Power Distribution Unit X X X X Module Power Distribution Unit X X X X System Monitor Common Equipment Power Supply AC Power Failure Transfer Unit Blower Unit Power Distribution Unit AC Power Distribution Unit System Option continued x 7-12 System configuration Table 7-4 Meridian 1 hardware compatibility CODE power equipment (continued) DESCRIPTION Module Power Distribution Unit Temperature Sensor Panel QBL15 21A 21 51 61 x X X X X X Battery Distribution Box X X X X Power/Battery Distribution Box X X X DC Power Plant QPC188 71 Battery Monitor (Part of QBL 15) X X X X X System configuration 7-13 Meridian 1 system options hardware provisioning Following is a description of all hardware equipment of the Meridian 1 system options 2 that can be ordered individually. The items are described in terms of purpose, quantity required, and system hardware (system option), as appropriate. Universal Equipment Modules CPU/Network Module System hardware-System option CPU/Network Module (hereafter referred to as CPU/NET) houses a Central Processor Unit (CPU) and network cards. This module is available in two versions: for AC systems for DC systems The CPU/NET card cage contains 18 card slots which support the following cards and functions: network cards Clock Controller Serial Data Interface Serial Data Interface (ESDI) Peripheral Signaling 3-Port Extender (3PE) mass storage unit CPU Function CPU Interface Changeover Memory Arbitrator (CMA) Memory D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI) Primary Rate Interface Trunk Interface (DTI) The CPU/NET Module is powered by a Common Equipment Power Quantity-One per system option 5 1 two per system option 6 1 7-14 System configuration Meridian Mail Module System hardware--System option Purpose-The Meridian Mail Module is a self-contained unit, complete with power converters and cooling units. It is designed to integrate with 1 Communication Systems but is also available as a stand-alone system. This module is available in two versions: for AC systems for DC systems The Meridian Mail Module is powered by two Common Equipment Power Supplies. Refer to the Meridian Mail suite of documents information. for detailed Quantity-Maximum of five per system AC, System Purpose-The to as Equipment DC Common/Peripheral Equipment Module option 21 and 21A Common/Peripheral Equipment Module (hereafter referred supports CPU, network, and Intelligent Peripheral cards in a single module. This module is available in two versions: for AC systems for DC systems The card cage contains 20 card slots which support the followingcards and functions: Floppy Disk Interface Disk Unit CPU Memory network Receiver (DTR) DCHI System configuration The Module is powered by a Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply. Quantity-One per system Peripheral Equipment Module System option Peripheral Equipment Module referred to as PE) supports the Dual Loop Buffer (DLB), and 10 card PE Buffer is situated near the center of the module, with five cards to the left and five cards to the right. This module is available in two versions: for AC systems for DC systems The a Ringing PE Module is powered by a Peripheral Equipment Power Supply, and when sets are supported by the module. Quantity-As required; refer to engineering CPU Module System hardware-System option 71 CPU Module (hereafter referred to as houses the CPU, memory cards, and the mass storage. CPU) This module is available in two versions: for AC systems for DC systems CPU card cage contains 15 card slots which support the following The cards and functions: Memory CMA CPU Interface CPU Function Segmented Bus Extender (SBE) DCHI Clock Controller Mass Storage Unit (MSU) or Floppy Disk Unit 7-16 System The CPU Module is powered by a Common Equipment Power Supply. Quantity-Two per system Network Module option 71 System Network Module (hereafter referred to as NET)provides signal interface between the Common Equipment (CE) cards located in the module. This module is available in two versions: for AC systems for DC systems The NET card cage contains 15 card slots which support the following cards and functions: 3PE Intergroup Switch (IGS) (for system option 71 only) peripheral signaling network cards The NET Module is powered by a Common Equipment Power Supply. Quantity-A maximum of 10 per system (five network groups), excluding additional requirements for System Inter Group Module option 71 Inter Group Module provides a path for the switching of traffic between the network groups in the system. Faceplate cables from Clock Controller (CC) and Intergroup Switch (IGS) circuit cards are connected to the Inter Group Module. This module uses a QPC417 Junctor Board. This module is used in both AC and DC systems. Quantity-One per system System Purpose-The referred to as Controller card Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module option 1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module (hereafter IPE) supports a Controller card and 16 IPE cards. The situated near the center of the module, between slot 7 and slot 8. This module is available in two versions: System configuration 7-17 for AC systems for DC systems The card slots in the Universal Trunk IPE card cage support the following cards: Receiver (DTR) Analog Line card (ALC) Digital Line card (DLC) Analog Message Waiting Line card (MLC) The IPE Module is powered by a Peripheral Equipment Power Supply, and a Ringing Generator when sets are supported by the module. Quantity-As required; refer to System System engineering (553-3001-151) Remote Peripheral Equipment Module option Purpose--The Remote Peripheral Equipment Module (hereafter referred RPE) is an interface module used to extend the interconnection to as distance between local and remote sites. The same module is used for local and remote applications. On the local side, it interfaces to the QPC414 Network card for up to two network loops; on the PE Module. remote side, it supports the This module is available in two versions: for AC systems for DC systems RPE card cage contains 12 card slots which support the following The cards and functions: 1.5 Mb converter 2 Mb converter carrier interface remote peripheral local carrier buffer carrier interface 2 Mb converter 1.5 Mb converter carrier maintenance (optional) 7-18 System configuration The RPE Module is powered by a Common Equipment/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply. Quantity-Since each RPE Module serves two network loops, the number of modules required per system depends on the number of stations in the remote site. Packaging Spacer Kit System Hardware-All modules together for side-by-side expansion. The Spacer includes: expansion spacer RF gasketing eight bushings Universal Equipment Module cover System Hardware-All Purpose--This is the front or rear cover that is part of the UEM. Two covers are required for each UEM. Universal Equipment Module side panel System Hardware-All is the side panel (PO699724) that is part of the UEM. of eight panels are required for multi-column systems. A maximum Card cage assemblies A card cage assembly consists of a sheet metal case and an associated backplane. The card cage provides the physical framework that houses the circuitry and power supplies within the UEM. The following is a list of all the card cage assemblies available and their corresponding CPU/Network Module 11 AC/DC Common/Peripheral Equipment Module Peripheral Equipment-Module CPU Module Network Module Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module Remote Peripheral Equipment Module System 7-19 Top Cap System Hardware-AU top cap is mounted on the highest module of each column. The top cap is approximately 80 cm (31.5 in.) wide by 55.9 cm (22 in.) deep by 7.6 cm (3 in.) high and weighs 3.6 kg (8 lbs). It consists of a front and a rear air exhaust grill and thermal sensors. System option 21A contains a small fan to cool the power Three versions of the top cap are available: AC systems DC systems system option 21A only Pedestal System Hardware-All Purpose-The Pedestal is a base unit made of die-cast construction. It is approximately 80 cm (3 1.5 in.) wide by 64.8 cm (25.5 in.) deep by 25.4 cm (10 in.) high and weighs 13.6 kg (30 lbs) empty. Leveling feet are provided for up to four tiers, while a caster option is provided for up to two tiers. The pedestal is available in three versions: for AC systems for system option 21A only for DC systems The pedestal for AC and DC systems (except system option 21A) can house any of the following field replaceable assemblies: Power Distribution Unit or Blower Unit or Fan Unit or Leveling foot A0318207 Air grill (molded) PO699797 Air filter PO699798 The pedestal for system option 21A is basically the same as the one used for other system options except it can only house the following field-replaceable assemblies: Power Distribution Unit Leveling foot A03 18207 Air grill (molded) PO699797 7-20 System configuration Power and cooling equipment System Hardware-System option 2 1 A A0367754 Top Cap Fan is located in the Fan and Sensor Panel. It power Supply AC. There is no speed provides cooling for the or temperature control provided with it. Power to the Top Cap Fan is controlled by the circuit breaker located on the back panel of the pedestal. Quantity-One per system Switched Mode Rectifier System Hardware-System option 7 1 (DC version) Purpose-Solid state, switched-mode rectifier. Converts VAC (nominal) to -48 VDC (nominal), with a 50A output. Used in the QCA13 power plant, with up to ten rectifiers in parallel. Quantity-As required by system power consumption Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC System Hardware-All Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC is used to provide power to all peripheral equipment modules in DC systems. It converts -48V DC to and -48V DC voltages used to power peripheral equipment logic cards and to supply talk battery to lines and trunks. This power supply is located in the far left hand card slot labeled “PE Pwr Sup”. Quantity-One Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC is used in each of the following DC modules: Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module Peripheral Equipment Module AA Common Equipment Power Supply DC System Hardware-All Purpose-The Common Equipment Power Supply DC is used in the common equipment modules in DC systems. It is located in the first slot on the left in the module labeled “CE Pwr Sup”. It converts -48V DC to and V DC to provide all required voltages for CE and network circuit cards Quantity-One Common Equipment Power Supply DC is used in each of the following DC modules: CPU Module Network Module CPU/Network Module System configuration 7-21 Two Common Equipment Power Supply DC units are used in the Meridian Mail Module Switched Mode Rectifier System Hardware-System option (DC versions) Switched-Mode Rectifier is based on the QRF12 rectifier, with shielding to limit electromagnetic interference. It converts VAC (nominal) to -48 VDC (nominal), with a 30A output. It connects to the through the Battery Distribution Box. Quantity-Generally one rectifier per every three modules. Exact quantity depends on system configuration and power requirements. Junction Box System Hardware-All (DC version) Purpose-The Junction Box is required when the distance from the rectifier to the pedestal is over 0.74 m (8 ft), which requires wire larger than 10 AWG. It provides a set of connection terminals for the 4-AWG wire that comes from the rectifier, and a set of connection terminals for the wire that goes into the pedestal. Refer to Power engineering (553-3001-152) for more information. Quantity-One per DC pedestal Logic Return Equalizer System Hardware-System option 7 1 (DC version) Purpose--The Logic Return Equalizer mounts on top of the QCA13 cabinet. It is used as the single point ground for system option 71. Quantity-One per system Fan and Sensor Panel System Hardware-System option 2 1 A Fan and Sensor Panel contains a 230 VAC tubeaxial fan (A0367754) and a thermal sensor for a high temperature/shutdown alarm to the Option 21A System Monitor. The fan provides cooling for the Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply. It is on and receives power harness. power directly from the Power distribution Unit via the The Fan and Sensor Panel consists of the following: a perforated top shield a Top Cap Fan (A0367754) a fan power harness a thermostat harness 7-22 System configuration Quantity-One per system Ringing Generator DC System Hardware-All DC system options Purpose-The Ringing Generator DC operates from a nominal -48V DC input and provides selectable AC ringing voltage outputs superimposed on -48 VDC. The and VAC. It also supplies frequency and voltage options are set applications. The Ringing -15OV DC Message Waiting lamp Generator DC mounts in the PE modules to the right of the Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC. Quantity-One Ringing Generator DC is used in each of the following, when these DC modules support or analog sets: Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module Peripheral Equipment Module Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC System Hardware-All (DC options) Purpose---The Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC converts -48V and -150V DC voltages used to power DC to peripheral and common equipment, supply talk battery, and light Message Waiting lamps on sets. It provides selectable AC ringing voltage outputs Hz and superimposed on -48 VDC. The frequency and voltage options are VAC. It is located to the left of the module, in the slot labeled Pwr Sup”. Quantity-One Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC is used in each of the following DC Modules: Common/Peripheral Equipment Module Remote Peripheral Equipment Module Power Distribution Unit DC System Hardware-All except system option 2 1 A Purpose--The Power Distribution Unit DC distributes power to the entire column. It is located in the rear of the pedestal. It houses five circuit breakers (one for each Module and one for the Blower Unit) and the System Monitor. Quantity-One per pedestal/column in DC systems -- Rectifier Rack System (DC versions) Purpose--This is a open relay rack which is approximately 1.5 m Rectifiers in a single column. (5 ft) high. It supports up to three System configuration 7-23 Quantity-One rack per every three three racks per system Rectifiers, up to a maximum of Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC System Hardware-System Options And all RPE Purpose-The Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC converts AC to and voltages used to power peripheral and common equipment, supply talk battery, and light Message sets. It provides selectable AC ringing voltage outputs Waiting lamps on Hz and superimposed on -48 VDC. The frequency and voltage options are VAC. It is located in the left of the module, in the slot labeled Pwr Sup”. Quantity-One Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC is used in each of the following AC modules: Common/Peripheral Equipment Module Remote Peripheral Equipment Module System Monitor System Option 21 A System Hardware-System option 21A Purpose-The System Monitor System Option 21A provides an Power Supply AC, interface to communicate and monitor the the CPU, and the thermal switches. In the event of failure, the System System Option 21A is notified and the appropriate alarm is set. A system alarm LED located below the top cap lights to indicate CPU failure. Quantity-One per system Fan Unit AC System Hardware-System option 21 with up to two tiers Purpose-The Fan Unit AC is housed within the pedestal and provides cooling for the entire column. It consists of three fans and a circuit breaker located in the front. Quantity-One per pedestal Fan Unit DC System Hardware--System option 21 with up to two tiers __ Fan Unit DC is the same as the Fan Unit AC except that it is used for DC systems. It has an on/off switch in the front and its own separate circuit breaker located on the Power Distribution Unit. Quantity-One per pedestal , System Rectifier Baffle/Mounting Kit option (DC versions) 7-24 System configuration Rectifier Baffle/Mounting Kit consists of a set of support brackets Rectifier to an Rack, and a heat baffle for mounting the plate. The baffle directs exhaust air from the lower rectifier away from the inlet to the upper rectifier, thereby allowing cooling by natural convection . Quantity-One per Rectifier Peripheral Equipment Supply AC System Hardware-All except system option 21A Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC is used to provide power to all peripheral equipment modules in AC systems. It converts AC to and -48V DC voltages used to power peripheral equipment logic cards and to supply talk battery to lines and trunks. This power supply is located in the far left-hand card slot labeled “PE Pwr Sup”. Quantity-One Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC is used in each of the following AC modules: Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module Peripheral Equipment Module AA Ringing Generator AC System Hardware-All except system option 21A Purpose-The Ringing Generator AC operates from a nominal VAC input and provides selectable AC ringing voltage outputs superimposed on -48 VDC. The frequency and voltage options are Hz and VAC. It also supplies set applications. The Ringing -150V DC Message Waiting lamp Generator AC mounts in the PE modules to the right of the Peripheral Equipment Power Supply. Quantity-One Ringing Generator AC is used in each of the following, when these AC Modules support or analog sets: Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module Peripheral Equipment Module System Monitor System Hardware-All except system option 2 1 A System Monitor monitors the status of all internal power and cooling related components, as well as external DC rectifiers, batteries, and Uninterruptable Power Supplies (UPS). The System Monitor is mounted in the Power Distribution Unit, within the Pedestal. The System Monitor that handles the communication with the system CPU (via port) is the master; all others function as slaves. There is a serial communication link between the master and the slave System Monitors. In addition to CPU status reporting, the System Monitor also controls all external visual status indications. System configuration 7-25 Quantity-One master and up to 63 slave System Monitors are allowed per system. Common Equipment Power Supply AC System Hardware-System option 5 Common Equipment Power Supply AC is used in the common equipment modules in AC systems. It is located in the first slot on the left in the module labeled “CE Pwr Sup”. It converts AC to and V DC to provide all required voltages for CE and network circuit cards. Quantity-One Common Equipment Power Supply AC is used in each of the following AC Modules: CPU Module Network Module CPU/Network Module Two Common Equipment Power Supply AC is used in the Meridian Mail Module A0355200 Power Failure Transfer Unit System Hardware-All except system option 21A an interface between CO lines, PBX, and phones (rotary dial and pushbutton). The Power Failure Transfer Unit allows eight phones to be connected to the CO lines in the event of a PBX power failure or malfunction. The Power Fail Transfer Unit is transparent to the switch and CO lines during normal PBX operations. The Power Failure Transfer Unit is approximately 22.8 cm (9 in) long by 22.8 cm (9 in) wide by 8.8 cm (3.5 in) deep. It is screw-mounted to the Distribution Frame and connects to the Main Distribution Frame and switch by two 25-pair cables. Quantity-As required Blower Unit System Hardware-All except system option Purpose-The Blower Unit is part of the system cooling assembly and provides forced-convection cooling. Housed within the pedestal, it contains two curved impellers (rotor blades) which are cylindrically shaped, approximately 22.8 in diameter, and 6.9 cm (2.75 in) thick. A circuit is located on the cm front of the blower chassis to turn the unit on and off. Each unit weighs about 1.5 kg (3.5 lbs). The unit communicates with the power distribution section by engaging a connector in the rear of the pedestal. Quantity-One per pedestal in AC systems 7-26 System configuration Blower Unit System Hardware-AU except system option 21 A Blower Unit is the same as the Blower Unit except that it is used for DC systems. It has its own separate circuit breaker located on the Power Distribution Unit. Also, for maintainability in the field, a switch is located on the front of the blower chassis to turn the unit on and off. Quantity-One per pedestal in DC systems Power Distribution Unit AC System Hardware-All except system option 21A Power Distribution Unit AC distributes power to the entire column. It is located in the rear of the pedestal. It houses a main circuit breaker and the System Monitor. Quantity-One per pedestal/column in AC systems System Power Distribution Unit System Option 21A option 21A Power Distribution Unit System Option 21A is a panel located in the pedestal. It contains a circuit breaker, a terminal block, and an filter. The power cable enters the pedestal and connects to the circuit breaker. From the circuit breaker, the AC voltage goes to the terminal block through the EM1 filter and back to the terminal block where it is distributed to the Power Supply AC and the fan located in the top cap. Quantity-One per system Module Power Distribution Unit System Hardware-All except system option 21A Module Power Distribution Unit protects the power supply and distributes power within a module. It houses a single breaker and is used in conjunction with the CE Power Supply AC. Quantity-One per CPU Module NET, Module Power Distribution Unit System Hardware-All except system option 21A CPU/NET, or -. Purpose-The Module Power Distribution Unit protects the power supply and distributes power within a module. It houses a single breaker and is Power Supply AC. used in conjunction with the Quantity-One per RPE Module System configuration 7-27 Module Power Distribution Unit System Hardware--All except system option 21A Purpose--The Module Power Distribution Unit protects the power supply and distributes power within a module. It houses a dual breaker and is used PE Power AC and the in conjunction with the Ringing Generator AC. Quantity-One per System PE or IPE Module Temperature Sensor Panel except system option 2 Purpose-The Temperature Sensor Panel communicates with the System Monitor in the event of overheating. It contains two temperature sensors which protect against thermal damage by detecting extreme temperature. The Temperature Sensor Panel is available in two versions: for AC systems for DC systems The Temperature Sensor Panel consists of the following: a perforated shield panel an LED bracket a thermostat harness an air probe harness or an air probe connector bracket (PO703064 or PO708 186) Quantity-One per top cap Battery Distribution Box System Hardware--All (DC versions) Purpose-Connects customer-provided power supplies to the system. Allows connection of up to 24 modules. Provides connection points, fused outputs, and monitoring of rectifiers and batteries. Quantity-One per system Power/Battery Distribution Box -System Hardware---System option (DC versions) Purpose-Allows the parallel connection of up to three Rectifiers, for connection to the system and to reserve batteries. Includes main fuses, diode blocking, test points, QPC188 battery monitor card, and sense lead fusing on connections from each rectifier. 7-28 System configuration Quantity-One per every three per system Rectifiers, up to a maximum of two QCA13 DC Power Plant System Hardware--System option 71 (DC version) of a primary power cabinet with fusing and distribution hardware, monitoring and control, and up to four Rectifiers. Up to two supplemental cabinets can be added, with up to four rectifiers in the first supplemental cabinet and up to two rectifiers in the second cabinet, for a total of 10 rectifiers and a total system capacity of 500A. (This power system is also referred to as the 52412 power plant; QCA13 is actually the cabinet designation, but is the more commonly used name.) Quantity-As required by system power consumption QPC188 Battery Monitor System Hardware-All (DC versions) in each Battery Distribution Box to monitor rectifier and battery voltages. Generates low float alarm, low voltage trip alarm and sense lead fuse conditions. Quantity-One circuit card in QBL12 or QRF12 -52 V Rectifier System Hardware-System option (DC version) 115 V AC and 220 V AC to -52 V DC (nominal). voltage conversions from 90V to and 190V to 250V. Connects to the Power/Battery Distribution Box. columns through the Quantity-One for every two, or three modules, depending on load and redundancy requirements. Common Equipment cards Superloop Network System Hardware-All Purpose- Provides 120 time slots (one superloop) interface between Network and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment. Utilizes the equivalence of four network loops. Controller card(s). May be connected to one or two -The Superloop Network card is equipped with a Motorola microprocessor which performs network diagnostics and signaling control, and communicates with the Intelligent Peripheral Controller. Quantity-Up to four per Network Module as required. engineering (553-3001-151) for engineering details. Refer to System System configuration 7-29 Conference/Tone and Digit Switch (TDS) System Hardware-All Purpose--Provides both Conference and TDS functions. This card accesses two network loops, one for each function. The Conference circuitry has a warning tone and supports broadcast mode. Up to 15 simultaneous conferences can be controlled with the restriction that the total number of conferees in all conferences is not greater than 30. The TDS circuitry provides tones for different countries (up to 256 tones and cadences). Quantity-As required. Refer to system engineering (553-3001-151) for engineering details. Receiver System Hardware-System option 2 1 and 2 1 A the functionality of the Network Controller and Receiver cards in a mother/daughterboard assembly. The mother board plugs into a dedicated slot on the backplane. The daughter board attaches to the mother board through an connector and does not connect to the backplane. Quantity-One per Module Memory/Peripheral Signaling System Hardware-System option 2 1 and 2 1 A the functionality of the Memory and Peripheral Signaling cards, as well as miscellaneous CPU functions. The CPU functions include interrupt and fault monitoring. The Peripheral Signaling function provides: signaling interface between CPU and Peripheral Equipment for up to 32 network loops clock and timing signals for real-time transmission functions Quantity-One per Module AA Serial Data Interface paddle board (dual-port) System Hardware-System option 2 1 A/2 1 Purpose--Provides two serial ports between the SL-1 processor and an external device. Each port supports RS-232-C interface 8-bit ASCII data with parity and stop bit asynchronous, start-stop operation . 7-30 System configuration data rates of and 9600 baud Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) mode Data Communication Equipment (DCE) mode Quantity-Three maximum per CPU/NET Module Module; two maximum per Floppy Disk Unit System hardware-All Purpose-The Floppy Disk Unit is used to load the programs and office data into the system memory. The FDU contains two 3.5inch floppy drives and is controlled by the QPC742 Floppy Disk Interface Each floppy drive has a formatted capacity of 1.44 MB. The FDU occupies two adjacent card slots in the CPU, Network, or PE Module. It is powered through the cable connecting it to the FDI. The FDU can be connected as required by the system. to one or two Quantity-One per system Multi Disk Unit System hardware-System option Multi Disk Unit (MDU) is used to load the programs and office data into the system memory. The MDU contains the following: two 3.5inch floppy1 drives which are connected to the SCSI interface through the SCSI/floppy controller; each drive has a formatted capacity of 1.44 MB a 3.5inch hard disk drive which has a built-in SCSI interface and a capacity of 20 MB an SCSI/floppy controller The MDU occupies three adjacent card slots in the CPU, CPU/NET, or Network and 12V from the module. The MDU is controlled by the Module and requires QPC584 Mass Storage Interface (MSI). The MDU can be connected to one or two as needed. Quantity-One per system QMM42 Security Data Cartridge System Hardware-AU Purpose--This is a security measure that allows a customer access only to software packages purchased for his system. This security data cartridge is mounted on either the QPC584 Mass Storage Interface or QPC742 Floppy Disk Interface card. Quantity-One per card System configuration 7-31 QPC43 Peripheral Signaling System Hardware-System option 5 a signaling interface between the CPU and PE via the Network cards. Provides basic bit rate 2.048 MHz clock and timing signals for real-time functions. Quantity-One per NET or Module QPC215 Segmented Bus Extender System Hardware-System option 71 Purpose--The Segmented Bus Extender (SBE) extends CPU bus signals (address, data, and control) to the Network Module. It also allows recovery of calls by isolating bus faults to a single network group. or later vintage is required. Quantity-One circuit card in each CPU per network group, with a maximum of five per CPU QPC412 Intergroup Switch System Hardware-System option 71 Purpose+-Provides space switching systems. Quantity-Two installed) between network groups in multigroup Network Module (use vintage C when two or more groups are QPC414 Network System Hardware-All 30 time slots interface per each of two network loops. Provides speech path switching, signaling and control circuits for two network loops. Interfaces between network and PE, RPE, and Meridian Mail cards. Modules, and Quantity-As required; refer to System engineering (553-3001-151) QPC417 Junctor Board System Hardware---System option 71 -- space switching paths between network groups in multigroup systems for up to five groups. Quantity-One per system QPC441 Three-Port Extender System Hardware-System option System configuration Purpose-Extends CPU data, address and control signals between one NET Module and a QPC215 Segmented Bus Extender on a CPU Module in Option CPU/NET Modules. (Also 71. In Option 61, interfaces between two required in Option 5 1.) Quantity-One per NET or Module Clock Controller System Hardware-All Purpose-The Clock Controller (CC) is used in system option 71 to synchronize the Meridian 1 network to an external source clock and to generate and distribute clock to the Meridian 1 system. It is also used with in all system options. Note: QPC47 1 C or later vintage is required. Quantity-Two for system option 71, and one per CPU when DTI or PRA is required in other options. QPC477 Bus Terminating Unit System Hardware--System option 5 Terminating Units are installed in the CE Modules. They provide a logical termination to the CPU and network buses. They are paddle boards installed in dedicated slots, between circuit cards from the front of the module. Quantity-The following vintages are required for the modules listed: One required for each CPU/NET and each NET One required for each CPU/NET and each NET One required for each 1 One required for each CPU One required for each CPU/NET CPU Enhanced Serial Data Interface System Hardware--All two serial data interface circuits that can be configured for either synchronous or asynchronous data communications at rates of up to 64 kbps (synchronous) or 19.2 kbps (asynchronous). Note: Use 13D with Meridian Mail option and other applications requiring Integrated Services Digital Network Application Protocol, Quantity-As required per application System configuration 7-33 QPC579 CPU Function System Hardware-System option 5 1 CPU Function card works in conjunction with the CPU Interface card (QPC580). It contains the main CPU logic circuitry. The CPU provides a bit data bus. The CPU Function card contains a system ROM. Quantity-One per CPU Module QPC580 CPU Interface System Hardware--System option 5 1 Purpose-Contains the logic required to interface the CPU with the external address bus and detects, identifies and isolates bus faults. Works in conjunction with QPC579 CPU Function card. Quantity-One per CPU Module QPC581 Changeover and Memory Arbitrator System Hardware-System option 5 1 Purpose-The Changeover and Memory Arbitrator (CMA) card controls CPU access to the duplicated memory in dual CPU systems, automatically disables faulty memory cards and controls CPU changeover. The CMA switches from one CPU to the other in the event of a CPU fault. Quantity-Two CMA cards are required per system (one per CPU/Memory configuration). QPC583 Memory System Hardware--System option 5 1 Purpose-Provides 768K of Random Access Memory (RAM). Quantity-One per CPU for system option 71 two maximum per system option QPC584 Mass Storage Interface System Hardware-System option between the Multi Disk Unit (MDU) and CPU(s). Provides address matching, disk drive control, data buffering and interrupt control circuits. The is used with the MDU and contains: -two high capacity floppy disk drives or -one Winchester disk drive with two high capacity floppy drives as backup or later vintage is required. Note: Quantity-One .. circuit card for each 7-34 System configuration QPC687 CPU with System Hardware-System option 21 and Purpose-This is a stand-alone CPU card with error correction, real-time clock, and one port. Note: or later vintage is required. Quantity-One per system QPC720 Primary Rate Interface System Hardware--All ISDN Primary Rate Interface card allows twenty three 64 Kbps clear channel operation with a single 64 Kbps common signaling channel. It is used in conjunction with DCHI to provide PRA. The PRI circuit card provides the physical DS- 1 interface and is also used for DTI applications. Quantity-One per Primary Rate Access (PRA) or DTI link QPC742 Floppy Disk Interface System Hardware-All between the Floppy Disk Unit and one CPU. Provides address matching, disk drive control, data buffering and interrupt control circuits. Quantity-One per CPU D-Channel Handler Interface System Hardware-All D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI) card processes the LAPD protocol for ISDN primary rate signaling channel and ISDN Signaling Link (ISL). It also provides a single asynchronous Serial Data Interface (SDI) port. Quantity-One per 16 PRI links to the same location (eight maximum per system) QPC841 Four-Port Serial Data Interface System Hardware-All four serial ports between the system processor and an external device. Each port supports RS-232-C interface 8-bit ASCII data with parity and stop bit asynchronous, start-stop operation rates of 300,600, and 9600 baud Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) mode Data Communication Equipment (DCE) mode System configuration 7-35 Quantity-Up to four per system QPC939 Read-Only Memory System Hardware-System option Memory (ROM) daughterboard on the QPC579 CPU Function card. Quantity-One per CPU QPC940 Read-Only Memory System option 21 Purpose--ROM daughterboard on the QPC687 CPU with card. Quantity-One per CPU Peripheral Equipment cards AD Controller-2 System Hardware-All except system option 21A Purpose-Provides a primary interface and control function between the Superloop Network card and the IPE Module over up to two superloops. Each Controller-2 card serves up to 16 IPE cards. The Controller-2 card interfaces with up to two Superloop Network microprocessor which performs cards. It is equipped with a Motorola some local call processing and maintenance diagnostics, thus off-loading the system CPU. Quantity-One per IPE Module AC Controller-4 System Hardware--All except system option 21A Purpose-Provides a primary interface and control function between the Superloop Network card and the IPE Module over up to four superloops. Each Controller-4 card serves up to 16 IPE cards. The Controller-4 card interfaces with up to four Superloop Network cards. It is equipped with a Motorola microprocessor which performs some local call processing and maintenance diagnostics, thus-off-loading the system CPU. Quantity-One per System IPE Module Digital Line card Hardware-All 7-36 System configuration Purpose-Provides interface to up to 16 digital integrated voice and data sets for a total of 32 ports. It is equipped with an Intel microprocessor which performs several functions, some of which are as follows: control of card operation card identification self-test status reporting to the Controller maintenance diagnostics Quantity-Up to sixteen cards per IPE Module Analog Line card System Hardware-All interface to up to 16 analog sets It is equipped with an Intel 805 1 -type microprocessor which performs several functions, some of which are as follows: control of card operation card identification self-test status reporting to the Controller maintenance diagnostics Quantity-Up to sixteen cards per IPE Module Analog Message Waiting Line card System Hardware-All interface to up to 16 analog sets with Message It is equipped with an Intel 805 1 -type microprocessor which Waiting lamp feature. performs several functions, some of which are as follows: control of card operation card identification self-test status reporting to the Controller maintenance diagnostics Quantity-Up to sixteen cards per IPE Module -- Universal Trunk System Hardware-All Purpose---Provides interface connecting the trunk facility to the IPE microprocessor which performs Module. It is equipped with an Intel several functions, some of which are as follows: System configuration 7-37 control of card operation card identification self-test status reporting to the Controller maintenance diagnostics This card interfaces eight 600 or 900 trunks with the system in A-Law or application. Each of these eight ports can be to operate as: Central Office (CO) Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk 2-way Tie, Dial Repeating (2DR) 2-way Tie, Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial (OAID) trunk Outgoing Automatic Number Identification trunk Recorded Announcement (RAN) trunk Music Paging trunk The Universal Trunk card is software selectable and complies with CSA Standard C82.2 No. 0.7 Ml985 and EIA Standard 464A. Quantity-Up to sixteen cards per IPE Module E&M Trunk System Hardware--All in both A-Law and applications. Provides interface connecting the trunk facility to the Module. It is equipped with an Intel microprocessor which performs several functions, some of which are as follows: control of card operation card identification self-test status reporting to the Controller maintenance diagnostics The E&M Trunk provides four analog trunks, each of which can be individually configured to operate as: E&M signaling two-wire Tie trunk four-wire Tie trunk Paging trunk The E&M Trunk card is software selectable and complies with CSA Standard C82.2 No. 0.7 Ml985 and EIA Standard 464A. .. 7-38 System configuration Quantity-Up to sixteen cards per System IPE Module Receiver Hardware-All Purpose-Provides a total of eight channels of Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) detection. These channels are assigned on the loop. There is one tone reporting. 8 Kbps signaling channel provided for maintenance messaging The Receiver allows access to the filters for parameter alterations in order to service different environments (e.g. international applications). Quantity-Refer to System engineering for engineering details. QPC62 1.5 Baud Converter System Hardware-System option Purpose-Used for Remote Peripheral Equipment applications. Converts an Sl-1 loop into two carrier loops. Used with 1.5 Mb/s Remote Peripheral Equipment Contains switch-selectable line equalizers. Note: or later vintage is required. Quantity-Two for each network loop, one in the local module and one in the remote module QPC63 Local Carrier Buffer System Hardware-System option 2 1 Purpose--Used for RPE applications. Performs the following functions: Generates from the 2.048 MHz clock a 1.544 MHz clock Decodes and provides enables for outgoing and incoming data Delays the data incoming from the carrier so that its frame relative to the outgoing data frame is equivalent to that returning from a peripheral buffer Relays line status information to the processor Decodes line control information from the processor Note: or later vintage is required. Quantity-One for each network loop connected to the equipment location QPC65 Remote Peripheral Switch System Hardware-System option 2 at the local 1 Purpose--Used for RPE applications. Performs the following functions: Module, card, and line enables plus the bypass bit. to the modules it serves at the remote site System configuration 7-39 Cyclic scanning of the terminals it serves for incoming signaling messages Monitoring of time slot 0 for outgoing messages Assembling incoming messages or later vintage is required. Quantity-One per network loop at the remote location QPC66 2M Baud Converter System Hardware--System option 2 1 for RPE applications. Converts two carrier loops in to an Meridian 1 loop. or later vintage is required. Quantity-Two required for each network loop, one in the local module and one in the remote module. QPC67 Carrier Maintenance System Hardware-System option 2 1 for RPE applications. Contains an M-type (3017 Hz) fault-locate filter. Provides DC detection circuitry for the fault-locate pair, and carrier relays to facilitate software maintenance testing. Terminates and gives access to the order wire pair via a jack and binding posts on the faceplate. or later vintage is required. Quantity-One per Module QPC71 Signaling and Paging Trunk System Hardware-All except system option 21A Purpose-Used in applications in one of the following ways to interface with appropriate types of trunk facilities -E&M signaling, 2-way dial repeating trunk 2-wire DX signaling, 2-way dial repeating trunk 4-wire DX signaling, 2-way dial repeating trunk (a repeater, externally to 4-wire) mounted, converts the trunk from paging trunk or externally mounted loudspeaker Refer to signaling and paging trunk 187) for more details. Circuit description Each card contains two separate, identical trunk circuits. Trunk usage option is selected by switches on the circuit card. Note: or later vintage is required. 7-40 System configuration Quantity-One per two trunk circuits Carrier Interface System Hardware--System option 2 for RPE applications. Contains two carrier line receivers with 7.5 pads built-in. Converts bipolar line signals into level signals. Provides facilities for carrier looping. Monitors system and invokes emergency transfer if carrier fails. or later vintage is required. Quantity-Two per network loop QPC192 Off-Premises Extension Line System Hardware-All except system option 21A Off-Premises Extension (OPX) line circuit interfaces with sets in applications. ‘The loop range from the PE Module to excluding the set. This trunk may also be used when station apparatus is 1400 the line-to-line loss required is less than 5 Refer to line packs Description and operation (553-2201-183) for more information. Quantity-One per two OPX lines QPC237 E&M/DX signaling trunk System Hardware-All except system option 21A Purpose---Used in applications in one of the following modes to interface with appropriate types of trunk facilities: E&M Signaling, 2-way dial repeating trunk 4-wire DX signaling, 2-way dial repeating trunk only) Each trunk card has two separate, identical trunk circuits with a balanced terminating impedance of 600 Trunk usage options are selected by option trunk circuit description switches on the pack. Refer to Four-wire (553-2001-190). Note: or later vintage is required. Quantity-Maximum of 10 cards per per IPE Module PE Module; maximum of 16 cards QPC250 Release Link Trunk System Hardware-All except system option 21A Purpose--Used to interface a remote system, arranged for the Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) option, with the main system where CAS attendant is located. Refer to Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) -Feature description and System configuration 7-41 engineering (553-2681-100) and Release Link Trunk- Description, operation, and installation (553-2681-180) for more information. The card contains two separate, identical trunk circuits, with balanced terminating impedance of 900 Note: Quantity-One per or later vintage is required. Release Link Trunks QPC297 Attendant Console Monitor System except system option 21A attendant consoles (including add-on modules) when the supervisory console feature is used. Allows the supervisory attendant to monitor calls being handled by attendants within the customer group. Quantity-One per feature console in systems using Supervisory Console QPC422 Tone Detector System Hardware-All except system option 21A Purpose-Identifies tones and reports to CPU appropriately. Each card contains two tone detector circuits controlled by two microprocessors. Refer to Tone Circuit description 19 1) for more information. Detector Quantity-One per system QPC430 Asynchronous Interface Line System Hardware-All except system option 21 A four asynchronous line ports. Used in the SL-1 Data Feature to SL-I interface to data equipment conforming to the EIA RS-422 standard. Refer to Data Feature General description and provisioning (553-273 1- 100) for more information. Note: or later vintage is required. Quantity-One per four data lines QPC432 Data Line System Hardware-All except system option 21A -- Purpose-Provides four data-only ports for the SL- 1 Data Feature. Refer to General description and provisioning (553-273 100) for more information. Data Feature Note: or later vintage is required. Quantity-One per four data ports .. 7-42 System configuration QPC449 Loop Signaling Trunk System Hardware-All except system option the following 600 or 900 trunks in Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 2-way Tie, Dial Repeating (2DR) 2-way Tie, Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial (OAID) Outgoing Automatic Number Identification (OANI) applications: The card contains four separate identical trunk circuits. Trunk usage option is selected by switches on the circuit card. Refer to Circuitpack option settings 3001-211) for more information. Quantity-One per four loop signaling trunks QPC450 Trunk System Hardware-All except system option 2 Purpose-Interfaces four 600 or 900 S2 CO, FX or WATS trunks with the system in applications. The card can also detect ringing on either the tip or ring leads and has provision to extend the normal loop range from 1200 to 2600 using balanced battery boost from the Central Office. Refer to trunk engineering description ( 553-2201-185) for more information. The card contains four separate identical trunk circuits. Trunk usage option is selected by switches on the circuit card. Note: or later vintage is required. Quantity-One per four trunks QPC578 Integrated Services Digital Line System Hardware-All except system option 21A the Digital telephone sets and the associated ASCII terminals on Time Compression Multiplexing (TCM) loops to the system. Each card contains 16 separate line circuits, 8 Data circuits and 8 Voice circuits. Quantity-One per 16 digital lines QPC594 Line System Hardware-All except system option 21A Purpose--Allows for 16 circuits per card (quad density) using p-law. Quantity-One per 16 lines QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer System Hardware-All except system option 2 1 A System configuration 7-43 Purpose-Interfaces one or two network loops. Also, a can be used to convert multifrequency dialing signals from a dc pulses suitable for processing in the system control. Quantity-One per daughterboard station to PE Module QPC723 FE-232 Interface Line System Hardware-All except system option Purpose--This card provides four direct interfaces to RS-232 asynchronous ASCII computer equipment, such as asynchronous hosts, modems, standard off-the-shelf X.25 Packet Assembler/Disassembler (PAD), data and multiplexers. Quantity-One per PE Module QPC789 1 Line (Message Waiting) System Hardware-AI except system option 21A interface to up to 16 analog sets Waiting lamp feature. Quantity-One per 16 with Message Message Waiting lines QPC918 High-Speed Data Card System Hardware---All except system option 21A Purpose-Supports two data ports that operate independently of each other in mode. Interfaces with any port on the QPC432 4-Port Data Line Card. The High-Speed Data Card (HSDC) provides an interface to high speed synchronous devices, such as front end processors or video conferencing ports, through the Multi-Channel System (MCDS) and the PBX. In synchronous mode, it supports data speeds of up to 64 kbps. Refer to High-Speed Data Curd Description, and operation (553-273 l-108) for more information. Quantity-As required Station equipment Meridian Modular Telephones The Meridian Modular Telephones are designed to provide cost effective integrated voice and data communication capability. The following Meridian Modular Telephones are available: single line telephone with 6 programmable keys multi-line set with 8 programmable keys high performance multi-line set with 16 programmable keys and integrated Handsfree unit 7-44 System configuration Telephone Security Group Class II approved telephone designed to provide on-hook security. It is similar to the M2616, with 16 programmable keys, but has no handsfree capability. multi-line set for ACD operations. It has 15 programmable function keys, a special ACD Display Module and two RJ-32 jacks for modular headsets multi-line set for ACD operations. It has 15 programmable function keys, and a special ACD Display. It is similar to model 1, but with one for an PJ-327 jack for a carbon agent headset and one supervisor headset The following hardware options can be add on to Meridian Modular Telephones: External Alerter Interface Board Display Module Programmable Data Adapter Key Expansion Module Refer to Meridian Modular Telephones 2201 -116) for additional information. Description and specifications (553- M2000 series digital telephones The following types of M2000 digital telephones are available for integrated voice and data communications: The has 9 keys for features and lines The has 12 keys which are as follows: 11 keys for features and lines one key to control the built-in handsfree feature The M2317 has 17 keys which are as follows: 11 programmable keys one key to control the built-in handsfree feature five soft keys which are programmable for software features An asynchronous data option circuit board and data option power supply are available for the M2000 series digital telephones to provide for connecting data terminals to the sets. For additional information on these telephones, refer to description, installation, operation, and maintenance. Digital Telephones __ The 1) Touchphone is a digital integrated voice and data telephone with a touch sensitive Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screen for feature implementation. Refer to Meridian Touchphone -Description, installation, operation, and maintenance (553-2201-115) for additional information. System configuration 7-45 An asynchronous data option circuit board and data option power supply (TEC 00020) are available to provide for connecting data terminals to the sets. Ml 250 and M2250 attendant consoles The Ml250 and M2250 incorporate design improvements based on the previous and are functionally, compatible with the QCW4. The Attendant Console Ml250 is driven and powered by analog line cards and is compatible with QCW4 console cabling schemes. The M2250 is driven and powered by a digital line card and has a modified cabling scheme. The following list describes the applications for SL- 1 System attendant consoles. The Ml250 is designed to work in analog mode and functions through an analog line card when connected to a digital switch. The is a digital version of the M1250, offering additional features. A to the switch. digital link connects the Refer to and additional information. Attendant Consoles description 117) for asynchronous/ synchronous interface module The Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module (ASIM) is similar to the QMT9 but provides added dialing capabilities and six data feature keys and associated lamps and data control switches. Refer to SL-I Feature General description and provisioning (553-273 1- 100) for more information. QMT12 add-on data module The synchronous ADM provides a V.35 interface between the Meridian 1 system and customer-supplied data equipment. Refer to SL-1 Feature General description and provisioning (553-273 l-100) for more information. Each ADM requires a local supplementary power supply such as the PO593922 or PO6 10756 transformer. high-speed data module This module is similar to the 1 module. It provides interface and allows synchronous data transmission of up to 64 kbps. It provides connectivity to the Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) for intra-switch communications, as well as wide area communications over links to other Northern Telecom switches. Refer to QMT21 High-Speed Module Description, installation, and operation (553-2731-107) for more information. Asynchronous data options These microprocessor-controlled devices provide the interface (RS-232 compatible) through which ASCII Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) may be connected to the Meridian 1 network. Two types of asynchronous data options are available for use with the following digital telephones: printed circuit board for use with M2009, and digital Digital Telephones -Description, telephones. Refer to Meridian installation, operation, and maintenance (553-2201-l 10) for more information. 7-46 System configuration telemanuals.com printed circuit board assembly and housing for’M3000 digital Description, touchphone. Refer to Meridian installation, operation, andmaintenance (553-2201-l 15) for additional information. The following features are available: Automatic data rate detection at all rates using the ASCII “Carriage Return” character Keyboard dialing for originating data calls to local andremote hosts or DTE from the terminal keyboard Break detection and generation Meridian programmable data adapter This adapter provides the interface (RS-232 compatible) through which ASCII Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) may be connected to the Meridian 1 network. It is available with the and M2616 Meridian Modular Telephones Some of the features available are as follows: keyboard dialing for originating data calls to local or remote hosts or DTE telephone keypad dialing for originating and releasing data calls parameter setting from telephone keypad voice call origination from terminal keyboard script file capabilities to pre-program resource locations via mnemonic address names Software provisioning Call processing, maintenance and administration of the Meridian 1 system are controlled by computer programs. These programs and the office data (system characteristics) are stored in the system memory and on disk. A mass storage unit is used to load the system programs and office data into the memory. Table 7-5 lists all the data administration overlay programs. Every system requires the Basic PBX Features as the base software package. Optional software features may then be added. The basic and optional features are outlined in Tables 7-6 and 7-7. Note that some software packages require other packages as an operating base. These dependencies are also provided in the tables. Table 7-8 lists a majority of the features with its parameters. Some of the parameters have changed in Releases 13 and 14 due to the introduction of the System Capacity Expansion feature. For a complete list of all-features and associated parameters, refer to XII features and services’ (553-3001-305). Table 7-9 lists the memory requirements for each feature option. This table indicates the size of the programs (in K’s, where equals 1024 words). telemanuals.com System configuration 7-47 Table 7-5 Data administration overlay programs Single-line telephone sets Multi-line telephone sets LD12 Attendant Console Receivers and Tone Detectors LD13 LD14 Trunks LD15 Customer data LD16 Trunk Routes & Automatic Trunk Maintenance LD17 Configuration LD18 Speed Call, Group Call, Pretranslation and Hot Line Code Record Restriction LD20 Print Routine 1 LD21 Print Routine 2 LD22 Print Routine 3 LD23 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Messaging features LD24 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) LD25 Move data blocks LD26 Group Do Not Disturb LD28 Route Selection for Automatic Number Identification LD29 Memory Management LD49 New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) LD50 Call Park LD56 Flexible Tones and Cadences LD57 Flexible Feature Codes LD73 Digital Trunk/Primary Rate Interface error thresolds Print features and stations LD82 Print hunt chains & multiple appearance groups LD83 Print designated (DES) LD84 Designators (DES) for single-line telephone sets LD85 Designators (DES) for multi-line telephone sets -continued 7-48 System configuration Table 7-5 Data administration overlay programs (continued) LD86 Electronic Switched Network (ESN) ESN data block Digit manipulation data (DGT) Incoming Trunk Group Exclusion (ITGE) Route list (RLB) Special common carrier (SCC) LD87 Electronic Switched Network (ESN) Network control (NCTL) Free calling area screening (FCAS) Coordinated Dailing Plan (CDP) LD88 Basic and Network Authorization code ESN Network Translation tables Multi-Tenant Service and Console Presentation Group Call Party Name Display LD97 Configuration Record 2 telemanuals.com System configuration 7-49 Table 7-6 Feature and software options Feature option name Number Mnemonic ACD Activity Code Entry 155 ACNT ACD CDR Queue Record 83 CDRQ ACD Load Management (C2) 43 LMAN ACD Package A 45 ACDA ACD Package B 41 ACDB ACD Package Cl 42 ACDC ACD Package D 50 ACDD R2 ACD Package D, Auxiliary Link Processor 51 LNK R2 ACD Priority Agent 116 PAGT R12 ACD Timed Ove 111 TOF ACD-D Auxiliary Security 114 Advanced Network Services 148 Route Selection 13 Attendant R3 R12 NTWK R13 54 AA 174 AAA Attendant Overflow Position 56 AOP Automatic Answerback 47 AAB Automatic Line Selection 72 LSEL R4 Automatic 12 R7 Attendant Administration Release Alternative Number Answering Identification R15 Automatic Trunk Maintenance 84 ATM Automatic Wake-Up 102 AWU AUTOVON Defense Switched Network (DSN) 68 ATVN R4 AUTOVON Call Detail Recording 69 ACDR R4 Auxiliary Processor Link 109 APL Background Terminal 99 BGD Basic Routing 14 BRTE Basic Alternate Route Selection 57 BARS Basic Authorization Code 25 BAUT Basic Automatic Call Distribution 40 BACD -continued , System configuration Table 7-6 Feature and software options (continued) Feature option name Number Mnemonic Basic Call Processing 0 BASIC Basic Queuing 28 Call Detail Recording 4 Call Park 33 Call Detail Recording Expansion 151 CDRE Call Party Name Display 95 CPND Call-by-Call Service Selection 117 CBC R13 Calling line ID in CDR 118 CCDR R13 CDR on Data Link 6 CLNK CDR on Teletype Machine (TTY) 5 CTY Centralized Attendant Services (Main) 26 CASM Centralized (Remote) 27 CASR 157 THF 23 CHG 24 CAB Attendant Services Switchhook Flash Charge Account for CDR Charge Account/Authorization Code Release CDR R2 R13 R14 Command Status Link 77 Console Presentation Group Level Services 172 Controlled Class Of Service 81 Coordinated Dialing Plan 59 CDP CSL with Alpha Signaling 85 CSLA R8 Deluxe Hold 71 DHLD R4 Departmental Listed Directory Number 76 DLDN Dial Intercom 21 DI Dialed Number Identification Service 9 Digit Display 19 DDSP Digital Sets 88 DSET Direct Inward System Access 22 Directed Call Pickup 115 DCP Directory Number Expansion 150 DNXP -continued R8 CPGS R7 8 R7 System configuration 7-51 Table 7-6 Feature and software options (continued) Feature option name Number Mnemonic Release 74 DRNG R4 Distinctive Ringing, New 74 DRNG. Do-Not-Disturb, Group 16 DNDG Do-Not-Disturb, Individual 9 Distinctive Ringing End-To-End Signaling 10 EES Enhanced Conference, TDS and MFS card 204 XCTO Enhanced Controlled Class of Service 173 ECCS Enhanced Music 119 EMUS 1 OPTF 203 XPE R15 Fast Tone and Digit Switch 87 FTDS R7 Flexible Call Back Queuing 61 FCBQ Flexible Feature Codes 139 FFC Forced Charge Account 52 FCA Group Call 48 GRP 70 HOT 113 IDC R12 ntegrated Messaging System Link 35 IMS R2 nter-exchange 149 IEC R13 Extended PBX Features Extended Peripheral (superloop) Equipment R12 File Line Services DID Digit Conversion Carrier Treatment 11 nternal Call Detail Recording (CDR) 108 SDN Application Protocol Third Party Jendor 153 .SDN Primary Rate Access 146 signaling 145 signaling Link 147 Last Number Redial 90 Line Load Control 105 -continued PRA R13 LNR 7-52 System configuration Table 7-6 Feature and software options (continued) M2317 Digital Display Set M3000 Touchphone Make Set Busy Malicious Call Trace Meridian Modular Telephone Sets Meridian SL-1 ST Message Center Message Registration Multiple-Customer Multiple-Tenant Operation Service Music Network ACD Network Alternate Route Selection Network Authorization Code Network Call Transfer Network Class Of Service Network Message Center Main Network Queuing Network 38 MCBQ 37 Signaling R2 Network Speed Call 39 NSC Network Measurements 29 NTRF Yew Flexible Code Restriction 49 NFCR 62 OHQ 20 ODAS 79 OOD Traffic Queuing Data Administration System Outpulsing Delay PBX Interface for 75 Pretranslation 92 PXLT Priority 60 PQUE Queuing Property Management System Interface 103 -continued R2 R2 R2 R8 System configuration 7-53 Table 7-6 Feature and software options (continued) Feature option name Number Mnemonic Recorded Announcement 7 RAN Recorded Overflow Announcement 36 ROA Remote Peripheral Equipment 15 RPE Room Status 100 RMS Set 53 SR Relocation Station Category Indication 80 Station Loop Preemption 106 Stored Number Redial 64 Superloop Supervisory Administration Attendant (LD97) Console Release R2 R7 SNR R3 205 R15 93 R8 System Speed Call 34 ssc R2 Time and Date 8 TAD Tone Detector 65 TDET R7 Trunk Verification from a Station 110 TVS R9.32 2.0 Mbit/s Primary Rate Interface 154 2500 Set Features 18 SS25 Rl 500 Set Features 73 ss5 R4 R14 7-54 System configuration Table 7-7 Feature options and package dependencies Option number 0 Feature option name and dependencies Basic Call Processing Mnemonic Release BASIC includes the following features: -Call Transfer -Conference -Call Forward No Answer -Hunt -Call Pickup 1 Extended PBX Features OPTF Includes the following features: -Call Forward All Calls Override Ring Again -Secretarial Filtering -Speed Call -Voice Call 2 Multiple-Customer 4 Call Detail Recording Package Operation CUST CDR dependencies: CTY (5) or CLNK (6) This is the base package for CDR. See also CDR with Charge Account 24) CDR Magnetic Tape (CLNK-6) CDR TTY (CTY-5) CDR Queue Record (CDR-83) -Internal CDR (ICDR-108) -AUTOVON (ACDR-69) -continued -- System configuration 7-55 Table 7-7 Feature options and package dependencies (continued) Package dependencies: Package dependencies: Package dependencies: Package dependencies: Package dependencies: Package dependencies: -continued System configuration Table 7-7 Feature options and package dependencies (continued) Package dependencies: Package dependencies: CASR cannot be used with AOP-56 One of the following packages must -continued System configuration 7-57 Table 7-7 Feature options and package dependencies (continued) Option number 35 Feature option name and dependencies integrated Messaging System Link Mnemonic Release IMS R2 ROA R2 Package dependencies: BACD-40 AC DA-45 M WC-46 APL-109 is required in Release 10 and later software. 36 Recorded Overflow Announcement Package dependencies: RAN-7 37 Network R2 Signaling Package dependencies: NCOS-32 38 Network Queuing Package Main MCBQ R2 NSC R2 dependencies: NCOS-32 NSIG-37 FCBQ-61 39 Network Speed Call Package dependencies: ssc-34 BARS-56, or NARS-57 40 Basic Automatic Call Distribution This is the base package for ACD. See also ACD Basic; package A 45) ACD Advanced; package B (ACDB-41) -continued BACD 7-58 System configuration Table 7-7 Feature options and package dependencies (continued) Option number Feature option name and dependencies Mnemonic Release ACD Management Reports; package Cl (ACDC-42) -ACD Load Management; package C2 (LMAN-43) -ACD Package D (ACDD-50) ACD Auxiliary Link Processor (LNK-51) record (CDRQ-83) ACD Timed Overflow 111) Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS-98) 41 ACDB ACD Package B Package dependencies: BACD-40 AC DA-45 42 ACDC ACD Package Cl Package dependencies: BACD-40 ACDB-41 AC DA-45 43 ACD Load Management (C2) Package LMAN dependencies: BACD-40 ACDB-41 AC DC-42 AC DA-45 44 MUS Music Package dependencies: RAN-7 -continued -- System configuration 7-59 Table 7-7 Feature options and package dependencies (continued) Package dependencies: Package dependencies: Package dependencies: LNK-51 51 ACD Package D, Auxiliary Link Processor Package LNK dependencies: ACDD-50 52 FCA Forced Charge Account Package dependencies: CHG-23 CAB-24 53 Set Relocation SR 54 Attendant AA 55 History File 56 Attendant Overflow Position Administration AOP cannot be used with CASM-26 or CASR-27. conenueo AOP R2 7-60 System configuration Table 7-7 Feature options and package dependencies (continued) Option number 57 Feature option name and dependencies Basic Alternate Route Selection Package Mnemonic Release BARS dependencies: BRTE-14 NCOS-32 58 Network Alternate Route Selection NARS Package dependencies: BRTE-14 NCOS-32 59 Coordinated Dialing Plan CDP Package dependencies: BRTE-14 NCOS-32 FCBQ-61 60 PQUE Priority Queuing Package dependencies: NCOS-32 61 Flexible Call Back Queuing Package FCBQ dependencies: BQU E-28 BARS (57) or NARS (58) or CDP 62 Off-Hook Queuing Package OHQ dependencies: BQUE-28 BARS-57 or NARS-58 83 Network Authorization Code Package NAUT dependencies: CAB-24 -- BAUT-25 BARS (57) or NARS (58) or CDP -continued System configuration 7-61 Table 7-7 Feature options and package dependencies (continued) Option number Feature option name and dependencies Mnemonic Release 64 Stored Number Redial SNR R3 65 Tone Detector TDET R7 67 Network Call Transfer ANN R4 ACDR R4 Package dependencies: NCOS-32 NSIG-37 68 AUTOVON Defense Switched Network (DSN) Package dependencies: NCOS-32 69 AUTOVON Call Detail Recording Package dependencies: CDR-4 ATVN-68 CTY-5 or CLNK-6 Package dependencies: Package dependencies: -continued 7-62 System configuration Table 7-7 Feature options and package dependencies (continued) Option number 77 79 80 81 83 Package dependencies: CDR-4 I I BACD-40 84 Automatic Trunk Package Maintenance dependencies: ATM I R7 I TDET-65 85 CSL with Alpha Signaling Package CSLA R8 TENS R7 dependencies: DDSP-19 CSL-77 Meridian Mail MP systems also require PBXI-75. 86 Multiple-Tenant 87 Fast Tone and Digit Switch FTDS R7 Digital Telephone Set DSET R7 M3000 Touchphone TSET R7 Last Number Redial LNR R8 M2317 Digital Display Telephone Set DLT2 89 Package Service dependencies: DS ET-88 Package dependencies: DSET-88 92 Pretranslation PXLT -continued System configuration 7-63 Table 7-7 Feature options and package dependencies (continued) Option number Feature option name and dependencies 93 Supervisory 95 Call Party Name Display Attendant Package Mnemonic Release CPND RIO Console dependencies: DDSP-19 DSET-88 TSET-89 ODAS-20* ‘The ODAS package is required for DES. “The BGD package is required for Hotel/Motel applications. 96 Meridian SL-1 ST 98 Dialed Number Identification Service Package SLST RIO dependencies: DDSP-19 AC DA-45 APL-l APL package is required for DP link. The IDC package is required for routing by DNIS. 99 Background Terminal Facility Package BGD RIO dependencies: CCOS-81 RMS-100, MR-101 , AWU-102, or PMSI-103 -- 7-64 System configuration Table 7-7 Feature options and package dependencies (continued) Option number 100 Feature option name and dependencies Mnemonic Release RMS Room Status Package dependencies: CCOS-81 BGD-99 M Packages DNDI-9 and MWC-46 are required for lamp status. 101 Message Registration Package MR dependencies: CCOS-81 BGD-99 102 AWU Automatic Wake-Up Package dependencies: RAN-7 CCOS-81 BGD-99 103 Property Management System I nte Package dependencies: CCOS-81 BGD-99 RMS-100 105 Line Load Control Package dependencies: ATVN-68’ The AUTOVON package is not required in Release 13 l and later software. -continued -- System configuration Table 7-7 Feature options and package dependencies (continued) 114 Package dependencies: Package dependencies: Package dependencies: Package dependencies: ACD-D Auxiliary Security Package AUXS R12 dependencies: ACDD-50 LNK-51 115 Directed Call Pickup DCP R12 116 ACD Priority Agent PAGT R12 Package dependencies: AC DA-45 117 Call-by-Call Service Selection Package dependencies: NARS-58 ISDN-145 IEC-149* IEC package is required for Inter-exchange carrier. -continued CBC 7-66 System configuration Table 7-7 Feature options and package dependencies (continued) Package dependencies: Package dependencies: Package dependencies: Package dependencies: Package dependencies: Package dependencies: NARS-58 or CDP-59 PRA-146 or package is required -continued System configuration 7-67 Table 7-7 Feature options and package dependencies (continued) Option number 149 Feature option name and dependencies Inter-exchange Carrier Package dependencies: Mnemonic Release IEC ISDN-145 PRA-146 150 Directory Number Expansion DNXP R13 151 Call Detail Recording Expansion CDRE R13 Package dependencies: CDR-4 DNXP-150 153 Application Protocol Third Party Vendor Package R13 dependencies: CSL-77 154 R14 2.0 Mbit/s Primary Rate Interface Package dependencies: ISDN-145 155 ACD Activity Code Entry Package ACNT R13 THF R14 dependencies: ACDD-50 LNK-51 AUXS-114 157 170 Switchhook Flash R14 Meridian Modular Telephone Sets Package dependencies: DSET-88 or TSET-89 172 Console Presentation Group Level Services Package TEN dependencies: 86 -continued CPGS -- 7-68 System configuration Table 7-7 Feature options and package dependencies (continued) Option number 173 Feature option name and dependencies Enhanced Controlled Class of Service Package CCOS Mnemonic ECCS dependencies: 81 174 Attendant 175 Network Message Center Alternative Answering AAA NMC Package dependencies: Network Message Center: Originating or Terminating PBX: MWC-46 NTWK-148 Tandem PBX: NTWK-148 Meridian Mail Originating PBX: EES-10 MWC-46 NTWK-148 Tandem PBX: EES-10 NTWK-148 Terminating PBX: EES-10 IMS-35 BACD-40 ACDA-45 MWC-46 CSL-77 NTWK-148 ACD Message Center: Originating PBX: MWC-46 148 Tandem PBX: NTWK-148 Terminating PBX: ACDA-45 46 NTWK-148 178 NACD Network ACD Package Release dependencies: BQUE (28) NCOS (32) (37) ACDB (41) -continued R15 System configuration 7-69 Table 7-7 Feature options and package dependencies (continued) Option number Feature option name and Mnemonic Release XPE R15 dependencies CDP (59) TOF (111) (145) PRA (146) or ISL (147) The NTWK (148) package is required for remote targets. 203 Extended Peripheral (superloop) Package 204 Equipment dependencies: Enhanced Conference, TDS and MFS card Package dependencies: 205 Superloop Administration (LD97) XCTO 7-70 System configuration Table 7-8 Feature parameters Feature Previous parameter Attendant Consoles 63 Attendant Incoming Call Indicators 20 New parameter Release for new parameter Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) ACD agents l 1200 * 240 Basic Authorization Code Digits 14 l Call Party Name Display characters 27 Call Detail Recording Charge Account digits 23 Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) CDP Route List Entry * 3 7 R13 CDP Route List Index 32 128 R13 CDP Steering Codes 5K * 32 100 (Note) R14 254 2046 R14 20 R13 30 R13 8 32 R13 7 14 R13 20K 50K R14 8 100 R13 16 100 R13 4 100 Customer Groups l Dial Intercom Groups l Do Not Disturb Groups* 100 Do Not Disturb entries per group 127 Group Call Members (per group) 10 Listed Directory Numbers (LDN) Multiple Appearance Multiple Tenants R13 4 l 16 l 512 l Route List Entry Network Authorization Code Digits Network Authorization Codes l l Network Class of Service (NCOS) NCOS Groups NCOS Groups CDP NCOS Groups l l l -continued -- R13 System configuration 7-71 Table 7-8 Feature parameters (continued) Feature Previous parameter New parameter Release for new parameter 1 512 R14 255 4095 R13 Speed Call Lists/Hotline Lists 255 8191 R13 System Speed Call Lists Trunk Groups 255 4096 R13 128 512 (Note) Trunk Group Access Restrictions 15 31 R13 Trunk Group Members (per trunk group) 127 254 R13 New Flexible Code Restriction Digits per NFCR trees 50 Trees per trunk route 8 255 Trees per customer Private Line Routes Ringing Number Pickup Groups l Per customer Per system l 7-72 System configuration Table 7-9 Program size Model/System Option Package Mnemonic Package Name No. A 0 Basic PBX Features 131.91 103.24 1 OPTF Extended PBX Features 17.67 12.58 2 CUST Multi-Customer 9.19 6.38 Automatic Inward/Outward Dialing 0.91 0.66 3 4 CDR Call Detail Recording 2.48 1.76 5 CTY CDR on I 0.83 6 CLNK CDR on Mag Tape 0.89 0.64 7 RAN Recorded Announcement 1.60 1.15 8 TAD Time and Date 0.76 0.56 Do Not Disturb 0.43 0.31 End-to-End 1.00 0.69 9 IO EES Signaling II I nte rcept 0.00 0.00 12 Automatic Number If-identification 1.74 1.26 0.22 0.18 7.86 5.63 I 0.74 Do Not Disturb Group 0.49 0.35 I3 I4 Route Selection BRTE RPE Basic Routing Remote Peripheral Equipment 16 DNDG 17 MSB Make Set Busy 0.21 0.15 I8 SS25 2500 Set Features 0.96 0.71 I9 DDSP Digit Display (SLI) 4.63 3.35 20 ODAS Office Administration System 0.72 0.88 21 Dial Intercom Group 0.74 0.54 22 Direct Inward System Access 0.35 0.25 0.28 23 CHG CDR Charge Account 0.38 24 CAB Charge Account/Authorization Code Base 1.28 -continued Svstem Table 7-9 Program size (continued) Mnemonic Package Name Model/System Option No. ST/21 A 25 BAUT Basic Authorization Code 0.31 26 CASM Centralized Attendant Service Main 0.23 0.17 27 CASR Centralized Attendant Service Remote 7.85 5.56 28 BQUE Base Queuing 2.70 1.93 29 NTRF Network Traffic 0.54 0.38 30 CMAC N/W Communication Management Center 1.00 0.70 31 MCDR Mini CDR 32 NCOS Network Class of Service 0.08 0.06 33 CPRK Call Park 4.23 2.97 34 ssc System Speed Call 0.10 0.08 3.02 2.17 Recorded Overflow Announcement 0.43 0.31 Network 2.69 2.01 Network Queuing Main 2.86 2.01 Network 0.00 0.00 35 36 1.31 IMS,UST,U Integrated Message System MG ROA 37 0.91 38 MCBQ 39 NSC 40 BACD Automatic Call Distribution Base 17.63 12.78 41 ACDB ACD Package B 0.13 0.09 42 ACDC ACD Package C 20.87 14.80 43 LMAN ACD Load Management 0.00 0.00 44 MUS Music 1.39 0.97 45 ACDA ACD Package A 0.00 0.00 46 MWC Multiple Message Centre 2.80 2.03 47 AAB Auto Answerback 0.12 48 GRP Group Call 2.35 Speedcall connnuea 1.65 7-73 7-74 System configuration Table 7-9 Program size (continued) Package Mnemonic Package Name No. New Flexible Code Restriction 49 Model/System Option -0.50 0.35 50 ACDD ACD Package D 1.50 1.03 51 LNK Auxiliary Link 4.37 3.08 52 FCA Forced Charge Account 0.00 0.00 53 SR Set Relocation 6.56 4.61 54 AA Attendant 1.00 0.73 History File 0.04 0.03 0.80 0.56 55 Administration 56 AOP Attendant Overflow Position 57 BARS Basic Automatic Route Selection 58 NARS Network Automatic Route Selection 0.00 0.00 59 CDP Coordinated Dialing Plan 0.08 0.05 60 PQUE Priority Queuing 0.00 0.00 61 FCBQ Flexible Callback Queue 0.02 0.01 62 OHQ Off-Hook Queuing 0.12 0.08 63 NAUT Network Authorization Code 0.57 0.41 64 SNR Stored Number Redial 0.96 0.68 65 TDET Tone Detector 0.45 0.32 Special Common Carrier 0.00 0.00 0.72 0.50 66 Transfer 0.00 67 NXFR Network 68 ATVN Autovon 5.52 3.99 69 ACDR Autovon CDR 0.00 0.00 70 HOT Hotline 0.26 0.19 71 DHLD Deluxe Hold 0.61 0.44 72 LSEL Line Selection 0.17 0.12 73 ss5 500 Set Dial Access 0.01 74 DRNG Distinctive 0.58 Ringing -continued ‘0.42 System configuration 7-75 Table 7-9 Program size (continued) Command Status Link Auto Modem Pooling Optional Outpulsing Delay Station Catagory indicator Controlled Class of Service Resident Debugger Trunk Maintenance 85 CSLA CSL Application Interface 0.00 0.00 86 TENS Multi-Tenant Service 0.51 0.38 87 FTDS Fast Outpulsing TDS 0.00 0.00 88 DSET Digital Sets 12.53 9.12 89 TSET SL-Touch Sets 0.00 0.00 90 LNR Last Number Redial 0.30 0.22 91 DLT2 Delta II Sets 0.00 0.00 92 PXLT Pretranslation 0.37 0.26 0.72 0.50 93 Supervisory Console 94 JTDS Japan Tones & Ringing 0.00 0.00 95 CPND Calling Party Name Display 0.90 0.64 96 SLST Gemini Machine 0.00 0.00 97 JPN Japan CO Trunks 0.00 0.00 Directory Number Identification Service 0.00 0.00 Background 11.54 8.40 98 99 BGD Terminal . . . 7-76 System configuration Table 7-9 Program size (continued) Package Mnemonic Package Name No. Model/System Option A 100 RMS Room Status 1.67 101 MR Message Restriction 0.89 0.64 102 AWU Wakeup 4.34 3.06 0.05 0.04 0.05 0.04 PMS Interface 103 104 OPAO of Japan l # 105 Line Load Control 0.08 0.06 106 Station Loop Preemption 1.23 0.89 0.34 0.24 Internal Call 0.00 0.00 107 MCT 108 Call Trace 109 APL Auxiliary Processor Link 5.07 3.71 110 TVS Trunk Verification From Station 0.00 0.00 111 TOF Time Overflow 0.00 0.00 112 NKL Notification Key Lamp 0.00 0.00 113 IDC Digit Conversion 0.44 0.31 114 AUX ACD-D Auxiliary Security 0.00 0.00 115 DCP Direct Call Pickup 0.19 0.14 116 PAGT ACD Priority Agent 0.00 0.00 Call By Call (ISA) 0.00 0.00 117 118 CCDR Calling tine Identification in CDR 0.00 0.00 119 EMUS Enhanced Music 0.00 0.00 125 FTC Flexible Tones & Cadences 0.00 0.00 129 DT12 2.0 Mbit DTI 8.57 6.12 Japan Digital MUX 0.00 0.00 Flexible Feature Codes 2.80 2.02 TCM Console 0.00 136 139 FFC 140 DCON 35.28 145 -continued -26.06 System configuration 7-77 Table 7-9 Program size (continued) Package No. 146 Mnemonic Package Name PRA Primary Rate Access 147 Signalling Link 148 NTWK 149 IEC 150 DNXP DN Expansion 151 CDRE CDR Expansion Due to DNXP Advanced Network Service ESS Interface X25 152 ACNT 157 THF 0.00 0.02 5.42 0.00 0.00 0.00 4.69 0.00 0.01 3.89 0.00 0.00 0.00 2.0 Megabit Primary Rate I nte 4.19 ACD Activity Code 0.62 0.00 0.44 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.07 0.00 0.00 0.04 AP 3rd Party Application 155 Model/System Option 3.45 0.00 2.97 153 154 T (Trunk) Flash 170 Aries Sets 171 JTDS Japan Tones 172 CPGS Console Presentation Group Service 173 ECCS Enhanced Controlled Class of Service 0.00 0.00 174 AAA Attendant Alternative Answering 0.50 0.35 175 NMC Network Message Center 1.25 0.91 178 NACD Network ACD 10.54 7.62 4.31 202 International PRA 5.78 8-1 Chapter 8 Ordering information Contents introduction Autoquote System options Package concept SL-1 system option 21, 21A SL-1 system option 51 SL-1 system option 61 SL-1 system option 71 Peripheral expansion Remote Peripheral Equipment Software Meridian Modular Telephones Power 8-4 8-4 8-5 8-6 8-l 1 8-15 8-19 8-23 8-24 8-25 8-34 8-41 Introduction Ordering Meridian 1 Communication Systems is a straightforward process. Modularity and flexibility permits each system to be individually configured to suit specific applications. The necessary equipment and associated quantity depends upon the system requirements which essentially fall into each of the following categories: Hardware . number and type of telephones type, digital telephones) . number and type of trunks (CO, FX, TIE, DID, number and type of data units (ADM, ASIM, HSDM) . number of network resources necessary to meet the traffic requirements for the various peripheral ports l Software base software required to support the system . application software associated with the required optional features l 8-2 Ordering information Power . optional AC or DC power distribution scheme From these requirements, the following system elements and their respective quantities are calculated. System Structure Universal Equipment Modules Pedestal Assembly Top Cap Assembly l l Common Equipment Common Equipment Modules Mass Storage Unit Central Processing Unit Memory Cards Network Circuit Cards Peripheral Signaling Cards Cards Segmented Bus Extenders Multigroup Extenders 3-Port Extenders Serial Data Interfaces Bus Termination Units Dummy Faceplates l . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripheral Equipment Peripheral Equipment Modules Peripheral Controllers Line Interface Cards Trunk Interface Cards Receivers Data Interface Cards Digital Trunk Interfaces Primary Rate Interfaces l l l l l l l l -- Ordering information 8-3 Terminal Equipment Modular Digital Telephones Type Telephones Attendant Consoles Key/Lamp Add-on Modules . Handsfree Headset Modules Data Access Units l l l l l Power Equipment AC or DC Power Option 48V Rectifiers Power Converters Line Transfer Units Reserve Power Requirements Ringing Generators Power and System Monitors Cooling Units Distribution Units Software Fee) Base Software Optional Application Software l l Cables Auxiliary Equipment Interconnection Termination Cables MDF Cross-Connect Terminal Blocks Designation Material l l 8-4 Ordering information Autoquote The autoquote mechanism is utilized as a base for order input. System requirements provide input for the automatic generation of associated hardware and software data. Although the autoquote system contains many engineering rules, it does not perform an exhaustive and complete configuration for every potential system requirement. The user should always review the reports produced by the system to ensure that all requirements are met. Because of this, the price quoted by the autoquote system applies only to the hardware and software items listed. It is conceivable, in some instances, that manual adjustments may have to be made to accommodate any special engineering or system requirement. The following reports are availabie from the autoquote. Description 1 Summary Price Report 3 Equipment Breakout Report 4 Engineering 5 Equipment Summary Report 6 Input Data Listing 7 RPE Summary 9 Equipment List 11 Auxiliary Load Summary 20 Unused Capacity Summary Summary Report System options To facilitate various system applications, Meridian 1 is available in several options, the selection of which depends upon the line size and other customer configuration requirements. The SL-1 system options are listed below. System option Configuration 21A Single module AC power only 21 Single CPU 51 Single CPU, half network group 61 Dual CPU, full network group 71 Dual CPU, multiple network Ordering information 8-5 Package concept Pre-packaged hardware To simplify the ordering process and reduce the number of orderable items, prepackaged hardware is available for each system option. The packages form the basis for all system applications and are identified as follows: SL-1 Table System option 21, 21A System option 5 1 System option 6 1 System option 7 1 Note : The information contained in this section of the handbook is only a summary of the system ordering packages and their contents, and is subject to change. The NT Price Manual is the definitive reference in these matters and should be consulted to verify the availability of product packages and their contents. Where applicable, systems are not offered below the basic package complement. To serve applications under the package capability, unused hardware is either reallocated or retained for use as spares. For each system option, the basic package can be expanded up to the full capacity of the system by adding the appropriate complement of equipment. Various sub-packages are available that group together required elements, thus eliminating the possibility of overlooking certain necessary equipment. Single apparatus items are specified by their individual ordering code. 8-6 Ordering information SL-1 system option For small business applications, system option 21 is available in two configurations for either AC or DC power arrangements as outlined in Table 8-l. Another version, system option 21A (order code SY which is a single-module system configured for AC-only power arrangement, is also available to address applications up to 160 each of the system ports. Table 8-2 provides a breakdown of the hardware packages. Ordering information 8-7 Table SL-1 system option packages ORDER CODE AC POWER DC POWER NOTE DC POWER DESCRIPTION with Rectifier SL-1 system option 21 package D 1 comprising: 1 Central Processing Unit 1 768K Memory Card 1 Floppy Disk Unit 1 Common/Peripheral Equipment Module 1 Card 1 Receiver Card SL-1 system option 21 + PE module package 1 comprising: 1 Processing Unit 1 768K Memory Card 1 Floppy Disk Unit 1 Common/Peripheral Equipment Module 1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module 1 Card 1 1 Receiver Card Superloop Network Card SL-1 system option 21A package 001 A) (contents similar to AS1 001 A AS1 002A AS1 001 D AS1001 D Pedestal AS1 002D Two-Module 2 Assembly Pedestal Assembly Requires the addition of the appropriate Pedestal Assembly. Note 2: Standard pedestal assembly. Supports up to four modules per column, in any configuration. -Note 3: Required for configurations of up to two modules only. 3 8-8 Ordering information Table 8-2 SL-1 system option packages c o d e breakdown tion PE Module P a tion 21 Package DC with tion 21 + PE Module Package DC I I I I I I I Memory/Signaling continued Card Ordering information 8-9 Table 8-2 SL-1 system option A packages code breakdown (continued) EQUIPMENT CODE QUANTITY 1 DESCRIPTION Pedestal Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module AC 2 2 2 4 1 Power Cord AC- Option 21A 2 2 Port 1 Power Distribution Unit 2 PO699724 Paddle Board Module Side Cover (Part of Modules) 4 2 1 1 Floppy Disk Unit 1 1 FDI to FDU Cable 19 7 19 Tip & Ring Cable (Part of Modules) 3 3 3 SDI Paddle Board to Cable 1 Network to PE Cable 1.8 m (6 ft) 1.2 m (4 ft) Security Data Cartridge 1 CPU with Floppy Disk Interface ROM Card Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC Top Cap Assembly DC Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module DC 1 1 System Monitor to SDI Cable Requires appropriate Pedestal Assembly. I -continued 8-10 Ordering information Table 8-2 SL-1 system option QUANTITY A packages CODE code breakdown (continued) DESCRIPTION System-Monitor TO Cable Battery Distribution Unit -52 amp Rectifier Rectifier Wiring Kit Rectifier Rack Rectifier Support/Air Baffle Power Battery Distribution Unit System Monitor to Backplane Cable SDI to Cable Ordering information 8-11 SL-1 system option 51 For medium-sized business applications using single operation, the SL-1 system option 51 is available for either AC or DC pqwer arrangements as outlined in Table 83. To expand the SL-1 system option 51 package to a Dual CPU/Fully Redundant Memory configuration requires the addition of one AS 1005A package (redundancy assembly for AC power) or one package (redundancy assembly for DC power). Table 8-4 details the equipment breakdown of the package assemblies associated with the SL-1 system option 1. Table 8-3 SL-1 system option 51 packages ORDER CODE POWER DC POWER DC POWER h Rectifier DESCRIPTION SL-1 System Option 51 Package comprising: 1 Central Processing Unit 1 768K Memory Card 1 Half Network Group Capability 1 1 1 Common Equipment Module Intelligent Peripheral Equip. Module Card In addition, requires one Floppy Disk Assembly or one Multi-Disk Assembly, as appropriate. 8-12 Ordering information Table 8-4 SL-1 system option 51 packages code breakdown DESCRIPTION NOTE SL-1 1 System I Option 51 Package AC CPU Redundancy Assembly AC 2 SL-1 System 1 Option 51 Package DC CPU Redundancy Assembly DC 2 SL-1 System Option 51 Package DC with Rectifiers EQUIPMENT CODE DESCRIPTION Common Equipment Module AC Top Cap Assembly AC Superloop Network Card Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC 1 1 1 Conference/TDS Card 1 1 1 System Monitor Pedestal AC Pedestal DC Common Equipment Power Supply AC CPU Cable 1 2 Tip & Ring Cable -continued I Ordering information 8-13 Table 8-4 SL-1 system option 51 packages code breakdown (continued) EQUIPMENT CODE QUANTITY DESCRIPTION 3 3 3 SDI Paddle Board-to 1 1 1 Superloop to PE Cable 1 1 Cable 1.8 m (6 ft) CPU to Note Requires AS1057 Floppy Disk Assembly or AS1 058 Multi-Disk Assembly. Note 2: Requires the purchase of the appropriate disk interface hardware. continued -- 8-14 Ordering information Table 8-4 SL-1 system option 51 packages code breakdown (continued) DESCRIPTION System 1 QBL12 QBL12 Cable Battery Distribution Unit 1 -52 1 Rectifier Wiring Kit 1 Rectifier Rack 1 1 201 NT8 Amp Rectifier Rectifier Baffle System Monitor to QBL15 Cable Power Battery Distribution Unit CPU Interface Cable Net to PE Cable Ordering information 8-15 SL-1 system option 61 For medium-sized business applications requiring added reliability of a Dual CPU/Fully Redundant Memory configuration, the SL-1 system option 61 is available for either AC or DC power arrangements as outlined in Table 8-5. Table 8-6 details the equipment breakdown of the package assemblies associated with the SL- 1 system option 6 Table 8-5 SL-1 system option 61 packages ORDER CODE AC POWER DC POWER DC POWER with DESCRIPTION SL-1 System Option 61 Package comprising: 2 Common Equipment Modules 1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module 2 Central Processing Units 2 768K Memory Cards (fully redundant) 1 Full Network Group Capability 1 Superloop Network Card 2 Note: In addition, requires one Floppy Disk Assembly or one Multi-Disk Assembly, as appropriate. Cards 8-16 Orderina information Table 8-6 SL-1 system option 61 packages code breakdown DESCRIPTION -continued I information 8-17 Table 8-6 SL-1 system option 61 packages -code breakdown (continued) Note 1 1 Pedestal Blower Unit DC 1 1 1 NT8 System Monitor to SDI Cable 2 2 2 QMM42 Security Data Cartridge Requires AS1059 Floppy Disk Assembly or AS1060 Multi-Disk Assembly. -continued 8-18 Ordering information Table 8-6 SL-1 system option 61 packages Note code breakdown (continued) Requires AS1059 Floppy Disk Assembly or AS1060 Multi-Disk Assembly. I Ordering information 8-19 SL-1 system option 71 For large-sized business applications, the SL-1 system option 71 provides a Dual CPU, Fully Redundant Memory configuration for either AC or DC power arrangements as outlined in Table 8-7. To expand the SL-1 System Option 7 1 Package with additional Network Group Assemblies (up to a maximum of five), requires the addition of the appropriate quantity of (AC Power) or (DC Power) packages. Table 8-8 details the equipment breakdown of the package assemblies associated with the SL-1 system option 71. Table 8-7 SL-1 system option 71 packages ORDER CODE AC POWER DC POWER DC POWER With Rectifier DESCRIPTION System Option 71 Package comprising: 2 CPU Equipment Modules 2 Network Equipment Modules 2 Intelligent PE Modules 2 Central Processing Units 2 768K Memory Cards (fully redundant) 1 Network Group Assembly 1 Superloop Network Card 2 Note: In addition, requires one Floppy Disk Assembly or one Multi-Disk Assembly, as appropriate. Cards 8-20 Ordering information Table 8-8 SL-1 system option 71 packages CODE code breakdown DESCRIPTION SL-1 System Option 71 Package AC AS1 006A Network Group Assembly AC 2 SL-1 System 1 Option 71 Package DC Network Group Assembly DC 2 SL-1 System Option 71 Package DC With Rectifiers CODE BREAKDOWN QUANTITY CODE DESCRIPTION Top Cap Assembly AC Filter Panel CE Module Superloop Network Card Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC Card System Monitor Pedestal AC Pedestal DC Common Equipment Power Supply AC Common Equipment Module AC Network Equipment Module AC Inter Group Module Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module AC System Monitor to SDI Cable Column Spacer Kit Pedestal Blower Unit AC Power Distribution Unit AC PO699724 Module Side Cover IGS Cable 1.8 m (6 ft) Ordering information 8-21 Table 8-8 SL-1 system option 71 packages CODE BREAKDOWN QUANTITY code breakdown (continued) CODE DESCRIPTION NT8 IGS to IGM Cable NT8 CPU Cable NT8 CPU Interface Cable 1.8 m (6 ft) CPU Interface Cable 3 m (10 ft) 2.4 m (8 ft) Tip & Ring Cable SDI to Cable 1.8 m (6 ft) Superloop to IPE Cable SDI Multiple 1.8 m (6 ft) Cable External Network Cable 0.6 m (2 ft) Segmented Bus Extender Intergroup Switch Peripheral Signaling Card c QPC471 C 3 Port Extender Clock Controller Bus Terminating Unit Bus Terminating Unit Bus Terminating Unit Bus Terminating Unit QPC579 CPU Function Card QPC580 CPU Interface Card Changeover Memory Arbitrator Memory Card QPC583 4 Pot-l SDI Card ROM Card -Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC AA Common Equipment Power Supply DC -continued - 1 8-22 Ordering information Table 8-8 SL-1 system option 71 packages code breakdown (continued) DESCRIPTION CODE BREAKDOWN Requires AS1059 Floppy Disk Assembly or AS1060 Multi-Disk Assembly. Note 2: Requires Cables and Cables (length depends upon module position). Ordering information 8-23 Peripheral expansion To provide peripheral expansion to the base packages associated with the various SL- 1 system options requires the addition of one or more Peripheral Equipment Modules. Two versions are available: for accommodating existing peripheral interface cards for accommodating the new intelligent peripheral interface cards Each of these PE modules is available for both AC or DC power arrangements with the always connected to a dual port Network Card and the always connected to the Superloop Network Card -Table 8-9 outlines the capabilities of the Peripheral Equipment Module Assemblies. Table 8-9 Peripheral Equipment Module packages ORDER CODE POWER 053A DC POWER DESCRIPTION AS1 053D SL-1 Peripheral Equipment Module Assembly Accommodates 10 existing PE cards (QPC code type) and is comprised of: AS1 054A (see Note) (see Note) 1 SL-1 Peripheral Equipment Module 1 Peripheral Equipment Power Supply 1 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer 7 Tip and Ring Cables Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module Assembly Accommodates 16 intelligent PE cards code type) and is comprised of: Note: 1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module 1 Peripheral Equipment Power Supply 11 Tip and Ring Cables In addition, requires one Controller-2 Card or.one Controller-4 Card, as applicable, to system configuration. 8-24 Ordering information Remote Peripheral Equipment Remote Peripheral Equipment is an optional feature that is used to extend the 15.2-m range of the multiplexed loop connection between the dual port network card (QPC414) and associated SL-1 Peripheral Equipment Modules to approximately type transmission media. This enables the peripheral 112.6 km (70 miles) over interface cards (QPC code types) to be placed in closer proximity to associated telephones and terminals to effectively increase the serving area of the Meridian 1 System. Existing RPE interface cards are used at both local and remote sites and are housed in respective RPE Carrier Modules, available for AC or DC power arrangements. Table outlines the capabilities of the RPE Carrier Module Assemblies. Table 8-10 Remote Peripheral Equipment Module packages ORDER CODE POWER DC POWER DESCRIPTION RPE Carrier Module Assembly Required at both local and remote site Serves two network loops and is comprised of: RPE Carrier Module 1 Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply 1 -1 Carrier Maintenance Card Local Network Interface Serves one remote network loop and is comprised of: 1 1.5 Mbaud Converter 1 Local Carrier Buffer 1 2 Mbaud Converter 1 Carrier Interface Remote Network Interface Serves one remote network loop and is comprised of: 1 1.5 Mbaud Converter 1 Remote Peripheral Switch 1 2 Mbaud Converter 1 Carrier Interface Ordering information 8-25 Software System software is provisioned on an incremental basis and falls into two categories: Base Software (Table 1 which is always required and configured at a minimum level depending upon the SL-1 system option selected Application Software (Tables and 8-14) which is provided on an optional basis and is equipped up to a maximum level assigned to the particular features chosen both cases, the associated Right-to-Use fee is dependent upon the number of hardware ports equipped in the system. Table 8-15 shows the relationship between equipped hardware ports (in 100 increments) and the associated software levels to be applied. Table 8-16 indicates the minimum number of hardware ports and minimum Base Software level for each SL- 1 system option. The port range depicts the number of ports which the minimum software level will support before adding incremental Base Software. For example, a system equipped with 650 hardware ports utilizes a software level factor of 7 (Table 8-14) in computing the total Base Software RTU fee (i.e., Unit Base RTU fee multiplied by 7). The same factor of 7 is also used in determining RTU fees for the Application Software feature codes selected for the system, provided that the maximum software level for the feature code has not been reached (Tables 13, and 8-14). Table 8-11 Base software Order code Option group Description SWOOOOA 0 Basic Features 1 Advanced Features Note Call Detail Recording List 7 Recorded Announcement 8 Time & Date Do-Not-Disturb 10 End-to-End 11 Intercept 14, 28, Basic Alternate Route Selection 17 Make Set Busy 18 2500 Set Features 19 Digital Display -continued Signaling Treatment 8-26 Ordering information Table 8-11 Base software (continued) code Option group Description 20 Office Data Administration System 21 Dial Intercom 22 Direct Inward Dialing System Note Call Detail Recording Charge Account Code 60 Automatic Route Selection Traffic/Queuing 33 Call Park 34 System Speed Call 36 Recorded Overflow Announcement 44 Music Package 46 Basic Message Center 47 Auto Handsfree Answerback 48 Group Call 52 Call Detail Recording Forced Charge Account 55 History File 64 Stored Number Redial 70 Flexible Hotline 71 Deluxe Hold 72 Auto Line Selection 73 500 Set Features 74 Distinctive 75 Private Branch Exchange Interface 76 Departmental Listed Directory Number 80 Station Category Indicator 81 Controlled Class of Service 87 Fast Tone and Digit Switch 88 Meridian Digital Telephone 89 Meridian M3000 Telephone continued Ringing 1 2 - - Ordering information 8-27 Table 8-11 Base software (continued) code Note Requires Option group Description Note 90 Last Number Redial 91 Meridian M2317 Telephone 95 Call Party Name Display 107 Malicious Call Trace 108 Internal Call Detail Recording 115 Directed Call Pickup 119 Enhanced Music 139 Remote Call Forward/Flexible Feature Codes 140 M2250 Console 157 Switch Hook Flash 170 Meridian Modular Terminals 173 Enhanced Controlled Class of Service 203 Superloop 204 Conference/Tone 205 Superloop Digit Switch Administration vintage B or later, for Digital Trunk Interface or Primary Rate Access application. 2: Requires QPC609 Tone Digit Switch or Conference/Tone Digit Switch. 8-28 Ordering information Table 8-12 Application software Order code Option group Description 150,151 Prerequisite Special Application Features 10 Administrative 10 Enhancements Directory Number Expansion 10 Automatic 10 Trunk Maintenance Autovon 186,172 Maximum level 10 Multi-Customer I Multi-Tenant I 10 Automatic Number ID 10 Features 10 103 Propery Management.Systems Interface 10 5 6 Attendant Overflow Position 1 9 3 Supervisory 1 174 Attendant 1 5 Remote 2 5 Authorization 105 Line Load Control 101,102 Console Alternative Peripheral Answer 1 Equipment 1 Code Centralized Attendant Service 2 7 1 1 I Centralized Attendant Remote Basic ESN Features 1 I -- 10 continued I Ordering information Table 2 Application software (continued) Order code Option group Description Advanced Electronic Switched Network Features Prerequisite Maximum level 1 0 SW0041 A S 1 0 9 Application Processor Link 3 Integrated Voice Messaging Link 1 0 Meridian Mail Link 1 0 1 0 5 S 153 Meridian Link S 153 Meridian Link Integrated Services Digital Network/Application Protocol Direct Connection S 152 Meridian Link Server 10 1 1 0 8-29 8-30 Ordering information Table 3 Automatic Call Distribution application software Option group Description 40, 45, 83 Basic ACD Features (ACD A) Advanced ACD Features (ACD B) Prerequisite SW0201 A ACD Reports (ACD Cl) 4 3 ACD Load Management (ACD C2) ACD Link (MAWACD D) 114,155 ACD-MAX Reports Enhancements 1 7 8 Enhanced ACD Overflow 111 ACD Timed Overflow 2 0 7 Network ACD SW0041 A S Ordering information Table 8-14 Integrated Services Digital Network application software S 149 1 1 7 S 175 Inter-Exchange Carrier Call by Call Service Network Message Center 1 0 1 0 10 SW030 1 A S 8-32 Ordering information Table 8-15 System software level configuration Hardware Ports Software Level l-100 1 101-200 2 201-300 3 301-400 4 401-500 5 501-600 6 601-700 7 701-800 8 801-900 9 901-1000 1 ' 0 1001-1100 11 1101-1200 12 1201-1300 13 1301-1400 14 1401-1500 15 1501-1600 16 1601-1700 17 1701-1800 18 1801-1900 19 1901-2000 20 2001-2100 21 2101-2200 22 2201-2300 23 2301-2400 24 2401-2500 25 2500andmore Divide the number of hardware ports by 100. -- Ordering Table 6 SL-1 system option SL-1 system opt ion package information minimum configuration 21 21 +PE 51 61 71 Order code Minimum hardware ports 40 40 101 60 60 201 Base software minimum level 1 1 2 1 1 3 Hardware port range l-100 l-100 101-200 l-100 l-100 201-300 8-33 8-34 Ordering information Meridian Modular Telephones The following Meridian Modular Telephones are available: single line telephone with 6 programmable keys multi-line set with 8 programmable keys high performance multi-line set with 16 programmable keys and integrated Handsfree unit Telephone Security Group Class II approved telephone designed to provide on-hook security. It is similar to the M2616, with 16 programmable keys, but has no handsfree capability. multi-line set for ACD operations. It has 15 programmable function keys, a special ACD Display Module and two RJ-32 jacks for modular headsets multi-line set for ACD operations. It has 15 programmable function keys, and a special ACD Display. It is similar to model 1, but with one PJ-327 jack for a carbon agent headset and one RJ-32 jack for an supervisor headset The following hardware options can be add on to Meridian Modular Telephones: External Alerter Interface Board Display Module Programmable Data Adapter Key Expansion Module Table 8-17 lists the ordering codes for the Meridian Modular Telephones, alone and with hardware options installed. Table 8-l 8 lists the hardware options that can be purchased separately, and Table 8-19 lists miscellaneous items. Refer to Meridian Modular Telephones-Description and specification (553-2201116) for additional information. Ordering information 8-35 Table 8-17 Order codes for Meridian Modular Telephones and factory installed options Ordering code (Basic) Ash Gray (with MPDA) (with power board) (with power board) (with power board) Ash Dolphin Gray M2008 (Basic) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray M2008 (with MPDA) (with power board) (with power board) (with power board) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray M2008 (with Display) (with power board) (with power board) (with power board) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray M2008 (with MPDA and Display) (with power board) (with power board) (with power board) -- Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray -continued 8-36 Ordering information Table 8-17 Order codes for Meridian Modular Telephones and factory installed options (continued) Description M2616 (basic) Ordering code Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray M2616 (with MPDA) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray (with power board) (with power board) (with power board) M2616 (with Display) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray M2616 Display) MPDA and Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray (with power board) (with power board) (with power board) (basic) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray (with power board) (with power board) (with power board) (with MPDA) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray (with power board) (with power board) (with power-board) -continued Ordering information 8-37 Table 8-17 Order codes for Meridian Modular Telephones and factory installed options (continued) Ordering code Description (with Display) Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray (with power board) (with power board) (with power board) (with MPDA and Display) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray (with power board) (with power board) (with power board) (basic-with ACD Display) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray (with MPDA and ACD Display) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray (with power board) (with power board) (with power board) (basic-with ACD Display) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray (with MPDA) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray (with power board) (with power board) (with power board) -(with board) (with power board) (with power board) telemanuals.com 8-38 Orderina information Table 8-18 Ordering codes for optional hardware Ordering code Additional requirements Board Programmable Data Power Supply Board (M2008) Module Ash Dolphin Gray Power Supply Board ACD Display Module (M2008) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray Top cover filler plate Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray Power Supply Board 22 Key Expansion Module Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray Single Key Module Footstand Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray PO7801 03-03 PO7801 93-93 Double Key Module Footstand Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray -- -continued telemanuals.com Ordering information 8-39 Table 8-18 Ordering codes for optional hardware (continued) Ordering code Description External Additional requirements Board Interface Power Supply Board OWA Transformer or closet power 120 V Transformer A0367335 Power Supply 240 V Transformer A036791 4 Power Supply Board telemanuals.com 8-40 Ordering information Table 8-19 Ordering codes for miscellaneous items Description Ordering code Card, Directory Number Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray PO665352 PO665352 PO652740 Card, key labels PO657709 Lens, Directory Number PO652720 Handset Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray Handset cord, A0338908 A03291 73 A03291 74 (9 ft) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray A0334590 A031 8327 A031 8330 Handset cord, 3.6 m. (12 ft) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray A0274233 A0274243 A031 4423 Line cord A0346862 Set User Guide (regular) PO703991 Set Reference Card PO704094 Display Module Reference Card PO704096 -- - continued telemanuals.com Ordering information 8-41 Table 8-19 Ordering codes for miscellaneous items (continued) Description Ordering code Display Installation Sheet PO706836 Meridian Programmable Data Adapter User Guide User Guide ACD Reference Card PO704747 PO705952 Power The Meridian 1 is available in both AC power distribution and DC power distribution versions. These two methods are discussed in more detail in Chapters 4 and 5 of this handbook, but essentially the AC system is connected directly to the commercial AC (utility) power, whereas the DC system always requires an external power plant w/rectifiers to convert the commercial AC power source into AC for distribution within the Meridian 1 system. Power equipment can be ordered in several different ways. System packages for powered system options have an “A” at the end of the package ordering code. DC system packages have a “D” suffix. These system packages generally contain all internal power-related components neccesary for operation, such as the module AC-DC power supplies in AC systems and the module AC-DC power converters in DC systems. Note that Ringing Generator packs, however, are specified seperately. Several external DC power plants w/rectifiers are available as assembly packages. However, a third type of system package is available. System packages with an suffix are DC systems with suitable rectifier assembly packages included for convenience. Lastly, a variety of power and power-related equipment can be ordered either as assembly packages or as merchandise for individual items. Though this chapter contains a summary of most of the available packages, the Manual should be consulted for detailed breakdowns of packages and availability of merchandise items. 8-42 Ordering information Table 8-20 DC power package assemblies PACKAGE CODE QUANTITY EQUIPMENT CODE 1 1 Note DESCRIPTION NOTE Rectifier Rack Assembly 1 DC Power Assembly 2 Prime Rectifier Cabinet Assembly 3 DESCRIPTION 50 Amp Rectifier (Note 4) Nt6 D5303 Applies to system options Ground LRE and Note 2: Applies to all system options when customer-provided power is used. Note 3: Applies primarily to system option 71. Can be used with option 4: For Provisioning guidelines for power equipment., refer to NTP 553-3001-l 52. 9-1 Chapter 9: Traffic Contents Introduction Traffic Engineering Traffic Considerations Introduction All telecommunications networks possess two basic types of resources: call processing resources and call carrying resources. Call processing resources set up and take down point-to-point connections within the network. They comprise route selection within the network, signaling between switching systems, billing, and control of special functions or features. Call processing resources are usually concentrated within the switching system. They take the form of relay or software-based logic, memory, and digit receivers/transmitters which are used to exchange signals between switching systems. Call carrying resources are used to support. a point-to-point connection established the network. These resources consist of subscriber loops between telephones and switching systems, the connections through which a call transmission paths between all the passes within switching systems, and switching systems in an end-to-end connection. A fundamental quantity traffic is derived from the product of two factors. One factor is the number of attempts or bids made to use resource per hour. The other is the average duration in hours that the’ resource is used per attempt. Traffic engineering Traffic Engineering predicts amount of equipment required to provide high quality service at the most economical cost. Most users excellent telephone service for granted. It happens so quickly and automatically that there is a tendency to believe there are unlimited resources available in the switching network Engineering Handbook 9-1 9-l 9-4 9-2 Traffic dedicated to each telephone. However, this is not the case; components of the switching equipment are shared among many callers. It is the traffic engineering which promotes the illusion of unlimited resources in an economical system. The high quality of service currently achievable is due in part to the establishment of and adherence to communication traffic standards. These standards define the quality of service that a user will experience when gaining access to the network to place a call. In general, the higher the grade of service, the greater the amount of switching and transmission resources required. In today’s telecommunications environment, the task of setting appropriate traffic standards is becoming increasingly complicated because the nature of traffic is changing. Until recently, traffic engineering consisted primarily of providing an adequate level of telephone service. Today, advances in digital technology make it possible to integrate a variety of new communications services into the common network. The traffic characteristics of this integrated stream of features differ markedly from those of basic telephone traffic in three areas: holding time, number of network connections, and traffic pattern. The holding time or duration of an ordinary telephone call averages approximately three minutes. In an integrated office traffic stream, holding times vary from very short (a few seconds to transmit an electronic letter) to very long (30 minutes or more for a teleconference or a document processing operation). To determine the impact of these variable holding times on traffic, the parameters that measure network performance, particularly those for blocking and access delay, must be considered. Blocking probability is the probability that an attempt to invoke a service will be unsuccessful. At a given traffic level, the probability that blocking will occur increases as the required number of simultaneous connections increases. In Access delay is the amount of time a user waits to gain access to the service. public networks, users experience both dial tone delay and post-dialing delay. In a private network, access to resources may also be gained on a delay basis, Measurements of service quality have little meaning unless a standard exists against which they may be compared. Traffic standards must be carefully selected to strike the correct balance between user service expectations and cost. Once service is deployed, operational measurements monitor traffic demands and the resulting quality of service. This data is also used to predict future load requirements. The goal of this activity is to ensure that performance objectives are met both now and in the future. The degree to which this goal is met depends largely on the accuracy of the traffic forecasts. The average number of simultaneous calls during a given period is known as the traffic flow or intensity. The two commonly used units of traffic measurements are: Engineering Handbook Traffic 9-3 1. ERLANG by definition, one erlang is equal to the traffic intensity of one circuit fully occupied for one hour. 2. CCS hundred call seconds. Since there are 3600 seconds in each hour, one hour of traffic is equivalent to 36 CCS. Thus the relationship between the two is that one hour of traffic is one erlang; one erlang is equal to 36 CCS. Table 9-1 Telephone traffic units Term Definition UC Unit call (expressed in 100 seconds or CCS) ccs Hundred call seconds or the total amount of traffic in seconds divided by 100 ERLANG Traffic unit used when holding times are expressed in hours. Usually designated as E CCS (CCS = E/36) For planning purposes, calculations are usually made with the level of traffic measured during the busiest hour of the day. The busy hour, therefore, is the minute time period in which the system carries the most traffic during a 24-hour period. The function of traffic engineering is to determine the minimum amount of equipment required to carry a given amount of traffic while maintaining an acceptable grade of service (GOS). Since busy hour traffic is an average measurement and equipment is provisioned to cater for it accordingly, the grade of service is the probability of a call being lost. A number of mathematical formulas may be used to address grade of service. These vary according to assumptions made concerning the nature of the traffic. The three main formulas in use today are: POISSON Blocked Calls Held Calls that find no idle trunk remain in the system for the period that they would have occupied had they been connected and then leave the system. Time in system is equal to the expected call duration. The Poisson technique predicts the portion of time circuits are all busy when given the calling traffic. It utilizes what is called the “Lost Callls Held” which states that when a call receives an all trunks busy signal, the call is held waiting for a trunk to become available up to the length of its individual holding time. This assumption has been widely criticized because of the widespread belief that Poisson inflates the number of circuits required to maintain certain grades of service. ERLANG B Blocked Calls Cleared Calls which find no idle trunk are cleared immediately from the system. Time in the system is zero. Engineering Handbook 9-4 Traffic Erlang B is a very accurate technique for predicting both blocking and trunk usage, particularly when alternate routes are automatically selected upon encountering blockage. ERLANG C blocked calls delayed Calls which find no idle trunk wait in a queue until a trunk is free and then are connected normally. Time in system is equal to the waiting time plus the expected call duration. Erlang C is the technique used when calls are queued but has the limitation of assuming all callers encountering a delay will be willing to wait an indefinite period of time to be connected. In summary, there are justified indictments against the traffic engineering techniques of Poisson, Erlang B, and Erlang C that result in a void in the capability of accounting for the way customers utilize today’s enhanced communication services. The most pervasive influence on traffic standards comes from the development of new services. The way users perceive and interact with the network is changing, particularly in the business community, as the electronic office becomes a reality. The traditional objective of high quality service must be balanced against the cost of deploying the service using the available technology. The Meridian 1, with its flexible architecture, distributed network, and inherent traffic measurement capabilities, can be suitably configured to meet any traffic engineering application with minimum penalty to cost. Traffic considerations Many different analytical methods have been used for calculating the traffic capacity of the Meridian 1. Theoretical analysis, substantiated by simulation of the switching system, resulted in an admissable region of traffic handling capability that would satisfy and interloop blocking probabilities. Service loops were not considered in the simulation, since most of the services (such as dial tone) operate on a delay basis without contributing to the loss of traffic. Grade of service The following grade of service objectives are utilized for the switching network: (a) No more than 1.5 percent of the originating calls have to wait more than 3 seconds for dial tone. (b) No more than 1 percent of the incoming terminating lost provided the called line was free. (c) No more than 1 percent of the originating outgoing calls will be lost in the system (excluding the loss due to the outgoing trunks being unavailable). Furthermore, no more than 2 percent of the calls will be lost due to all the trunks being busy. (d) No more than 4 percent of the intraoffice calls will be lost provided the called line was free. Engineering Handbook Traffic 9-5 The grade of service (a) is concerned with dial tone delay specifications. The grade of service (c), and in effect, deal with the switching network and route blocking. Incoming, outgoing, and intraoffice matching losses are related to intraloop and interloop blocking probabilities. Specification (d) requires that these blocking probabilities be less 4 percent, Specification (b) means that 1 percent is the allowable limit on blocking for incoming terminating calls. Specification (c) refers to the congestion in the switching network for an outgoing call and the maximum allowable blocking probability for this case is 1 percent. A retrial procedure is used on outgoing trunks in attempting to find an available path through the network. Hence the blocking probability for the outgoing calls will be less than that for incoming calls. Thus if specification (b) is satisfied, specification (c) is automatically satisfied for the switching network. It should be noted that these are desirable guidelines to optimize network performance for the maximum number of terminations on a network loop. In the practical sense, a mix of peripheral interface cards more often results in fewer terminations being serviced by the network loop. With less contention for time slots, the traffic handling capability exceeds the grade of service objectives and increases the traffic capacity of the network loop. Since any type of peripheral device (telephone, terminal, trunk, data unit, receiver, etc.) may be used in a connection, the traffic capacity is obtained as the traffic that can be carried by all time slots in a loop. The sum of the traffic generated by all associated peripheral terminations constitutes what is known as the loop traffic. In order to achieve the lowest blocking probability, traffic should be evenly distributed over the available network loops. This is termed load balancing and is implemented to more readily accommodate variable traffic patterns. However, this procedure is quite meaningless if based upon unsubstantiated traffic projections prior to system installation. Although balanced from a theoretical point of view and engineered to meet grade of service recommendations, the allocation of users to peripheral devices and their subsequent network resource activity is the main criteria for achieving optimum system performance. It makes more sense to assign approximately the same number and type of terminals on each network loop and utilize the inherent system traffic measurement capabilities to determine if reassignments are necessary. All too often, inflationary traffic forecasts are made without substance and applied arbitrarily to system engineering. The result is a configuration that adopts a very conservative approach to traffic handling capability. Non network enhanced systems The original SL- 1 network design utilized a procedure of selecting time slots from a set of admissable pairs. This method of searching for free time slots in admissable Engineering Handbook 9-6 Traffic pairs was utilized in two of the Meridian SL-1 business system offerings--models S and MS. The concept readily met the traffic demands of small system applications. It was also utilized in the LE and XL in support of Software Generics 337 and 637 respectively. However, in recognition of me need to enhance and provide more switching capability to address the ongoing requirements of both voice and data, a new network design was introduced in 1984. Network enhancement The traffic impacts of network enhancement are two-fold: The removal of the time slot pairing constraint between originating and terminating calls. The selection of time slots on an individual basis reduced mismatch probability, improved network capacity, and provided the capability for a non-blocking matrix. The net effect was an increase in loop capability of approximately ten per cent i.e., from 600 to 660 for model as before. 160 PE terminations based on the Erlang The doubling of network loops within a group. In the enhanced network design, the number of loops in a group is doubled from 16 to 32. The associated was also network card supports two loops. The number of inter-group increased from 4 to 8 to improve the grade of service and reduce blocking probability in the multi-group system. These enhancements were instrumental in the formation of two Meridian SL- 1 system models N and XN. The network design has since been incorporated in the Meridian SL-1 NT, and Meridian SL-1 XT. Meridian SL-1 ST, Meridian SL-1 61, and 71, is also The Superloop, introduced on Meridian 1 System Options based upon the network enhancement. The unavailability of a time slot for call set up is a function of the amount of traffic then loaded on the loop (both voice and data) and, therefore, blockage due to all time slots being busy is the same for both voice calls and data calls. However, if the traffic level for different traffic sources varies significantly, the type of traffic sources with a lower load could encounter blocking if too many heavy traffic sources also generate traffic to the same circuit group. It is for this reason that data traffic, with its typically long holding times, be limited on inter-group junctors. Network enhancement provides the viable alternative of assigning all data lines on a loop and data traffic within a group to effectively isolate the impact on voice traffic. It also provides complete flexibility in engineering network loops throughout the system to address the varying demands of both voice and data traffic accordingly. Depending upon the origination and termination of a call, several situations contribute to the blocking probability, based on Erlang B formula at the network loop. Intra-loop, Intra-group blocking For an intra-loop intra-group call, blocking will occur when idle time slots in the network loop are less than two. Engineering Handbook Traffic 9-7 Inter-loop, Intra-group blocking Blocking of this type could occur when a call encounters no idle time slot at either the originating loop or terminating loop. Inter-loop, Intergroup blocking Calls of this type can be blocked at originating loop, terminating loop, and intergroup junctors. A junctor is served as an extension of the originating and terminating loop; the same time slot at both junctor and originating loop must be idle in order to succeed in the first half of the connection. A similar match is also required at the terminating side. The time slot at the terminating loop is independent of the originating time slot. Each inter-group call initiated requires two idle time slots on the junctors to set up the path; one time slot on the originating junctor to match the originating loop and another time slot on the terminating junctor to match the terminating loop. In other words, one inter-group call makes two time slots on the junctors busy, one on each group of junctors. Since both originating and terminating traffic between two network groups pass the same sets of junctors, a junctor group handles traffic from both directions, even though it is associated with only one network group. Inter-loop, Intra-group calls with small traffic sources This type of call is of particular interest since for heavy data applications, the number of terminations per network loop could be relatively small due to high CCS per data line requirements. In order to reduce blocking, high traffic data lines and computer ports are not recommended to be in the same network loop (since an loop call takes two time slots from the same loop) or different groups (to minimize junctor traffic). Therefore, most calls from loops with small traffic sources should use inter-loop intra-group connections. The reduction in the number of terminations permits the use of the Engset formula for finite sources in place of the Erlang loss formula for infinite sources. The Engset formula, like Erlang B, is a loss-call-cleared model with a finite source assumption which is applicable when the number of traffic sources to channels ratio is small. The source model predicts a higher capacity since it includes the number of traffic sources as a parameter in the model. When a certain number of channels or time slots are occupied, the model will correspondingly reduce the number of idle sources which could potentially generate traffic to the channels. Therefore, the projected blocking is reduced and the allowed traffic would be greater for the finite Engset source model than that for the Erlang B model since the latter has a constant rate of service demand. Utilization of the Engset model is appropriate for those Meridian 1 and Meridian SL-1 models that incorporate network enhancement and have a traffic source to channel ratio of approximately 4: 1 or less. Therefore, it is appropriate for applications where a network loop of 30 traffic channels services up to 120 peripheral ports or traffic sources. For Meridian SL-1 applications, this is Engineering Handbook 9-8 Traffic invariably the case because of the universal concept of the peripheral equipment shelf and its ability to accommodate any type of interface card. With this in mind, significant traffic handling benefits arise in allocating a single shelf to a network loop. For the implementation of density peripheral equipment, the capacity of the PE shelf is 80 terminations, attainable only by the provision of 8 port line cards in each of the ten card slots available. However, this rarely the case since a mix of card types is typically equipped. The varying card densities on the PE shelf combine to reduce the number of peripheral ports contending for the thirty available time slots on the supporting network loop. The fewer the PE terminations, the higher the loop traffic and vice-versa. The universal allocation of peripheral cards on the PE shelf or module permits loop traffic to vary accordingly from 735 CCS (for 80 terminations) up to 1080 CCS (for a blocking matrix of 30 terminations). It is this complete flexibility of network and peripheral organization that allows the Meridian 1 to meet any traffic requirement. Figure 9-l shows the loop capacity as a function of traffic sources for the Engset and Erlang Loss models. Superloop network The Superloop Network card, introduced with Meridian , utilizes the network enhancement to combine four regular network loops to make 120 timeslots available to PE cards housed in Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Modules. This increased bandwidth and larger pool of timeslots increases the network traffic bundle. A Superloop may be assigned from capacity by 25% for each 120 one to eight Intelligent PE segments. A number of different superloop-to-segment configurations are possible. The configuration chosen depends upon system traffic requirements and the specific PE cards used. Figure 9-1 Superloop segmentation 1 (128 120 TS) SL8 sEG2 C 0 N T -- 4 0 Engineering Handbook 1 2 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Traffic 9-9 Figure Superloop segmentation (continued) (256 2 120 TS) 120TS 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Figure 9-1 Superloop segmentation (continued) (512 TS) Figure 9-1 Superloop segmentation (continued) 1 (128 120TS (384 120 TS) & 3 120 TS) 120TS SUPERLOOP C 0 N T 2 t 0 7 9 10 Engineering Handbook 9-10 Traffic Figure 9-1 Superloop segmentation 2 (256 120 TS) (768 1 120 TS) 120TS SUPE , 0 N T 2 Engineering Handbook Traffic Figure 9-1 Super-loop segmentation (continued) 8 (1024 120 TS) SUPERLOOP 8 9 10 11 112 SUPERLOOP -SEG Service loop configuration Since network enhancement doubled the number of loops within a group from 16 to 32, the impact on service loop provisioning was measured for typical applications. The requirements of service circuits in general are a function of call seeking connections. If the average traffic per line is increased due to more traffic (longer holding time) rather than more call attempts, the increased traffic to service circuits is minimal. However, when the number of call attempts is doubled, the service circuit traffic is also approximately doubled, The object of network enhancement is to facilitate traffic handling capability rather than increase significantly the number of terminations. In general, an equivalent number of call attempts, coupled with larger holding times for data connections, means that service circuit functions arc not adversely impacted by the increase in traffic loops. Engineering Handbook 9-12 Traffic The Tone and Digit Switch (TDS) provides dial tone, busy tone, overflow tone, tone, DP or DTMF outpulsing, and miscellaneous ringing tone, audible tones. The service circuit requirements were estimated as a linear function of terminal loops at a specified traffic level. The conference (CONF) loop provides connections for multi-party conference calls and its provisioning is largely dependent on customer needs. The Meridian SL-1 is flexible enough to provide additional CONF loops to meet specific application requirements, such as Music-On-Hold. Thus, every additional fourteen traffic loops adds a TDS and a CONF loop. With network enhancement, only the number of traffic loops is doubled on a network card. The TDS and CONF loops are single density circuit cards. Although, theoretically, the number of loops in a network group is doubled from 16 to 32, it is loops. Any TDS or CONF loop takes the place of true only when they am all 2 traffic loops in the total 32 loops available. Therefore, in a fully equipped network group, the recommendation is 24 traffic, 2 TDS, and 2 CONF loops. The combined Conference card, introduced with Meridian 1, provides TDS and conference capability on a single circuit card, and provides the added benefit of requiring only a single loop per card, in contrast to the 2 loops per card used by the TDS and CONF cards. If the loss of the second loop is not an issue, the use of CONF cards may be more cost effective in conference intensive environments. Utilization of only a simple network card position for Conference/IDS function frees up a slot to accommodate additional traffic loops thereby increasing the network capacity of the system. The recommended of TDS, CONF, and traffic loops is provided in Table 9-2. Table 9-2 Recommended service circuit allocation with Card Engineering Handbook Traffic 3 Figure 9-2 Loop capacity as a Function of traffic sources 1080 ENGSET MODEL 800 700 ERLANG LOSS MODEL 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 TRAFFIC SOURCES (NUMBER OF LINES/LOOP) Engineering Handbook Chapter 10: Technical Specifications Meridian 1 System Specifications System power consumption Commercial power and grounding requirements Environmental requirements Air conditioning requirements Equipment dimensions and weight Floor loading estimates Terminal Specifications System option 21 -Floor plan example System option 51 and 61 -Floor plan example System option 71 -Floor plan example Table 1 O-l Meridian 1 system Technology Digital switching, stored program control, 24 bit processor Network North Americanstandard Mu-Law 255 8 bit PCM, 8 KHZ sampling rate, time division multiplexing (TDM), 64 KBPS per time slot, 10.24 MBPS per Superloop, 120 time slots per Superloop FCC Registration Number AB-6982-13234-M Listed Ringer F-E Yes Equivalent Port Size 3 0 to 60,000 Maximum number of Modules 256 Modules, in 64 Columns continued 1 o-1 1 O-6 10-8 10-11 10-12 10-13 10-14 10-15 1 O-26 1 O-27 10-2 Technical specifications Table 10-l Meridian 1 system specifications (continued) Pedestal 81.2 cm (32 in.) 66 cm (26 in.) 81.2 cm (32 in.) 55.8 cm (22 in.) 25.4 cm (10 in.) 10.1 cm (4 in.) Module 81.2 cm (32 in.) 55.9 cm (22 in.) 43.2 cm (17 in.) 1 Module Column 81.2 cm (32 in.) 66 cm (26 in.) 2 Module Column 81.2 cm (32 in.) 66 cm (26 in.) 121.9 cm (48 in.] 3 Module Column 81.2 cm (32 in.) 66 cm (26 in.) 165.1 cm (65 in.] 4 Module Column 81.2 cm (32 in.) 66 cm (26 in.) 208.2 cm (82 in.) (31 Note: Multi-column systems have a3 inch spacer between each column 31.7 kg (70 Ibs) 6.8 kg (15 Ibs) Module 58.9 kg (130 Ibs) 1 Module Column 97.5 kg (215 Ibs) 2 Module Column 156.5 kg (345 Ibs) 3 Module Column 215.4 kg (475 Ibs) 4 Module Column 274.4 kg (605 Ibs) (See also Table Peripheral O-2) Common/ Equipment 630 420 CPU/Network CPU 335 Network 325 300 Peripheral Equipment Peripheral Intelligent Equipment 700 continued -- Technical specifications Table Meridian 1 system Consumption: (continued) Typical Maximum (WATTS) See also Table 1 O-2) Remote Equipment 175 Peripheral Remote Equipment 100 Peripheral 225 Local Site 150 Remote Site 400 450 0 0 50 80 Meridian Mail Module Pedestal (Blowers) Loading See also Table 1 O-8) Point One module 38.1 (1.8 11 .O (75.8 Two modules 60.3 (2.8 17.3 (119 Three modules 82.4 (3.9 23.7 (163.4 Four modules 104.6 (5 30.0 (206.8 Note: The numbers under based on a floor area of the system of 5.64 square feet. These numbers do not include the weight of the optional overhead cable rack. .The numbers are based on under “Point load distributing the system weight among four feet, each with an area of 4.91 square inches; these numbers do not reflect the use of optional casters. System Powering AC or DC power distribution -- AC Input voltage (See also Table 1 O-3) Minimum 1 O-4 Technical specifications Table 1 O-l Meridian 1 system specifications (continued) Frequency (Hz) 24 bits plus 1 bit parity (system options 51, 16 bits plus 6 check bits (system options 21 Physical memory Up to 5 Network Groups Table 1 O-4) 32 to 122” F Relative humidity non-condensing less than Temperature (recommended) F Technical specifications 1 O-5 Table 1 O-l Meridian 1 system specifications (continued) environment Terminals (continued) Relative humidity (recommended) 20 to non-condensing Storage/transportation snvironment (See also Table 1 O-5) F Temperature (absolute) -58” to (-50 to 70” Relative humidity (absolute) 5 to non-condensing Temperature change F less than C )per hour. -58 to (50 to 70” F 5 to non-condensing (-20 to 60” C) 10 to 90% non-condensing Technical specifications System power consumption For detailed system power calculations, the typical and worst power consumption figures for each full module are shown in the following table. The “typical power” figures are fully adequate for use in system power engineering calculations, since they are representative of most systems -with Modules fully loaded (configured) with cards, and under moderate traffic conditions (25% continuous active traffic on lines, 75% continuous active traffic on trunks). These figures recommended for use in rectifier and reserve power provisioning. The “maximum power” figures shown for reference and planning purposes when needed, and were calculated for each module based on a fully-loaded card cage, in the “worst-possible” operational configuration (in terms of power consumption), with each card consuming typical power under 100% traffic, plus 10% added margin. For example, the maximum power consumption for the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module was based on a configuration of sixteen Universal Trunk cards, all under 100% traffic conditions, along with a Controller card, additional power margin, etc. All figures in this section given in real power (unit of Watts) for simplicity. In addition, all of the stated numbers have already taken the average efficiency of the Module power supplies into account. To convert to DC current (in amps), divide the total system power figure by 52 Vdc. This will give the total DC system load in amps. If batteries present for reserve power, additional current must be allocated for changing the batteries, according to battery manufacturer’s guidelines. To convert power to AC current (in amps), divide the total system power figure by 208 nominal, or 240 nominal, as appropriate. For calculations normally done in apparent, or complex, power, such as AC wire and panel size, UPS rating for AC reserve power, etc, simply divide the total real power (in Watts) by the typical system power factor of 0.6 to obtain the complex power (in VA). Technical Table 1 O-2 Meridian 1 power consumption Meridian Mail (Blowers) 1 O-7 10-8 Technical specifications Commercial power and grounding requirements Commercial Power Source The commercial power source refers to the main AC utility power feed, for either AC-powered or DC powered systems. For AC systems, this power is wired directly to the system. For DC systems, this power source would connect to the rectifiers, which would convert to 48VDC for distribution to the system. In North America, the power supplied can be either 208 or 240 volts AC nominal. phase is not required but single power feeds from alternate phases would be normal practice where three phase power is available. Table 1 O-3 Input power specifications Input Minimum Nominal Voltage (VAC) at pedestal 180 Surges I 288 V ac Maximum 2081240 I 8.34 to 50 to 500 Notches ov specifications. All ~4.17 are the peak of the AC I I I Technical specifications 1 O-9 All power feeds used should contain a separate safety conductor (green wire). Northern Telecom strongly recommends that the supply conductors be dedicated and uninterrupted from a building primary source to a dedicated equipment room sub-panel. Power Sub-Panel.- Power subpanels must meet the following requirements or be modified when used for the Meridian 1: . Panels should be located in the equipment mom. No lighting, air conditioning, heating, generators or motors shall be serviced from this equipment room panel. In where isolated ground systems permissible, this panel will provide sufficient ground connection points on the isolated ground plate or bar to handle the AC circuit grounds as well as the other ground reference conductors associated with the Meridian 1. l l Service Receptacles One dedicated outlet per pedestal (column) is a typical requirement for AC systems. For DC systems, or if reserve power is being used, the receptacles or conduit will serve the centralized rectifiers or UPS system directly, with power then routing to the columns. Unless otherwise specified, these circuits should be rated for 30 Amps. All circuits must be: . Wired and fused independently of all receptacles. . Tagged at the power panel to prevent unauthorized interruption of power. Not controlled by a switch. l The NEMA receptacle types are as follows: l l * Isolated Ground systems: Non-Isolated Ground systems: IG-L6-30 In particular, all AC System Options require one 30 A receptacle per column. For DC Systems, those using rectifier, require one 30A receptacle per rectifier. The 30A rectifier, while it the had previously used a 20A input circuit, has been changed to use one 30A receptacle per rectifier, for -consistency throughout the product line. 1 O-1 0 Technical specifications Commercial power If the quality of the commercial power source continuously meets the Meridian 1 system requirements listed in this section, a power conditioner is not required; however, where the commercial power is of poor quality and cannot consistently meet the Meridian 1 system requirements, a-power conditioner may provide some improvement. When using power conditioning equipment, simply install the equipment in series with the commercial power feed. Do not modify the Meridian 1 system grounding scheme. System grounding requirements Essential to trouble-free system operation and the safety of personnel is the employment of proper grounding. The Meridian 1 has several different grounds that are generally referred to as grounds: logic return, battery and signal return (for DC systems), AC “green wire” equipment ground (in AC systems), and the personal hazard equipment ground. The Meridian 1 does not, by design, need an AC Isolated Ground (IG) system but it does need a (though this is typically required by local codes such as single point ground system. This means that each of the various grounds, from each of the columns, should terminate at a single connection point before attaching The to the actual ground reference at the main AC panel or transformer. point ground may be implemented either by the use of the Isolated Ground bus in the AC panel, or by a separate logic return equalizing bus for battery returns and logic returns where a non-isolated AC system is used. The following must also be observed to implement the single-point ground: All ground conductors must be in accordance with local codes and terminate in a manner that is permanent, resulting in low impedance connections. All terminations should be accessible for inspection and maintenance. All grounding conductors must be continuous with no splices or junctions and tagged, “WARNING Ground Connection Do not remove or disconnect.” Conductors should be insulated against contact with foreign grounds. Grounding conductors must be no-load, non-current carrying cables under normal operating conditions. The use of building steel as integral part of the ground system is not recommended. -l l l l l The DC resistance of the system ground reference wire from the IG to the building ground should be as close to zero as possible with the maximum total resistance on runs, within the building, not to exceed 0.5 ohms. The insulated grounding wire size shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code 295 and sections 310-316 (equivalent CSA requirements when used in Canada). , Technical specifications 1 Environmental requirements Table Meridian 1 operating environment: Considerations System Terminals I Temperature (Absolute) Relative Humidity (Absolute) 20 to non-condensing Temperature change less than F (1 C hour. Temperature (Recommended) 59 to 88” F (15 to 30” C) Relative Humidity (Recommended) 20 to non-condensing Table Meridian 1 storage/transportation environment: System Terminals Temperature (Absolute) -58 to 158 F (-50 to 70” Relative Humidity (Absolute) 5 to noncondensing Temperature change less than F C hour. -58 to to 70” 5 to condensing Disk Drives F (-50 -4 to to (-20 1 condensing 10-12 Technical specifications Air conditioning requirements The air conditioning provided must be capable of handling the heat produced by the system, as well as the additional heat produced by equipment room personnel, lighting, and the heat input of external walls, windows, floors and ceilings enclosing the room. Heat dissipation of a system is estimated in The amount of air conditioning required can be estimated at a rate of one U.S. ton of refrigeration for every 12,000 of heat generated by the equipment and equipment personnel, plus one ton for each 500 square feet of floor space. Each person in the equipment mom generates 600 These guidelines should be used along with the following table when estimating air conditioning requirements. Exact requirements should be determined by a qualified air conditioning engineer. The table below shows the maximum power dissipation in the form of heat for each Equipment Module. These figures apply to both AC and DC powered systems. The power figures listed here do not necessarily correspond to total input power, since some of the power especially for peripheral equipment is distributed out to the sets and is not dissipated within the system. Table 1 O-6 Meridian 1 heat dissipation Heat Dissipation Module Watts 1 1530 Common/Peripheral Equip. 360 CPU/Network 270 Equipment 380 Peripheral Equip. 175 600 100 340 Remote Peripheral Local Site RPE -remote Site Note: Thermal load Total power dissipation (Watts) x 3.4 Technical specifications Table IO-6 Meridian heat dissipation (continued) Heat Dissipation Module Watts 4 0 0 1360 Meridian Mail Module Note: Thermal load = power dissipation (Watts) x 3.4 Equipment dimensions and weight Table Meridian 1 dimensions and weight Technical specifications Floor loading estimates Floor loading estimates should be obtained in order to plan for proper stacking of modules. (Floor loading is the weight of the system divided by the occupied floor area; Point loading is the local pressure exerted by the system feet on the floor.) Table shows the floor loading estimates for stacking a Meridian 1 system. The estimates given represent a fully-loaded module complete with pedestal, maximum circuit pack allowances, power supplies, and cables. Table 1 O-8 Floor loading estimates Modules Point Load One 38.1 (1.8 11 .O (75.8 Two 60.3 (2.8 17.3 (119 Three 82.4 (3.9 23.7 (163.4 Four 104.6 (5 30.0 (206.8 Note: The numbers under are based on a floor area of the system of 5.64 square feet. These numbers do not include the weight of the optional are overhead cable rack. The numbers under “Point Load based on distributing the system weight among four feet, each with an area of 4.91 square inches; these numbers do not reflect the use of optional casters. Technical specifications IO-15 Terminal Specifications Table 1 O-9 specifications Line Appearances 1 Total Line/Feature Buttons Programmable Fixed 8 6 2 (Hold, Release) Plus Independent Volume Adjustments Line/Feature 6 LCD Indicators Two-way Speakerphone No On-Hook Yes Dialing Message Waiting LED and/or Key Indicator Display No Programmable Data Adapter Optional Data Communications Capabilities Up to 19.2 Kbps Asynchronous Key Expansion Modules No External Interface Optional Loop Length 3,500 ft. (1,057 meters) 24 AWG Power Loop Voice only Auxiliary Programmable Data Adapter, External Interface Auxiliary Power Options Local Plug-in AC Transformer, or AC or DC Closet Power Color Ash, Gray, Black Dimensions 3.645 in. (92.6 mm) H W = 8.5 in. (212 mm) 8.35 in. (216 mm) L Weight 1.98 Ibs. (900 grams) Environmental Temperature Humidity F RH C) 1 O-l 6 Technical specifications Table 1 O-l 0 M2008 specifications Line Appearances Total Line/Feature Programmable Fixed Line/Feature Buttons 2 (Hold, Release) Plus Independent Volume Adjustments 8 LCD Indicators Two-way Speakerphone No On-Hook Yes Dialing Message Waiting LED and/or Key Indicator Display Optional Programmable Data Adapter Optional Data Up to 19.2 Kbps Asynchronous Communications Capabilities Key Expansion Modules No External Alerter Interface Optional Loop Length 3,500 ft. (1,057 meters) 24 AWG Power Loop Voice only Auxiliary Data, Display, Auxiliary Power Options Local Plug-in AC Transformer, or AC or DC Closet Power Color Ash, Gray, Black Dimensions 3.645 in. (92.6 mm) H W = 8.5 in. (216 mm) L = 8.35 in. (212 mm) Weight 1.98 Ibs. (900 grams) Environmental Temperature Humidity F RH C) Technical specifications Table 1 O-l 1 M2616 specifications Programmable Fixed 2 (Hold, Release) Plus Independent IO-18 Technical specifications Table 1 O-l 2 6 specifications Line Appearances l-6 18 Total Line/Feature Buttons 18 18 Programmable 16 16 Fixed (Hold, Release) Plus Independent Volume Adjustments 2 (Hold, Release) Plus Independent Volume Adjustments No No Line/Feature Indicators Two-way Speakerphone On-Hook Dialing N/A Message Waiting LED Indicator LED Indicator Display Standard Standard Data 2 x 24 2 x 24 Optional Optional Data Communications Up to 19.2 Kbps Up to 19.2 Kbps Key Expansion Modules Optional Optional External Alerter Interface Optional Optional Headset Jacks Two RJ-32 Jacks for Headsets One PJ-327 Jack for Carbon Headset, One RJ-32 Jack for Headset Loop Length 3,500 ft. (1,057 meters) 24 AWG 3,500 ft. (1,057 meters) 24 AWG Power Loop Voice and Display only Data, Key Module, Auxiliary Alerter Auxiliary for All Operations (Power Board Included in Telephone) Auxiliary Power Options Local Plug-in AC Transformer, or AC or DC Closet Power Local Plug-in AC Transformer, or AC or DC Closet Power Color Ash, Gray, Black Ash, Gray, Black __ Dimensions H = 3.645 in. (92.6 mm) W = 10.4 in. (251 mm) L = 9.48 in. (237 mm) mm) H = 3.645 W = 10.4 in. (251 mm) L = 9.48 in. (237 mm) Weight 2.84 Ibs. (1300 grams) 3.28 Ibs. (1500 grams) Environmental Temperature C) Humidity Adapter 2 maximum F RH 2 max Temperature Humidity C) RH Technical specifications Table 1 O-1 3 specifications Classification TSG Approved, Type-Accepted Meets On-Hook Security Class 2 Line Appearances 1-16 Total Line/Feature Buttons Programmable Fixed 18 16 2 (Hold, Release) Plus Independent Volume Adjustments Line/Feature Indicators Two-way Speakerphone No On-Hook Yes Dialing Message Waiting LED and/or Key Indicator Display Optional Programmable Data Adapter Optional Data Up to 19.2 Kbps Asynchronous Communications Capabilities Key Expansion Modules External Interface Optional 2 Maximum No Loop Length 3,500 ft (1,057 meters) 24 AWG Power Auxiliary for All Operations (Power Board Included) Auxiliary Power Options Local Plug-in AC Transformer, or AC or DC Closet Power Dimensions H = 3.645 in. (92.6 mm) W = 9.876 in. (251 mm) L = 8.35 in. (212 mm) Weight 2.42 Ibs. (1100 grams) Environmental Temperature F I Humidity 5%-95% RH C) 10-20 Technical specifications Table 1 O-l 4 M2317 specifications Plus 5 for Over 35 Features and Prompts H/F Mute, Hold, Release) Plus Independent Volume Technical specifications 1 Table 1 O-l 5 M3000 specifications Line Appearances Two-way Speakerphone Standard On-Hook Yes Dialing Via Display Icon Message Waiting Display Full Screen, Touch Sensitive Directory Over 130 Dial-by-Name Entries Asynchronous Data Option (ADO) Optional Data Up to 19.2 Kbps Asynchronous Communications Capabilities External Alerter Interface No Key Expansion Modules 3,500 ft. (1,057 meters) 24 AWG Loop, plus Auxiliary (Supplied with Set) Dimensions H = Tilt Adj. W = 12 in. (302 mm) L = 8.5 in (214 mm) 3.28 Ibs. (1500 grams) Temperature Humidity F RH C) Technical specifications Table 1 O-l 6 Telephone Set Overview I Line Appearances 1 l-8 l-16 Total Line/Feature Buttons Programmable 8 6 10 8 18 16 2 Plus Volume Adjustment 2 Plus Volume Adjustment 2 Plus Volume Adjustment. 6 LCD 8 LCD Fixed Line/Feature Indicators Integrated Speakerphone No No Software Option On-Hook Yes Yes Yes LED Indicator LED Indicator LED Indicator Display (LCD) Opt. 2 x 24 Opt. 2x24 Directory No Dialing Message Waiting Data Option PDA PDA PDA Data Corn Capabilities Up to 19.2 Kbps Up to 19.2 Kbps Up to 19.2 Kbps No Optional Optional Optional I Key Expansion Modules No I External Alerter Interface Optional 2 or6 Multiple Languages N/A Loop Length 3,500 ft. Power Loop Aux. Color Ash, Gray, Black Voice Data, Alerter 3,500 3,500 Loop Voice Data, Display, Alerter Loop-Voice, Display, H/F Aux. Data, Display, Alerter Ash, Gray, Black Ash, Gray, Black Technical specifications Table 1 O-1 7 Telephone Set Overview Line Appearances 1-16 1-16 1-16 Total Line/Feature Buttons Programmable 18 16 18 16 18 16 2 Plus Volume Adjustment 2 Plus Volume Adjustment 2 Plus Volume Adjustment. No No No N/A Yes LED Indicator LED Indicator Std. 2 x 24 Opt. 2 x 24 Fixed Line/Feature Indicators Integrated Speakerphone Directory No No No Data Option PDA PDA PDA Data Corn Capabilities Up to 19.2 Kbps Up to 19.2 Kbps Up to 19.2 Kbps I Key Expansion Modules Optional Optional Optional External Alerter Interface Optional Optional No 6 2 or 6 3,500 3,500 Multiple Languages 6 Loop Length Power Loop Voice, Display Aux. Data, Alerter, Key Module Auxiliary for All Operations (Power Board Included) Auxiliary for All Operations (Power Board Included) Color Ash, Gray, Black Ash, Gray, Black Ash, Gray, Black Technical specifications Table 1 O-1 8 Telephone Set Overview M2317 I Line Appearances N/A N/A Total Line/Feature Buttons Programmable 2 Plus Volume Adjustment Fixed Line/Feature 2 Plus Volume Adjustment 3 Plus Volume Adjustment Indicators 5 Feature ces LCD Integrated Speakerphone On-Hook Dialing Yes Yes Yes Yes Message Waiting LED Indicator LED Indicator LCD Icon LCD Icon Display (LCD) No No Built in 2 x 40 I Built-in Screen I Yes Directory No No Data Option ADO ADO ADO ADO Data Corn Capabilities Up to 19.2 Kbps Up to 19.2 Kbps Up to 19.2 Kbps up to 19.2 Kbps Key Expansion Modules External Alerter Interface No No Multiple Languages N/A N/A 2 No No No Loop Length 3,560 3,500 ft. 3,560 3,500 Power Loop Voice Aux. Data Loop, Plus Auxiliary (Provided With Set) Loop, Plus Auxiliary (Provided With Set) Loop, Ash, Gray, Black Ash, Gray, Black Ash, Gray, Black Color Plus Auxiliary (Provided With Set) Black Technical specifications IO-25 System Option plan Figure System Option 24 equipment room floor plan (2640 mm) I Approximately Terminal or AC Panel Notes to floor plans: 1.) These sample floor plans may vary from your own depending on your system needs and - - the size/arrangement of your equipment room. 2.) A template for system placement and floor drilling procedures is available. drawing (part number is delivered with the system packing instructions. 3.) If a conflict arises between a code included in this document and a local or national code, follow the local or national code. Technical System Option 51 and plan example Figure 2 System Option 51 and 61 equipment room floor plan Battery stand for reserve power (optional) Notes to floor plans: 1.) These sample floor plans may vary from your own depending on your system the size/arrangement of your equipment room. 2.) A template for system placement and floor drilling procedures is available. The drawing (part number is delivered with the system packing instructions. 3.) If a conflict arises between a code included in this document and a local or national code, follow the local or national code. Technical specifications System Option plan example Figure 3 System Option 71 equipment room floor plan 24ft (7365 mm) ‘(915 mm) 15 n (4570 mm) (535 Battery stand for 25 In. (650 In. TTY 25 in. (660 36 in. (915 terminal Note: Meridian 1 Option 71 may also expand to additional rows of Peripheral Equipment Modules. Notes to floor plans: 1.) These sample floor plans may vary your own depending on your system needs and - - the size/arrangement of your equipment room. 2.) A template for system placement and floor drilling procedures is available. drawing (part number is delivered with the system packing instructions. 3.) If a conflict arises between a code included in this document and a local or national code, follow the local or national code. Chapter of terms Access time The time required to retrieve information from or store information in a computer’s memory. Acoustic coupler A data set which converts electrical signals into audio signals suitable for transmission over telephone circuits. The telephone handset is placed into a cradle device that acoustically couples the transmitter and receiver in order to send or receive the modulated signal. Address A number designating a location in memory. Adjacent channel The channel closest to the channel being used for transmission, either in physical proximity or in electronic characteristics. A-law The law used in PCM systems in the European countries is the A-Law, which is defined as follows: l n x Y where A x is the input signal y is the compressed output signal A is a constant, set to 87.6 ln is the natural logrithm -- Algorithm A set of processes in a computer program used to solve a particular problem in a finite number of steps. Analog signal Any voltage or current waveform that varies continuously with time. 11-2 List of terms Analog -to-digital (A/D) converter Circuitry which changes an analog signal into a digital pulse stream. ANSI (American National Standards Institute) The principal standards organization in the USA, formed in 1918, and run as a nonprofit, non-government body supported by private industry and professional organizations. Its role is to coordinate voluntary standards activities. ASCII Code (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) A binary code used to exchange information between computers. Assembly language A programming language in which each statement corresponds to a machine language instruction. Codes are less close to everyday language than those of high level languages, therefore mnemonic devices are included. Asynchronous Characteristic of any operation that is independent of a master clock or timing signals. Asynchronous transmission Data transmission in which the characters may be transmitted at varying intervals or in blocks, and which uses start and stop elements at the beginning and end of each character, instead of synchronizing the whole message block. Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) A switching system which automatically distributes incoming calls to a centralized group without going through a switchboard operator. If no answering positions are available, the calls will be automatically held until one becomes free. Used in catalog ordering, airline information, and credit-card authorization centers of larger businesses. Automatic Number Identification The automatic line identification of outward dialed long distance calls which permits call completion and billing without the telephone company’s operator intervention. B channel The 64-Kbps channel of a digital subscriber link (DSL) (where there are two) or an extended DSL (where there are 23) that is circuit switched and can carry either voice or data. Usually considered to stand for “Bearer” Balancing network Electronic circuitry used to match two-wire to four-wire toll facilities in order to maximize power transfer and minimize echo. List of terms 11-3 BASIC language (Beginner’s Ail-purpose Symbolic instruction Code) A simplified computer programming language based upon common English language terms. Basic Rate Access Two 64-Kbps B channels and one subscriber line. D channel over a single digital Baud A unit of signaling speed which measures the number of signal changes per second. If each signal element or state change represents one bit, then the baud rate equals the bit rate; otherwise, the two differ. Bell 103 A North American Bell System modem standard which provides asynchronous data transmission at speeds up to 300 bps. Bell 113 As Bell 103, but provides either originate or answer capability only. Bell 201 A North American Bell System modem standard which provides synchronous data transmission at 2400 bps. Bell 202 A North American Bell System modem standard which provides asynchronous data transmission at bps. Requires four-wire line for full duplex operation. Bell A North American Bell System modem standard which provides synchronous data transmission at 4800 bps. Bell 209 A North American Bell System modem standard which provides synchronous data transmission at 9600 bps. Bell 212 A North American Bell System modem standard which provides full-duplex asynchronous or synchronous data transmission at 1200 bps on the dial network. Binary -A system of numbers or codes involving only two states, typically 1 or 0. Binary coded decimal (BCD) A coding scheme in which four bits are used to represent numbers and six bits to represent letters and special symbols. 11-4 List of terms Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC, An IBM byte-controlled protocol using a defined set of control characters and sequences for synchronous binary coded data transmission. Binary word A group of bits that represent one piece of information. In PCM systems, an eight bit binary word is used to represent the magnitude of an analog signal at a particular instant in time. Bipolar Refers to two polarities, positive and negative. Digital information is normally transmitted in alternating bipolar pulses. Bisync Short for “Binary Synchronous Communications,” a half-duplex, character-oriented protocol developed by IBM. Bit A contraction of the term “binary digit” which represents a single character in a group, either 1 or 0. Bit interleaved This refers to the format of the resulting higher rate bit stream in a TDM system where the higher rate bit stream is generated by taking single bits from each of the lower rate bit streams in turn. Bit rate The speed at which bit positions are transmitted, normally expressed in bits per second. Bit stream A continuous string of bit positions occurring serially in time. Bit stream format In some bit streams the bit positions, or groups of bit positions, have specific uses. In The way in which the bit stream is subdivided is the format of the bit stream. order to locate the position of the format within the bit stream a recurring alignment signal is required either internal or external to the bit stream. Black box A term used to describe a device which handles known input and produces known output, but whose mechanism is hypothetical or unknown. Blocking (1) A switching system condition in which no circuits are available to complete a call, and a busy signal is returned to the caller. (2) The creation of blocks from individual records in a computer memory file. List of terms 1 l-5 Bootstrap routine A computer technique of inputting data before loading a program and thereby initiating the loading of the program. Bubble memory high capacity RAM memory in which a bit of information is recorded as a bubble on a thin film of magnetic silicate, and read by an electronic reading head. A Buffer A temporary storage facility used as an interface between system elements data rates are different. Bus A major electrical path used to transfer information between two or more electrical circuits. Busy hour The peak hour of communications traffic in a carrier facility. Byte The smallest number of binary digits which is acted upon as if it were a single entity. In most present-day systems, a byte is equivalent to 8 bits. Byte interleaved This refers to the format of the resulting higher rate bit stream in a TDM system where the higher rate bitstream is generated by taking groups of bits (ie bytes) from each of the lower rate bit streams in turn. Cable, coaxial A cable containing a central conductor insulated from a surrounding conductor, or several such pairs. An efficient carrier of high frequency signals, and capable of being multiplexed. Call processing programs Software that controls the switching network in an electronic switching system. Carrier system A means of producing several channels from one communications link by combining signals at the originating end, transmitting them in a or high speed signal, and separating them at the receiver. -Carrler wave A signal of a certain frequency and amplitude which can be modulated with respect to amplitude, frequency and phase, and transmitted as a data signal. Comite Consultatif International Telegraphique et Telephonique. An international committee that sets telephone, telegraph, and data communications standards. 11-6 List of terms signaling The standard for signalling within telecommunications networks being developed by CCITT. It will eventually replace the CCIS6 network in the U.S. Usually referred to as SS7. v.21 Standards for modems operating asynchronously at 200-300 bps, full-duplex, on the dial network (similar to Bell 103). v.22 Standards for synchronous half-duplex modems operating on the dial network at 1200 bps (similar to Bell 212A). V.23 Standards for asynchronous half-duplex modems on the dial network, and fullduplex on a leased four-wire line, operating at 600 or 1200 bps. V.24 Recommendation for interchange circuits between data communications equipment and terminals (similar to RS-232C). CCITT V.25 Recommendation defining a packet switching network protocol. V.26 bps, half-duplex on the dial network, Standards for modems operating at and full-duplex on a leased four-wire line (similar to Bell 201). CCITT V.27 As V.26, but at 4800 bps on leased telephone-type circuits (similar to Bell 208). V.28 Recommendation for the electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current interchange circuits operating at data signaling rates below the limit of 20,000 bps (Geneva 1972). CCITT v.29 CCITT X.25 Standards for synchronous modems operating at 96000 bps on a leased four-wire line (similar to Bell 209). -Recommendation defining a packet switching networks protocol. ccs A communications unit of traffic measurement equivalent to 100 call-seconds, so that there are 36 CCS in one hour. List of terms 11-7 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The portion of a computer which controls its operation and manipulates the data being processed. A private exchange service permitting incoming calls to be dialed direct to extensions, without operator intervention. Usually provided from the telephone company’s central office facilities. Channel A signal pathway in a communications system between two or more points, furnished by a wire, radio, light fibers, satellite or a combination thereof. Channel bank An electronic device used to digitally encode analog signals and time division multiplex the resultant digital signals and also demultiplex and decode these digital signals. Character An actual or coded representation of a letter, number or symbol. Chip A small (1-5 cm) integrated circuit of several elements with external connections to other electronic circuits. Circuit A complete transmission path to and from two points in a communications system. Circuit switching A method of communications in which individual circuits are connected to establish a continuous connection for the use of stations on the circuit until it is disconnected. Class Of Service (COS) The type of service in use by a subscriber of a communications system, including the type of telephone equipment, and the calling privileges or restrictions. Clear-to-send delay The time required for a data set to inform a terminal that it is ready to send or reply. (Also called modem turnaround.) -Clock A device that generates periodic signals used for system synchronization. Cluster A group of terminals connected to a communications facility by a cluster controller so that they may operate together. 11-8 List of terms COBOL (Common Business Oriented Language) A high level programming language used for business data manipulation. Code The representation of an alphanumeric character or symbol in machine language Code conversion The translation from one code to another (e.g., ASCII to Baudot), so that machines using different codes may communicate with each other. CODEC (Coder/Decoder) A device used to convert analog voltage samples into binary coded digital data and vice versa. A encodes analog signals into 8 bit, = 255, PCM. It also performs the reverse function of decoding PCM signals into analog signals. Common channel signaling A technique in which signaling information relating to several circuits is conveyed by addressed messages over a single signaling channel. Common Channel lnteroff ice Signaling (CCIS) A method where all signaling data is sent over a dedicated connection between the processors of two switching systems. Signaling and transmission are completely segregated and handled over separate facilities. Common control Equipment which receives and stores subscriber-dialed information for subsequent processing. Communications terminal Any device which produces tones or electrical signals which can be transmitted over a communications facility. Compandlng The process of compressing quantized speech samples at low speech amplitudes at the transmitting end of a system and then expanding these levels at the receiving end, thus reducing quantizing distortion. Companding law Many different algorithms (i.e. companding laws) could be used to obtain companding effects. Two companding laws in widespread use in PCM systems are the “MU-Law” and the “A-Law”. The MU-Law is used in North America and the A-Law is used in European countries. Compiler A computer program used to convert symbols meaningful to a human operator to codes meaningful to a specific computer. List of terms Concentrator A device used in data communications which can subdivide a channel into a system of data routes to permit the transfer of more data than would otherwise be possible. Low speed buffered asynchronous channels are fed into a high speed synchronous channel via a concentrator, which creates several channels of lower speed. Conditioning The improvement of standards of a data transmission line in order to increase the data rate and decrease the error rate. Contention A method of communications line control in which users compete for transmission time on a first-come, first-served basis, and must wait until a channel is free. Continuity check A check made of a communications link to ensure that a proper data connection exists. Control character A character included with a data communications signal to control and facilitate transmission. Examples are CR (carnage return), EOT (end of text), ACK (acknowledgment), STX (start of text). Conversation mode An on-line dialogue between a terminal and a computer in which each responds to data presented by the other on a character-by-character basis. Conversation time The portion of time used in a call devoted to actual data or speech transmission as opposed to that used for call connection and coordination. Converter A peripheral device which converts data from one medium or mode to another; e.g., paper tape to magnetic disc. CPE-customer premise equipment The generalized term for any equipment that resides on the end user’s side of the network interface boundary. -Crosstalk Interference on a “disturbed” circuit caused by the transfer of energy from a nearby “disturbing” circuit. CRT-cathode ray tube An electronic display screen similar to a television picture tube. 11-10 List of terms CSA-Canadian Standard Association A Standards Council of Canada body which sets electric and electronic standards including those applicable to data communications. Cursor An illuminated marker on a visual display unit which shows the position of the next character to be generated, and which can be moved about the screen to perform text control operations. Cycle time The shortest period of time necessary to complete one computer instruction. D channel The packet-switched channel on a DSL (where it is 16 Kbps) or an EDSL (where it is 64 Kbps) that carries signaling messages and packet-switched user data. Usually considered to stand for “Delta” or Data channel. Data Any set of characters which can represent a meaningful message and which can be transmitted electronically. Data base (1) Specific information pertaining to a particular office such as subscriber directory numbers, trunk routes, etc. This information is utilized by the generic program. (2) A set of data which can be stored for computer access. Data communications The transmission of data over electronic communications channels, often involving two-way data exchange over long distances. Data compression The use of special coding devices to reduce the size of data elements in order to reduce the storage space, increase channel bandwidth, or reduce cost and time required to transmit data. Data coupler A device which allows a subscriber’s data set to interface with the telephone network by controlling signaling functions and limiting the power applied to the line. Data link -The hardware in a data terminal which establishes protocols and a data link with another data terminal. DATAPAC network A common user packet switched commercial network which links TELENET in the USA with the Trans-Canada Telephone Network in Canada. List of terms 1 1 - 1 1 Data set (1) A device which interfaces a data terminal and a data communications facility, and which may modulate or demodulate the signal (see modem), and perform control functions. (2) A collection of related data records stored in a computer. Data station The hardware making up a data station, including the data terminal and circuit terminating equipment. Data terminal equipment (DTE) Any equipment defining the beginning or end of a data link, and which usually comprises the data source and data sink. DC signaling Transmission of data over physical wires using DC pulses at speeds below 150 baud. Decibel (db) A unit of signal strength relative to a standard (usually 1 milliwatt). In acoustics, a measure of sound intensity: 1 db is the smallest amplitude difference the human ear can detect. Decode To convert received PCM code words into pulse amplitude modulated pulses which are the same as the quantized samples at the transmitting end. Dedicated access A direct connection between a terminal and either a service, network, or a computer. Dedicated data channel A communications channel assigned for a subscriber’s exclusive use. Default option An assumption which a computer system is programmed to make unless an alternate instruction is given it by a user. Degradation The deterioration of the qualities of a signal or system. -- Delay, absolute The time taken for a signal to travel a certain distance in a communication system, dependent on the frequency, distance, and physical medium of transmission. Delay distortion Distortion of a signal produced by the unequal transmission speeds of different frequencies of that signal in a communications medium. 11-12 List of terms Delta modulation A method of digitally encoding an analog waveform that looks at the difference in magnitude between successive analog signal samples. Only one quantizing level is available so only one bit is needed to record whether the signal went up or down. This system is simple to implement but requires a faster sampling than the Nyquist Frequency. Demodulation The process of retrieving an original signal from a modulated carrier wave. Diagnostic Relating to test programs used for error and fault detection in the functioning of hardware or software. Digital Multiplex Switching System (DMS) Switching systems which permit digital switched transmission circuits for voice and data. They use pulse code modulation and time division multiplexing to allow direct switching of PCM signals without modulation into an analog form. Digital pad A device that introduces loss in an analog signal that is digitally encoded. Digital signal A series of pulses or rapidly changing voltage levels that vary in discrete steps or increments. Digital-to-analog (D/A) converter Circuitry which changes digitally encoded data into an analog signal. Digital transmission system The transmission of data in digital pulses which can be regenerated along the line, as opposed to analog transmission, in which waveform signals are transmitted via amplifiers in the line. Digitize The conversion of a continuous analog signal to digital form. Disk, magnetic A high capacity circular plate of varying size with a magnetic surface divided into addressable sectors used for Random Access Memory storage. Read/write heads enter and access data on each sector, permitting rapid access to data. Disc technology is rapidly producing discs of different types (including the mini-floppy, floppy, flippy and hard), with increasing memory capacity. Display unit A terminal device which produces a visual display of data. Usually a CRT display, but may be liquid crystal or other electronic medium (as opposed to hard copy printouts of data). List of terms 1 1 - 1 3 Distortion The undesirable change of signal characteristics during transmission due to distance effects, noise, or interference. Down-line load The loading of software programs into a computer from computer using a communications channel. device or Downtime The time period during which a device or system is not functioning properly. Drive A device which accepts a magnetic storage medium and transfers its contents upon request to the terminal. Drop The external wire between a subscriber’s premises and the telephone distribution cable. DSO The common terminology for a single, 64-Kbps voice channel. The common terminology for a T-carrier that multiplexes 24 channels into a single, bit stream. DSL-digital subscriber line The ISDN DSL combines two B channels and one D channel on a single line. Also called the basic access rate. Dumb terminal A keyboard and display unit with no processing capability of memory storage of its own, until connected to a computer. Dump The process of copying the data contents of an internal storage device into an external device. Echo The of a signal from the terminating end back along the line, causing interference in voice signals. It can be suppressed for voice transmission, but is normally non-distorting of data signals. EDSL-extended digital subscriber The ISDN EDSL combines 23 B channels and one D channel on a single line. Also called the primary access rate. l-14 List of terms EIA (Electronic Industries Association) a US manufacturers’ group which sets electronic equipment standards. Electronic switching system (ESS) A digital switching system controlled by computer, able to provide custom services such as three way calling, speed dialing, and call transfer.. Emulator Hardware and/or software which allows a system or device to operate as if it had properties which it does not have, and thus interface with devices having those properties. For example, an 8-bit microprocessor may emulate the features of a bit processor, and thus be able to accept 16-bit data from a true 16-bit device. Encode To convert quantized samples into PCM words. Encryption The security coding of a message to prevent unauthorized interception during transmission. EPROM (erasable programmable read-only memory) ROM which can be programmed, erased, and reprogrammed. Equalization An electronic technique used in telecommunications to compensate for distortion present on a channel, causing uneven frequency response. Error detection and correction Methods used in data transmission to allow the receiver to detect errors in data received, to request retransmission, or, in some cases, to correct it at the receiving end. Error rate The frequency of errors in data transmission. The rate depends on several variables, including the type of circuit, channel, or switching network the data passes through. Exclusion The ability of a user on some telephone systems to exclude all other users from a line or channel. Facility A transmission link between two or more points without-either terminating or signaling equipment. A link with such equipment would be either a channel, central office, or trunk. Facsimile An A representation of an image transmitted over a telecommunications link. electro-mechanical scanning device converts the image (photo, document, graph) List of terms 11-15 into an electrical signal which is transmitted over either an analog or digital facility and reconstituted by the receiving equipment as an image on paper on film. Failure rate The number of failures which occur during a given period of time. Feedback The return of part of a machine’s output to its input. It is used to control the output by comparison with the input, or for re-entry into another phase of processing. FEP-front-end processor An sits between a host computer and the terminals (or cluster controllers) to which it is connected. It performs the multiplexing function that allows many data communication lines to access a single host computer port. Fiber transmission system (FOTS) A transmission system in which light from lasers or is modulated and transmitted over very thin glass fibers and read by photodiodes in the receiver. FOTS is capable of data rates a thousand times that of copper wire, with very low interference effects. Field effect transistor A small, low-power, high input impedance semiconductor used to replace vacuum tubes in most applications, especially small circuitry. File Any organization collection of data, itemized, structured and stored for convenient access. Filter An electronic circuit used in telecommunications which blocks frequencies above and below a specified bandwidth (“band-pass”) but lets other frequencies pass undisturbed. Firmware A program written into a non-erasable computer storage location (ROM) to prevent accidental loss, and to avoid the necessity of repeated loading of the program into RAM. Floppy disk A thin, flexible, flat circular plate used to store information-FORTRAN (Formula Translation) A high level computer programming language used for mathematical and scientific applications. 1 6 List of terms Frame (1) A string of bits running across the width of paper or magnetic tape, representing one character. (2) In Videotex, a 24-line, 40 character screen of data. (3) In telecommunications, an information identification structure used by receivers. A group of digits is framed so as to be treated as one information unit. Framing bit A bit which signals the beginning and/or end of a data in data communications, and allows the terminals to synchronize transmission and reception of data bits. Framing pattern A particular arrangement of framing bits. Frequency divsion multiplexing (FDM) The division of a channel bandwidth into several smaller bandwidths, each of which becomes a separate data channel. Frequency modulation The modification of a single frequency carrier wave so that changes in its frequency correspond to variations of an information signal. Frequency shift keying (FSK) A form of frequency modulation in which frequency values are assigned to represent a and a and in which the carrier wave shifts frequency between these values according to the data. Front end An input device to a computer or other system which is used to enter data and control codes. Function keys Special keys on a computer keyboard which initiate system or control commands, rather than text input. Gain The increase in strength of a signal (in db) when it is amplified. Gate An electronic switch, basic to computers, which recognizes only two possible states, and will pass a signal into one of them (“off’ or “on”, or -Gateway (1) Equipment which allows terminals on one communications network to access terminals or data on another network. (2) A Videotex software package which users to access data on external networks. List of terms 11-17 Global A term used in computer software to indicate a complete application of a routine to data available. Thus “global search” indicates that a search routine will go through all relevant data in storage. Grade of service A measure of the circuits available for calls in a communications service at the peak hour. Calculated in calls blocked or average delay. Graphic display terminal A visual computer display capable of presenting graphic material such as charts, diagrams or line drawings. Handshaking Initial signaling between two data sets on a data communications link which sets up communication between them. Hard copy Any system information printed in some permanent form. Hardware The mechanical parts of a computer or business machine, including the electronic wiring and storage components, but excluding the software programs (see firmware). HDLC (high-level data link control) An International Standards Organization bit-oriented communications protocol which includes frame error checking sequences, start-up and shut-down procedures. Head A device which reads and writes data on a storage unit. Header The initial string of codes in some data communication systems which informs the receiver of the type of data to follow and its address. High-level language A computer program language whose statements are translated into more than one machine instruction. Examples include BASIC, FORTRAN, PASCAL, ALGOL, and SL-1. - High speed (1) Data communication rates over 9600 bps (the limit of most voice grade channels). (2) A printer which runs fast enough to print as data becomes available to the computer. 11-18 List of terms High speed multiplex A transmission circuit between two or a terminal and a multiplexer, capable of carrying several user signals which can be separated at the receiving end. Highway A transmission path capable of carrying multiplexed data. Host A large, centralized computer holding a database to which access can be supplied to users on a subscription basis. Hybrid circuit A complex circuit built up on film using integrated circuitry, transistors, resistors and capacitors. Impedance The opposition of a circuit to the flow of electricity. reactance (a resistance effect caused by inductance). The sum of resistance and Impulse noise Short-lived, high-amplitude interference bursts on a communications channel caused by lightning, sparking machinery or switch contacts. Information Data which has been processed according to accepted conventions so that it is meaningful to a user. Information bit A bit which carries text information, generated by the data source, and not used for transmission control purposes. In-house system A data communications network operated by one organization for its own needs, usually on its own premises, and without the use of common carrier facilities. Instruction A written statement, or the equivalent computer-acceptable code, that tells the computer to execute a specified single operation. Integrated circuit A functional circuit whose components and interconnecting “leads” are formed on a single chip of semiconductor material. Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) A network, generally evolving from the existing telephony digital network, that provides end-to-end digital connectivity to support a wide range of voice and voice services to which users have access via a set of standard multipurpose user to network interfaces. List of terms 11-19 Intelligent terminal A terminal containing internal storage and a CPU, capable of performing operations on data without connection to an external computer. Interactive A system in which input elicits a response-from a computer in real time, and in which the computer may ask for further input from the user. Interface The connection between two systems. Usually, the hardware and software connecting a computer terminal with peripherals such as data sets, printers, etc.. Interference Loss of clarity of a communications signal caused by unwanted noise signals. Interrupt The pause of a computer operation initiated either by commands in the program it is Some using, or by conditions which arise in the hardware (“priority interrupt”). specified operation must be performed during the interrupt before the original operation may be resumed. buffer (Input/output) A short-term storage for computer input and output. device (Input/output) An interface between a computer or switching system and the outside world. l-series recommendations recommendations on standards for ISDN services, ISDN networks, network interfaces, and internetwork and maintenance principles. (International Standards Organization) A body concerned with international computer and communications standards. Jitter The phase shift effect on a digital signal caused by transmission facility delays Key system (telephone) A multi-key telephone system on subscriber premises permitting several users to place calls on several lines. -- LAN-local area network A high-volume data transmission facility interconnecting a number of data devices, generally within a building or campus. Language The set of symbols, rules and conventions used to convey information, either at the human level or the computer level. 1 l-20 List of terms Large scale integration (LSI) Large functional circuits made up of hundreds of gate circuits which form a complete system or instrument. Examples are memories, computers and certain instruments. Laser communications The use of a coherent, single-frequency, high-energy beam of light which can be modulated to transmit information. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) A form of visual data display using liquid crystals which can be-electronicaily changed from a transparent to an opaque state. Leased line An telecommunications channel linking two or more points inside the same exchange, leased to subscribers for their exclusive use. LED (Llght Emitting Diode) An electrical switching device which emits light when current is applied, and is used for some visual displays. Level (1) The amplitude of a signal. (2) The number of bits required by a code to represent one character. (3) The number of discrete signal elements in a modulation system. (4) A procedure set in a communications protocol which enables higher-level signaling. Limited Distance Data Set (LDDS) A data set used for transmission over short distances (30 miles). Line A communications channel, circuit, trunk or facility. Usually refers to a telephone link between the local switching equipment and the network. Line speed The rate at which data signals may be passed over a particular channel, measured in baud or bits per second. Link (1) A circuit or path joining two communications channels in a network. (2) A line connector in a common control telephone switching system. -Loading, cable The addition of inductance through load coils along a cable to reduce amplitude distortion and improve frequency response. The loading restores capacitance balance to cable conductors, but is not used for high speed data channels. List of terms 11-21 Logic circuit An electronic element which takes a series of inputs and produces outputs according to the specific function the element is designed to perform. test A circuit fault-testing procedure in which a data set and back to the test point. is sent from on the line to Low speed Data communications below 2400 bps. LSI (Large Scale Integration) An LSI circuit is a complex electronic circuit (thousands of transistors) reproduced on a silicon chip. Machine language Coded information consisting of binary digits that can be accepted and utilized by the computer. Main distributing frame The cable rack used to terminate all distribution and trunk cables in a central office or PBX. Mainframe A large computer with peripherals, software and database maintained by large corporations for internal use and subscriber access. Matrix An orderly array of elements used to switch calls from one part of the system to another. Matrix prlnter An impact printer for hard copy output which uses an array of steel pins to create the shape of a character in dots. Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) The average trouble-free working period for a system or device, calculated statistically over time. Mean Time to Repair (MTTR) The average time elapsed between discovery of a fault and its correction. Medium Scale Integration (MSI) Functional circuitry consisting of 12 or more gates which form a complete functional operating unit such as a decoder, counter or multiplexer. 11-22 List of terms Medium speed Data communications generally between the rates of 2400 and 9600 bps on a voice grade channel. Memory An organized collection of storage elements into which units of information consisting of binary digits can be stored and from which this information can be later retrieved. Message A communication prepared for telecommunications consisting of control signals, header, start and end of text indicators, and text. Message switching A method of “Store-and-Forward” switching in telecommunications. A message is received somewhere in the network, stored, and retransmitted down the line when a suitable channel is free. Metal Oxide Semiconductor (MOS) A type of small, field-effect transistor. Micro A Greek prefix used to mean “very small”, as in microcomputer, or “one-millionth of a unit” as in microsecond. Microcomputer An electronic device consisting of a microprocessor, program memory, data memory, and input-output circuitry capable of accepting, storing and arithmetically manipulating data. Microprocessor An electronic circuit contained on a single chip of silicon which performs the arithmetic logic and control operations of a digital microcomputer. Microwave A high-capacity, low interference transmission network using high-frequency radio bandwidths transmitted via relay towers. Minicomputer An intermediate-sized computer usually capable of multi-terminal networking. -Mnemonic An abbreviation or arrangement of symbols which stands for a particular instruction or process. List of terms 11-23 Mnemonic coding Any coding system using parts of the vernacular spoken language to aid understanding and recall of its codes. E.g., ED for edit, EXT for end of text, DV for divide, etc. Modem A or vice-versa. a data set which can convert analog signals to digital Modem pooling The pooling of modems so that there need not be a one-to-one correspondence with “casual” terminal users, thereby reducing data service costs. Modulation The process by which some characteristic of a high frequency carrier signal, such as frequency, phase or amplitude, is varied by a low frequency information signal. Multidrop line A single communications link connecting several terminals, and which supports polling and selecting operations. Multiplexer A device which enables the passage of several signals along one path, either through time or frequency division of the signals. Narrowband A communications bandwidth less than that of a voice grade circuit (normally less than 300 Hz) used for communication at 300 bps or less. Network Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE) Generic name for equipment that provides line transmission termination from a network to the customer’s premises. Network A set of communications points interconnected by communications channels. Network termination 1 The name for ISDN Provides the functions of line transmission termination and layer- 1 maintenance and multiplexing, terminating a two-wire U interface. -Network termination (NT12) A single piece of equipment that provides the combined functions of NT1 and NT2. Network termination 2 (NT2) Terminates the four-wire T interface. Examples are a PBX, LAN, and terminal controller. telemanuals.com 11-24 List of terms Node A convergent point in a communications network where lines from many sources meet, and may be switched. In Datapac, a node is a packet switch location. Non-volatile memory A storage element whose contents are not destroyed if is lost. Nyquist frequency In order to adequately reproduce an analog waveform a sampling frequency of at least twice the maximum analog waveform frequency must be used. The minimum acceptable sampling frequency (ie. twice highest waveform is termed the Nyquist Frequency. Off-line Referring to circuitry or devices not under direct control of the operating systems. On-line Referring to circuitry or devices in direct connection to, or under direct control of, the operating system. Open Systems Interconnection reference model Established by the International Standards Organization the model describes seven functional layers that define how interconnected telecommunications systems should interface. The seven layers are: 1) physical, 2) data link, 3) network, 4) transport, 5) session, 6) presentation, and 7) application. Operating system (OS) Computer software which permits the control and use of all particular programs fed into the computer, coordinates storage and recall functions, and supervises remote terminal interaction. Overload level The highest amplitude of an analog signal for which a code word exists. Packet A data block with its own address and control signals transmitted as a unit through a telecommunications system. Packet Assembler/Disassembler (PAD) Devices which provide packet assembly and disassembly capability to -mode terminals. Packet switched data transmission service A service which transmits data in packets, including packet assembly and disassembly, if required. telemanuals.com List of terms 11-25 Packet switching The routing of message packets through a network as channels are available. Each channel is busy for the duration of only one packet, then becomes free for another packet. Packets of one message take different routes, determined by the network itself, and are rejoined and resequenced at the destination. Packet terminal A terminal which can communicate with a packet network, such as X.25. Parallel transmission The simultaneous transmission of bits of one data character using several links, or multiplexed channels in one link. Parity bit A binary digit 1 added to an information word to make the total number of 1 bits either always odd or always even. This permits checking the accuracy of information transfers. Password A set of characters which must be input to a system before the security program will allow access to data and operations. PCM word An 8-bit code group representing a specific quantized level. Port An access to a switching system. Port concentration A device which permits several terminals to share a single port. Primary Rate Access Twenty-three 64-Kbps B channels and one 64-Kbps D channel extended digital subscriber line. over an Program Step-by-step instructions that tell a computer what operations to perform. Program memory The data storage area of a computer which contains the instructions that tell the -computer what operations to perform. PROM (Programmable Read-Only Memory) A permanent data storage system which holds information which can be repeatedly read but altered only through a programming operation. Protocol converter A device which can convert one communications protocol into another. telemanuals.com List of terms Public data network A data transmission network operated by a private telecommunications administration specifically for public subscription and use. Pulse A very short-lived electric current. Usually; a DC signal burst used for digital data transmission. Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) A time division modulation technique in which signal intelligence is represented by a pulse whose amplitude represents the amplitude of the modulating wave at a specific instant of time. Pulse code modulation The most common technique used to digitize analog voice signals. Individually sampled segments of a voice signal are coded into eight-bit digital words for transmission. Pulse modulation The modulation of the amplitude (PAM), duration or position of pulses to create a digital data signal. Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) samples analog signals at short intervals and converts this information into a digitized information signal. Quantizing The process of dividing a sampled analog signal into discrete levels. In a PCM system, a finite number of bits are available for encoding each PAM sample. This establishes the number of different magnitudes, or levels, that can be encoded. For example, 8 bit PCM has 256 possible codes, each code representing a specific signal level. Each PAM sample is assigned the encoded value of the nearest level to it. This “rounding off’ to the nearest level is termed quantizing. RAM (Random Access Memory) A volatile storage system in which any storage location can be read from or written to, independent of the last storage location accessed. ROM (Read Only Memory) A permanent storage system manufactured with predetermined data content, to be read but not altered during computer operation. Real time -The actual time in which a process or event takes place. In computer processing, the running of an input/process/output cycle during the time in which an external event is occurring, and in time to influence that event. Repeater A bi-directional digital signal regenerator. telemanuals.com List of terms 1 1 - 2 7 Request to Send defined signal to a modem indicating that the attached DTE would like to send. RF channel A radio frequency channel nominally satellite. and 72 MHz bandwidth through a Routing The path selection made for a given telecommunications signal through the network to its destination. Technical specifications established by the Electronic Industries Association that electrical and mechanical interfaces between terminals, modems, computers and communications lines. Sampling The taking of measurements or specimens from representative elements of a body under investigation in order to project truths about the body as a whole from this data. SDLC (Synchronous Data Link Control) An IBM communications protocol using synchronous data transfer techniques. Semiconductor An electronic device made of silicon or germanium which will pass a high voltage, but block a low one. Examples are transistors, diodes and integrated circuits. Serial transmission A transmission method in which data bits are sent sequentially along the same channel (see parallel transmission). SF (Single Frequency signaling) The use of single tone frequencies for control functions on a circuit, e.g., “disconnect” on Direct Distance Dialing. Signal (analog) An electrical signal which has continuous waveform, the amplitude, frequency or phase of which can be modified to represent data. -Signal (digital) A discontinuous sequence of pulses representing combinations of binary digits. Simulation The fabrication of a mathematical or physical model of a process or event for the purpose of testing, training or experimentation. 1 1 - 2 8 List of terms Software instructions, programs and procedures which direct the operation of a computer system. Solid state device An electronic device which does not use vacuum tubes but which duplicates their function. Space matrix An array of crosspoints separated in space. In many modem switching systems every inlet has access to every outlet by means of separate paths-. Span lines Digital transmission media between central offices and between host and remote Start/stop A data transmission system in which each character is preceded by a start bit and followed by a stop bit which set and reset the receiver for data reception. Also known as synchronizing bits. Store and forward A message handling routine used in a message switching system. Stored program control A network switching system using programs stored in memory which are used during the switching operations, and which can be changed as the need arises. Stored program computer A computer controlled by an internally stored set of instructions. Subroutine A small, self-contained part of a computer program which can be called into operation when required, with control returned to the main program after its use. Switching The temporary, controllable connection of two or more points in a communications network. Synchronous Any operation where a series of events takes place under the-control of a clocking device; the same operations taking place in different systems, or different parts of the same system, at exactly the same time. Synchronous data network A data network in which control. components are synchronized by a single timing List of terms 11-29 Synchronous transmission A transmission system in which bits are sequenced according to fixed time intervals, and which may not have start and stop bits framing each character. System Network Architecture (SNA) An IBM communications system design which includes structure, formats, protocols and operating sequences. T interface The four-wire, physical interface between an NT1 and either an NT2 or ISDN terminal. This interface can only be about one kilometer long. A digital transmission standard that in North America carries traffic at the DS 1 rate of 1.544 Mbps. Tandem switching An intermediate switching office which handles traffic between two switching offices in the same exchange. Telecommunications A general term for the transmission and reception of intelligent signals via physical, electronic, optical or other means. Telegraphy A communications facility for telegraph key generated signals. Telemetry The transmission of measurement readings over distance, usually by electronic means. Telephony A communication facility for the transmission of voice and data over voice-grade circuits. Teletypewriter A typewriter-like device connected to a telegraphic circuit for the transmission and reception of alphanumeric data. Teleprocessing Data processing carried out by computers using data communications facilities. Terminal A point of data entry or exit in a communications network, or the device which performs entry and exit functions. 11-30 List of terms Terminal Adaptors (TA) ISDN provide protocol conversion from standard non-ISDN interfaces (e.g. X.25, RS232) to ISDN interfaces. Terminal Equipment type 1 Refers to devices that support the standard interface. Examples are digital telephones, IVD terminals, and other digital equipment. Terminal Equipment type 2 (TE2) Encompasses the existing non-ISDN equipment that requires a Terminal Adaptor to connect to an ISDN interface. Examples are RS-232, RS-422, and V.35. Text messaging The use of a computer-based network of terminals to store and transmit alphanumeric messages among users. An electronic mail service. Throughput The amount of data input, processed, and output in a given period by a machine or system. Tie line, Tie trunk A private communications link leased from a common carrier connecting two or more private branch exchanges. Time Compression Multiplexing (TCM) A digital transmission technique that permits full-duplex data transmission by sending compressed bursts of data in a “ping pong” fashion. Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) The merging of several bit streams into a composite signal for transmission over a single communication channel. Time matrix A series of memory devices used to rearrange the order of channels in a time division multiplexed bit stream, thus switching the channels in time. Time-sharing Shared access to a central computer by several users, all of whom use it over a given real-time period, but who do not notice each others’ presence due to the high processing speed of the computer. Time slot A group of one or more bit positions which recurs at a constant interval and can be uniquely identified. i List of terms 1 l-31 Time slot interchange The functional element of a digital system which performs the switching of digital voice data. Provides the path by which information is passed between the calling line and the called line. Tracking A measure of how accurately a reconstructed analog waveform compares to the original analog signal that was digitally encoded. Transceiver A device which has both transmit and receive modes. Transmission system Physical transmission medium used to transfer data from one point to another. Transparent A transmission procedure in which control signals pass unseen by the transmission facility so that no control actions are taken. Trunk A communications channel between two switching centers, provided with signaling and terminating equipment. MU-law The law used in PCM systems in North America is the MU-Law which is defined as follows: -1 where x is the input signal y is the compressed output signal is a constant (set to 255 in Norht America) is the natural logarithm U interface The two-wire, physical interface between the network (i.e., switch) and an Unipolar Refers to one polarity. In digital systems, unipolar pulses are generated and used the equipment, but are seldom transmitted over cables-or other transmission media. User prof The set of needs and specifications provided by a subscriber which define the type which be supplied by the facility. 11-32 List of terms . Value-added telecommunications A service which uses a common carrier’s network, but which offers its own services based on computer’s software and hardware, e.g., message forwarding, data pooling, etc. Virtual circuit A link between two in a network permitting message exchange according to protocol, but which uses network bandwidth only during actual data exchange. Voice messaging An electronic system which uses a telephone, computer, or other devices to ‘send, store and access voice messages between senders and recipients. Volatile memory A storage element whose contents are destroyed when power is removed. Watchdog timer A programmed timing circuit which can be set to interrupt a program a set number of seconds as a safeguard against an endless loop caused by a programming error, or unanticipated problems due to hardware breakdown. A channel bandwidth greater than voice grade, capable of data transmission at rates of 50,000 bps. x.25 A standard for packet switching communications established by x.75 The standard for intemetwork gateways between data networks. , Meridian 1 Engineering Handbook Address comments to: Northern Telecom 2305 Mission College Boulevard Santa Clara, California 95054-1591 Attention: Product Marketing 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Information subject to change without notice. Release 3.0 February, 1990 Developed in the United States Mike McLaughlin PAT Rd., Ste. 300 Thousand Oaks CA g 136 Meridian April 24, 1990 Dear Autoguote Your update to the following Autoquote User guide chapters is enclosed. Overview Meridian Meridian ACD-MAX Meridian Meridian 1 SL-1 Mail MS-1 Message Center You may use the updated chapters with your existing binder and tabs. User Guide Note that the Meridian 1 SL-1 chapter does cover the T-series models (ST,RT,NT,XT). If you still plan to quote these models, please retain All other chapters the old Meridian SL-1 Autoquote User Guide chapter. m a y be d i s c a r d e d . Due to proposed product changes, the Lanstar and Banyan chapters have These chapters will updated and distributed in not yet been updated. the near future. The Autoquote User Guide distribution list will be audited before the To remain on the distribution list, please complete and next update. I f t h i s form the Distribution List Update Form on the next page. 1 9 9 0 , y o u r n a m e w i l l b e r e m o v e d from t h e list. is not receive by June 4, Meridian I AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE OVERVIEW northern . Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 INTRODUCTION AND OVERVIEW AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE CHAPTER 1. ORGANIZATION 2. PRODUCT OF USER GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHAPTERS . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2.1 PRODUCT CHAPTER FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 NUMBERING SCHEME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 3.1 QUOTING PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 2 ...2 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3 3.2 3.3 SYSTEM ACCESS PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1 ACCESSING ...3 COMPUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ...4 3.3.1.1 Telenet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1.2 Direct Access ................................ 4 3.3.2 AUTOQUOTE MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5 3.3.3 INFORM FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3.3.4 ACCESSING THE AUTOQUOTE APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3.4 THE SERVICE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8 3.4.1 N SET UP NEW QUOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a 3.4.1.1 Inputs phase ................................. 9 3.4.2 0 LOAD OLD QUOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 3.4.3 G GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 3.4.4 M MODEL/SOFTWARE GENERIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 3.4.5 I INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 3.4.5.1 Input Formats...............................1 2 3.4.6 S SAVE QUOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3.4.7 x AUX LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..13 3.4.8 R REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L I S T E X I S T I N G Q U O T E S . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.10 c COPY OLD QUOTE.................................1 3.4.11 D DELETE OLD Q U O T E . . . . . . . . . . -. -. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3.4.12 Q QUIT AUTOQUOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.9 L 3.5 HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 Host Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPUTER RELATED QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACCESS OR AUTHORIZATION CODE QUESTIONS..............1 AUTOQUOTE OPERATIONAL OR TECHNICAL QUESTIONS........1 PRICING QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 13 13 4 4 14 14 14 15 5 5 15 4. CAVEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 4.1 4.2 OPERATIONAL 5. Appendix 1 SALES CHANNELS.....................1 Telenet Access ii 6 Autoquote Userguide 1. ORGANIZATION OF USER April 1990 GUIDE This user guide is organized with one chapter dedicated to each product In addition, this is an introductory supported by the Autoquote System. chapter pertaining to all products and-the Autoquote System as a whole. The information provided in each product chapter assumes this chapter has been read and understood. 2. PRODUCT CHAPTERS As each user does not necessarily quote all products supported by the user may be A u t o q u o t e system, o n l y t h e c h a p t e r s a p p l i c a b l e t o included in his user guide. The following product chapters may be included in an Autoquote User Guide: Meridian Meridian ACD-MAX Meridian Meridian 2.1 PRODUCT 1 SL-1 Mail MS-1 Message Center CHAPTER FORMAT E a c h o f t h e p r o d u c t c h a p t e r s i s o r g a n i z e d similarly t o s i m p l i f y u s i n g this manual for various products. Each product chapter consists of the following sections: Introduction Inputs Engineering/Provisioning Reports Some chapters may include other sections as well, such as installation parameters or special applications. This consistent format will allow an Autoquote user--familiar with one product chapter to use other product chapters with little difficulty. 1 Autoquote U s e r g u i d e April 20, 2.2 NUMBERING SCHEME T h e s e c t i o n s a n d s u b s e c t i o n s w i t h i n e a c h c h a p t e r of t h e U s e r G u i d e a r e This numbering scheme allows for quick numbered hierarchically. r e f e r e n c e t o s p e c i f i c t o p i c s a n d also aids i n h i g h l i g h t i n g t h e For example, section 2.1.2 indicates organization of each chapter. section 2, subsection 1, part 2. 3. AUTOQUOTE OVERVIEW The Northern Telecom MBS Autoquote System is an on-line, computerized s a l e s t o o l u s e d i n ' p r e p a r i n g q u o t a t i o n s f o r n e w systems as w e l l a s s o m e peripheral devices that may be added to existing systems. The Autoquote programs produce pricing and engineering reports that support sales. to the items The price quoted by the Autoquote System applies listed in the quote. The features and functions available on a system configuration are based solely on the inputs. The actual system price depends on particular applications and finalized system engineering . which may require manual adjustments to the quote. The general process for using the Autoquote System is as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Define the requirements of the quote Complete associated Autoquote input Sheets A c c e s s t h e A u t o q u o t e System b y d i a l i n g i n t o t h e h o s t c o m p u t e r Input the requirements of the quote Run and analyze pricing and engineering reports If necessary, re-define requirements and repeat the process 3.1 QUOTING PROCESS The quotation process is divided into three parts: and output (reports). inputs, processing 3.1.1 Inputs Inputs comprise the interactive part of the program. All desired inputs options must be specified via associated inputs. I n some define will default to predetermined values if no entry is made. the configuration. 3.1.2 Processing The processing of the input data begins when Reports are requested. T h i s p h a s e o f A u t o q u o t e may l a s t f r o m as l i t t l e a s 3 0 s e c o n d s t o a s m u c h minutes, depending on thg system size and the activity on the as 2 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 The processing performs engineering and provisioning computer. calculations to generate a configuration and pricing. Reports Reports represent the output of the Autoquote process. The general categories of reports are pricing, equipment engineering. 3.2 SECURITY The Autoquote System is one of Northern Telecom's primary sources of pricing and configuration information. As such, use of the system is A c c e s s t o t h e A u t o q u o t e S y s tem is controlled with various restricted. and passwords which should be-handled conscientiously. Two levels of passwords are used to restrict access to the Autoquote The first level allows access to the computer and is changed system. approximately every two months. This password is called "User Password." The second level allows access to the Autoquote programs within your specific user file. User files are called "Location Codes." If the file is not segmented by user ID's, a "Location Authorization Code" is the second level password; this password is changed approximately every three months. If user ID's are utilized for a Location Code, the second level password is called "User Code Password." User ID's and associated passwords are maintained by the administrator or controller of the Location Code; changes typically occur infrequently. Since this document provides detailed information on how to access and use the Autoquote System, i t must be handled with the same attention to security that is accorded Northern Telecom Pricing Manuals. 3.3 SYSTEM ACCESS PROCEDURES Accessing the Northern Telecom MBS Autoquote System requires two The first level is accessing the separate levels of access procedures. computer itself. The second level is accessing the Meridian Autoquote programs within the computer. 3.3.1 ACCESSING THE COMPUTER Access to the computer is accomplished by dialing into the computer with the use of a modem. Various "dumb" terminals teletypewriters and Most u s e r s will be personal computers can be used to access the dialing in to the computer through the Telenet network. However, if the user is in the Dallas area or if there are Telenet problems, he will dial in directly. Once connected to the computer, you will be required to enter an account sign-on and user password. These will be provided by your Sales Channel Point-of-Contact. 3 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 3.3.1.1 Telenet The following procedure is required to access the host computer through Telenet: Determine your local Telenet dial-in number. These numbers are Note that contained in Appendix 1.1 at the end of this chapter. there are different numbers for different baud rates. 2) Dial the Telenet number with your modem and wait for an audible or At this response, enter two carriage visual connect response. then a carriage returns. (For 2400 baud, enter one 3) After the carriage returns, you will see the following prompt: 214 TERMINAL = Enter and press 4) After responding to step 3, you will see the following Enter "C 214156" and a carriage return after this This designates the host address on Telenet. symbol: prompt. 5) You will now see "214156 CONNECTED" indicating you are connected to the host computer.Enter another carriage return and the host will prompt. send a 6) To access the computer, enter "HELLO XXXXXXXX,YYYY.NTII" at the prompt, where is your Location Code and is your account sign-on. For example: 7 ) T h e c o m p u t e r w i l l n o w p r o m p t t h e f o l l o w i n g : ENTER USER ( ) PASSWORD: Enter the User Password supplied by your Sales Channel Contact. will include your sales channel I.D. 8) After the password has been successfully entered, the computer will d i s p l a y a system m e n u f r o m w h i c h t h e S L - 1 A u t o q o u t e System c a n b e accessed. -3.3.1.2 Direct Access Accessing the Computer directly requires fewer steps: 1) Dial (214) 301-7764 with your modem and wait for an audible or visual connect response. Wait approximately five (5) seconds, then enter prompt from the You will then receive a a carriage return. host computer. You at the same point as Step 5 described in paragraph 0 above. 4 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 2) Perform steps 6 through 8 in paragraph 0 above to complete the logon procedure. 3.3.2 AUTOQVOTE MENUS the Autoqoute system has been accessed the following "primary" menu will be presented allowing the user to-choose between the SL-1 and 100 Autoqoute systems or to EXIT and logoff the system.: N 0 R T H E R N T E L E C O M M E ' R I D I A N 1 Communication Systems Welcome to the Autoquote system. Select 1 for SL-1 1 0 0 for SL-100 E to one of the following: Autoquote Exit (This system is designed for the exclusive use of and its authorized distributors and is not for Public Disclosure.) Selection:- The primary menu allows the user to select either the SL-1 Autoquote, As this S L - 1 0 0 A u t o q u o t e or E x i t b y e n t e r i n g 1 , 1 0 0 o r E r e s p e c t i v e l y . user guide only addresses the SL-1 Autoquote System, enter at this to Exit. selection to continue or an Once a the SL-1 Autoquote been selected, the user will see message file. PLEASE PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION TO THESE the TO AUTOQUOTE M E S S A G E S AS T H E Y CONVEY IMPORTANT to USERS. Once these INFORM messages have been read, press continue. After the initial INFORM messages have been read and thekey pressed, the following secondary menu will appear: Autoquote Userguide N O R T H E R T N E April 20, 1990 L E C O M M E R I D I A N 1 Communication Systems Welcome to SL-1 Autoquote! INFORMB INFORMF E Autoquote Main Menu Display message file Display message file Display message file Display message file Exit SL-1 Autoquote Select one of the following: A B C F and its ( T h i s s y s t e m i s d e s i g n e d f o r t h e e x c l u s i v e use o f authorized distributors and is not for Public Disclosure.) Selection:- to enter the Autoquote This menu allows the user to select application, to exit to the primary menu or "INFORM-"to view one of the indicated INFORM messages. 3.3.3 INFORM FILES After the user selects the SL-1 Autoqoute System the message file will be displayed. The message file displays special access and alert messages, and brief information regarding the contents of other INFORM message files. Typically, these messages will indicate new product releases available in Autoquote, changes in the quoting of existing products or changes to the system itself. INFORMF typically has the most current on-line input form. The INFORM message files will be dated to indicate when these files were last updated. 3.3.4 ACCESSING THE -- After selecting Autoquote from the secondary menu you following prompt: 6 see the Autoquote Userguide April 20, N O R T H E R N TELECOM AUTOQUOTE S Y S T E M : ENTER LOCATION CODE sssssssss Enter the Location Code supplied by your Sales Channel Point-of-Contact and wait for the next prompt. If the Location Code file is not divided If the file is using User into User Code ID's, skip the next two steps. Code segmentation, the next prompt is: ENTER USER CODE sssssssss Enter the User Code ID supplied by the administrator or controller of the Location Code, usually your Sales Channel Point-of-Contact, and wait for the next prompt: ENTER PASSWORD FOR THIS USER sssssssss Enter the User Code Password supplied with the User Code. If the Location Code File is not divided into User Codes, the prompt after ENTER LOCATION CODE is: ENTER LOCATION AUTHORIZATION sssssssss Enter the location authorization code supplied by your Sales Channel Point-of-Contact. This The next prompt is only applicable to certain Location Codes. input indicates the amount of information to be included on certain reports. ENTER REPORT LEVEL ACCESS-- If your access level and the associated passwords are known, enter the proper indicator here, otherwise enter to this prompt. Other entries will require the user to enter the "Report Level Access Password." A f t e r s u c c e s s f u l l y e n t e r i n g t h e p r e v i o u s c o d e s , t h e f- - o l l o w i n g m e s s a g e s are displayed: E N D OF PROGRAM PLEASE MENU REQUIRED OR CARRIAGE RETURN FOR SERVICE You are now ready to begin the quoting process. carriage return, y o u w i l l s e e the service menu. 7 Upon entering a Userguide April 20, 1990 3.4 THE SERVICE MENU All activities available in the Autoquote System begin at the Service Menu. The following message will appear when you are at the Service Menu: PLEASE ENTER REQUIRED SELECTION OR FOR SERVICE It is recommended that novice users always view the Service Menu when first entering the Autoquote System. To view the menu, enter RETURN. CODES: N - S E T UP NEW QUOTE 0- LOAD OLD QUOTE G- GENERAL INFORMATION M- MODEL/SOFTWARE GENERIC INPUT S- SAVE QUOTE X- AUX LOAD R- REPORT L- LIST EXISTING QUOTES C- COPY OLD QUOTE D- DELETE QUOTE Q- QUIT AUTOQUOTE A quote must be loaded into your working file (option N or 0) before the functions G,M,I,S,X, and R can be used. The general procedure for setting up a new quote requires using the options to: 1) Set up a new quote 2) Save the quote 3) Run reports . These major options are explained in the following paragraphs with the other available options shown in the service menu. 3.4.1 N along SET UP NEW QUOTE Enter to set up a new quote. The user is prompted for a set of Upon General Information (G) and Model/Software Generic (M) entries. completion of these entries, the user is automatically put into the -input phase without having to go back to the Service Menu. General Information/Model Code All entries regarding General Information and Model Code are prompted when setting up a new quote. The prompts and appropriate responses are listed below. Enter the name the user and/or salesperson. a Autoquote Ueerguide ENTER RUN TYPE: A p r i l 2 0 , 1990 QUOTE, QUOTE, QUOTE Run types do not affect the result of an Autoquote but are used in the analysis of Autoguote usage. A valid entry is required. ENTER CITY CODE FOR LABOR RATE This input applies only to the Direct Sales channel. Enter a carriage return for a listing of valid city codes, then enter the appropriate code. A valid entry is required; the entry will be validated by Autoguote. ENTER END-USER INDUSTRY CODE Enter a carriage return for a listing of the industry codes, enter the appropriate code. then A valid entry is required; the entry will be validated by Autoquote. ENTER END-USER COMPANY NAME Enter the customer's company name. ENTER END-USER LOCATION Enter the company's business location. ENTER SYSTEM CUTOVER DATE (MMDDYY) The cutover date must be equal to or greater than the current date. Format is month, day and year (MMDDYY). A valid entry is required. ENTER MODEL GENERIC CODE ENTER NUMBER These prompts determine the product and system type to be quoted. Refer to Section 1 of the various product chapters for valid responses to this prompt. 3.4.1.1 Inputs Phase -After responding to the previous prompts, the is now ready to input For e x a m p l e , t h e i n p u t c l a s s e s f o r his data for each input class. Meridian 1 SL-1 are: Software Options Phones, Lines and Trunks Miscellaneous/Memory Basic Information 9 Autoquote Ueerguide April 20, 1990 The program will prompt for each class in the order listed above. (Refer to the Inputs section of the various product chapters for information on the input classes.) In each class, there will be a prompt phase (questions asked by Autoquote) followed by the statement: END OF PROMPTS BEGIN MANUAL INPUT The user simply answers the prompted questions (if any), and then manually inputs any other requirements. Prompted entries may be changed during the manual input phase. Refer to paragraph 3.4.5.1 Input Formats, page 12 for detailed information of inputting data. After all input entries have been completed, the Service Menu is presented. At this point, the user may change General Information, Model and/or Inputs by entering G, M and/or I respectively. Refer to the explanations of these Service Menu selections in paragraphs: 3.4.3, 3.4.4, and 3.4.5. IMPORTANT: is recommended the quote be saved after initial input or Otherwise, the data could be lost if after any changes have been made. a c o m m u n i c a t i o n l i n e w e r e t o g o d o w n o r t h e user b e g a n a n o t h e r q u o t e without saving the current one. 3.4.2 LOAD OLD QUOTE When the is selected from the Service Menu, with the following: the system will respond P L E A S E E N T E R OLD QUOTE NUMBER Enter the old quote number. The existing quote numbers may be displayed command as described in paragraph . using the DO YOU WANT A P R I N T O F T H E S A V E D Enter if you want to view the inputs for this quote as the quote is loading. The inputs are printed out in their "raw" format. This feature allows the inputs to be viewed without running a quote (i.e. paragraph 3.4.8). entering the Report function ENTER REQUIRED SELECTION OR CARRIAGE RETURN FOR.SERVICE can Now that the quote has been loaded into the working file, the user select another option from t h e S e r v i c e Menu such as R for reports or G to change the General Information. 10 Autoquote U s e r g u i d e 3.4.3 G April 20, 1990 GENERAL INFORMATION This function allows the user to make changes to the General Information at the Upon entering entered when the quote was first created. Service Menu, the user will be prompted for the following: ENTER SALESMAN NAME ENTER RUN TYPE: QUOTE, ENTER CITY CODE FOR LABOR RATE ( D i r e c t ENTER END-USER INDUSTRY CODE ENTER END-USER COMPANY NAME ENTER END-USER LOCATION ENTER SYSTEM CUTOVER DATE QUOTE Sales channel only) An explanation of these prompts is given in Section page 8. 3.4.4 M MODEL/SOFTWARE GENERIC This function allows the user to change the Model/Software Generic of an For example, if quote number 10 is an Option 21, it existing quote. could be changed to a Option 51 without having to re-input the requirements. Please refer to Introduction section of the various product chapters for the valid Model/Generic codes. Upon entering t h e u s e r w i l l b e p r o m p t e d f o r t h e following: at the Service Menu, ENTER MODEL GENERIC CODE ENTER RELEASE An explanation of these prompts is given in Section 8. 3.4.5 I N-New, page INPUT The is entered at the Service menu when the user wishes to change the inputs which were specified when the quote was first set up with the "N" command. The following prompt will appear: PLEASE ENTER DESIRED INPUT CLASS, END OR CARRIAGE RETURN FOR THE If a carriage return is entered, an input menu will-display. Meridian 1 SL-1, the following input menu will appear: OPTIONS SOFTWARE OPTION GROUPS PHONES, LINES AND MISCELLANEOUS/MEMORY BASIC INFORMATION Enter the appropriate letter for the input class desired. 11 For April Autoquote 20, 1990 Once a user is in a specific input category and all changes are complete, may b e e n t e r e d t o g e t b a c k t o t h e I n p u t M e n u o r “ABORT” to return to the Service Menu. Refer to the Inputs section of each product chapter for specific inputs. 3.4.5.1 Input Formats Input of data into the MBS Autoquote System may be required in one of three different input types. These different types are needed for some inputs that require more information than others. For example, a certain input may need to include just a quantity whereas another might need to include a quantity and a "type." The three input formats are as follows: Input Type 1 Format 2 3 where I = Input code Number A = an integer value and/or a one decimal value When entering data, the input code is separated from the input data and data values are separated from each other by values by a slash a comma Blank spaces or leading zeros when entering data are not Some e x a m p l e i n p u t s a r e s h o w n b e l o w : required or recommended. Type 1: Type 2: Type 3: I n some cases, n o t a l l d a t a v a l u e s n e e d t o b e e n t e r e d a s A u t o q u o t e will supply default values. Information on input defaults is included in the Inputs section of each of the various product chapters. Input Echo Whether supplied by the end user or defaulted, the program will echo e a c h line o f i n p u t b a c k t o t h e t e r m i n a l for v e r i f i c a t i o n . not only allows the user to verify each input, but also to view any-defaulted value. The echoed values do not contain a decimal point and appear to be increased by a magnitude of 10. For e x a m p l e , E n t e r i n g will appear as 3.4.6 S SAVE QUOTE When is selected for a new quote, the system will respond by assigning a quote number and providing a statement confirming the quote 12 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 has been saved. The quote will be saved for only four (4) months from If necessary, the quote may be copied to a new quote the creation date. number to extend the life four more months. The creation date o f a quote is either the date it was saved for the first time or the date it was copied. When is selected for an existing quote, the system will respond by providing a statement confirming the quote has been saved. 3.4.7 x AUX LOAD Auxiliary loads are used to combine the engineering of a single or multiple RPE sites and/or other peripheral devices with the main site or When is entered, the system prompts for the AUX quote system. After each AUX quote number is entered, press numbers one at a time. ENTER and the system will prompt for another. After all AUX quote numbers have been entered, the user enters "END". Refer to the Aux Loading section for Meridian 1 SL-1 chapter for a complete description of the AUX LOAD requirements regarding RPE. 3.4.8 R REPORT This selection is used to generate reports on the quote. After the is entered, there will be a pause while the computer runs through the This phase of Autoquote may last from as little as 30 calculations. minutes, depending on the system size and the seconds to as much as activity on the computer. After completing the calculations, the system will print the "Header" report which includes general information and Autoquote disclaimers. Autoquote disclaimers. The system will t PLEASE ENTER REPORT NUMBER(S) Reports may be requested in any order and may be entered one at a time or several separated by commas. Refer to the Reports Section of each the various product chapters for a list of report numbers and titles. All reports except the header are optional and can be printed as desired by the user. Enter "End" at the prompt to return to the Service Menu. -3.4.9 L LIST EXISTING QUOTES This option allows a "directory" list to be displayed, showing all of the quotes in the file. The quotes are listed by quote number in descending order. When " L " i s e n t e r e d , t h e s y s t e m p r o m p t s : PLEASE ENTER QUOTE NUMBER TO LIST PROM OR CARRIAGE 13 Autoguote Userguide April 20, Enter the quote number from which you want the list to begin. return will cause the list to begin from the latest quote. Carriage PLEASE ENTER NUMBER OF QUOTES TO BE DISPLAYED AT ONE TIRE OR END When the number is entered, the system will list the 'number of quotes The list will start with the quote number specified and end specified. after the correct amount has been displayed. After viewing the quotes in the list, the user can continue with more listings or enter "END" to return to the Service Menu. 3.4.10 c COPY OLD QUOTE With this entry, the system will prompt for the quote number to be copied. W h e n t h e q u o t e n u m b e r i s e n t e r e d , t h e system m a k e s a c o p y o f t h e s a v e d i n f o r m a t i o n a n d a s s i g n s i t a n e w quote n u m b e r w i t h a new creation date. This feature allows a quote to be modified and saved without disturbing the original quote. 3.4.11 D DELETE OLD QUOTE A quote may be deleted from the file if it is no longer needed. After entering "D" at the Service Menu, the system will prompt for the quote number to be deleted. A second prompt will echo back the quote number to be deleted for verification. 3.4.12 Q Enter 3.5 QUIT AUTOQUOTE "Q" at the Service Menu to return to the secondary Autoqoute menu. HELP When this User Guide is read and followed, the user will experience little or no difficulty in using the MBS Autoquote System. If, however, questions or problems do arise, read the following subsections for assistance information. These items are presented in the order problems -m a y b e e n c o u n t e r e d w h e n u s i n g t h e A u t o q u o t e system. 3.5.1 Host Access If, when accessing Autoquote, you encounter problems before getting the host prompt (:) Telenet Users call Telenet Customer Service at 800-336-0437. Direct Users call the Information Center at 214-437-8711 14 Ueerguide April 20, 1990 3.5.2 COMPUTER RELATED QUESTIONS For computer access or terminal time-out problems, Center at 214-437-8111. call the Information 3.5.3 ACCESS OR AUTHORIZATION CODE Call your Sales Channel Point-of-Contact o r password Autoquote Administration cannot give out administrator/controller. password information. 3.5.4 AUTOQUOTE OPERATIONAL OR TECHNICAL QUESTIONS There are three sources of information available to answer and/or technical questions. 1) Consult this User Guide for both access and configuration information. 2) Call your NT support person or group (District Sales Manager). 3) Contact Autoquote Administration at (214) 437-8529. 3.5.5 PRICING QUESTIONS Many pricing questions can be answered by consulting your pricing However, i f t h e p r i c i n g m a n u a l d o e s n o t c o n t a i n t h e a n s w e r , manual. contact your NT Representative. 4. CAVEATS This section contains information on the characteristics and functionality of the Autoquote system. It is important that this section is understood to prevent any misuse of the Autoquote system. 4.1 GENERAL -T h e M e r i d i a n A u t o q u o t e S y s t e m i s a s a l e s tool to b e u s e d i n p r e p a r i n g Although quotations for new systems as well as some peripheral devices. t h e system c o n t a i n s p r e c i s e e n g i n e e r i n g r u l e s , i t d o e s n o t p e r f o r m a n configuration of every potential exhaustive and configuration. The engineering rules are designed to accurately Therefore, the user should always review configure an average system. the reports produced by the system to ensure a correct and reasonable configuration. These reviews are necessitated by Autoquote program functionality and not by limitations of the products supported in the . A u t o q u o t e System. 15 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 Although a concerted effort has been made to engineer each Meridian system configuration completely with the Autoquote System, there may be situations requiring further engineering or configuration adjustments. Because of this, the price quoted by the Autoquote System applies only to the items of equipment and software listed in the.Equipment Breakout Report. This report contains a line entry for each item of equipment or software that is quoted. No item is priced into the quote unless it is detailed in this report. Pricing adjustments will be required if there are any additions or deletions to this list. 4.2 OPERATIONAL SALES CHANNELS The Autoquote System is used by all Sales Channels. For each Sales Channel, it quotes only those items which Northern Telecom supplies to that channel. Autoquote may treat some inputs differently depending on the Sales Channel. 16 Autoguote Userguide April 20, 1990 5. APPENDIX 1 TELENET ACCESS NUMBERS For customer service, call toll-free l-800/336-0437. locations with non-WATS access, call From overseas 2400 9600 BPS ST AC CITY BPS BPS CLASS -----------------------------------------------------------------------AL 205 A n n i s t o n 236-9711 AL 205 Birmingham 328-2310 355-0206 AL 205 D e c a t u r AL 2 0 5 793-5034 AL 205 F l o r e n c e 767-7960 767-0497 AL 205 H u n t s v i l l e 539-2281 539-1631 AL 205 M o b i l e 438-6881 432-1680 AL 205 Montgomery 832-4314 269-0090 AL 205 T u s c a l o o s a 752-1472 758-5799 AK 9 0 7 A n c h o r a g e 276-0453 276-0453 AK 9 0 7 B a r r o w 852-2425 AK 9 0 7 B e t h e l 543-2411 AK 907 Cold Bay 532-2371 AK 9 0 7 424-3744 AK 9 0 7 D e a d h o r s e 659-2777 AK 907 Delta Junction 895-5070 AK 9 0 7 D i l l i n g h a m 842-2688 AK 9 0 7 F a i r b a n k s 456-3282 AK 9 0 7 G l e n n a l l e n 822-5231 AK 9 0 7 H o m e r 235-5239 AK 9 0 7 I l i a m n a 571-1364 AK 9 0 7 J u n e a u 789-7009 AK 9 0 7 K e t c h i k a n 225-1871 AK King Salmon 246-3049 AK 9 0 7 K o d i a k 486-4061 AK 9 0 7 K o t z e b u e 442-2602 AK 9 0 7 524-3256 AK 9 0 7 N a m e 443-2256 AK 9 0 7 778-2301 AK 9 0 7 P a l m e r 745-0200 AK 907 Prudhoe Bay 659-2777 AK 907 St Paul 546-2320 AK 9 0 7 S e w a r d 224-3126 AK 9 0 7 S i t k a AK 9 0 7 S o l d o t n a 262-1990 AK 9 0 7 T a l k e e t n a 733-2227 AK 9 0 7 T a n a n a ( 3 0 0 B P S ONLY) 366-7167 AK 9 0 7 V a l d e z 835-4987 AK 9 0 7 W h i t t i e r 472-2467 AK 9 0 7 Y a k u t a t 254-0244 AZ 602 P h o e n i x 256-6955 254-0040 A AZ 602 F l a g s t a f f B AZ 602 T u c s o n 747-9395 B AR 5 0 1 F a y e t t e v i l l e 442-0212 442-0212 B 17 Autoquote Userguide AR AR AR AR 501 501 501 501 805 Ft Smith Hot Springs Little Rock Texarkana CA Bakersfield CA 9 1 6 C h i c o CA 7 1 4 CA 2 1 3 Compton CA 4 1 5 C o n c o r d CA 9 1 6 D a v i s CA 6 1 9 E s c o n d i d o CA 7 0 7 E u r e k a CA 4 1 5 F r e m o n t CA 2 0 9 F r e s n o CA 714 Garden Grove CA 8 1 8 G l e n d a l e CA 4 1 5 H a y w a r d CA 213 Los Angeles CA 213 Los Angeles CA 213 Marina Del Rey CA 2 0 9 CA 2 0 9 M o d e s t o CA 4 0 8 M o n t e r e y CA 2 1 3 N o r w a l k CA 4 1 5 O a k l a n d CA 6 1 9 O c e a n s i d e CA 619 Palm Springs CA 415 Palo Alto CA Pinole CA 7 1 4 Pomona CA 9 1 6 CA 9 1 6 S a c r a m e n t o CA 4 0 8 S a l i n a s CA 415 San Carlos CA 619 San Diego CA 415 San Francisco CA 408 San Jose CA 2 1 3 S a n P e d r o CA 415 San Rafael CA 415 San CA 714 S a n t a CA 805 S a n t a Barbara CA 408 Santa Cruz CA 805 Santa Maria CA 707 Santa Rosa CA 2 0 9 S t o c k t o n CA 805 Thousand Oaks CA 8 0 5 V e n t u r a CA 2 0 9 V i s a l i a CA 818 West Covina CA.818 Woodland Hills CO 719 Colorado Springs CO 3 0 3 D e n v e r CO 303 F t Collins CO 303 Grand Junction 782-2852 623-3159 372-4616 772-6181 327-8146 894-6882 824-9000 516-1007 827-3960 753-4387 741-7756 444-3091 490-2050 233-0961 898-9820 507-0909 881-1382 624-2251 937-3580 306-2984 383-2557 576-2852 646-9092 404-2237 836-4911 430-0613 951-2612 856-9995 724-2400 626-1284 243-0690 448-6262 443-4940 591-0726 233-0233 956-5777 294-9119 548-6141 April 20, C B B B B B B C C B B B B B B 623-3159 374-2861 772-6181 327-5321 8 2 4 - 8 9 7 6 674-0127 753-4387 741-9536 490-2050 441-1861 895-1207 246-3886 9 3 7 - 0 2 3 3 9 3 7 - 0 2 3 3 622-1138 622-1138 306-4922 646-5122 834-3194 951-2612 856-0484 724-2225 243-0690 443-7434 443-8791 595-8870 231-1703 956-6317 286-6340 514-1590 472-5360 558-7078 682-5361 429-6937 925-7039 578-4447 957-7610 495-3588 656-6760 627-1201 915-5151 887-3160 635-5361 337-6060 493-9131 550-4625 564-1158 429-9192 925-7039 578-1055 957-7627 -. 650-1070 348-7141 635-2551 696-0159 493-4014 18 3 3 7 - 3 3 0 4 B A A B B B C C B C B B C C B B B B B A B B C B B B C B C C B B B C B B A B C Userguide . CO CO CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT DE DE DC DC FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL GA GA GA GA GA GA GA GA GA HI HI ID ID 303 719 203 203 203 203 203 203 203 203 203 203 302 302 202 202 407 813 407 904 305 813 407 904 904 904 813 904 407 305 813 904 407 904 904 305 813 813 904 813 904 407 912 404 404 404 404 404 912 Greeley Pueblo Bridgeport Danbury Hartford Middletown. New Britain New Haven New London Norwalk Stamford Waterbury Dover Newark Washington Washington Cape Coral Cocoa Beach Daytona Beach Ft Lauderdale Ft Myers Ft Pierce Gainesville Holly Hill Jacksonville Melbourne Miami Naples Ocala Orlando Panama City Pensacola Pompano Beach St Petersburg Sarasota Tallahassee Tampa Valparaiso West Palm Beach Albany Athens Atlanta Augusta Columbus Gainsville Macon 4 0 4 Rome 912 S a v a n n a h 8 0 8 Oahu 800 Other Islands 208 Boise 2 0 8 I d a h o Falls 352-8563 542-4053 335-5055 794-9075 247-9479 344-8217 225-7027 624-5954 447-8455 866-7404 348-0787 753-4512 678-8328 454-7710 429-7896 429-7800 338-3701 275-7924 267-0800 255-2629 764-4505 275-4153 466-4566 338-0220 257-4770 353-1818 683-5461 787-0799 242-8247 372-0230 263-3033 351-3790 422-4088 763-8377 432-1335 941-5445 323-4026 923-4563 April 20, 1990 367-9130 792-5354 724-9396 7-73-3569 437-0909 359-9404 756-0342 737-4340 429-0956 429-0956 524-5304 275-4153 466-4566 338-1700 257-4770 791-9201 687-0666 787-0799 372-1355 351-0263 422-8858 763-8377 434-2103 327-1163 925-1499 681-1902 224-9920 897-3421 833-6691 888-3011 548-5590 223-5859 897-3421 655-2993 431-9384 523-0834 724-2752 571-0556 584-0212 724-4494 323-8931 741-2108 234-1428 236-2605 236-2875 528-0200 (2 ) 272-5299 (2) 343-1272 529-0406 528-0200 272-5299 529-0406 19 B C B B B B B B B B B C B B 429-9145 A . A C C B C B B B B B B C B C 372-9684 A C C B B C C B C B B B B C B 523-5512 A B B B C B B B B Userguide ID 208 ID 208 IL 312 IL 312 IL 618 IL 309 IL 312 IL 217 IL 815 IL 815 IL 708 IL 708 IL 309 IL 815 IL 217 IL 217 IN 812 IN 812 IN 219 IN 219 IN 317 IN 317 IN 317 IN 317 IN 219 IN 812 IA 515 IA 319 IA 319 IA 319 IA IA 319 IA IA 712 IA 319 KS 9 1 3 KS 9 1 3 KS 9 1 3 KS 9 1 3 KS 9 1 3 KS 3 1 6 KY 502 KY 5 0 2 KY 6 0 6 KY 5 0 2 KY 5 0 2 LA 3 1 8 LA 504 LA 318 LA 318 LA'318 LA 504 LA 318 ME 2 0 7 ME 2 0 7 Pocatella Arlington Heights Aurora Belleview Bloomington Chicago Decatur Dekalb Joliet Libertyville Naperville Peoria Springfield Urbana Bloomington Evansville Ft Wayne Gary Indianapolis Kokomo Lafayette Muncie South Bend Terre Haute Ames Burlington Cedar Rapids Davenport Des Moines Dubuque Iowa City Sioux City Waterloo Lawrence Leavenworth Manhattan Salina Topeka Wichita Bowling Green Frankfort Lexington Louisville Cwensboro Alexandria Baton Rouge Lafayette Lake Charles Monroe New Orleans Shreveport Augusta Brewer 743-0099 232-1764 255-6465 896-0620 227-5483 827-7000 938-0600 429-0235 758-2623 726-0070 362-7838 355-2910 637-8570 965-0400 753-1373 384-6428 332-1344 424-7693 426-2268 882-8800 299-0024 455-2460 742-6000 282-6418 233-7104 232-5329 233-6300 752-2516 364-0911 324-2445 288-4403 556-0783 351-1421 255-1545 232-5441 843-8124 651-0015 537-0948 825-7900 233-9880 262-5669 782-7941 875-4654 233-0312 589-5580 686-8107 445-1053 343-0753 233-0002 436-0518 387-6330 524-4094 622-3123 989-3081 743-5885 232-1764 255-6465 896-3363 227-5483 828-2573 938-8725 429-6054 758-5046 726-8731 362-7838 355-2910 637-8582 965-0696 753-1391 328-0317 April 20, 938-4401 C B B B B C C C B C C B B C B C C C B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B C B 428-2522 422-3431 882-1835 299-6766 452-0073 233-4031 234-4119 233-2603 752-2516 362-2764 324-8902 288-6206 354-0676 233-4660 262-7961 782-6380 875-1942 233-7217 583-1006 343-0771 234-8451 322-9826 522-3967 424-2255 622-7364 20 C B A B B B A C B C B B B B 524-7337 A B B C Userguide . ME 2 0 7 ME 2 0 7 MD 3 0 1 MD MD 3 0 1 MA 6 1 7 MA 5 0 8 MA 6 1 7 MA 508 MA 5 0 8 MA 5 0 8 MA 6 1 7 MA 5 0 8 MA 508 MA 4 1 3 MA 4 1 3 MA 5 0 8 MA 4 1 3 MA 508 MA 5 0 8 MI 313 MI 616 MI 3 1 3 MI 3 1 3 MI 616 MI 5 1 7 MI 616 MI 5 1 7 MI 5 1 7 MI 616 MI 313 MI 313 MI 5 1 7 MI 3 1 3 MI 616 MI 3 1 3 MI 3 1 3 MN 2 1 8 MN 5 0 7 MN 6 1 2 MN 5 0 7 MN 612 MS 6 0 1 MS 6 0 1 MS 6 0 1 MS 6 0 1 MS 6 0 1 MO 3 1 4 MO 314 MO 816 MO 8 1 6 MO 314 MO 4 1 7 MT 4 0 6 MT 406 Portland Annapolis Baltimore Frederick. Boston Brockton Dedham Fall River Framingham Lawrence Lexington Lowell New Bedford Northampton Pittsfield Salem Springfield Woods Hole Worcester Ann Arbor Battle Creek Detroit Flint Grand Rapids Jackson Kalamazoo Lansing Midland Muskegon Pontiac Port Huron Saginaw Southfield Traverse City Warren Wayne Duluth Mankato Minneapolis Rochester St Cloud Hattiesburg Jackson Meridian Starkville Columbia Jefferson City Kansas City St Joseph St Louis Springfield Billings G r e a t Falls 784-0105 761-4000 224-8550 727-6060 293-9596 292-0662 580-0721 326-4064 677-4477 879-6798 975-2273 863-1550 937-5214 999-2915 586-0510 499-7741 744-1559 April 20, 1990 224-0795 752-5555 C C B A B A B B B B B B B B C 727-2044 574-9244 3 2 6 - 4 0 6 4 863-1745 999-9667 B 540-7500 755-4740 996-5995 968-0929 964-2988 235-8517 774-0966 782-8111 345-3088 484-0062 832-7068 726-5723 332-5120 982-8364 790-5166 827-4710 946-2121 575-9152 326-4210 722-1719 388-3780 341-2459 282-5917 253-2064 264-0815 863-0024 969-0036 482-2210 3 2 4 - 2 1 5 5 449-4404 634-5178 221-9900 279-4797 421-4990 864-4814 771-0067 21 737-9285 457-9390 792-1785 665-2900 968-9851 963-2274 235-5477 774-0131 B 9 6 4 - 3 1 3 3 345-3122 484-6301 799-3190 558-8460 326-4210 722-5032 338-1661 282-0253 3 4 1 - 0 3 2 4 -9 6 9 - 0 1 5 2 634-8436 472-1430 421-0381 864-4945 248-6373 4 2 1 - 1 3 7 6 C B A B A B B C B B B C B B B B C B B B B A C C B B B B B B C A C A B C B Userguide MT MT NE NE NE NV NV NH NH NH NH NH NJ NJ NJ NJ NJ NJ NJ NJ NJ NJ NJ NJ NJ NJ NJ NJ NJ 406 Helena 443-0000 406 Missoula 721-5900 308 Grand Island 381-2049 402 Lincoln 475-4964 402 Omaha 341-7733 702 L a s V e g a s 737-6861 702 Reno 827-6900 603 Concord 224-1024 603 Durham 868-2924 603 Manchester 627-8725 880-6241 603 Nashua 431-2302 603 Portsmouth 348-0561 609 Atlantic City 780-5030 201 Freehold 201 Hackensack 488-6567 609 596-1500 609 M e r c h a n t v i l l e 663-9297 201 Morristown . 455-0275 201 New Brunswick 745-2900 201 Newark 623-0469 201 P a s s a i c 778-5600 201 P a t e r s o n 684-7560 609 P r i n c e t o n 799-5587 201 Rahway 815-1885 201 201 Roseland 227-5277 201 S a y r e v i l l e 525-9507 201 Summit 273-9619 609 Trenton 989-8847 NM 5 0 5 A l b u q u e r q u e 243-4479 NM 5 0 5 L a s 526-9191 NM 505 Santa Fe 473-3403 NY 5 1 8 A l b a n y 465-8444 NY 6 0 7 B i n g h a m t o n 772-6642 NY 7 1 6 B u f f a l o 847-1440 NY 516 Deer Park 667-5566 NY 5 1 6 H e m p s t e a d 292-3800 NY 6 0 7 I t h a c a 277-2142 NY 212 New York City 741-8100 NY 212 New York City 741-4950 NY 212 New York City 620-6000 N Y 7 1 6 N i a g a r a Falls 282-1462 NY 5 1 8 P l a t t s b u r g h 562-1890 NY 9 1 4 P o u g h k e e p s i e 473-2240 NY 7 1 6 R o c h e s t e r 454-1020 NY 3 1 5 S y r a c u s e 472-5583 NY 3 1 5 U t i c a 797-0920 NY 914 White Plains 328-9199 NC 7 0 4 A s h e v i l l e 252-9134 NC 7 0 4 C h a r l o t t e 332-3131 NC.919 Fayetteville 323-8165 NC 7 0 4 G a s t o n i a 865-4708 NC 9 1 9 G r e e n s b o r o NC 919 High Point 889-7494 NC 919 North Wilkesboro 838-9034 April 20, 1990 B C B B B B 443-0527 381-2049 475-3839 346-6419 737-5466 827-5290 225-8710 B B B C 625-8088 880-3901 431-7592 344-8571 780-9122 488-2063 596-8659 665-6860 644-4745 745-7010 623-7122 773-3674 936-0231 B B B 623-0900 799-0244 227-6722 273-9619 989-7127 242-1742 465-8632 772-9526 847-1825 243-1105 485-3380 272-9980 645-0560 645-0560 645-0560 282-3284 633-1117 633-1117 633-1117 -- 473-3200 454-5730 479-5445’ 797-022.8 682-3505 252-0133 333-6204 323-4148 275-1251 22 3 3 2 - 3 7 0 5 B B B A B B A B B B B' B B B C B B B B B C A A A C C B B B B B B A C B B B C Userguide NC NC NC NC NC ND ND ND OH OH OH OH OH OH OH OH OH OH OH OH OH OH OH OH OH OK OK OK OK OK OR OR OR OR OR OR OR PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA 919 919 919 919 919 701 701 701 216 513 216 614 513 216 419 513 216 216 419 419 513 419 216 216 216 918 405 405 405 918 503 503 503 503 503 503 503 215 814 717 717 814 412 717 814 215 717 215 412 215 412 412 215 717 814 Raleigh Res Tri Park Tarboro Wilmington Winston-Salem Fargo Grand Forks Canton Cincinnati Cleveland Columbus Dayton Elyria Hamilton Kent Mansfield Sandusky Springfield Toledo Warren Wooster Youngstown Bartlesville Oklahoma City Stillwater Tulsa Corvallis Eugene Hood River Klamath Falls Medford Portland Salem Allentown Altoona Carlisle Danville Erie Greensburg Harrisburg Johnstown King of Prussia Lancaster Monroeville Philadelphia Pittsburgh Pittsburgh Reading Scranton State College 834-8254 549-8139 823-0578 763-8313 725-2126 235-7717 775-7813 663-2256 452-0903 579-0390 575-1658 463-9340 461-5254 322-8712 422-8188 863-4116 678-5115 960-1771 526-0686 627-0050 324-1520 April 20, 541-9096 251-8900 777-0312 235-9069 452-6642 241-8008 771-6480 461-9044 461-0755 322-8645 422-8188 678-5043 579-1583 575-1308 463-9110 678-6774 255-1906 394-0041 743-1296 336-3675 353-0333 743-6843 353-0225 232-9513 743-1447 587-2774 754-0559 342-6626 624-1112 584-3247 754-9273 683-1460 386-4405 882-6282 779-6343 295-3028 378-7712 435-3330 949-0310 249-9311 271-0102 899-2241 836-4771 236-6882 535-7576 337-4300 295-5405 946-3439 856-1330 574-9462 288-9950 288-9974 376-8750 961-5321 231-1510 882-6282 773-7601 241-0496 378-1660 770-1405 453-3793 836-4771 236-2007 536-3630 337-2850 295-7128 946-3439 856-1330 574-0990 471-6430 471-6430 375-6945 961-5480 23 295-2936 574-0094 281-8782 281-8782 B B C C B C B B B A A A B C B A C C B C B C B B B B B B B C C C B B A B B B C C B B B B B C B B A A A C B C Autoquote Userguide PA 215 PA 215 PA 7 1 7 PA 717 PA 7 1 7 RI 401 RI 401 RI 401 SC 8 0 3 SC 803 SC 8 0 3 SC 8 0 3 SD 6 0 5 SD 605 SD 605 TN 615 TN 615 TN 615 TN 615 TN 615 TN 901 TN 615 TN 615 TX 915 TX 806 TX 214 TX 512 TX 512 TX 409 TX 512 TX 214 TX 817 TX 915 TX 817 TX 409 TX 713 TX 512 TX 214 TX 806 TX 512 TX 915 TX 409 TX 915 TX 512 TX 214 TX 817 TX 214 TX 512 TX 817 TX 817 UT.801 UT 801 UT 801 UT 801 VT 802 Warrington West Chester Wilkes-Barre Williamsport York Providence North Kingston Woonsocket Charleston Columbia Greenville Spartanburg Pierre Rapid City Sioux Falls Bristol Chattanooga Clarksville Johnson City Knoxville Memphis Nashville Oak Ridge Abilene Amarillo Athens Austin Brownsville Bryan Corpus Dallas El Paso Worth Galveston Houston Laredo Lubbock Midland Nederland San Angelo San Antonio Sherman Temple Tyler Victoria Waco Wichita Falls Logan Ogden Provo Salt Lake City Burlington April 20, 1990 343-6010 343-6010 436-7406 436-7406 824-8209 829-3108 494-1796 846-6550 751-7912 295-7100 466-4566 722-4303 254-0695 233-3486 585-1637 224-0481 348-2621 336-8593 B B B C B B B B B B B B B C B 843-0039 831-3990 295-7100 466-4566 577-4710 252-0328 271-0231 224-2257 968-1130 756-1161 336-6438 968-2480 265-7929 552-0032 282-6645 523-5500 521-0215 244-3702 521-5072 527-5175 255-2608 481-3590 676-9151 373-0458 677-1712 373-1833 928-1130 929-3622 542-0367 544-7073 822-0159 884-9030 748-6371 381-1897 532-7907 332-4307 762-4382 227-1018 884-6946 745-1359 381-1897 541-1931 332-6794 765-7298 227-8208 748-3541 3 3 2 - 8 4 2 4 227-1760 724-1791 236-4205 747-4121 686-5360 561-9811 722-3720 944-7621 22 S-8004 893-4995 773-9723 597-8925 572-3197 752-9743 322-3774 752-3421 627-1630 359-0149 864-0808 686-2452 561-8597 727-4090 949-1231 225-3444 572-3197 752-3421 627-1640 375-2084 359-0578 24 -- B B C B B B C B B C B C C B A C B A B A C C C B B B B B B C C B C B B C B B B Userguide VT VT VT VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA WA WA WA WA WA WA WA WA WA WA WA WA WA WA WV WV WV WV WI WI WI WI WI WI WI WI WI WI WI WI WY WY WY 802 802 802 703 804 703 703 703 703 804 804 804 703 804 703 206 206 206 206 206 206 509 509 206 509 206 206 509 509 304 304 304 608 715 414 414 608 608 414 414 414 414 715 414 307 307 307 Montpelier 229-4966 775-1676 White River Blacksburg Charlottesville Covington Fredericksburg Harrisonburg Herndon Lynchburg Newport News Norfolk Occoquan Richmond Roanoke Auburn Bellingham Everett 552-9181 977-5330 962-2217 371-0188 434-7121 435-1800 845-0010 596-6600 625-1186 494-0836 788-9902 344-2036 939-9982 733-2720 775-9929 Lynwood Olympia Pullman 774-7466 754-0460 332-0172 Seattle Spokane Tacoma V a n c o u v e r Wenatchee Yakima Charleston Huntington Morgantown Wheeling Beloit Eau Claire Green Bay Kenosha La Crosse Madison Milwaukee Neenah 625-9612 455-4071 627-1791 693-6914 663-6227 575-1060 345-6471 523-2802 292-0104 233-7732 Sheboygan Wausau West Bend Casper Cheyenne Laramie April 20, 1990 B C C C C C B C B C B B 4 8 1 - 6 8 0 7 596-2710 625-2408 494-0836 343-4140 344-2404 B B B 733-2873 774-7466 774-7466 786-5066 332-0172 946-2350 623-9951 838-9065 6 2 5 - 9 0 0 8 663-9180 345-7140 292-0492 836-0097 432-2815 552-9242 784-0560 257-5010 271-3914 722-7636' 632-6166 452-399s 845-9589 334-2206 265-5167 638-4421 721-5878 432-0346 257-8472 278-8007 731-1560 632-2174 2 6 5 - 8 8 0 7 637-3958 2 7 1 - 2 2 3 8 B C B B C B B A B B B B B B C C B B C B C B B A C C C B B C B C (1) Service is provided by Alascom, Inc. via Alaskanet, which is restricted to collect call access to U.S. hosts connected to the network. If prepaid access is required, contact a US Sprint representative. For sign-on information, call Alascom 2s Autoquote Userguide Customer Service at (outside Alaska). April 20, 1990 (inside Alaska) or l-8001544-2233 (2) International data rate schedule applies. * An asterisk indicates a change in number, a service upgrade or a new location. Refer to the 'New' listing for further explanations of these changes. 26 Meridian I USER GUIDE MERIDIAN 1 Autoquote U s e r g u i d e April 20, 1990 MERIDIAN 1 SL-1 PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 PRODUCT 1 DESCRIPTION...............................1 1.2 VALID MODELS.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 1 INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.1 INPUT CLASSES.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.2 INPUT CODES, DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES- . . . . . 4 2.2.1 Software Option ............................... 2.2.2 Phones, Lines, and Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2.1 Port Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic Defaults Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3 Miscellaneous/Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4 Basic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 4 a 25 ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3.1 SOFTWARE PROVISIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3.2 PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT CARDS AND MODULES;..........3 0 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 IPE Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPE Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3.1 DTR Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3.2 D T R P o r t P r o v i s i o n i n g T a b l e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3.2.3.3 DTR Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.4 T o n e Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.5 I P E M o d u l e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.6 EPE M o d u l e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.6.1 Controller 3.2.6.2 3.3 NETWORK 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7 3.3.8 3.4 Ringing LOOP ............................. Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 31 31 32 3 34 34 34 34 34 34 ENGINEERING.........................36 Calculating Network Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option 21 Special Case . . . . . . . . . . IPE Modules GOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPE MODULES GOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Segmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meridian Mail Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......................................... Non Blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 36 36 37 37 38 38 PROVISIONING........3 9 3.4.1 P r o v i s i o n i n g *. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P o r t s -. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 39 Userguide 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.1.2 SDI .... 3 . 4 . 1 . 3 S D I C a b l e s -. . . ESDI Provisioning-. . . . D C H I P r o v i s i o n i n g -. . . . Card 3.5 . . . . April 20, 1990 .............................. .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Provisioning:...................4 39 39 40 40 0 PROVISIONING........,.................4 3.5.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 3 . 5 . 2 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 3.6 COMMON EQUIPMENT CARD PLACEMENT RULES............4 3 3.6.1 General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 3.7 MODULE AND COLUMN PROVISIONING...................4 4 3 . 7 . 1 M o d u l e P r o v i s i o n i n g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 3.7.1.1 Common Equipment Modules and Placement......4 4 3.7.1.1.1 Common/Peripheral Equipment Module 3.7.1.1.2 CPU/Network Module 4 3.7.1.1.3 CPU Module (CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Network Module (NET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4 3.7.1.1.5 PRI Network Expansion Module 5 3.7.1.2 Peripheral Equipment 5 3.7.1.2.1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module...4 3.7.1.2.2 Enhanced Peripheral Equipment Module......4 5 3.7.1.3 Other Equipment Modules.....................4 5 3 . 7 . 1 . 3 . 1 H e r i d i a n H a i l (MH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..4 6 3.7.1.3.2 Remote Peripheral Equipment 6 3.7.1.3.3 Inter-Group Module 6 3.7.2 Pedestals and Kits.................4 6 3.7.2.1 Pedestals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 3 . 7 . 2 . 2 Kits......................4 7 3.8 POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.1 Power Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.2 Power Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.3 Power Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 8 . 4 Reserve P o w e r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 8 . 4 . 1 AC S y s t e m s ( U P S ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.4.2 DC Systems (Batteries):.....................4 3 . 9 MEMORY . . . . . . 3.9.1 Memory 3.9.2 Memory 3.9.2.1 3.9.2.2 3.9.2.3 3.9.2.4 . . . . ..................................... Calculations . . . . . Capacities . . . . . . . Option 21 . . . . . . . . Option 51 . . . . . . . . Option 61 . . . . . . . Option 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... ....... ...... ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... .... ...... ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... ........... .............. .............. 3.10 REAL TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 48 48 49 49 49 9 50 50 51 51 51 52 52 3.10.1 Rated Call Carrying Capacity.......................5 2 2 3.10.2 Call Detail Recording Line Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 3 . 1 0 . 4 C a l l s P e r Hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3 .. Autoquote 3.11 Userguide NON-BLOCKING April APPLICATIONS.......................5 3.11.1 Non-Blocking Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 1 1 . 2 Recommended Quoting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ..5 4 ..5 4 3 . 1 2 MERIDIAN MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.1 Meridian Mail Modular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 1 2 . 2 Meridian Mail X Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13 4. REMOTE PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT (RPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 8 REPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Header Report 4 . 2 Price Summary 4.3 56 56 57 . . . . . . . ...60 Report Report 9 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Report 4 Engineering 4.4.1 59 64 6 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.3 System Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.4 Real Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Equipment 4.5 0 4.5.1 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 4 . 5 . 2 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 4.6 Report 6 Input Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Report 72 7 Auxiliary Quote Summary.................7 3 4.7.1 Main Quote Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 4.7.2 RPE Quote Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 4.8 Report 20 Unused Capacity 4 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 4.8.2 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ports ............................................ 5. Auxiliary LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. Appendix 1: Input Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 75 75 77 79 Ueerguide April 20, Autoquote Userguide 1. April 20, INTRODUCTION This chapter of the Meridian Business Systems Autoquote User Guide provides information on quoting the Meridian 1 SL-1 Communication It includes the following sect-ions: System. Section Section Section Section Section Section 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: Introduction Inputs Engineering/Provisioning Reports Auxiliary Loading Appendix 1: Input Form The mechanics of using Autoquote are not included in this product chapter. Refer to the Introduction and Overview chapter for detailed information on how to use the Autoquote System. 1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Meridian 1 SL-1 is a computer controlled, digital switching, Private The Meridian 1 SL-1 can support from 40 to Branch Exchange (PBX). 10,000 analog and/or digital lines. The Meridian 1 SL-1 is available powered either AC, DC, o r DC with rectifiers for most system options. The Meridian 1 SL-1 is packaged in stackable modules. A modular version Meridian Mail Voice Messaging System can be configured as a system option for the Meridian 1 SL-1 Models. The Autoquote System will provide for integration the Meridian 1 SL-1 with the following systems: Remote Peripheral Equipment, Meridian Mail Voice Messaging Systems, and -Automatic Call Distribution (ACD-MAX) Systems. 1.2 VALID MODELS T h e r e are f o u r M e r i d i a n 1 S L - 1 A u t o q u o t e M o d e l s c u r r e n t l y a v a i l a b l e : Model 21 o r 21A 51 . 61 71 Generic 21 51 61 71 Release 15 15 -- Note: To quote a 21A system enter 21 for the model generic code. A 21A will be quoted if the system fits within the constraints of the 21A system. Note : The minimum purchase requirements for each Meridian 1 SL-1 Model that are outlined in the Hardware section of the Meridian 1 Communication Systems Pricing Manual are applied by the Autoquote system and restrict the configurations that may be quoted. 1 Autoquote Userguide April Autoquote Userguide 2. April 20, 1990 INPUTS This section covers all inputs associated with the Meridian 1. following sections are covered within t-his section. Input Classes Input Codes, Descriptions, and Default Values Software Options Phones, Lines and Trunks Miscellaneous/Memory Basic Information The As with all models, data input consists of responses to prompted entries and manual inputs associated with specific input codes. An input can require one, two, or three entries (types 1, 2, or 3). The mechanics of using are not included in this product chapter. Refer to the Introduction/Overview chapter for detailed information on how to use the Autoquote system. A blank input form is included in the back of this section. It is recommended that copies be used for preparing quotations. An on-line input form is also available on the Autoquote system, select INFORMF at the secondary menu prompt 2 . 1 INPUT CLASSES Meridian 1 inputs are organized into four input classes: Software Options Phones, Lines, Trunks Miscellaneous Basic Information Autoquote will prompt for each input class in the order listed above The letter designation is used to make when setting up a new quote. selections from the Input Menu. 3 Autoguote Userguide 2.2 INPUT CODES, April 20, 1990 DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES The following pages contain information on each Meridian 1 input: codes, descriptions, and default values where appropriate. 2.2.1 Software Option Inputs This section gives explanations for Meridian 1 software inputs where necessary. Enter a 1 to select a software input or a 0 to remove. Note t h a t t h e s o f t w a r e i n p u t s a r e o r g a n i z e d in t h e o r d e r t h e y a p p e a r o n t h e input form and not in numerical sequence. . If information is needed on feature descriptions, please refer to the Feature Document. 2 Multi-Customer 5 CDR Link This input indicates that CDR Tape is desired. included in the Meridian Base Software package. 12 Automatic CDR List is Number I d e n t i f i c a t i o n This input is used to specify AN1 and AN1 Route Selection. 15 Remote Peripheral Equipment This option must be present at the main site to support an RPE quote. 26 Centralized Attendant Service (Input cannot be quoted with Attendant Overflow 56). 27 Centralized Attendant Service cannot be quoted with Attendant Overflow (Input 56). 56 Attendant Overflow Position Attendant Overflow cannot be quoted with (Input 27). or 57 Attendant Alternative 93 Supervisory (Input 26) Answer Console To support this feature, the Ml250 console, a QPC297 Supervisory Console line card, and EPE module must be provisioned. 4 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 Autovon Autovon and Multi-Tenant (input 86) are mutually exclusive software options. Only one of these may be selected in a quote. 84 Automatic Trunk Maintenance One QPC442 Tone Detector will be provisioned when this option is selected. The Tone Detector requires one EPE card slot. 86 Multi-Tenant Multi-Tenant and Autovon (input 68) are mutually exclusive software options. Only one of these may be selected in a quote. 105 Line Load Control 110 Special Application Features This input is used to quote Trunk Verification from a Station and Incoming DID Digit Conversion. 150 Directory 102 Number Expansion Hospitality/Healthcare Features This software input is a prerequisite for PMSI (Input 103). 103 Property Management System Interface (Input 102) is a prerequisite for this feature 37 Basic ESN Features This software input is a prerequisite for Advanced ESN Features (Input 39). 39 Advanced ESN F e a t u r e s Basic ESN Features (Input 37) is a prerequisite for this feature. 58 Network Automatic Route Selection (NABS) (Base package) are mutually exclusive software If this input is selected, BARS will be excluded P-DATA memory Meridian Base Software package. must be added manually using requirements for Miscellaneous/Memory Input 47. and options. from the 5 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 59 Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) P-DATA memory requirements for CDP must be added manually using Miscellaneous/Memory Input 47. 63 109 Network Authorization Auxiliary Processor Codes Link This option is required when Meridian Mail is used and will be included if Meridian Mail is quoted. 35 This option is required when Meridian Mail is used and will be included if Meridian Mail is quoted. 77 Meridian Mail This option is required when Meridian Mail is used and will be included if Meridian Mail is quoted. 152 Meridian Link Server This input is mutually exclusive with Meridian (Input 153). 153 Meridian Link Direct Connect This input is mutually exclusive with Meridian Link-Server (Input 152). 45 Basic ACD (ACD-A) This f e a t u r e is required when Meridian Mail is used and will be included when Meridian Mail is quoted. 4 1 A d v a n c e d A C D (ACD-B) 111 ACD Timed Overflow One of the following ACD applications are a prerequisite for ACD Timed Overflow Advanced ACD Features (Input 41) ACD Reports (Input 42) ACD Load Management (Input 43) MAX (Input ACD Link ACD L i n k ACD-D (Input 51) 6 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 121 Enhanced ACD Overflow 42 ACD Reports (ACD-Cl) 43 ACD Load Management (ACD-C2) Application 50 ACD Link This option is required if ACD-MAX is used. 51 ACD Link ACD-D Application 114 ACD-D/MAX Report Enhancements 122 Network ACD The following Network ACD: are prerequisites for Advanced ACD Features (Input 41) Enhanced ACD Overflow (Input 121) Basic ESN Features (Input 37) Coordinated Dialing Plan (Input 59) Advanced ISDN Features (Input 148) 1 4 6 P r i m a r y R a t e A c c e s s (PRA) 147 ISDN Signalling Link (ISL) 117 Call Call Service (Input 146) is a prerequisite for this input. 148 Advanced ISDN Features The following are prerequisites for this input: Basic ESN Features (Input 37) NAPS (Input 58) or CDP (Input 59) (Input 146) or ISL (Input 147) 149 Inter-Exchange Carrier PRA (Input 146) is a prerequisite for this input. 120 Network Message Center The following are prerequisites for this-input: Meridian Mail (Input 77) (Input 146) or ISL (Input 147) Advanced ISDN Features (Input 148) 7 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 Phones, Lines, and Trunks This input class consists of two categories of inputs: ports (lines and trunks) and terminal devices (telephone sets). Ports inputs generally accept equipped and wired quantities. It is with wired inputs that the built-in growth of a system is provisioned. PE cards' are quoted at the e q u i p p e d l e v e l , a l l o t h e r items are q u o t e d a t t h e - w i r e d l e v e l . Therefore, only PE cards must be added to grow a system from the equipped to the wired size. 2.2.2.1 Port Inputs Phones, Lines, and Trunks port inputs are numbers l-43, 101-143, and 171-178. Inputs 101-143 are for non-blocking ports. Input 101 blocking) corresponds to input 1 input 102 (non-blocking) etc. corresponds to input 2 Unless otherwise noted, . all port inputs accept three entries: 1. Ports Desired. 2. Wired Ports Desired. If no entry is made, this entry will default to the equipped quantity entered. The wired value cannot be less than the equipped value. 3. Traffic Per Port. Maximum t r a f f i c a l l o w e d i s 3 6 C C S . Traffic defaults that are l i s t e d b e l o w i n t h e T r a f f i c D e f a u l t s T a b l e , a r e f o r Grade of Service (GOS) ports unless otherwise noted. blocking port inputs default to 36 CCS for those entries not Receiver (DTR) requirements. affecting blocking inputs affecting default to the GOS value. Note that telephone sets are entered independently of the ports. 8 telemanuals.com Autoguote Userguide April 20, 2.2.2.1.1 Traffic Defaults Table Quantity Default Voice Data 10 1, Voice/Data 2 Type A Trunk (no queuing) 1 10 11 25 26 51 -100 16 22 26 31 B Trunk 1 10 11 25 26 51 -100 28 30 32 34 35 1 n designates any quantity 2 Trunk defaults assume one destination point for the entire quantity of trunks. A Oueuins Assumed) CO Trunks DID Trunks FX Trunks RAN Trunks Paging Trunks Dictation Trunks B Assumed) WATS Trunks CCSA Trunks TIE TIE TIE Trunks/Loop Remote Trunks 9 telemanuals.com Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 Grade of Service port inputs are included Special notes about the These notes also apply to the corresponding non-blocking inputs. below. 1 Digital Voice Only Lines This input is used to enter digital voice lines. 2 Digital Voice/Data Lines This input differs from Input 1 in that two Terminal Numbers are counted per port and the CCS per port default is increased to account for the data portion of the line. 42 Digital ACD Voice Lines This input specifies digital voice lines to be used in ACD applications. ACD applications have a larger impact on Real Time and may r e q u i r e a h i g h e r C C S . 43 Digital ACD Voice/Data Lines This input is the same as Input 42 with the exception that will be counted per port and the CCS may be higher two to account for the data portion. 3 4 5 6 7 8 2500 Lines 500 Lines Message Waiting 2500 Lines Message Waiting 500 Lines OPX 2 5 0 0 L i n e s ( Q P C 1 9 2 ) OPX 500 Lines (QPC192) OPX 2500 and OPX 500 Lines require an EPE shelf. Differentiation between 2500 and 500 lines is necessary to properly Receiver (DTR) requirements. determine 10 Console or QPC297) One console is quoted for each equipped console port entered. The traffic default for consoles is 30 CCS. Inputs 11-22 are used to quote analog trunk ports. The Grade of Service traffic defaults depend on the trunk type (refer to the Traffic Defaults Table). 10 telemanuals.com Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 The following trunks are Type A (No Queueing Assumed) 11 12 14 19 20 21 CO Trunks DID Trunks FX T r u n k s RAN Trunks Paging Trunks Dictation Trunks or The following trunk are Type B (Queueing Assumed) 13 WATS Trunks 1 5 CCSA Trunks 16 DX Trunks (QPC71) DX Trunks require an EPE shelf. 17 TIE Trunks E&M 18 TIE Trunks Loop 22 Release Link Trunks Release Link Trunks are used for Remote Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) applications. Software Input 27 must be selected for these circuits to function. Trunks require an EPE shelf. DID (input CCSA (input and TIE (inputs trunk signaling. This information will be incoming traffic may use prompted for in the Basic Information input class when setting up a new quote. All traffic will affect the number of Receivers provisioned. The remaining entries are for data lines, and digital trunks. 23 CPU Terminations (QPC432) This input is the same as input 28 with the exception of the traffic default. The traffic default for CPU terminations will correspond to Type B trunk values (Queueing assumed) since they typically have greater usage than station terminations. 24 Modem Pool Lines (QPC723 physical ports are provisioned for this modem pool application-- one QPC723 RILC port and one port. The traffic is presented to the switching matrix twice, therefore Autoquote will double the traffic input when determining network requirements. The traffic default will correspond to Type B Trunk values (Queueing assumed). 11 Userguide April 20, 1990 Modem Pool Lines (QPC432 27 Two physical ports are provisioned for this modem pool application: one QPC723 RILC port and one NT8D03A.A port. The traffic is presented to the switching matrix twice, therefore Autoquote will double the traffic input when determining network requirements. The traffic default Trunk values (Queueing assumed). will correspond to Type 28 Data Lines . QPC432 data line cards provide access to the Meridian 1 devices. switching matrix f o r s y n c o r An I n t e r f a c e M o d u l e ( A S I M ) or H i g h - S p e e d D a t a M o d u l e ( H S D M ) i s used to interface RS-232 ports to QPC432 ports. An adapter cable may be used for a V.35 connection on the HSDM. 29 Data Lines data line cards provide access to the Meridian 1 devices. switching matrix for An Interface Module (AIM), Interface Logical Unit (AILU), or . Personal Computer Interface (PCI) card is used to interface RS-232 ports to QPC430 ports. Some devices may interface directly to the data line card using a compatible RS-422 port. MCDS Lines Multi-Channel Data System is a rack or cabinet mounted used primarily to interface to version of async-only CPU ports. This input is used to provision the Meridian 1 EPE (QPC432 data line card) as well as the MCDS hardware. The traffic default is 30 CCS. 31 CIM Lines(QPC432) Although this input results in the same Meridian 1 hardware provisioning as input 28, the specific application represented is Coax Elimination and Switching using the Coax Interface Module (CIM) to interface a coax terminal device. 32 MCCS Lines This input represents the host/controller end of the Coax Elimination and Switching application. It is used to provision the Meridian 1 PE (QPC432 data line card) as well a s t h e M u l t i - C h a n n e l C o a x S y s t e m (MCCS) h a r d w a r e . The traffic default is 30 CCS. 12 . Autoquote Userguide April 20, 35 RILC Data Lines (QPC723) T h i s d a t a l i n e c a r d p r o v i d e s for d i r e c t R S - 2 3 2 a c c e s s t o t h e switching matrix. Using this card in a modem pool application will result in traffic being introduced into the system only once. 40 41 CPI These input accept two entries. 1st entry is number desired. Equipped/wired quantities are not used since DTI/CPI hardware is not Peripheral Equipment DTI/CPI cards interface directly to network loops and are housed in Common Equipment and/or Network Equipment shelves. 2nd entry is traffic (in CCS) per channel. This entry will default to Type trunk values. (Each DTI/CPI is treated like 24 trunks.) A link is essentially non-blocking since it interfaces directly to a network loop. There are no corresponding blocking DTI/CPI inputs. 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 PRI PRI PRI PRI PRI PRI (QPC720 PRI PRI QPC757) QPC757) QPC757) QPC757) QPC757) QPC757) QPC757) QPC757) Each input corresponds to a different destination point; up to eight destinations can be selected. Differentiating between destinations is required to determine the required number of D-Channel Interface cards. PRA (Software input 146) and PBX Interface (Base package) are prerequisites for this application. These inputs accept two entries. 1st entry is number desired. Equipped/wired quantities are not used since PRI hardware is not Peripheral Equipment PRI cards interface directly to network loops and are housed in Common Equipment and/or Network Equipment shelves. l 2nd entry is traffic (in CCS) per channel. default to Type B trunk values. (Each PRI 24 trunks.) 13 This entry will is treated like Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 Telephone Set Inputs and 206-281 are used for Phones, Lines, and Trunks inputs All phone inputs accept one selecting terminal devices and accessories. entry, indicating the number of units desired. Please refer to the sample input sheet at the end of this section for the actual Telephone set inputs. Inputs 269, 270 and 271 are used to allow Modular Set Power overrides. transformers and Entering a 1 for Input 271, allows the number of 110 power boards to be entered using Inputs 269 and 270 respectively. 14 Userguide April 2.2.3 Miscellaneous/Memory There is are common rules regarding the number of entries a Refer to the input sheet and the Miscellaneous/Memory input may accept. entries each input information provided below for the Information on the Miscellaneous/Memory inputs is included below. Note that the input descriptions appear in the order of the Input Sheet and are not in numerical order. 1 Power Indicator This input applies to the way in which the system will be powered. Enter 1 for AC Power, 2 for DC using Customer Provided Power, or 3 for DC using Rectifiers and Battery Backup (input 9). If this input is set to 2, (DC using Customer Provided Power), no rectifiers will be included in the quote. 9 Battery Backup This entry accepts two entries. The 1st entry is the number of hours of battery backup For Option 71 quotes, this input will be se desired. of no entry is made. . to 4 The 2nd entry is the battery type indicator: zero (0 indicates Absolyte and one (1) indicates Lead Calcium battery hardware. Please see Report 4 to determine battery backup requirements. Note that no batteries will be included in the quote. 10 UPS This input is used to indicate the UPS vendor desired: one Best, or three (3) for Alpha. (1) for Exide, two (2) Please see Report 4 to determine UPS rating requirements. Note that the UPS system will not be included in the quote. 2 Hard Disk Drive -- Enter one (1) i f desired, enter (0) to remove from This option is available only on the Option 51, 61, and 71. quote. 15 Autoquote Userguide 3 April 20, 1990 Emergency T r a n s f e r Units The ETU Assembly is Enter the number desired. provisioned on all systems. Each one allows eight phones to be connected to CO lines. Since this unit is not impact external to the Meridian 1 cabinet, it system engineering. 4 Attendant Overlay Enter the number of Overlays desired. 5 Supervisory Console Functionality This input only applies to Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) quotes. Enter one (1) for this input if the QPC297 Supervisory Line Card should be quoted. 11 Pedestal/Top Cap Provisioning Indicator This input applies to the Option 21 only. It is used to override the calculated Pedestal/Top Cap assembly to a higher one. Zero (0) indicates that the most cost effective 'Pedestal/Top Cap assembly will be provisioned; two (2) indicates that the Two-Module Pedestal will be the minimum provisioned; four (4) indicates that the Four-Module Pedestal will be provisioned. 12 Rectifier/Power Cabinet (Options only) Enter one (1) to provision the Prime Power Cabinet Assembly. This cabinet houses up to four 50 Amp rectifiers to be used in lieu of 30 Amp rectifiers. CDR Usage This input is used to calculate CPU Real Time impact of CDR. Enter one (1) to indicate either Outgoing, Incoming or Internal usage for CDR. As an example, the input indicates that the CDR will be used for Outgoing and Internal calls only. The default is meaning that CDR is limited to Outgoing calls only. 15 Code Restriction -- Route Enter the number of code restriction routes used in the system. This input is used for memory. 16 Speed Call Lists/l Digit 17 Speed Call Lists/2 Digit 18 Speed Call Lists/3 Digit These inputs are used to calculate required P-Data for Speed Call Lists. They accept three entries: 16 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 The 1st value is the number of lists desired. The 2nd value is the number of entries per speed call list. 100 for The maximum is 10 for l-digit lists (input digit lists (input 1000 for 3-digit lists (input 18). This entry will default to 7 digits for l-digit lists (input lists (inputs 16) and 40 for The 3rd value is the number of digits per speed call list. The maximum allowed is 31 and the default value is 10 for all three inputs. 19 Data Modem Enter the quantity desired. 20 Dual NTP Storage Sleeve Enter the number of NTP storage sleeves desired. Each storage sleeve holds two Typically four sleeves are required for a complete set of 23 Average Holding Time Enter the Average Holding Time per call in seconds. Autoquote will set this input to 180 seconds if no entry is made. 25 MCDS Cabinet Enter 1 if MCDS cabinets are to be quoted to house the MCDS shelves. These shelves can housed in standard 19 inch racks. 27 Number o f Entries This input is prompted on every Meridian 1 model. It is used to calculate memory requirements for Auto-Dial, Stored Number Redial, and Last Number Redial entries/keys in the system. This input accepts two entries. The 1st value is the number of entries or keys assigned with these features. The 2nd value is digits per entry. The maximum is 31 and the default is 16 digits. 28 Number of D o - N o t - D i s t u r b S t a t i o n s This input is prompted when the Do-Not-Disturb feature is It is used to calculate memory requirements for equipped. feature implementation. Enter the quantity desired. 17 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 29 Number o f Dial Intercom Groups This input is prompted when the Dial Intercom feature is equipped. It is used to calculate memory requirements'for feature implementation. Enter quantity desired. Number of Group Call Groups This input is prompted when the Group Call feature is equipped. It is used to calculate memory requirements for Enter quantity desired. feature implementation. 31 32 33 34 35 of Number of Number of Number of Number of ACD ACD ACD ACD ACD Queues Agent Positions Auto-Terminate Trunk Routes Auto-Terminate Trunk Routes CRT's Inputs 31, 32, and 34 are prompted when any ACD option group is equipped. Input 33 and 35 are prompted only if ACD-Cl or is equipped. These inputs are used to calculate memory requirements for the ACD application. All of these inputs accept two entries: 1st entry is equipped quantity, 2nd entry is wired quantity. 40 Number of Customers The input indicates the number of customers desired. A maximum number of 32 customers may BARS (input 41) and Multi-Tenant (input 41) are implemented on a customer basis. Memory requirements are determined using Miscellaneous/Memory inputs 40-42 when applicable. 41 Number of Customers Equipping BARS This input is prompted if the Multi-Customer and BARS features are equipped. BARS is implemented on a customer basis. This input is used to calculate memory requirements for the BARS application. 4 2 Number o f Customers with Service Equipped This input is prompted if the Multi-Customer and Multi-Tenant features are equipped. Multi-Tenant is implemented on a customer basis. This input is used to c a l c u l a t e memory r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e M u l t i - T e n a n t application. 43 Total Number of Tenants Equipped 4 4 T o t a l Number o f T e n a n t S t a t i o n s They These inputs are prompted i f the Multi-Tenant feature is equipped. are used to calculate memory requirements for Multi-Tenant application. 18 Userguide 45 Number of ISDN April Links This input is used to select the number of ISDN Signaling required. The ISL option (Software input 147) Links is a prerequisite for this input. 46 Drive Provisioning Override Applicable to the Meridian 1 Option 21 only, this input is used for Disk Drive placement. There are two scenarios for housing the Disk Drive: CE Placement in the Module. 0 P E P l a c e m e n t i n t h e M odule. 1 Autoquote will provision the Disk Drive in the CE shelf unless network requirements force it into PE placement. The user may force PE placement by entering a one (1) for this input. 47 Additional P-Data (kwords) This input accounts for additional memory requirements. Values are entered in thousands of words; i.e. if a one (1) is entered, 1000 P-Data words are added. 48 Additional U-Data (kwords) This input accounts for additional memory requirements. Values are entered in thousands of words: i.e. if a one (1) is entered, 1000 U-Data words are added. 49 Number of Call Party Name Display Entries T h e s e i n p u t s are p r o m p t e d i f t h e C a l l P a r t y N a m e D i s p l a y feature is equipped. T h e y a r e u s e d t o c a l c u l a t e memory requirements for CPND application. This input accepts two entries. The 1st value is the number of entries. The 2nd The default is 15 value is characters per entry. characters. 50 Number of Auth Codes . This input accepts two entries. Both are used to allocate is the number of authorization codes used in the system (maximum allowed is 2 n d entry i s n u m b e r o f d i g i t s p e r a u t h o r i z a t i o n c o d e 4096). The default value is 8 digits. (maximum is 14). P-Data for authorization 19 codes. Autoquote Userguide 21 Additional April 20, 1990 Ports Autoquote provisions the number of ports required to support software and maintenance (local and remote). This input is used to specify additional ports for other to connect for ACD applications such as supervisors. One cable is provisioned for each port. Autoquote does not determine cable connector type (M/M o r F / F ) . The user must specify the connector type when placing the order. 37 Additional Ports for APL's This is used to determine the number of ports required for Application Processor Links. Only the quantity not included within AUX-Loaded models must be entered. (Refer to the Introduction/Overview chapter for more information on the AUX-Load mechanism.) 38 Additional Conference Cards for This input is prompted when Music-on-Hold and/or Automatic Wake-up features are equipped. It is used to specify the number of additional Conference Cards required to support these features. The Automatic Wake-up feature requires one dedicated Conference Card per system. Music-on-Hold, on the other hand, may share a Conference Card with a normal conference traffic. The total number of Conference cards required on any system depends on the specific application. 39 Additional ESDI Ports Enhanced (ESDI) ports are used to support Command Status Link (The CSL provides the interface Link (CSL) and for Meridian Mail). This input is used to specify the number of additional ESDI ports required; i.e., ports in addition to the ports required for Meridian Mail either AUX- Loaded o r s y s t e m i n t e g r a t e d , a n d / o r t h e d e f a u l t p o r t s based on software option selection. One ESDI port will be software is quoted. Autoquote will included when also include support for one ESDI when CSL software is quoted and no Meridian Mail application is quoted ( i n t e g r a t e d o r A U X L o a d e d . ) W h e n M e r i d i a n Mail. i s q u o t e d , ESDI cards are generally provisioned via Meridian Mail base hardware packages. (Refer to the Introduction/Overview chapter for more information on the AUX-Load mechanism.) 180 Additional Network Groups This input applies to the Option 71 only. It is used to i n c r e a s e t h e number o f n e t w o r k g r o u p s c a l c u l a t e d b y t h e Autoquote. The maximum value is 4. 20 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 181 Additional Superloops 182 Additional Non-blocking Superloops These inputs are used to provide additional Superloops to the The net amount of Enhanced Loops must be greater than or equal system. Grade of Service. to the minimum required to maintain 183 Additional Network Loops 184 Additional Non-blocking Network Loops These inputs are used to provide additional Enhanced Network Loops The number of Enhanced Loops must be greater (QPC414) to the system. Grade of Service. than or equal to the minimum required to maintain 190 Ringing Generator Provisioning Factor Ringing Generators are required in IPE Shelves which support Analog Cards. The calculation to determine the number of ringing generators is as follows: Ringing Generators = Analog Cards * Factor * PE Shelves where Factor defaults to 2. This input allows the user to override the default factor of 2 and enter another if necessary. The factor may not be less than 1.0. 99 Software Graduation Level Override This input is used to directly enter the Software Graduation Level desired. This input will override Miscellaneous Input 100 a s long a s the input value is not less than the minimum As an example, if the Equipped level required. configuration equated to Software Graduation Levels and the Wired configuration equated to 8 Software Graduation Levels, this input could be used to request a level of 7, 9 or any level not less than 5. 100 Software Graduation Level Indicator This input is used to select the whether the Software Graduation Level will be calculated using the Equipped or Wired configuration. Enter zero (0) for Equipped or one (1) for Wired. The default is Equipped. Note that this input will not apply if-Input 99 is used. 101 Module Placement Indicator This input only applies to Option 71 quotes. If one (1) is entered for this input, module positions for network groups will be reserved for future growth. 21 Autoquote Userguide 102 Cable Egress April 20, 1990 Indicator This input is used to determine the way in which cables will Enter one (1) for Bottom Egress, be wired out of modules. two (2) for Top Egress or three (3) for Top Egress with Cable Tray Kit. 103 Earthquake Bracing Kit Enter one (1) if Earthquake Bracing equipment is required. 145 TDR U n i t This unit applies to the Direct sales channel only. applicable to the Meridian 1 Option 21, 51 and 61. input accepts three entries. It is This 1st entry indicates the firmware package: one (1) for the Business package, two (2) for the Professional Billing package, and three (3) for the Lodging package. 2nd entry is the total number of calls made per month in thousands. For example, e n t e r t h r e e ( 3 ) i f 3 0 0 0 c a l l s p e r This value is used to size the month are to be supported. TDR Unit. If no entry is made, the number of calls will be a function of the number of calls per station per month (3rd entry) . 3rd entry is the number of calls This entry will default to 100. station per month will be used to of calls per month if no entry is per station per month. The number of calls per determine the total number made for the 2nd value. Inputs 150-156 are used to quote the Meridian Mail Option and associated features. 150 Meridian Mail The Meridian Mail Software package (Software input 77) is a This input accepts three prerequisite for this input. entries: 1st entry is The maximum converted to available on the number of voice processor ports desired. be All entries value allowed is 48. the next voice processor port increment 48 ports). the product 2nd entry is the total number of hours of voice storage All entries desired. The maximum value allowed is 240. will be converted to the next voice storage increment 240 hours). available on the product 22 Userguide April 20, 1990 This 3rd entry is number of registered users supported. entry will determine the number of User Guides provided and real time impact. 151 Meridian Mail Voice Menus Enter the number of Voice Menu calls during the busy hour. Any value entered greater than zero will provision Voice The number of voice menu calls during the Menus Software. busy hour is requested to help determine CPU real time impact. 152 Meridian Mail Console Software Enter one (1) if this option is desired. 153 Meridian Mail Access Development Software Meridian Mail Enter one (1) if this option is desired. Console Software is a prerequisite for this'option. 155 Meridian Mail Networking Ports Enter the number of ports desired to be used for networking Meridian Mail Options together. Note that this input is used to provision the correct amount of Meridian Mail Networking Hardware and Modem Packages as well as Networking The total number of actual Meridian Mail ports Software. provisioned is only indicated in Input 150. 156 Meridian Secured Messaging Enter a one (1) if this option is desired. 169 Directory Messaging PC Software This input is used to specify the PC based CPLUS Attendant Console Software. Enter the number of copies desired. 171 Meridian Manager Work O r d e r S y s t e m Enter one (1) to quote this option. Note that Meridian M a n a g e r - S t a t i o n A d m i n i s t r a t i o n i s i n c l u d - e- d w i t h t h e b a s e Meridian 1 software package. 172 Meridian Manager-Traffic Reporting Note that Meridian Enter one (1) to quote this option. Manager-Station Administration is included with the base Meridian 1 software package. 23 Autoquote Userguide April 20, Inputs 51-84 are used to quote non-blocking PE 'cards and modules. Each 1st entry is equipped quantity, 2nd entry is input accepts two entries: These inputs are required to specify exact quantities wired quantity. of hardware required for non-blocking application. These values cannot be calculated by Autoquote since there is a possibility that some ports and/or some PE slots may be unusable in a non-blocking situation. Autoquote can determine the minimum required PE cards and shelves based on port inputs. During the calculation process Autoquote will make sure all non-blocking PE quantities are not less than the minimum calculated. Refer to Non Blocking Applications, page 54. 123 Average Holding Time (non-blocking) Enter the Average Holding Time per call in seconds. Autoquote will set this input to 180 seconds if no entry is made. 24 Autoquote Deerguide April 20, 1990 2.2.4 Basic Information All Basic Information inputs accept one entry. Inputs are prompted if applicable to the hardware/software selected. Changes to prompted entries may be made during the manual input, phase of this input class. 1 Number of Trunk Groups This input is prompted for all Meridian 1 models. entry must be greater than zero. This 2 Percent Tie Line Traffic that is 3 Percent CCSA Traffic that is Receivers (DTR's) are required for incoming calls on tie line and CCSA trunks. All tie line and CCSA traffic is considered when determining the portion that is digitone. Therefore, the percentage entered must consider which end of the trunk originates the call; outgoing calls do not require the use of DTR's. If incoming traffic is and if total tie line and/or CCSA traffic is split evenly between incoming and outgoing, 50% for purposes of determining the of the traffic is number of required DTR's. 4 DID Traffic is Enter one (1) if DID trunks will use signaling. Similar to Inputs 2 and 3, this input is used to calculate the number of DTR's required. 5 Amount of DISA Traffic (in CCS) Enter the Busy Hour DISA CCS. If all DISA calls occur outside the busy hour, enter zero (0). As a quick estimate, multiply estimated DISA calls during the busy hour by 0.2. 6 Number o f T y p e 1 S i g n a l i n g Tie Trunks Type 1 signaling requires the Meridian 1 to provide more power for 4-wire tie trunks. This input is used to accurately determine power requirements. 7 -- Number of Templates This input is prompted for all Meridian 1 models. All stations entered into the Meridian 1 data base will use a A new template is created each time a station template. with unique feature and key assignment characteristics is entered. If all sets are configured the same (except for only one template is used. If 100 sets with minor The differences are configured, 100 templates are used. The number of minimum, value-allowed for this entry is 2. templates is used to calculate memory requirements. 2 5 Userguide 8 Number April 20, 1990 of Autovon Trunks T h i s i n p u t i s u s e d t o c a l c u l a t e t h e a d d i t i o n a l memory requirements for Autovon trunks. 9 Percent DTI Traffic that is Since DTI can function as a tie line or DID trunk, Enter percent of total traffic that s i g n a l i n g m a y be u s e d . See explanations for inputs 2 and 4 is incoming digitone. for more information. 10 Number of DTI/PRI Tie Lines E n t e r t h e number o f Tie Lines expected in the This input is used to determine CPU Real configuration. Time impact. 26 Autoquote Userguide 3. April 20, 1990 ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING This section covers the Engineering/Provisioning rules used in generating Meridian 1 configurations. The following sections are included: Software Provisioning Peripheral Equipment Cards And Modules Engineering Provisioning Provisioning Common Equipment Card Placement Rules Module And Column Provisioning . Power Memory Real Time Non-Blocking Applications Meridian Mail Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) 27 Autoquote Userguide 3.1 SOFTWARE April 20, PROVISIONING The following is a list of software packages and the software options that are included in each package. Packages are selected by entering the corresponding Software Inputs. Please refer to the Software section of the input sheet at the end of this section. 28 Autoguote Userguide INPUT 110 150 84 68 2 86 12 102 103 56 93 57 15 105 26 27 5 58 59 63 37 39 45 41 42 43 114 121 111 122 146 147 148 149 117 120 109 35 77 153 152 April 20, 1990 ORDER CODE DESCRIPTION SWOOOOA MERIDIAN BASE SOFTWARE SOFTWARE OPTIONS SPECIAL APPLICATION FEATURES DN EXPANSION AUTOMATIC TRUNK MAINTENANCE AUTOVON MULTI-CUSTOMER MULTI-TENANT AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION HOSPITALITY APPLICATION PROPERTY MAN. SYS. INTERFACE ATTENDANT OVERFLOW POSITION SUPERVISORY CONSOLE ATTENDANT ALTERNATIVE ANSWER REMOTE PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT LINE LOAD CONTROL CAS-MAIN CAS-REMOTE CDR LINK FAST TDS NARS COORDINATED DIALING PLAN NETWORK AUTHORIZATION CODE BASIC ESN FEATURES ADVANCED ESN FEATURES BASIC ACD FEATURES (ACD-A) ADVANCED ACD FEATURES (ACD-B) ACD REPORTS (ACD-Cl) ACD LOAD MANAGEMENT ACD LINK (ACD-D or MAX) ACD-MAX REPORTS ENHANCEMENTS ENHANCED ACD OVERFLOW ACD TIMED OVERFLOW NETWORKED ACD BASIC ISDN FEATURES PRIMARY R A T E ACCESS ISDN SIGNALING LINK ADVANCED ISDN FEATURES INTER-EXCHANGE CARRIER CALL BY CALL SERVICE NETWORK MESSAGE CENTER APPLICATION PROCESSOR LINK IVMS LINK MERIDIAN MAIL LINK DIRECT CONN MERIDIAN LINK MERIDIAN LINK SERVER 29 110,113 150,151 2 86,172 103 56 93 174 15 105 26 27 6 87 58 59 63 42 43 114,155 178 111 207 118,145 146 147 148 149 117 175 109 35 153 152 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 3.2 PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT CARDS AND MODULES There are two generations of Peripheral Equipment (PE) which can be This provisioned -- Intelligent PE (IPE) and Enhanced PE (EPE). notation is used throughout this section to distinguish between the two when.necessary. 3.2.1 IPE Cards Card Ports 16 Console (5 ports/3 Digital Voice Data Lines (2 Digital Voice Only Lines 2500 Analog Lines Analog Lines Modem Pool Lines 2Sync/Async Modem Pool Lines 2500 Analog Lines 500 Analog Lines Message Waiting 2500 Analog Lines Message Waiting 500 Analog Lines CO Trunks DID Trunks FX Trunks Loop Tie Trunks Paging Trunks RAN Trunks WATS Trunks CCSA Trunks Dictation Trunks E&M Tie Trunks Paging Trunks Receiver 1 Modem Pool Lines require both a QPC723 port, 2Sync/Async Modem Pool Lines require both a and a QPC432 port. 30 16 16 8 port and a port Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 3.2.2 EPE Cards Card QPC71 QPC192 QPC297 QPC432 QPC422 QPC723 Ports DX Signalling Trunks OPX 2500 Lines OPX 500 Lines RLT Remote Trunks Supervisory Line Card CIM Lines MCCS Lines MCDS Lines MCDS High Speed Lines Sync/Async CPU Terminations Data Sync/Async Modem Pool Lines Data Lines 2 4 4 4 4 2 4 Modem Pool Lines RILC Data Lines 1 Modem Pool Lines require both a QPC723 port. 2Sync/Async Modem Pool Lines require both a and a QPC432 port. port and a port Autoquote optimizes the number of PE cards required by assigning For example: multiple types of ports on the same card. Unused Message Waiting ports are used Analog lines before the number of Analog Unused Universal Trunk Paging lines calculated. 3.2.3 CPU. and Data card are calculated. for ports are used for CO, WATS, FX and number of XCOT and E&M cards are Receivers Receivers interpret all The number of DTR cards is determined in signals for the SL-1 three step procedure: 1) Calculate DTR traffic. 2) Determine the DTR ports needed to support DTR traffic. 3) Calculate DTR cards to accommodate required-DTR ports. 31 Userguide April 20, 3.2.3.1 DTR Traffic The model below illustrates the port types, autoquote inputs and factors (Note: The demand on caused by from which DTR CCS is calculated. C A S A u t h o r i z a t i o n C o d e s , a n d / o r C D R C h a r g e A c c o u n t C o d e s i s NOT required for these addressed in the Autoquote system. Additional applications must be manually added to the quote.j P3 in the inputs column denotes Phones Lines and Trunks input 3. DTR CCS CALCULATION Inputs --------------------------------------------------- 2500 Lines CCS + Message Waiting Lines CCS + OPX 2500 Lines CCS P3 (Ports * PS (Ports'* CCS) P7 (Ports * CCS) ----------------------------------Total 2500 CCS * 10.114 (Constant) ----------------------------------= 2500 DTR CCS DX Signalling Trunks CCS . P16 (Ports * CCS) + E&M Tie Trunks CCS (Ports * CCS) (Ports * CCS) + Loop Tie Trunks CCS ----------------------------------T o t a l Tie Line CCS Tie Line Traffic 100 * % * 10.114 (Constant) ----------------------------------Tie DTR CCS CCSA Trunks CCS * % CCSA Traffic CCS B3 * 10.114 (Constant) ----------------------------------= CCSA CCS (Ports * CCS) DID Trunks CCS (0 or 1) B4 * DID Traffic * 2.5 (Constant) ----------------------------------= DID DTR CCS (Ports * CCS) CCS + Tie-DTR CCS + CCSA-DTR CCS + DID-DTR CCS ----------------------------------Total DTR CCS Average Holding Time ----------------------------------CCS (avg) 32 100 . Userguide April 3.2.3.2 DTR Port Provisioning Table The number of DTR Ports is determined by cross-referencing the c a l c u l a t e d D T R C C S w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g table: RECEIVER (assumes 11 second PORTS From To ------------------1 3 10 20 35 51 70 90 112 134 158 183 208 234 260 287 314 343 372 428 457 488 516 546 577 608 639 668 699 730 762 794 826 857 888 920 2 9 19 34 50 69 89 111 133 157 182 207 233 259 286 313 342 371 398 427 456 487 515 545 576 607 638 667 698 729 761 793 825 856 887 919 951 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 -holding PORTS To ------------------952 984 39 985 1017 40 1018 1050 41 TABLE time) ccs From 1085 1119 1154 1189 1224 1259 1294 1330 1366 1401 1436 1471 1506 1541 1576 1611 1646 1681 1716 1751 1786 1821 1856 1891 1926 1961 1996 2031 2066 2101 2136 2171 2206 33 1084 1118 1153 1188 1223 1258 1293 1329 1365 1400 1435 1470 1540 1575 1610 1645 1680 1715 1750 1785 1820 1855 1890 1925 1960 1995 2030 2100 2135 2170 2205 2240 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 PORTS From 2241 -2276 2311 2346 2381 2416 2451 2486 2521 2556 2591 2626 2661 2696 2731 2766 2801 2836 2871 2906 2941 2976 3011 3046 3081 3116 3151 3186 3221 3256 3291 3326 -- 3361 3396 3431 To 2275 2310 2345 2380 2415 2450 2485 2520 2555 2590 2625 2660 2695 2730 2765 2800 2835 2870 2905 2940 2975 3010 3045 3080 3115 3150 3185 3220 3255 3290 3325 3360 3395 3430 3465 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 April 20, 3.2.3.3 DTR Cards The number of DTR Cards required is calculated by dividing The Option 21 has 8 DTR total DTR Ports by 8 except on the Option 21. These are used before any ports in the base Network/Controller Card. are added. Example: 21 Cards = Round Up [(DTR Ports P o r t s P e r DTR C a r d ) ] Options DTR C a r d s = Round Up [(DTR Ports Per DTR Card)] 3.2.4 Tone Detector A tone detector (QPC422) is provisioned if Automatic Trunk Maintenance The QPC422 requires an EPE shelf. (ATM) software is requested. 3.2.5 IPE Modules IPE shelves have 16 slots for cards plus one slot for a Ringing Generator and one Slot for a controller card. There are four 4-slot segments in each IPE shelf. The Option 21 has one dedicated 10 slot IPE shelf in the base module. This shelf has no segmentation. 3.2.6 EPE Modules EPE shelves have 10 Slots for PE cards plus one slot for a Ringing There are two 5-Slot G e n e r a t o r a n d o n e S l o t f o r a QPC659 B u f f e r . segments in each EPE shelf. 3.2.6.1 Controller Cards An Controller 2 is provisioned for IPE shelves supported by 2 4 is provisioned for IPE or less Superloops. An is shelves supported by 3 or 4 Superloops. A QPC659 Dual Loop used for all EPE shelves. 3.2.6.2 Ringing Generators Ringing Generators are required in all IPE and PE for IPE and shelves which house analog line cards QPC192 for EPE). The is provisioned for AC powered systems and is provisioned D C systems. the 34 Userguide April To determine the quantity of ringing generators the following calculation is used for IPE and EPE shelves individually. Ringing Generators = (% Analog) * Factor * (PE Modules) % Analog Cards = Analog Cards/PE Slots. Factor defaults to 2.0 This calculation allows for even distribution of Analog Cards while minimizing the number of Ringing Generators which must be purchased. The user has the option to use a Factor other than the default of 2.0 (Miscellaneous/Memory Input 190). A higher factor will more PE shelves containing Ringing Generators. The Option 21 has a 10 slot IPE shelf in the base module which gets Power supply and therefore does not ringing current from the require a Ringing Generator. 35 Userguide April 20, 3.3 NETWORK LOOP ENGINEERING This section covers the rules used for provisioning network loops for Models (Option 21, 51, 61 and 71) are only Meridian 1 Systems. mentioned if a rule is different for a particular model. 3.3 Calculating Network Loops There are two types of network loops: Superloop and Enhanced The Superloop supports the traffic in IPE Loop (QPC414). modules. The Enhanced Loop (QPC414) supports the traffic in EPE modules and is also required for Meridian Mail and applications of Primary Rate Interface (PRI), Digital Trunk Interface (DTI), and Computer to PBX interface Separate calculations for the following are required to provision network loops. Option 21 IPE Modules EPE Modules Meridian Mail PRI,DTI,CPI Non-blocking GOS GOS 3.3.2 Option 21 Special Case The Option 21 base module contains a combination network/controller card which is dedicated to the 10 slot IPE shelf in that module. There is no network loop engineering required for this loop as it will support all traffic requirements of the 10 slot shelf. 3.3.3 IPE Modules GOS) Superloop requirements to support IPE modules is determined from the total IPE modules CCS and the total number of IPE modules: The GOS capacity for a Superloop is 3500 CCS, 120 time slots. A maximum of two IPE modules may be supported by a single Superloop. -The number of Superloops required to support IPE modules is the greater number of the following calculations: to (Total IPE CCS) Traffic (3500 or Reouired to Modules: (Number of (2 36 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 3.3.4 EPE MODULES (P.O1 GOS) Enhanced Loop requirements to support EPE modules is determined from the total EPE modules CCS and the total number of modules: The GOS capacity for an Enhanced Loop is 700 CCS, 30 time opposed to the slots. 700 CCS is being used for-Enhanced previous 660 CCS because these loops will support a low number of terminations. The QPC414 contains two Enhanced Loops. A maximum of two EPE modules may be supported by a single Enhanced Loop. The number of enhanced loops required to support EPE modules is the greater number of the following calculations: Enhanced Reuuired to support EPE traffic (Total EPE CCS) GOS) : (700 CCS/Enhanced Loop) or Enhanced Reuuired to EPE modules (Number of IPE Modules) (2 Modules/Enhanced Loop) The number of Enhanced Network Cards (QPC414) required is calculated by dividing the number of Enhanced Loops by two: to Enhanced Network Cards (Required Enhanced Loops) EPE traffic 2 3.3.5 Network Segmentation The IPE shelves contain four 4-slot segments. One Superloop can support from one to four segments per IPE module and up to a maximum of two IPE modules. The EPE shelves contain two segments. An enhanced loop can s u p p o r t o n e o r t w o s e g m e n t s p e r E P E m o d u l e a n d u p t o- - a m a x i m u m o f t w o EPE modules. The assignment of segments to loops for both IPE and EPE modules is accomplished by: a) trying to achieve even distribution segments assigned to all loops) same number of b) if even distribution is not possible, the next choice is to choose the quantity of loops and segments per loop which 37 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 gives the best distribution possible. I n c a s e b , Autoquote w i l l d i s p l a y a w a r n i n g m e s s a g e o n t h e r e p o r t s i n d i c a t i n g t h a t a n even d i s t r i b u t i o n o f s e g m e n t s t o l o o p s w a s n o t possible. The user has the option to do a manual assignment and GOS can be obtained with the uneven distribution determine that a or add additional network loops to make the distribution even. 3.3.6 Meridian Mail Loops Each Meridian Mail Voice Channel requires 28 CCS of traffic capacity on an Enhanced Loop. If the total traffic requirement for Meridian Mail does not increase the total number of network loops required then Meridian Mail traffic is assumed to be "shared" with PE shelf traffic. If the total traffic requirement for Meridian Mail does increase the total number of network loops required, then the additional network loops are assumed to be "dedicated" to Meridian Mail. The 28 CCS per Voice Channel equates to one network loop being required for every 24 Voice Messaging Channels. 3.3.7 One Enhanced traffic loop (2 per QPC414) is required to support a link. No traffic engineering is required since each channel on the network loop (Refer to will always have access to a Section , Provisioning). 3.3.8 Non Blocking Superloops and Enhanced Loops for Non Blocking applications are dedicated Non Blocking only (Refer to Non Blocking Applications, page 54: 38 Autoquote Userguide 3.4 3.4.1 April 20, 1990 PROVISIONING SDI Provisioning: 3.4.1.1 Ports: Each system requires a minimum of four ports to serve the following: system monitor, local maintenance, remote maintenance, and CDR list. In port. addition each of the following inputs provisions an additional INPUT CLASS CDR Link ACD Load ACD Link Meridian (CDR Mag Tape) Management (ACD-D) Manager Traffic SOFTWARE SOFTWARE SOFTWARE MISC/MEM NUMBER 5 43 50 172 The total number of ports quoted is the sum of the four required ports, the additional required ports noted above, and additional ports requested via Miscellaneous/Memory input 21. 3.4.1.2 Cards: There is one port on the Option and Option 21 CPU (QPC687) card. port on each DCHI (QPC757) card. There is also one If more ports are required than are available on the CPU and DCHI cards, than Paddle Boards may be provisioned. Each Paddle Board provides two ports. They are quoted in the AS1052 2-Port Paddle Board Assembly and are housed on the rear of the or modules (no common equipment slots are used). Paddle Boards provisioned depends on the The maximum number of system type. Svstem Option Option Option Option Option Maximum 21A 21 51 61 71 Paddle Boards 2 3 2 4 0 If the maximum Paddle Boards is provisioned and-more ports are cards are quoted. still required, then four port These cards are provisioned in the AS1051 4-Port Assembly and are housed in common equipment slots. 3.4.1.3 Cables: One 48ft cable is provisioned for each CDR List and/or CDR Link application. If a Paddle Board is quoted the is provisioned, otherwise the is used. 39 Autoquote Userguide April 20, One 16ft cable is provisioned for each remaining i s p r o v i s i o n e d for Paddle Boards and the CPU, DCHI, a n d cards. The port. is provisioned for 3.4.2 ESDI Provisioning: ESDI ports are determined by software options that require ESDI ports The following software and engineering adjustments made to inputs. and C o m m a n d a n d S tatus Link options require one ESDI port: ISDN/AP Third Party Vendor (153). provides two ESDI ports. They are provisioned Each ESDI Card as additional equipment except when included in a Meridian Mail assembly. 3.4.3 Provisioning: DCHI Cards are provisioned based on PRI inputs. One card is required For e x a m p l e , for every 16 PRI links serving a particular destination. if destination A needs three links and destination B needs nineteen links, a total of three DCHI cards is required. A maximum of eight DCHI cards may be configured. 3.4.4 Card Provisioning: . The quantity of cards quoted is the minimum As noted below, the number of Conference cards required by the system. minimum number of Conference cards depends on system model and size. Svstem 21 51 61 71 1 Group 71 2 Groups Groups 71 71 4 Groups Groups 71 Minimum Conference Cards 1 1 2 2 4 6 7 9 Additional Conference cards requested by will be provisioned as QPC444 Conference cards. Autoquote Userguide 3.5 April 20, 1990 PROVISIONING General Information Software Requirements PBX Software is a prerequisite for all three applications. applications. PRA Software is a prerequisite for Traffic Engineering One Enhanced traffic loop (QPC414) is required to support a No traffic engineering is required since each link. on the network loop. channel will always have access to a General Provisioning The number of links provisioned corresponds to the quantities selected via the following Lines, and Trunks inputs: DTI CPI PRI Input 40 Input 41 Inputs 171-178 3.5.2 Hardware PRI The Primary Rate Interface, QPC757 D-Channel Interface, and the QPC471 Clock Controller are the primary hardware components used in PRA applications. The is also used in DTI/CPI applications. The is a double wide card and requires two adjacent Common Equipment card slots. Clock Controller The QPC471 is quoted. (Options 21 (Options 61 Clock Controller(s) is provisioned when PRA and/or DTI Only one is required for non-redundant systems two are required for redundant systems and and 71). DCHI The QPC757 D-Channel I n t e r f a c e ( D C H I ) i s p r o v i s i o n e d f o r e v e r y 1 6 PRI links terminating at the same destination, and one is provisioned for each ISDN Signaling Link. A maximum of eight can be provisioned on a system. QPC757 -DTI The QPC720 and the QPC471 are the primary hardware components used in DTI applications. The CPI application uses the required. 41 only; the QPC471 is not Userguide April 20, 1990 Expansion (Network) Modules Additional network modules can be provisioned to house the cards on all system options. Each module can support up to 6 cards. Clock Controller Cables The following cables are provisioned when PRI and/or DTI are quoted: (PRI to Clock Controller) One for each PRI/DTI card, up to a maximum of two on non-redundant systems (Options 21 and 51) four on redundant systems (Options 61 and 71). (Clock Controller to Clock Controller) One for redundant systems (Options 61 and 71) only. 42 Autoquote Userguide 3.6 COMMON EQUIPMENT CARD April 20, PLACEMENT RULES The following is a list of CE cards that must be placed. that have fixed slot placement are not mentioned. QPC414 QPC471 QPC757 QPC814 Other CE cards Superloop Enhanced Network Loop PRI Clock Controller DCHI ESDI Conference/TDS 3.6.1 General Rules: Each Superloop takes one physical slot and one virtual slot on all Options except the Option 21. This is required because the Superloop O-3,4-7,8-11). This means uses 4 consecutive network buses. (e.g. that no card that requires a network bus may be placed in a virtual slot of a Superloop, but other cards can be placed in the virtual slot. If two Superloops are placed in such a way that the two virtual slot are adjacent, then double wide cards (e.g. that only require power or signalling can be placed between the Superloops. On the Option 21 Superloops may be placed in adjacent slots. the only exception to the above rules on Superloops. This is The PRI Card and the Floppy Disk Unit are double wide cards and require two adjacent slots. The Multi-Disk Unit requires three adjacent slots. 43 Autoquote Userguide 3.7 MODULE AND April 20, 1990 PROVISIONING 3.7.1 Module Provisioning This section explains module provisioning and module placement rules Common Equipment, P e r i p h e r a l E q u i p m e n t a n d Other Equipment modules. A column can t e r m "Column" i s u s e d t o r e p r e s e n t a s t a c k o f m o d u l e s . t h e t e r m " M o d u l e L evel" refers As such, contain up to four modules. Therefore, Column the level from the bottom that a module occupies. Level 3 indicates the third module of column two. for The to 2, 3.7.1.1 Common Equipment Modules and Placement The Common Equipment module types to be provisioned are: Module CEPE CNE CPU NET Common/Peripheral Equipment CPU/Network CPU Network PRI Network Expansion Option 21 Option Option 71 Option 71 Option 3.7.1.1.1 Common/Peripheral Equipment Module (CEPE) The Common/Peripheral Equipment Module (CEPE) is provisioned for all Option 21 systems. No other systems use this module. This module contains the CPU function, network slots and 10 slots of Intelligent PE (IPE) and is always located at the first module level of an Option 21. 3.7.1.1.2 CPU/Network Module (CNE) One CPU/Network (CNE) Module is provisioned with the Option 51 network group); two are provisioned with the Option 61 (full network T h e CNE M o d u l e ( s ) c o n t a i n t h e C P U a n d N e t w o r k f u n c t i o n s f o r t h e Option 51 and 61. This module is located in module level 1 on an Option 51 and in module levels 1 and 2 on the Option 61. 3.7.1.1.3 CPU Module (CPU) Two CPU Modules are provisioned on the Option 71, one for and another for CPU 1. Each CPU modules are positioned in module level 1 of adjacent columns. 3.7.1.1.4 Network Module (NET) The Network Module is only provisioned on the Option 71 as a primary Two Network modules network module which will house network cards. The Option 71 can accommodate up to five comprise a network group. The two network shelves network groups, therefore, ten Network modules. 44 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 which comprise a network group must be positioned together in a column. The first two network groups for an Option 71 are positioned directly The remaining three network a b o v e t h e C P U m o d u l e s as m e n t i o n e d a b o v e . groups can be positioned in any remaining module positions. 3.7.1.1.5 PRI Network Expansion Module- (NET/PRI) The PRI Network Expansion Module can be used on the Option 21, 51, 61 and 71. Each NET/PRI module can house up to six PRI packs and in the case of the Option 21 can house the Floppy Disk Unit. modules are provisioned if primary CE slots are not the PRI packs. Generally, there is no limit to the number of modules that can be provisioned with a system; the limiting factor is Network module space to house the supporting QPC414 network cards, clock Controller cards and D-Channel Interface cards. 3.7.1.2 Peripheral Equipment Modules The Peripheral Equipment module types to be provisioned are: Module IPE EPE Description Svstem Intelligent Peripheral Equipment . Option Enhanced Peripheral Equipment Option 3.7.1.2.1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module The Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module contains 16 slots for housing Intelligent PE cards. These modules are provisioned based on the number required to house the wired for IPE cards. The IPE module can be housed in any module level. 3.7.1.2.2 Enhanced Peripheral Equipment Module The Enhanced Peripheral Equipment module contains 10 slots for housing Enhanced PE cards. These modules are provisioned based on the number required to house the wired for EPE cards. The EPE module can be housed in any module level. 3.7.1.3 Other Equipment Modules -- The Other Equipment Modules provisioned are: Module MM RPE IGM Svstem Meridian Mail Remote Peripheral Equipment Inter-Group Module 45 Option Option Option 71 Autoquote Userguide 3.7.1.3.1 Meridian Mail April 20, 1990 (MM) The first is the There are two basic types of Meridian Mail Modules. All additional modules Prime Node which houses the Tape Drive Module. The Prime Meridian Mail module will be are referred to as Voice Nodes. Additional Voice Node provisioned with any Meridian Mail system. Meridian Mail modules will be provisioned based on the number of Network The positioning rules for Meridian Voice Processors (NVP) required. Mail modules in Autoquote assume a maximum room temperature of 40 The Prime node can be placed in the degrees Celsius (104 degrees F). The additional Voice Nodes can be first two module level positions. In addition, placed in the first, second, or third module positions. Meridian Mail modules need to be co-located for connectivity. 3.7.1.3.2 Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) The RPE modules which contains the Local Carrier Interface equipment are provisioned based on the number of RPE loops required. Each RPE module supports two. remote loops. The RPE module can be located in the first or second module level 3.7.1.3.3 Inter-Group Module (IGM) The Inter-Group module is only used on the Option 71. One IGM module will be provisioned per Option 71 system for inter-network group connectivity. 3.7.2 Pedestals and Kits In determining the module and column configuration for Meridian 1, the kits must be considered. pedestal types and 3.7.2.1 Pedestals The same general pedestal is used in all configurations, however, the Please contents of the pedestal assembly can differ as explained below. refer to the Pricing Manual for package breakdowns and assembly codes. The Option 21A assembly is used on all module Option 21A systems. This assembly contains designed for cooling a one module system. unit A Two-Module Pedestal Assembly is provisioned on Option 21 systems which contain two modules. This assembly contains a Pedestal Fan Unit designed for cooling a two module system. The standard Pedestal Assembly is used for columns which will include up to four module levels. A Special Pedestal assembly is used for systems containing 46 Autoquote Userguide April 20, This assembly contains the same pedestal equipment Meridian Mail. as in the standard Pedestal Assembly mentioned above, however a maximum of one of these assemblies can be ordered in systems which contain Meridian Mail. The minimum required pedestal assemblies will be provisioned based on the configuration quoted. However, Miscellaneous/Memory Input 11 can be used to override the pedestal provisioning assumptions. If Input 11 is set to 2, at least a two module pedestal assembly will be provisioned and if Input 11 is set to 4, a four module pedestal assembly will be required. 3.7.2.2 Sidepanels/Spacer Kits Sidepanels are provisioned for all module sides which are exposed. Spacer Kits are provisioned for every two adjoining modules. The number of Sidepanels and Spacer Kits provisioned is based on the number of modules as well as the module placement within columns. 47 Userguide April 20, 1990 3.0 POWER 3.8.1 Power Configurations Except for the Option all Meridian 1 systems may be configured for The Option 21A -is strictly an AC either an AC or DC power source. powered system. A DC powered system may be quoted with or without rectifiers. A DC system quoted without rectifiers is assumed to have a customer provided power source. The power configuration quoted is determined by the value of Miscellaneous/Memory input 1. AC 2 3 = DC 1 3 . 8 . 2 Customer Provided Power Using Rectifiers P o w e r C a l c u l a t i o n s System Power, BTU Output, module power values. . and Load are calculated using the following Consumption (Watts) 500 360 300 270 240 460 175 100 400 0 50 Dissipation (Watts) 450 360 300 270 200 380 175 100 400 0 0 Rectifiers: 30 Amp 50 Amp 175 290 System P o w e r i s c a l c u l a t e d b y s u m m i n g t h e power consumption of-all Per Module Power CPU/Network CPU Network EPE Intelligent PE RPE local side R P E remote s i d e M e r i d i a n Mail Intergroup Module Pedestal (Blowers) modules quoted. System BTU Output is calculated by summing the power Dissipation of all m o d u l e s a n d r e c t i f i e r s a n d m u l t i p l y i n g by t h e c o n s t a n t 3 . 4 1 5 . System Load (Amps) is determined by dividing the System Power by the a p p r o p r i a t e d i v i s o r : 5 2 V o l t s f o r D C systems, 2 3 0 V o l t s f o r A C systems. 48 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 3 . 8 . 3 Power Components All power components for AC systems are included in the base system packages. DC systems using customer provided power are provisioned the Customer Provided Power Assembly which includes Battery Distribution Unit. DC systems with rectifiers are provisioned the number of rectifiers required to support the system load. Quantify of Rectifiers = System Load Amps per Rectifier Rectifier Output = Quantity of Rectifiers * Amps per Rectifier Options 21, 51, and 61 are quoted with 30 Amp Rectifiers These rectifiers are housed in a rectifier rack which supports a maximum of three rectifiers and/or a maximum of eight modules. Thus the quantity of racks quoted is the larger of the following expressions. Quantity of Racks = Rectifiers Quantity of Racks = Modules 3 Note that one rectifier and one rectifier rack are included in the base system packages. Option 71 utilizes Amp Rectifiers housed in Prime Rectifier Cabinets (B0225152). Each cabinet may house up to four rectifiers. Note that the Option 71 base system package contains one prime cabinet and one 50 amp rectifier. If desired, the prime rectifier cabinet may be quoted on an option 51 or 61 using Miscellaneous/Memory input 12. 3 . 8 . 4 Reserve Power Both AC and DC powered systems may utilize reserve power sources. 3.8.4.1 AC Systems (UPS): Reserve power for an AC system is provided by an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). Autoquote calculates the UPS rating as follows. UPS rating = System Power 0.6 One UPS cable is required for any AC system with reserve power. The actual cable provisioned is dependent on the UPS vendor as indicted by Miscellaneous/Memory input 10. 3.8.4.2 DC Systems (Batteries): Autoquote calculates battery requirements as follows. Battery System Load * Battery Factor 49 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 The Battery Factor is dependent on the hours of backup required and the battery type used. Hours 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a 9 Absolyte 3.1 4.2 5.2 6.2 7.1 7.8 a.5 9.4 10.2 Lead-Calcium 3.0 4.0 5.0 5.9 6.9 7.7 a.5 9.3 10.1 10.9 If more than 10 hours of backup is required, the factor becomes linear. For example, if 15 hours are required the factor is 15. Note that the Option 71 requires a minimum of 4 hours of battery backup. 3.9 MEMORY Autoquote calculates three memory components for each Meridian 1 system: Protected Data (P-Data), Unprotected Data (U-Data), and Program Store. Utilization of these components is estimated at equipped and wired levels. These utilization measures are compared to appropriate capacities to ensure the system has adequate memory for the quoted functionality. 3.9.1 Memory Calculations Autoquote employs memory values and calculations detailed in the Controlled Release Memory documents. Exceptions and special notations are listed below. Each 1024 words equals of memory. A 5% error factor is included for each memory component. A 900 word error margin is added to P-Data and U-Data utilization to a c c o u n t for t h e e r r o r f a c t o r o f l o w m e m o r y s y s t e m s . P-Data is not calculated for the following software options: New Flexible Code Restriction Network Automatic Route Selection Coordinated Dialing Plan P-Data required for these features should be calculated manually based on specific customer requirements. Additional P-Data may be added to a quote using Memory input 47. P-Data required for Basic Automatic Route Selection (BARS) is estimated No factor Is included for Specialized Common Carriers to be Userguide requiring 6-digit April 20, 1990 translation. An additional 12% P-Data requirement is incorporated for DN translation. P-Data and U-Data values used for various line ports are: Lines Ports P-Data 10.5 Digital Voice Ports < 16 Buttons 16 Buttons Sync Data Ports Data Ports 3.9.2 Memory U-Data 4.5 22.5 26.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 9.5 14.5 Capacities Memory capacities vary depending on system type. 3.9.2.1 Option 21 One memory/signaling card is included in each system package. Although this card provides 768k total storage, it is addressed'by pages of 64k for the following purposes. I/O Addressing U-Data P-Data Program Store Total If this Paaes 1 1 1 9 12 Storaae 64k 64k 64k 576k 768k . necessary, Program Store may overflow into the P-Data page. p a g i n g , memory u t i l i z a t i o n i s l i m i t e d a s n o t e d b e l o w . 64k 64k 640k U-Data P-Data P-Data + Program Store 3.9.2.2 Option Due to 51 -- One QPC583 memory card is included in each system No paging limitations exist. provides 768k total storage. U-Data, P-Data, and Program Store may not exceed 768k. This card The sum of 3.9.2.3 Option 61 These cards Two QPC583 memory cards are include in each system package. The No paging limitations exist. provide 768k storage. 51 Userguide sum of U-Data, P-Data, April 20, 1990 and Program Store may not exceed 768k. 3.9.2.4 Option 71 Two memory cards are include in each system package. These cards provide 768k redundant storage. No paging limitations exist. additional QPCS83 memory cards may be added to provide redundant storage. Four additional QPC583 memory cards may be added to provide total redundant storage. The sum of U-Data, P-Data, and Program Store may not exceed 3.10 REAL TIME CPU Real Time utilization is estimated for each Meridian 1 system based on system traffic and applications. A rated call carrying capacity is determined assuming 70% of the busy hour (2520 seconds) is available for call processing. This rated capacity may not be exceeded by the wired calls per hour. 3.10.1 Rated Call Carrying Capacity The rated call carrying capacity incorporates the following factors. Set Calls Digital Set Calls Trunk Calls Tie Line Calls Call Party Name Display Coordinated Dialing Plan Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Meridian Mail Call Detail Recording (CDR) Authorization Codes Off-Hook Queuing Basic Automatic Route Selection (BARS) Network Automatic Route Selection (NARS) New Flexible Code Restriction Access Primary Superloop Ports -- 3.10.2 Call Detail Recording (CDR) CDR has a great impact on CPU real time. To ensure this impact is accounted for correctly, Miscellaneous Memory input 14 is used to specify how CDR will be used. Default CDR Usage is outgoing calls only. 3.10.3 Tie Line Calls TO a c c u r a t e l y a c c o u n t f o r used to specify the number of calls, Basic Information input 10 is l i n k s w h i c h w i l l s e r v e as t i e 52 Autoquote Userguide lines. The default is April 20, 1990 zero. Calls Per Hour The number of calls per hour is calculated as follows. P * 100 * 0.5 H where P = Total traffic in CCS H = Average Holding Time The default Average Holding Time is 180 seconds, using Miscellaneous/Memory input 23. 53 but this be altered Autoquote Userguide 3.11 NON-BLOCKING April 20, APPLICATIONS Non-Blocking applications require that all ports have access to a In other words, the number of ports at all times. network loop supported by a loop cannot exceed the number of timeslots on that loop. Options 21, 51, 61 and 71 can be quoted as totally or partially blocking. Autoquote assumes that non-blocking modules are PE modules. In addition, partitioned and separate from normal Intelligent PE (IPE) and Enhanced PE (EPE) non-blocking applications require separate modules. Generally the number of non-blocking ports capacity of the which can be quoted is based on the network system. Non-Blocking Inputs Quoting a non-blocking configuration requires entering inputs for In addition, the non-blocking blocking ports, cards and modules. Average Holding Time (AHT) can be adjusted using Miscellaneous/Memory Input 123. The non-blocking average holding time defaults to 600 seconds. Please refer to the sample input sheet at the end of this section for actual inputs. Non-blocking ports are entered with Phones/Lines and Trunks inputs 101 through 143. For these inputs, CCS values generally default to 36. Note that Input 143 is the Voice/Data ISDLC input. Two timeslots are required for each non-blocking Voice/Data ISDLC port. are used to specify the Miscellaneous/Memory Inputs 51 through blocking PE cards and modules. Note that there are separate inputs for Intelligent PE (IPE) and Enhanced PE (EPE) modules. Recommended Quoting Procedure The following steps are recommended to be used when quoting non-blocking applications: 1) Determine the quantity of non-blocking ports by card type for both Intelligent PE (IPE) and Enhanced (PE). For I P E d i v i d e t h e 2) Determine the number of network loops required. total non-blocking ports by 120; for EPE divide the total non-blocking ports by 30. These values should be rounded up to the nearest-number. 54 telemanuals.com Autoquote Userguide April 20, 3) Determine the number PE cards and shelves required by manually mapping out each loop with the type of ports to be assigned to that PE card calculation should include any Receiver loop. requirements. (This drawing can be sent in with the order to assure the system is built as the non-blocking system quoted) Note that analog line cards require Ringing Generators. Therefore, by noting the quantity of IPE and EPE shelves which contain analog line cards, this Also, for value can be entered into Miscellaneous Inputs each Intelligent PE module which require more than 2 Superloops, a Controller-4 Card will have to be entered in Miscellaneous/Memory Input 82. Total all non-blocking IPE and EPE shelves and cards from step 3.. Enter non-blocking ports in the appropriate non-blocking Phones Lines a n d T r u n k s i n p u t s a n d e n t e r t h e results o f s t e p 4 i n t o t h e n o n - b l o c k i n g M i s c e l l a n e o u s M e m o r y I n p u t section. 55 telemanuals.com Userguide April 20, 3.12 MERIDIAN MAIL Meridian Mail may be quoted with Options 21, 51, 61 and 71. Meridian Mail is quoted by either using Miscellaneous/Memory Input 150 for the Loading a Meridian Mail X Cabinet Meridian Mail Modular system or onto an existing quote. 3.12.1 Meridian Mail Modular The Meridian Mail Modular system can be quoted by entering the desired Ports, Hours and Users in Miscellaneous Memory Input 150. When this input is used, the complete Meridian Mail hardware and software packaging will be included in the quote as well as any supporting equipment such as network loops, ESDI card slots, pedestals and power. This section addresses the configuration rules for the Meridian Mail hardware and software. For information on switch impact of Meridian Mail, please refer to previous portions of this Engineering/Provisioning section. Meridian Mail Hardware is based upon the amount of Voice Processor Ports and Hours of storage requested. Meridian Mail Modular configurations consist of a combination of a Base Package, additional Network Voice Processor Cards (NVP), Expansion Storage Software and Expansion Assemblies. Each NVP card contains four Voice Processor ports. Voice Storage hours is determined by the amount of disk space available. Configurations include different combinations of 3 0 0 M B a n d 600MB disks. The following chart shows the relationship of these configurations. Note that the Ports column shows the capacities with additional NVP cards added. Base Package PORTS HOURS With With Expanded Storage Exp. Assembly PORTS 4 5 -- 4 4 24 24 11 12 36 45 120 12 36 36 HOURS PORTS -24 54 90 -20 20 With Both PORTS HOURS HOURS -26 12 20 20 a4 60 5 54 114 120 l 240 The corresponding order codes for these configurations are as follows: Base Base SW7001 SW7000 SW7000 SW7000 SW7000 Software Software -SW7003 SW7003 SW7003 SW7003 56 E XD . -AS7000 AS7001 AS7004 AS7005 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 A s s h o w n i n t h e above c h a r t , e v e r y M e r i d i a n M a i l M o d u l a r s y s t e m c o m e s with a Base Software Package. For configurations of not more than five hours of storage, the SW7001 5 Hour Software base package is included. All other configurations require the SW7000 Meridian Mail Base Software. is provisioned to increase voice Expansion Storage Software storage capacity if required. The remaining Meridian Mail applications are selected using Miscellaneous/Memory Inputs 151-156. As most of these inputs are software applications, enter a 1 to select the option. In the case of Voice Menus, any positive number input will provision Voice Menus software, however, by entering the number of Voice Menu Calls expected during the busy hour, this input can also be used in determining the CPU Real Time impact. . Input 155 is Meridian Mail Networking Ports. By entering the number of Meridian Mail Networking Ports required in this input, the Meridian Mail Networking Software and appropriate hardware will be provisioned. The hardware for this application includes a Networking Hardware Package and a Modem Package. The Networking Hardware Package includes one 4-port RS232 board and 2 modems. The Modem package is provisioned if more than two total networking ports are required and includes 2 additional modems. 3.12.2 Meridian Mail X Cabinet The Meridian Mail X Cabinet can be quoted in conjunction with a Meridian 1 s y s t e m b y c r e a t i n g a s e p a r a t e M e r i d i a n Mail q u o t e a n d A u x L o a d i n g i t onto the Meridian 1. Creating the Meridian Mail X quote is accomplished using the Autoquote Model "MM". Please refer to the Meridian Mail P r o d u c t C h a p t e r for i n f o r m a t i o n o n q u o t e t h e X C a b i n e t . 57 . Autoquote Userguide April 20, 3.13 REMOTE PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT (RPE) Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) may be quoted with any Meridian 1 Option 21, 51, 61 or 71. The quoting process is identical to a normal Meridian 1 quotation with the addition of the AUX Loading function as described in Section 4 of this User Guide. As there is no Common Equipment (CE) in an RPE system, the Software Input Class does not apply. Therefore the only inputs necessary on an RPE system are: Phones Lines and Trunks Miscellaneous/Memory Basic Information To set up an RPE quote, use either the RPE or RPEC Autoquote Models. (These models do not have an associated release number; enter a RETURN at the Release prompt.) The RPE model is used the Meridian 1 modular packaged RPE while the RPEC model is used to quote the QCA74 style RPE cabinet. receivers and memory are not quoted for an Although networks, RPE system, t h e y a r e c a l c u l a t e d s o t h e y c a n b e at the main site when Aux Loading is performed. Please reference Section 5, Aux Loading, page 77 of this User Guide for information on how to Aux Load an RPE system. RPE software must be selected on the Main circuit switch quote before Auxiliary Loading. 58 Autoquote Userguide 4. April 20, 1990 REPORTS This section contains samples of available on Meridian SL-1 quotation models. An explanation of each report is also included. Report -------------------------9999 Header Report Price Summary 4 Engineering Summary Equipment Summary 6 Input Listing 7 Auxiliary Quote Summary 9 Equipment List 2 Unused Capacity Summary 0 A sample of report 15 Discount Summary and Report 11 Auxiliary Price Summary will not appear in the User guide. These reports provide discounting information which may vary for different Autoquote users. Report 3 is available and is the same as Report 9 without pricing information. Please note that many of the engineering and configuration reports The Meridian SL-1 display "Equipped" and "Wired" values for hardware. Autoquote models calculate equipped and wired configurations in the same run. Details on these two values are often needed when the customer requires a certain amount of growth capacity engineered into the system. the user can input both the equipped For all line, trunk and data and wired quantities desired. The Autoquote will then configure a system where all hardware needed for the equipped configuration is included and the only things lacking for the wired configuration are PE cards. All other hardware (CE equipment, power equipment, memory, network capacity, cabinets and shelves) is quoted to support the wired configuration. The mechanics of using Autoquote are not included in this product chapter. Refer to the Introduction and chapter for detailed information on how to use the Autoquote system. 59 Autoquote Userguide 4.1 Header Report April 20, 1990 9999 The "Report Header" is produced each time that Report the service menu or it can be reproduced by requesting 9999. This report displays general information that is Quote is created or that has been entered by selecting Information at the Service Menu. 60 is selected from report number input when a New General Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 NORTHERN TELECOM MBS QUOTATION SYSTEM DATE: 'CREATION DATE QUOTATION QUOTATION. NUMBER: 00003556 FOR: USER GUIDE 'MERIDIAN 1 SYSTEM OPTION 21 RELEASE 15 QUOTED BY ): ADMIN 'ORDER DATE: THIS CONFIGURATION IS BASED UPON ENGINEERING RULES IN E F F E C T A S OF T H I S D A T E B U T P R I O R T O D I S T R I B U T O R S S U B M I S S I O N OF ALTHOUGH ENGINEERING RULES MAY CHANGE IN THE FUTURE, WILL AN ORDER. PRICING IS HONOR THE QUOTED FUNCTIONALITY FOR SIXTY DAYS FROM THIS DATE. GOVERNED SOLELY BY THE CPE DISTRIBUTORSHIP AGREEMENT BETWEEN EACH DISTRIBUTOR AND NTI, AND THE MERIDIAN BUSINESS SYSTEMS PRICING MANUAL IN ACCEPTS THE DISTRIBUTORS ORDER. EFFECT ON THE DATE THE PRICE QUOTED BY THE AUTOQUOTE SYSTEM APPLIES ONLY TO THE ITEMS OF EQUIPMENT AND SOFTWARE LISTED 'IN THE EQUIPMENT BREAKOUT (IE. REPORT 3). THESE ITEMS ARE BASED SOLELY ON THE INPUTS. THE ACTUAL SYSTEM PRICE DEPENDS ON PARTICULAR APPLICATIONS AND FINALIZED SYSTEM ENGINEERING MAY REQUIRE MANUAL ADDITIONS OR DELETIONS TO THIS QUOTE. DATE is the date on which the quotation was run CREATION DATE is the date on which the quote was created as a new quote or copied to a new quote number. FOR is the END USER COMPANY NAME entered as part of the information entered when setting up a new quote or changed within General Information. This is the system type being quoted. The system type is determined by the response to MODEL/GENERIC entered as part of a new quote or changed quote using the MODEL command -Either AC or DC depending on the system power option that was selected under miscellaneous inputs. The Software Release is input at the RELEASE prompt when creating a new quote or changing an existing quote using the Model command Sales Channel Acronym, entered as part of the system sign on procedure: HELLO (Location ID),(Sales Channel).NTII 8 Salesperson when creating a new quote or changing an existing 61 Userguide April quote using the General Information command. O r d e r Date i s t h e a n t i c i p a t e d o r d e r d a t e i n p u t w h e n c r e a t i n g a n e w quote or changed quote using the General Information command. 10 Caveats, Disclaimers, and Notes Autoquote Userguide 4.2 Price summary April 20, 1990 Report 1 This report subtotals Commercial List Price (CLP) by product group. QUOTE: SUMMARY PRICE --- (02) (03) (04) (13) (14) (20) SL-1 EQUIPMENT RPE EQUIPMENT SL-1 SOFTWARE T E R M I N A L S PROPRIETARY MERIDIAN MAIL HARDWARE MERIDIAN MAIL SOFTWARE T E R M I N A L S MTD 00003556 104615.00 7675.00 26660.00 6600.00 20100.00 16000.00 640.00 FOR USE ONLY BY PERSONNEL AUTHORIZED BY NTI. NOT FOR PUBLIC DISCLOSURE. DATE is the date on which the quotation was run 2 Subtotal of CLP by equipment type; The numerals in TP (type code) column of Report 9 correspond to the code on left of the each Equipment 63 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1 9 9 0 4.3 Report 9 Equipment List This report lists all items which are included in the price quoted. If a hardware o r software item is not listed in this report, it is not included in the price. Package and assembly codes are used wherever possible. Refer to the Meridian 1 Communication Systems Pricing Manuals for breakdown of packages and assemblies. --- EQUIPMENT LIST --- QUOTE: 00003556 UNIT EXTENDED QNTY EQP CODE DESCRIPTION * 1 OPTION 21 SYS PKG +PE MODULE AC 3760.00 3760.00 'FOLLOWING IS A PARTIAL LIST OF PREPACKAGE ITEMS FOR THE ABOVE SYSTEM. --- THEY ARE LISTED FOR REFERENCE ONLY. -TOP CAP AC 1 CARD 1 CONFERENCE/TDS CARD 1 SUPERLOOP NETWORK CARD 1 PADDLE BOARD ASSEMBLY 2 AS1052 2 PORT INTELLIGENT PE MODULE ASSEMBLY AC 1 NETWORK TO CONTROLLER CABLE 1 4 PO699724 MODULE SIDE COVER --ADDITIONS REQUIRED TO THE SYSTEM PACKAGE ARE : 1 PEDESTAL ASSEMBLY AC 1 TOP CAP AC 1 RPE CARRIER MODULE ASSEMBLY AC 1 LOCAL NETWORK INTERFACE ASSY. 1 SPECIAL 'PEDESTAL ASSEMBLY AC 1 2 PORT I/O TO CAB 48' 3 I/O TO DTE/DCE CAB 16' 2 PORT I/O TO DTE/DCE CABLE 16 FT. 1 1 QPC414 NETWORK CARD 1 QPC471 CLOCK CONTROLLER 2 TO CLOCK CONT 2 AS1061 PRI ASSEMBLY 1 INTELLIGENT PE MODULE ASSEMBLY AC 2 CONTROLLER CARD-2 1 PE MODULE ASSEMBLY AC 3 RING GENERATOR AC 1 NETWORK TO CONTROLLER CABLE 3 NETWORK TO PE CABLE AS1013 SPECIAL CONSOLE/LINE CARD PKG 5 DIGITAL LINE CARD 7 ANALOG LINE CARD 1 ANALOG MESSAGE WAITING LINE CARD 3 UNIVERSAL TRUNK CARD 1 QPC192 OPX LINE 2 QPC723 RILC-RS-232C INTERFACE LINE CARD M2008 TELEPHONE SILHUETE SILHOUETTE w/DIAL-IN HANDSET 1 MERIDIAN MANAGER STATION ADMIN 64 101 101 so2 so2 101 4910.00 495.00 4595.00 3080.00 3000.00 80.00 50.00 50.00 101 so1 101 101 101 DO1 DO1 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 DO4 H20 DO5 1715.00 885.00 40.00 2760.00 10220.00 3950.00 3140.00 1060.00 60. 40.00 4580.00 3085.00 3085.00 3240.00 3195.00 1695.00 1235.00 165.00 64.00 .oo 4910.00 495.00 4595.00 3080.00 3000.00 80.00 150.00 50.00 1715.00 885.00 80.00 5520.00 10220.00 7900.00 3140.00 3180.00 60.00 120.00 4580.00 . 15425.00 21595.00 3240.00 9585.00 1695.00 2470.00 6600.00 640.00 .oo Userguide April 20, 1990 M-MAIL MOD OPT 4PT AC MOD O P T B A S E S W MOD OPT EXPANDED SW MOD OPT VOICE MENUS COLUMN SPACER KIT PO699724 MODULE SIDE COVER B A S E SOFTWARE SWOOOOA RTU/MULTI-CUSTOMER RTU/RPE TDS RTU/AUX PROCESSOR LINK RTU/IVMS LINK MAIL LINK RTU/BASIC ACD FEATURES (ACD A) D13 SW7000 SW7003 SW7005 1 3 2 4 4 1 1 4 4 4 1 R03 103 103 103 103 103 20100.00 2000.00 12000.00 2000.00 190.00 95.00 5250.00 225.00 560.00 .oo 125.00 800.00 100.00 INDICATES CONTROLLED RELEASE; PROPER AUTHORIZATION IS REQUIRED SOFTWARE O P T I O N S 1 2 11 21 22 23 33 32 61 71 81 91 52 53 72 73 83 20100.00 2000.00 12000.00 2000.00 570.00 190.00 21000.00 900.00 560.00 .oo 500.00 3200.00 400.00 100.00 TO QUOTE. : 4 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 5 15 25 35 45 55 75 85 95 16 36 46 7 17 8 18 28 9 19 29 47' 57 48 49 10 20 40 77 87 88 89 60 70 80 90 107 108 109 119 139 140 76 115 157 170 173 203 204 205 FOR USE ONLY BY PERSONNEL AUTHORIZED BY NTI. NOT FOR PUBLIC DISCLOSURE. 1A r e f e r e n c e l i s t i n g o f t h e m a j o r s y s t e m p a c k a g e c o n t e n t s i s i n c l u d e d i n the Equipment List report. This is only a reference and extends down to the 2Symbols in the left hand column are used to indicate that a product or Terminals requires Controlled Release procedures Division product (T). 3The number in the column is the Autoquote equipment type code. It is used to designate logical groupings of hardware and software. 65 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 4.4 Report 4 Engineering The Engineering Summary Report displays engineering information on For details on memory, power, s y s t e m t r a f f i c a n d p r o c e s s o r r e a l t i m e . calculating these items, please see Section 3, Engineering\Provisioning, page 27. 66 Userguide April 20, 1990 R4 - - - E N G I N E E R I N G S U M M A R Y - - - QUOTE: EQUIPPED 26 15' -295 310 - MEMORY (Kwords) UNPROTECTED DATA PROTECTED DATA PROGRAM STORE PROTECTED DATA + PROGRAM STORE POWER VALUES SYSTEM POWER (WATTS) SYSTEM UPS FACTOR (KVA) SYSTEM HEAT OUTPUT EQUIPPED DTI/CPI SUPERLOOP QUOTED CAPACITY 64 64 WIRED 31 18 295 313 EQUIPPED 1520 2.53 4439 SYSTEM TRAFFIC (CCS) LINE TRUNK OTHER GOS 00003556 640 WIRED 2380 3.96 5737 WIRED 1536 1536 QUOTED CAPACITY . 1728 995 320 91 1406 1770 650 111 2531 7000 247 700 1471 2666 7700 3007 4202 9428 . GOS TOTAL NET MAIN 177 GOS . GRAND TOTAL TRAFFIC AVERAGES GOS INTELLIGENT PE TRAFFIC CCS/SHELF EQUIPPED WIRED QUOTED 6.221 83 703 703 6.375 94 844 1266 6.221 83 469 703 8.125 22 9.000 34 135 135 -- 8.125 22 65 65 GOS PE TRAFFIC (MAIN) 65 REAL TIME CALLS PER HOUR PERCENT UTILIZATION EQUIPPED 833 15 FOR USE ONLY BY PERSONNEL AUTHORIZED BY NTI. 67 WIRED 1164 21 QUOTED C A P A C I T Y 5682 100 NOT FOR PUBLIC DISCLOSURE. Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 4.4.1 Memory For questions regarding Memory values refer to Section 3.9, Memory, page 50. UNPR O T E C T E D D A T A , P R O T E C T E D D A T A a n d P R O G R A M S T O R E m e m o r y v a l u e s a r e displayed for the Equipped and Wired configurations. System'capacities are also displayed when appropriate; e.g. for PROGRAM STORE + P-DATA and TOTAL MEMORY. All values are in words of memory. 4.4.2 Power For questions regarding power values refer to Power, page 47. SYSTEM POWER is the sum of the modules power in Watts. SYSTEM UPS for AC Systems. Power Supply) FACTOR is (System Power) SYSTEM HEAT OUTPUT is the sum of the modules and rectifiers heat output. HOURS BATTERY BACXUP is the number of hours of battery backup requested (For DC Systems). BATTERY REQUIREMENTS (AMP HOURS) is the amount of amp-hours the batteries must be rated to support the specified amount of backup DC Systems). (For RECHARGE TIME is the number of hours required to recharge the quoted b a t t e r i e s a f t e r t h e y h a v e b e e n c o m p l e t e l y d i s c h a r g e d (For D C S y s t e m s ) . 4.4.3 System Traffic For questions regarding traffic values refer to Network Loop Engineering, page 36. Total system traffic is broken into NON-BLOCKING, and GOS quantities both the Main and RPE sites. OTHER CCS represents Console, location) and Meridian Mail traffic Receiver (main calculated for the system. -4.4.4 Real Time For q u e s t i o n s r e g a r d i n g r e a l t i m e v a l u e s r e f e r t o S e c t i o n 3 . 1 0 , R e a l Time, page 52. The values described in this section of Report 4 deal with the p r o c e s s i n g time o f t h e C P U . When applicable, equipped and wired values are given. 68 Userguide April 20, 1990 The equipped and wired CALLS PER HOUR is a measure of the number of calls made per hour based on traffic and average holding time. The CALL PER H O U R q u o t e d c a p a c i t y i s a r a t e d c a p a c i t y b a s e d o n s y s t e m f e a t u r e Real time intensive features (CDR, ACD, Meridian Mail) utilization. decrease this CALL PER HOUR quoted capacity since the u t i l i z a t i o n r e d u c e s t h e t i m e available f o r ' c a l l p r o c e s s i n g . PERCENT UTILIZATION is Simply a p e r c e n t a g e m e a s u r e o f t h e C A L L S P E R equipped or wired versus the CALLS PER HOUR quoted capacity. The PERCENT UTILIZATION quoted capacity is always 100. 69 HOUR Autoquote Userguide April 4.5 Report 5 Equipment Summary Report provides a summary of the configuration in terms of the main hardware components and ports. --- QUOTE: EQUIPMENT SUMMARY --- TOTAL ROWS TOTAL COLUMNS TOTAL MODULES RPE CARRIER MODULES MERIDIAN MAIL MODULES MODULE INTELLIGENT PE MODULES PE MODULES SUPERLOOPS NETWORK LOOPS LOOPS EQUIPPED 1 2 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 INTELLIGENT PE CARDS LINE CARDS TRUNK CARDS DISK DRIVE SLOTS (N/A) TOTAL INTELLIGENT PE SLOTS TOTAL INTELLIGENT PE CARDS PECARDS TOTAL CARDS PORTS PORTS ESDI PORTS 00003556 WIRED 1 2 6 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 QUOTED 1 2 6 - 1 14 3 2 19 17 23 4 2 29 27 14 3 2 19 17 3 4 3 WIRED 4 1 QUOTED 202 17 7 226 EQUIPPED 4 -- 1 1 2 1 ' 1 2 2 1 INTELLIGENT PE VOICE PORTS TRUNK PORTS DTR PORTS TOTAL 202 17 7 226 357 32 AVG. PORTS/SHELF AVG. PORTS/LOOP 113 22.6 133 397 GOS PE VOICE PORTS DATA PORTS TOTAL 3 5 3 12 . 15 8 AVG. PORTS/SHELF A V G . PORTS/LOOP 8 8 15 15 8 8 TOTAL PORTS (TN's) 364 542 364 70 397 -- 76 226 3 Userguide April 20, 4.5.1 Hardware The information in the Hardware section of this report represents the number of key of an item equipped, wired and quoted. The quoted level for calculations of Peripheral should correspond to the equipped IPE) cards, ports , and For all other Equipment (EPE calculations the quoted level should correspond to the wired level. For details Provisioning, on calculating page 27. these items, see Section Engineering 4 . 5 . 2 Ports SDI, D-Channel Interface, and ESDI (Enhanced ports are listed for reference. for Meridian Mail) Ports average are calculated at module and network loop level for Grade of Service (GOS) and Non-blocking configurations. . 71 \ Userguide April 20, 4.6 Report 6 Input Listing This report lists all inputs used to engineer and provision the Meridian 1 SL-1 system. Default values and input adjustments will be reflected in this report. Actual "saved" inputs can be viewed when loading an existing quote. The inputs will be stored as shown on this report if after running reports. the quote is R6 - - - I N P U T L I S T I N G - - - QUOTE: 00003556 - SOFTWARE OPTIONS 002 015 077 1 1 1 MULTI-CUSTOMER REMOTE PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT (RPE) MERIDIAN MAIL APPLICATION PHONES, LINES 001 78 , 003 005 007 113 , 8 3 , 010 011 TRUNKS , , 8 , 23 , 012 035 040 5 , 12 32.0 , 100 10 DIGITAL VOICE LINES 2 5 0 0 LINES MSG WAITING 2500 LINES OPX 2500 LINES CONSOLES CO TRUNKS DID TRUNKS RILC DATA LINES DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE (DTI) SILHOUETTE 230 40 M2008 134 . 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 30.00 22.00 16.00 10.00 DATA 001 1 023 040 102 150 151 180 2 1 4, 1 2 , 23 100 POWER INDICATCR w/RECTIFIERS) AVERAGE HOLDING TIME NUMBER OF CUSTOMERS CABLE EGRESS MERIDIAN MAIL OPTION MERIDIAN MAIL VOICE MENUS (# CALLS) B A S I C INFORMATION 001 005 007 009 2 2 25 40 NUMBER OF TRUNK GROUPS AMOUNT OF D I S A T R A F F I C ( I N C C S ) NUMBER OF TEMPLATES PERCENT DTI TRAFFIC THAT IS 72 Userguide April 20, 1990 4.7 Report 7 Auxiliary Quote Summary There are two versions of Report 7: the Auxiliary Quote Summary and the RPE Summary. The latter is available on the RPE models only. If printed from a "Main" quote, it provides an overview of any Loaded" quote run with the "Main" quote. The summary consists of System Traffic and Voice ports and (ccs) and the number of Network Loops for Hours of storage for Meridian Mail. If-this report is printed from an RPE quote, a summary of the engineered values which will impact the "Main" quote are printed. Main Quote Version AUXILIARY QUOTE SUMMARY MAIN/RPE END-USER QUOTE # 00003556 00003557 SUBTOTAL QUOTE: SYSTEM 00003556 TRAFFIC 2942 390 NETWORKS 5 1 $ 6 3397 TOTAL 219640.00 4.7.2 RPE Quote Version RPE SUMMARY --- QUOTE: 00003557 END-USER: $ EQUIPPED UNPROTECTED DATA PROTECTED DATA ccs P.O1 TRAFFIC LOOPS 182290.00 37350.00 WIRED 2475 4664 2475 4664 390 1 390 1 73 37350 -- Userguide April 20, 4.8 Report 20 Unused Capacity Summary Unused Capacity is the result of hardware being able to support a range of usage. For example an IPE module can support form 1 to 16 IPE cards. card is needed at the equipped for level then the If only one equipped unused capacity is 15 slots. For details on calculating these items, please see paragraph 0 Engineering \ Provisioning page 27. UNUSED CAPACITY SUMMARY --- QUOTE: 00003556 . MEMORY (Kwords) EQUIPPED UNPROTECTED DATA 34 AVAILABLE 54 PROTECTED DATA 44 69 % AVAILABLE P R O T E C T E D D A T A + PROGRAM S 325 % AVAILABLE 51 WIRED 29 46 '41 64 322 51 EQUIPPED 7 7 -- WIRED 13 6 IPE CARD SLOTS PE CARD SLOTS SUPERLOOPS PE PORTS QPC192 QPC723 GOS) GOS) GOS) DIGITAL LINE CARD ANALOG MESSAGE WAITING LINE CARD OPX LINE RILC-RS-232C INTERFACE LINE CARD UNIVERSAL TRUNK CARD FOR USE ONLY BY PERSONNEL AUTHORIZED BY NTI. 74 QUOTED 23 7 EQUIPPED 13 7 1 3 7 WIRED 5 4 1 NOT FOR PUBLIC DISCLOSURE. Autoquote Userguide 4.8.1 April 20, Memory Unused memory capacities are calculated and displayed when appropriate, e . g . UNPROTECTED DATA, PROGRAM STORE + P-DATA, and TOTAL MEMORY. All values are in words of memory. also calculated for each memory category. 4.8.2 Hardware PE CARD SLOTS GOS) are the number of card slots available on Unused card slots for the Quoted PE shelves in the configured system. large since modules are quoted at the Wired configuration quantity while PE cards are quoted at the Equipped quantity. SUPERLOOPS is the number of loops that may be added to the existing CE/NET modules. 4.8.3 PE Ports This section displays the spare number of ports for each line card type in the system at the Equipped and Wired levels.. REPORTS 75 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 5. AUXILIARY LOADING Auxiliary Loading is used to combine the engineering of one or more peripheral devices with a main system. Auxiliary Loading is required since each system, peripheral or is a unique quote with a unique As an example, one or more Remote 'Peripheral Equipment quote number. (RPE) quotes can be Aux Loaded onto a main quote (Option or Note that Aux Loading DOES NOT COMBINE QUOTES together, but simply 71). allows the main to be configured with the necessary equipment to support the peripheral/auxiliary systems. Please reference the Engineering/Provisioning Section on RPE and Meridian Mail for specifics on these products. The general procedure of how to use the Auxiliary Load function is as follows: 1) Create, save and run reports for all auxiliary quotes. Although it is necessary to print all reports, the Report function must be initiated for each Auxiliary quote to calculate the required information for inclusion into the Main quote. If desired, Reports for each Auxiliary quote may be printed in the normal manner. 2) Create the Main quote (or Load the main quote if already created). Make s u r e a l l r e q u i r e d s o f t w a r e t o s u p p o r t t h e peripherals has been included on the Main quote. At the service menu, e n t e r for Aux Load (refer to the Introduction/Overview chapter for how to select the Aux Load command from the Service Menu). At this point, the system will prompt you for: PLEASE ENTER NUMBER OR END Enter the quote number of the first Auxiliary quote. Since more than one Auxiliary quote can be combined with the Main quote, the system will continue to prompt for Auxiliary quote numbers until "END" is entered. 3) After "END" has been entered for step 2, the Service Menu will At this point, Reports can be selected for the Main be displayed. site by entering "R". The configuration calculated and printed for this main quote will contain the necessary equipment required to support the peripheral quotes Aux Loaded.. Auxiliary Quote and the Auxiliary Price- Summary Report (11) may Summary be printed to verify the Aux Load quote numbers. The Aux Load function simply allows the main quote to be configured to support auxiliary sites. The list of Aux Load quotes are not saved with the input data of the main quote. Therefore, the process of entering the auxiliary quotes as described in step 2 above should be completed each time the main quote is loaded. The Main quote and any Auxiliary quotes remain separate quotes. If any changes are made to the auxiliary quotes, the Reports option (R) 77 Autoquote Userguide April must be selected for each auxiliary quote changed. By doing this, any configuration changes are calculated and saved for inclusion in the Main the Main quote will have to be re-run Aux Loading the quote. Likewise, auxiliaries with the above steps. 78 Autoquote Userguide 6. APPENDIX 1: April 20, 1990 INPUT FORM Autoquote TELENET: 301-7764 QUOTATION REQUEST FORM Salesman Type of Quote: 1, 2 or 3 Name: End-User City/Labor-Code: End-User Company End-User System Industry Code: Name: Location: Cutover Model/Generic Numbers: 214156 Date (MMDDYY): Release: Code: Report Options: 1 Price Summary 4 Engineering Summary' 6 = Input Listing 9 Equipment List 15 = Discount Summary 3 = = 7 = 11 = 20 = 79 Equipment List Equipment Summary RPE Summary Auxiliary Load Summary Unused Capacity Summary April 20, 1990 SOFTWARE OPTIONS All software option inputs are require one entry. Enter 1 if software is desired; enter 0 to remove software. 2 Multi-Customer CDR Link 12 Automatic Number Identification Remote Peripheral Equipment 26 Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)/Main 27 Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)/Remote 110 Special Application Features 56 57 93 Attendant Overflow Position Attendant Alternative Answer Supervisory Console 68 84 86 105 150 Autovon Automatic Trunk Maintenance Multi-Tenant Line Load Control Directory Number Expansion 102 103 Features Property Management System Interface (103) 37 39 58 59 63 Basic ESN Features Advanced ESN Features Network Automatic Route Selection (NARS) Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) Network Authorization Codes 109 35 77 152 153 Auxiliary Processor Link 45 41 111 121 42 43 50 51 114 122 Basic ACD (ACD-A) Advanced ACD ACD Timed Overflow Enhanced ACD Overflow ACD Reports (ACD-Cl) ACD L o a d M a n a g e m e n t ( A C D - C 2 ) MAX Application ACD Link ACD-D Application ACD L i n k ACD-D/MAX Report Enhancements Network ACD 146 147 117 148 149 120 Primary Rate Access (PRA) ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) Call By Call Service Advanced ISDN Features Inter-Exchange Carrier Network Message Center Meridian Mail Meridian Link Meridian Link Server ISDN/AP Direct Connect 80 Userguide April PHONES, LINES, Inputs (l-35 and 42-43) accept quantity, 2nd entry is "wired" (CCS) per port. Inputs quantity desired and 2nd entry entry; enter quantity desired. 1 2 42 43 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14. 15 16 17 18 19 20 32 35 40 41 172 173 174 175 176 177 TRUNKS 3 entries: 1st entry is "equipped" quantity, and 3rd entry is busy hour traffic and 171 178 accept 2 entries: 1st entry is is CCS per channel. All terminal inputs accept 1 Digital Voice Only Lines Digital Voice/Data Lines ACD Digital Voice Only Lines ACD Digital Voice/Data Lines 2500 Lines 500 Lines Msg Waiting 2500 Lines Waiting 500 Lines OPX 2500 Lines (QPC192) OPX 500 Lines (QPC192) Console - ‘ I ‘ - ‘ ‘ ‘ - - ‘ ‘ - I ‘ - CO Trunks DID Trunks WATS Trunks FX Trunks CCSA Trunks DX Signaling Trunks (QPC71) E&M TIE Trunks Loop TIE Trunks RAN Trunks Paging Trunks Dictation Trunks RLT Remote Trunks Sync/Async CPU Terminations (QPC432) Modem Pool Lines (QPC723 Sync/Async Modem Pool Lines (QPC432 Data (QPC432) Data Lines MCDS Lines MCDS High Speed Lines CIM Lines (QPC432) MCCS Lines RILC Data Lines (QPC723) DTI (QPC720) PRI PRI PRI PRI PRI PRI PRI PRI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Autoquote Userguide 51 52 53 56 57 58 59 69 80 98 100 77 78 63 64 85 86 87 88 89 92 94 95 96 206 207 209 210 212 213 217 218 Unity I Unity II Unity III Quick Touch Harmony Decorator Unity Waiting Rapport/Msg Waiting Companion Unity Wall Displayphone 220 W/Modem Silhouette Venture Headsets Headset Adaptor RILC Cable (Female) RILC Cable (Male) HSDM V.35 Adapter (Male) RS232 v.35 Adapter (Female) RS232 (A0322496) (A0322493) ASIM CIM AIM PC Interface Card (QPCS12) w/Data M3000 T o u c h p h o n e M3000 Touchphone w/Data w/Data M2317 M2317 w/Data 225 226 230 231 232 233 235 236 237 238 M2006 M2006 M2008 M2008 M2008 M2008 241 242 243 245 246 248 249 w/Display w/Data w/Display Data M2216 ACD-1 M2216 ACD-1 w/Data M2216 ACD-2 M2216 ACD-2 w/Data w/Data w/Display w/Data w/Display Data M2616 w/Display M2616 w/Data t42616 w/Display Data 82 April 20, 1990 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 261 262 265 267 269 270 271 Key Module (22) Key Module (44) External Alerter ACD Display Power Supply Board Override Transformer Override Modular Set Power Override Enabler 280 Adjustable Stand for Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module a3 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 M I S C E L L A N E O U S / M E M O R Y DATA These inputs are used to quote miscellaneous hardware and to provide information necessary to calculate memory requirements. There is no common rule regarding the number of entries a Miscellaneous/Memory input accepts. Some of the inputs are prompted depending on previous selections. Changes to prompted entries may be made during the manual input phase. 1 9 10 Power Indicator Battery Backup (Hrs, 2 3 4 Hard Disk Drive Emergency Transfer Units (ETU) Attendant Admin Overlay Supervisory Console Functionality (RPE Only) Pedestal/Top Cap Provisioning Indicator (Option 21 Only) Rectifier/Power Cabinet (Options only) 11 12 14. 15 16 17 18 w/RECTIFIER) Type) - ‘ - I - - ‘ - ‘ - - I - ‘ - CDR Usage Indicator(Outgoing,Incoming,Internal) Code Restriction Routes Speed Call Lists/l Digit Speed Call Lists/2 Digit Speed Call Lists/3 Digit 19 20 23 25 Data Modem Dual NTP Storage Sleeve Average Holding Time (AHT) MCDS Cabinet 27 28 29 30 Number of Entries (No.,Length) Number of Do-Not-Disturb Stations Number of Dial Intercom Members Number of Group Call Groups 31 32 33 34 35 Number of ACD Queues Number of ACD Agent Positions Number of ACD Auto-Terminate Trunk Routes Number of ACD Auto-Terminate Trunks Number of ACD-CRTs 40 41 42 43 44 Number of Customers N u m b e r of C u s t o m e r s e q u i p p i n g B A R S Number of Customers, with Multi-Tenant Total Number of Tenants Total Number of Tenant Stations 46 47 48 49 50 Number of ISDN Signaling Links Drive Provisioning Override (Option 21 Only) Additional P-Data (kwords) Additional U-Data (kwords) Number of Call Party Name Display Entries (No.,Length) (No.,Length) Number of Auth - ‘ - 84 Service Autoquote Userguide 21 37 38 39 April 20, 1990 Additional Ports Additional Ports for Additional Conference Cards for Additional ESDI Ports Userguide April 20, 180 181 182 183 184 190 (Option 71 Only) Additional Network Group Additional Superloops Additional Non-blocking Superloops Additional Network Loops Additional Non-blocking Network Loops Ringing Generator Provisioning Factor 99 100 Software Graduation Level Override (Enter Level) Software Graduation Level Indicator (O=Equipped,l=Wired) Module Placement Indicator (Option 71 Only) Cable Egress Indicator Earthquake Bracing 101 102 103 145 - ' 150 151 152 153 155 1 5 169 171 172 - ' TDR Unit , 6 Meridian Meridian Meridian Meridian Meridian Meridian Mail Calls) Mail Voice Menus Software Mail Mail Access Development Software Mail Networking Ports Secured Messaging Directory Meridian Manager Meridian Manager Messaging PC Software Work Order System Traffic Reporting Kit) Autoquote Userguide BASIC April 20, INFORMATION All inputs accept one entry; enter required number or indicator. prompted entries may be made during the manual input phase. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Number of Trunk Groups Percent Tie Line Traffic that is Percent CCSA Traffic that is 1 if DID Traffic is Amount of DISA Traffic (in CCS) Number of Type 1 Signalling 4W Tie Trunks Number of Templates Number of Autovon Trunks Percent DTI Traffic that is Number of DTI/PRI Tie Lines 87 Changes to Autoquote Userguide N O N B L O C K I N G PHONES, LINES, April 20, 1990 I N P U T S TRUNKS Non-blocking port inputs accept 3 entries: 1st entry is quantity, 2nd entry is "wired" quantity, a n d 3 r d e n t r y i s b u s y h o u r t r a f f i c ( CCS) p e r port. 101 102 142 143 103 104 105 106 107 108 110 - ' - ' - 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 - ' ' - 121 122 124 127 134 131 132 135 , , ' ' - NB NB NB NB NB NB NB NB NB NB NB Digital Voice Only Lines Digital Voice Only Lines Digital Voice Only Lines Digital Voice/Data Lines 2500 Lines 500 Lines Msg Waiting 2500 Lines Waiting 500 Lines OPX 2500 Lines (QPC192) OPX 500 Lines (QPC192) Console NB NB NB NB NB NB NB NB NB NB NB NB CO Trunks DID Trunks WATS Trunks FX T r u n k s CCSA Trunks DX Trunks E&M TIE Trunks Loop TIE Trunks RAN Trunks Paging Trunks Dictation Trunks Remote NB NB NB NB NB NB NB NB NB NB CPU Terminations (QPC432) Modem Pool Lines (QPC723 Modem Pool Lines (QPC432 Data (QPC432) Data Lines MCDS Lines MCDS High Speed Lines CIM Lines (QPC432) MCCS Lines R I L C Data L i n e s ( Q P C 7 2 3 ) 88 Userguide April NON BLOCKING MISCELLANEOUS/MEMORY DATA All non-blocking Miscellaneous/Memory inputs except 123 accept 2 entries: entry is "equipped" quantity and 2nd entry is "wired" quantity. 51 52 53 54 55 57 59 58 62 65 66 68 80 81 82 83 84 123 - ‘ - - ‘ - - ‘ - - ‘ - - - - ‘ - NB NB NB NB NB Digital Line Card Analog Line Card Msg Waiting Line Card OPX Line Card (QPC192) Supervisory Console Line NB NB NB NB Universal Trunk Card E&M Trunk Card DX Signalling Card (QPC71) RLT Card Card NB S y n c / A s y n c D a t a L i n e C a r d Data Line Card NB . NB R I L C ( Q P C 7 2 3 ) NB NB NB NB NB (QPC297) (QPC432) Intelligent PE Modules PE Modules Controller-4 Cards Intelligent PE Ringing Generators PE Ringing Generators NB A v e r a g e Holding 89 Time (AHT) 1st AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE MERIDIAN MAIL northern Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 MERIDIAN MAIL VOICE MESSAGING SYSTEMS AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE CHAPTER. 1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 PRODUCT 1 DESCRIPTION.................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MODELS......................................2 2. INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 INPUT CLASSES.............. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.2 INPUT CODES, DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES . . . . . 3 2.2.1 Software Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Ports/Services Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3 System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 3. SPECIAL NOTES.....................................8 ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING OVERVIEW................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 SOFTWARE . . . . . . . 9 OPTIONS.................................10 3.3 VOICE PROCESSOR PORT 3.3.2 0 AQ Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Traffic Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1.1.1 Voice Processor Ports Traffic Table.......1 2 3 . 3 . 1 . 2 C a l l Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice Messaging Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..14 Voice Menus Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3.3.1.5 Admin Plus Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Override Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 DISK STORAGE 3.4.1 3.4.2 5 AQ Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Override Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE 3.5.1 Meridian 3.5.2 Meridian Meridian 3.5.4 Meridian 3.5.5 Meridian 3.6 a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 3.3.1 3 4 6 5 Mail Modular Option . Mail X-Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mail Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mail Option (Cantilever) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mail O p t i o n ( C e n t e r ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POWER VALUES.....................................1 Amps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 6 . 1 System Load 3.6.2 AC System Power 3.6.3 Heat Dissipation 15 15 Watts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 16 17 ..17 ..17 9 19 19 19 Userguide April 20, 1990 3.7 MERIDIAN 1 EQUIPMENT PROVISIONING................2 0 3.7.1 ROM 0 3.7.2 ESDI Card...........................................2 0 3 . 7 . 3 O t h e r E q u i p m e n t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3.8 MERIDIAN 3.8.1 1 IMPACT................................2 3.8.1.1 Program Store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.1.2 Protected Data/Unprotected Data.............2 3.8.1.3 Protected Data* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.1.4 Unprotected Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.2 Real Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.3 Network Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.4 Meridian Mail Integration Considerations............2 3.8.5 3.8.5.1 Meridian Mail Modular Option................2 3.8.5.2 Meridian Mail X-Cabinet.....................2 Option..................2 3.8.5.3 Meridian Mail 3.8.5.4 Meridian Mail Shelf Option..................2 4. REPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 21 22 22 22 23 23 3 4 4 4 4 25 4.1 Report 1 Price Summary.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...26 4.2 Report 4 Engineering Summary....................2 7 4.2.1 Voice Messaging Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Dedicated Voice Port Services.......................2 8 4.2.2 4 . 2 . 3 V o i c e S t o r a g e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 4.3 Report 6 Input 4.4 Report 9 Equipment 4.5 Report 17 Circuit Switch 4.6 Report 21 Power Summary........................34 5. APPENDIX 1 : Listing..........................30 List........................31 Impact................32 INPUT FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Userguide 1. April INTRODUCTION This chapter of the Meridian 1 Guide provides information on the Meridian Mail X-Cabinet, Meridian Mail Option shelf. Communication Systems Autoquote User quoting the Meridian Mail Modular Option, t h e M e r i d i a n Mail Option tier, the It includes the following sections: Section 1: Section 2: Section 3: Section 4:. Introduction Inputs Engineering/Provisioning Reports The mechanics of using Autoquote are not included in this product Refer to the Introduction and Overview chapter for detailed chapter. i n f o r m a t i o n o n h o w t o u s e t h e A u t o q u o t e System. 1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION M e r i d i a n Mail is a d e d i c a t e d v o i c e s e r v i c e s p e r i p h e r a l d e v i c e w h i c h i s functionally integrated with the Meridian 1. This system can be integrated with the MS, RT, LE, N, NT, XL, The other versions of the X N , X T , a n d all o f t h e M e r i d i a n 1 p r o d u c t s . Option and the Meridian Mail Option product are the Meridian Mail L E , N , N T , X L , X N , a n d XT). (for All of these Meridian Mail versions interface to the Meridian Circuit Switch via an Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI) port and network Option and Shelf Option will support up to 20 loops (QPC414). The ports and 114 hours of voice storage. The Modular Option and X-Cabinet will support up to 48 ports and 240 hours of storage. . . l 1 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1.2 VALID MODELS There are two valid Meridian Mail Autoquote models. Model Generic Code Release Meridian Mail On-line Input Form MM MMF Neither of the models has an associated release; i.e. enter RETURN at the release prompt. The first way Meridian Mail may be ways with the "MM" model. The second way is is to quote the Meridian Mail system as merchandise. to quote it along with a Meridian 1 system using the "AUX LOAD" function. (See the Meridian 1 Product Chapter in this User Guide for LOAD" f u n c t i o n i n c o n j u n c t i o n w i t h more information on using the generic.) the ** All of the versions of the product may be "AUX LOADED" onto a Meridian 1 configuration except the center mount Meridian Mail Option. 2. INPUTS This section covers all inputs associated with the Meridian Mail generic. The following subsections are contained within this section: Input Classes Input Codes, Descriptions, Notes and Default Values As with all Autoquote models, data input consists of responses to prompted entries and manual inputs associated with specific input codes. It is A blank input form is included in the back of this chapter. r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t c o p i e s b e u s e d for p r e p a r i n g q u o t a t i o n s . An on-line input form is also available on the Autoquote system (Generic Code ). 2.1 INPUT CLASSES M e r i d i a n M a i l i n p u t s are o r g a n i z e d i n t o t h r e e i n p u t c l a s s e s : Software Options Ports/Services Usage System Options The Autoquote will prompt for each input class in the order listed above The letter designation is used to make when setting up a new quote. selections for that input class from the Input Menu. 2 Userguide 2.2 INPUT CODES, April 20, 1990 DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES The following pages contain information on each Meridian Mail input: and default values where appropriate. codes, descriptions, 2.2.1 Software Options All Software Option inputs software option is desired; option. 1 Meridian one entry. Enter one (1) if the e n t e r z e r o ( 0 ) t o remove a s o f t w a r e Mail This input is used to provision the base Meridian Mail Software. This input will automatically be selected by if necessary. Autoquote will also select the appropriate Meridian Mail options depending on the number of voice processor ports and hours of storage quoted. 2 Voice Menus Options This will provision Meridian Mail voice menus software. Meridian Mail Networking This input provisions Meridian Mail Networking software. 50 Meridian Mail Admin Plus T h i s i n p u t p r o v i s i o n s M e r i d i a n Mail A d m i n P l u s s o f t w a r e . 51 Access Development Software This input provisions Access Development software. Meridian Mail Admin Plus (input 50) is a prerequisite for this option. 3 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 2.2.2 Ports/Services Usage There is no common rule regarding the number of entries a Ports/Services Usage input may accept. Refer to the input sheet or the information provided below for the number of entries each input accepts.. 1 Voice Messaging Users This input is used to determine the appropriate'number of voice processor ports and hours of storage needed on the system based on usage. It accepts three entries. o Number of Registered Users If no entry is made, this input will default to 1. o Seconds of Usage during the Busy Hour Default is 39 seconds. o Voice Storage in minutes for each user Default is 1.6 minutes. 5 Networking Ports Enter the number of networking ports desired. 10 Voice Menus This input accepts two entries. Number of Menus Maximum allowed is 1000. If no entry is made, this input will be set to the number of separate Voice Menu groups specified via Voice Menu Usage inputs 11-14. o Hours of Storage for all Voice Menus Maximum allowed is 48 hours (24 hours for the and Shelf Options); the default is 1 hour. 4 Autoquote Userguide 11 Voice 12 13 Voice 14 Voice Menu Menu Menu Menu April 20, 1990 Usage Usage Usage Usage These inputs accept two entries, and are used to specify different amounts of traffic for the different menus used in the system. o Number of Voice Menu Calls during the Busy Hour o Average Holding Time per Menu Call in Seconds The default is 25 seconds. Multiple inputs are available so that different menu groups with varying usage characteristics can easily be entered. If no usage is entered and Voice Menu software is selected, 25 input 11 will default to 1 for the first for the second value. 20 Voice Menu Usage Indicator Enter one (1) if the Voice Menu traffic is dedicated, i.e. ports for menu use will not be shared with ports used for Voice Messaging. Making an entry in the Voice Menu Ports override input (Systems Option input 53) also results in dedicated menu ports. Dedicating Voice Menu ports will generally result in more voice processor ports being provisioned on a system because of a loss in traffic carrying efficiency. 21 Networking Usage Indicator Enter one (1) if the Networking traffic is dedicated, i.e. ports for networking use will not be shared with ports used for normal Voice Messaging. Dedicating Networking ports will generally result in more voice processor ports being provisioned on a system because of a loss in traffic carrying efficiency. Admin Plus Usage (Access) -- Meridian Mail Admin Plus (Software input 50) is a p r e r e q u i s i t e for t h i s a p p l i c a t i o n . . T h i s i n p u t a c c e p t s t w o entries. o Number of Admin Plus Access Ports required o Storage in Hours for Admin Plus applications Default is 1 hour. 5 Userguide April 20, 51 Meridian Mail PC Users (Access) * Meridian Mail Admin Plus (Software input 50) is a prerequisite for this application. This input accepts three entries. . o Number of Registered Users o Seconds of Usage during the Busy Hour Default is 80 seconds. o Voice Storage in Minutes for each User Default is 4 minutes. 2.2.3 System Options All inputs accept 1 entry; enter desired number or indicator. The system will default to the Meridian Mail Modular Option (Input 47) when setting up a new quote. 2 3 Distribution Lists Spoken Names Enter the desired number of each. Both of these inputs, along with the number of registered users, will impact voice storage capacity. 5 Modular Option Power This input will default to- zero (0); for AC power. power is required, enter a one (1) for this input. 21 Model Indicator This input will be prompted when running a new quote. Valid entries are: 1 LE (SINGLE CPU) 2 LE (DUAL CPU) 3 N (SINGLE CPU) 4 N (DUAL CPU) 6 7 XN (w/MEMORY ENHANCEMENT) -XN (w/out MEMORY ENHANCEMENT)> 8 10 11 12 ST MS Options 6 If DC Userguide April 20, 1990 This input indicates what type of Circuit Switch the Meridian Mail system will be interfacing. It is used to determine if a ROM card must be included in the Meridian a n d t o c a l c u l a t e C i r c u i t S w i t c h memory a n d r e a l Mail time impact of the Meridian Mail system. 47 Meridian Mail Modular Option Indicator (1 Modular Option) X-Cabinet) 4 8 M e r i d i a n Mail X - C a b i n e t I n d i c a t o r ( 1 Enter a one (1) to indicate the option desired. When s e t t i n g u p a n e w q u o t e , t h e system w i l l d e f a u l t t o t h e Meridian Mail Modular Option. 49 Meridian Mail Option Indicator This input is used to Valid entries are: the other Meridian Mail Options. 1 = Meridian Mail Option (Tier) 2 = Meridian Mail Shelf Option (Cantilever Mount) Meridian Mail Shelf Option (Center Mount) 3 T h e c a n t i l e v e r m o u n t v e r s i o n o f t h e M e r i d i a n Mail O p t i o n i s *used for SL-1 systems utilizing the front/rear entry PE The center mount version of the Meridian Mail cabinets. O p t i o n i s u s e d f o r S L - 1 systems u t i l i z i n g t h e f r o n t e n t r y only PE cabinets. 50 System Purchase Indicator Enter 1 if the Meridian Mail system is not purchased with a Meridian 1 system, i.e. the quote is for a merchandise No entry or an entry of zero (0) will indicate purchase. that this Meridian Mail configuration is part of a system purchase. 51 Voice Messaging Ports (Optional Override) This input allows the user to specify the number of voice processor ports for Voice Messaging; this value overrides r e q u i r e m e n t s b a s e d o n usage i n p u t s . This entry includes shared services (voice menus) when appropriate. The maximum i s 48. . -- 52 Hours of Voice Storage (Optional Override)- This input allows the user to specify the amount of total voice storage; this value overrides requirements calculated based on the usage inputs (Ports/Services Usage Inputs). The maximum is 240. 7 Userguide April 20, Dedicated (Optional Override) 53 Voice Menu Ports This input allows the user to specify the number of voice p r o c e s s o r p o r t s d e d i c a t e d t o a l l M e r i d i a n Mail A d m i n P l u s (Access) applications; this value overrides requirements The maximum 48. based on usage inputs. 54 Plus Access Ports (Optional Override)This input allows the user to specify the number of voice processor ports dedicated to all Meridian Mail Access Gateway applications; this value overrides requirements The maximum is 48. based on the usage inputs. 2.3 SPECIAL NOTES To run a simple Voice Messaging quote where the number of ports and amount of voice storage required are known, the following inputs are all that have to be entered: Software Options: . Meridian Ports/Services Mail Usage: Voice Messaging Users number of registered voice messaging users. x Let the other two values default. System Options: SL-1 Model Indicator Y 51/a appropriate SL-1 indicator (1-12) Voice Messaging Ports (Optional Override) a required ports 52/b Hours of Voice Messaging Storage (Opt.Override) b = required 3. hours of voice storage. ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING This section contains the engineering/provisioning rules used to configure the Meridian Mail Modular Option, Meridian Mail X-Cabinet, and Meridian Mail Shelf Options. A s t h e e n g i n e e r i n g r u l e s f o r t h e s e a r e very s i m i l a r , t h e y w i l l o n l y b e distinguished when different. The following subsections are contained within Autoquote Userguide this April 20, 1990 section. Overview Software Options Voice Processor Port Requirements Disk Storage Requirements Hardware/Software provisioning P o w e r V a l u e s Meridian 1 Equipment Provisioning Meridian 1 Impact 3.1 OVERVIEW A Meridian Mail configuration generated by is based upon engineering rules in effect as of the run date but prior to submission of an order. Although engineering rules may change in the future, will honor the However, p r i c i n g i s quoted functionality for 60 days from the run date. governed solely by the CPE Distributorship Agreement between each distributor and NTI, and the Meridian One Communication Systems Pricing Manual accepts the order. in effect on the date The price quoted by the Autoquote applies only to the items of equipment and software listed in the Equipment List report. This report contains a line entry No item is priced into for each item of equipment and software that is quoted. the quote unless it is detailed in this report. Pricing adjustments are required if there are any additions or deletions to this list: The contents of any quote depends solely on the inputs and the engineering rules. T h e a c t u a l c o n f i g u r a t i o n d e p e n d s on p a r t i c u l a r a p p l i c a t i o n s a n d finalized system engineering which may require manual additions or deletions. In this section, inputs will be used in some of the equations. The input class letter designation and code number will be used to represent specific inputs. The three input classes are: Class Designation Software Options Ports/Services Usage System Options For example: refers to Ports/Services Usage input land indicates the number of registered Voice Messaging users, i n d i c a t e s the number of seconds of usage for each user d u r i n g t h e busy h o u r , a n d indicates the number of minutes of voice storage for each u s e r . Unless otherwise noted, the answers to all calculations used in this subsection are rounded to the next whole number. Autoguote Userguide April 20, 1990 3.2 SOFTWARE OPTIONS The current release of Meridian Mail can support up to 48 voice processor ports and 240 hours of voice storage. The base software provisioned on a quote depends on the base system equipped. The Meridian Mail Modular Option, with the exception-of the 4 port/5 hour The 4 port, 5 hour system package, uses Meridian Base Software package uses the 5 Hour Base Software For the Meridian Mail Option, Meridian Mail Shelf Option, and the Meridian Mail X-Cabinet, use the following to determine which software will provisioned. Hours of Storage <= 5 X-Cabinet Software Meridian Mail Base Software (52601) Meridian Mail Base Software (52600) Meridian Mail Release 5 Software (63051) Optional Meridian Mail software is provisioned only when requested. Meridian Mail Expanded Storage Software will be provisioned if storage requirements determine it's need. The following is a table of basic information about the various Meridian Mail Modular Option packages. Base Hrs Hrs Max Base Base Expansion Ports Hours Exp S/W Exp Assy Hours Package Software Assembly -----------------------------------------------------------------------4-12 4-20 4-20 24-48 5 11 36 45 120 11 24 54 90 26 a4 90 11 54 114 114 240 SW7001 4-20 11 SW7000 SW7000 SW7000 24 26 3.3 VOICE PROCESSOR PORT REQUIREMENTS Meridian Mail is engineered primarily on the number of voice processor ports equipped. Voice processor ports are based on the number of simultaneously active voice messaging users, voice menus, Meridian Mail PC users-and Access Gateway usage. T h i s s e c t i o n d e s c r i b e s h o w t h e required a m o u n t o f v o i c e processor ports are determined and section 3.5, Hardware/Software Provisioning, explains which packages will be provisioned. There are two ways the number of voice processor ports are determined: (1) (2) utilizing Autoquote engineering via the override input. 10 rules or, 54 Userguide April 20, 1990 3.3.1 AQ Engineering Autoquote engineering can be used to determine the number of voice processor p o r t s r e q u i r e d f o r a n y or a l l p a r t s o f a M e r i d i a n M a i l s y s t e m . The Engineering rules make use of Traffic Tables and Call Overhead to determine the number of voice processor ports needed for the system. 3.3.1.1 Traffic Table W h e n t r a f f i c i s t h e usage p a r a m e t e r , a d e l a y t r a f f i c t a b l e i s u s e d t o determine the number of required voice processor ports. The standard grade of service is the probability that the delay-will be greater than o n e - s i x t h t h e average h o l d i n g t i m e i s e q u a l t o 5 % . This delay c h a r a c t e r i s t i c c a n be e x p r e s s e d a s f o l l o w s : P r o b a b i l i t y o f Delay Holding Time/ 6 = 6% 11 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 If the average holding time per voice messaging call is 60 seconds, only one in 20 calls (5%) will be delayed longer than 10 seconds. See the traffic table below for the relationship between traffic and voice processor ports using this grade of service. 3.3.1.1.1 Voice Processor Ports Traffic Table Traffic 0 3 15 33 55 79 104 131 158 186 215 244 274 304 335 366 397 428 459 491 523 555 587 620 652 653 717 750 783 816 849 882 3.3.1.2 2 14 32 54 78 103 130 157 185 214 243 273 303 334 365 396 427 458 490 522 554 586 619 651 684 716 749 782 815 848 881 915 Ports 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27. 28 29 30 31 32 Traffic 916 949 982 1016 1049 1083 1116 1149 1184 1218 1252 1285 1319 1353 1387 1421 1456 1490 1524 1558 1592 1627 1661 1695 1730 1764 1798 1833 1867 1902 1936 1971 948 981 1015 1048 1082 1115 1149 1183 1217 1251 1284 1318 1352 1386 1420 1455 1489 1523 1557 1591 1626 1660 1694 1729 1763 1797 1832 1866 1901 1935 1970 2004 Ports 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 . . -- C a l l Overhead The total traffic or usage of a Meridian Mail system is made of many different elements. T h e c a l l o v e r h e a d e l e m e n t s for V o i c e M e s s a g i n g include: listening to greetings, logging in to retrieve messages, and listening to messages (sometimes repeatedly). 12 Autoguote Userguide April 20, 1990 There are no overhead elements for Voice Menus system m e s s a g e s a n d / o r p r o m p t s i s t h e s e r v i c e . Meridian Mail PC calls will generally be similar therefore, overhead for those calls are assumed Voice Messaging. Specific overhead assumptions Messaging/Meridian Mail PC in Autoguote are: Overhead per message left: Overhead per Messages received per Average number of replays: since listening to the Overhead elements for to Voice Messaging calls, to be the same as for used for Voice 15 seconds 20 seconds 2 5% Adjusted message length must be determined to properly calculate Voice Messaging traffic. The following equations are used to determine adjusted message length using the variable a = average message length: a + 15 seconds overhead 20 overhead/2 messages per = 10 seconds retrieve 1 m e s s a g e : to messages * 5% replay factor + Overhead/message + 10 seconds = length: message + Time to retrieve 1 message + 10) = (a + 15) + + 25 T i m e to leave 1 m e s s a g e : Overhead per message l e f t : Average time to Time to listen Adjusted message Time to leave The above formula allows us to derive the default values for Voice Messaging users based on the following assumptions: Messages per day: Days of storage: Average length of Busy Hour traffic: The following equations are Usage Storage (seconds) (minutes) message: 3 1 32 14 seconds determine the default values: 3 messages x x 32 seconds per message) overhead] x 14 % busy hour traffic + 25 39 seconds of usage 3 messages x 32 seconds per message 1.6 minutes These values are the usage defaults for Voice Messaging users in Autoquote Pl(min)). Overhead and usage assumptions can be modified to fit any application for The resulting busy hour Voice Messaging and/or Meridian Mail PC users. usage and storage requirements can be entered into the Pl(min)), to accurately determine the number of voice processor ports required to support those usage assumptions. 13 Userguide April 20, 3.3.1.3 Voice Messaging Ports The busy hour Voice Messaging t r a f f i c ( i n CCS) is determined by the following equation: x 100 This traffic is taken to Section 3.3.1.1.1, Voice Processor Ports Traffic Table, to determine the number of required voice processor ports for Voice When Voice Menu shared, the sum of the voice Messaging. messaging and voice menus traffic values is taken to the table to determine required voice processor ports. The maximum number of voice processor ports supported on Meridian Mail is 48 for the Modular or X-, and Shelf Options. Cabinet Options, and 20 for the 3.3.1.4 Voice Menus Ports The busy hour Voice Menu traffic (CCS) is determined summing all four of the voice menu usage inputs by the following equation: + x x + + x 100 This traffic is taken to Table 3.1 to determine the number of required Menus; this number cannot-be greater than voice processor ports for 48 for the Modular o r X-Cabinet Options, and 20 for the and Shelf Options. When Voice Menu ports are dedicated, the number yielded by the traffic table is the number of ports provisioned. When Voice Menu usage is shared, the traffic is added to the Voice Messaging traffic (refer to Section 3.3.1.3, Voice Messaging Ports). 3.3.1.5 Admin Plus Ports A d m i m P l u s ( A c c e s s ) usage i s c o m p r i s e d - o f M e r i d i a n M a i l P C a n d o t h e r A d m i n Voice processor ports for other Access applications Plus applications. The sum of the are entered directly by the user via Input Meridian Mail PC ports and the number input for other applications is the total voice processor ports for Admin Plus (Access). Port requirements for Meridian Mail PC users is determined utilizing traffic engineering. T h e b u s y h o u r M e r i d i a n Mail P C t r a f f i c ( C C S ) i s determined by the following equation: x 100 -This traffic is taken to Section 3.3.1.1.1, Voice Processor Ports Traffic T a b l e , t o d e t e r m i n e t h e n u m b e r o f r e q u i r e d v o i c e p r o c e s s o r p o r t s for Meridian Mail PC users; this number cannot be greater than 48 for the and Shelf Options. Modular o r X-Cabinet Options, and 20 for the 14 Userguide April 20, 3.3.2 Override Inputs System Options inputs 51, 53, and 54 are used to override AQ engineering of In any case, a non-zero input will result in that number voice processor ports. of ports being provisioned for a particular service, and Autoquote engineering for that service will be ignored. Voice Messaging Ports' Voice Menu Ports Dedicated Admin Plus Ports The sum of these entries cannot be greater than the maximum number of voice 48 for the and X-Cabinet processor ports supported by the system Options, and 20 for the and Shelf Options. 3.4 DISK STORAGE REQUIREMENTS The amount of disk storage provisioned by Autoquote depends first on the voice storage requirements, and second on the Meridian Mail system packages. Section 3.5, Hardware/Software Provisioning, lists the available packages. There are two ways the disk storage requirements are determined: (1) utilizing Autoquote engineering or, (2) via the override input. . 3.4.1 AQ Engineering Disk storage requirements are expressed in hours of voice storage. The voice storage requirement is the sum of all the storage elements determined using the following equations: Voice Messaging: Voice Menus: Admin Plus (Access): Meridian Mail PC: Pl(#) x Pl(min) x 60 60 If Voice Menu storage requirement is 6 minutes (0.1 hours) or less, there will be no impact to total storage requirements. 3.4.2 Override Input To manually override the number of hours of storage required, System Options input 52 can be used. A non-zero value entered for this input overrides Autoquote engineering; voice storage capacity is 240 hours for the Modular or Cabinet Options, and 114 hours f o r the Option and Shelf Option. 3.5 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE PROVISIONING Once the required amount of disk storage and number of voice processor ports are determined, a Meridian Mail package and other required hardware and software are matched to meet these requirements. The following subsections summarize the hardware and software provisioned for different voice processor port/disk storage r e q u i r e m e n t s . 15 Autoquote Userguide 3.5.1 Meridian Ports Hours Mail April 20, 1990 Modular Option Hardware 155 MB Disk Drive 5 Description Hrs Exp S/W Software 4 Port/5 Hour Modular SW7001 SW7002 11 SW7000 SW7003 24 54 24 Port/45 Hour Modular 36-40 Port Expansion SW7000 SW7003 90 120 600 MB Drive (Large) l-12 36 13-20 84 4 Port/36 Hour Modular 16-20 Port Expansion SW7000 SW7003 54 114 1-36 37-48 24 Hour Modular 36-40 Port Expansion SW7000 SW7003 180 240 300 MB Disk Drive (Standard) 4 Hour Modular 11 13-20 26 16-20 Port Expansion l-36 37-48 3.5.2 Ports 60 120 180 Meridian Hours Mail . X-Cabinet Hardware Description Software Hrs Exp S/W 1-12 13-16 11 26 4 Hour Pkg 12-16 Port Exp Assy (Std) 63050 63051 24 54 l-12 13-16 36 84 4 Port/36 Hour Pkg 12-16 Port Exp Assy (Lg) 63050 63051 54 114 l-20 21-32 26 45 20 Port/26 Hour Pkg 20-24 Port Exp Assy (Std) 63050 63051 54 90 l-20 21-32 84 120 20 Port/84 Hour Pkg 20-24 Port Exp Assy (Lg) 63050 63051 114 180 l-36 37-44 36 Port145 Hour Pkg 36-40 Port Exp Assy (Std) 63050 63051 60 90 120 l-36 37-44 120 180 36 Hour Pkg 36-40 Port Exp Assy (Lg) 63050 63051 180 240 l-48 60 48 Port/60 Hour Pkg 63050 63051 120 l-48 180 48 Port/l80 Hour Pkg 63050 63051 2 4 0 16 Autoquote 3.5.3 Meridian Mail Ports Hours April 20, 1990 Option 5 4 Port/5 Hrs Exp S/w Software Description Hardware Hour Pkg Hour Pkg Exp Assy 52601 52602 11 52600 52603 24 54 52600 52603 54 114 13-20 11 26 4 16-20 l-12 13-20 36 84 4 Port/36 Hour Pkg 16-20 Port Exp Assy l-20 26 16 Port/26 Hour Pkg 52600 52603 54 84 16 Port/84 Hour Pkg 52600 52603 114 Port (Std) (Lg) Meridian Mail Option (Cantilever) Ports Hours Description Hardware Port/5 Hour l-12 5 4 l-12 13-20 11 26 4 Pkg 52600 52602 11 52600 52603 24 54 l-12 36 84 4 Port/36 Hour Pkg 1 6 - 2 0 P o r t Exp Assy (Lg) 52600 52603 54 114 'l-20 26 16 Port/26 Pkg 52600 52603 54 l-20 84 16 Port/84 Pkg 52600 52603 114 Hour Pkg Port E xAps s y ( S t d ) 16-20 Hrs Exp S/W Software Hour Hour 3.5.5 Meridian Mail Option (Center) Ports Hours Description Hardware l-12 5 4 Port/5 l-12 13-20 11 26 4 16-20 l-12 13-20 36 84 4 l-20 26 l-20 84 Pkg 52600 52602 11 Hour Pkg P o r t Exp Assy (Std) 52600 . 52603 24 54 Port/36 Hour Pkg 16-20 Port Exp Assy (Lg) 52600 52603 54 114 Port/26 Hour Pkg 52600 52603 54 52600 52603 114 16 Hour Hrs Exp S/W Software Port/84 Hour 17 Pkg -- Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 telemanuals.com Userguide April 20, 1990 3.6 POWER VALUES T h e M e r i d i a n M a i l p o w e r v a l u e s u s e d t o e n g i n e e r p o w e r , a i r conditioning, rectifier and battery requirements are determined as shown in the following sections. 3.6.1 System Load Amps The draw in amperage on the Meridian 1 by the different Meridian Mail systems are given in the following table: Option Modular Option AC DC Modular Option X-Cabinet (1 node) X-Cabinet (2 node) X-Cabinet (4 node) X-Cabinet (5 node) X-Cabinet (1 node) X-Cabinet (2 node) X-Cabinet (4 node) node) X-Cabinet Option Amps 7.7 per module 1.7 p e r module 1.2 2.0 3.8 5.0 8.0 15.0 . 30.0 37.5 5.0 AC AC AC AC DC DC DC DC The Meridian Mail Shelf Options draw the same number of Amps as two PE shelves. Please see the Meridian 1 Product Chapter for exact numbers. 3 . 6 . 2 A C System P o w e r Watts T h e a m o u n t o f p o w e r i n W a t t s b y t h e M e r i d i a n Mail o p t i o n s a r e g i v e n i n the table below: Option Modular Option (AC/DC) X-Cabinet (1 node) AC AC X-Cabinet (2 node) AC X-Cabinet (4 node) AC X-Cabinet (5 node) DC X-Cabinet (1 node) X-Cabinet (2 node) DC DC X-Cabinet (4 node) X-Cabinet (5 node) DC Option Watts 400 per module 276 460 874 416 780 1560 1950 500 -- The Meridian Mail Shelf Options require two PE shelf positions. The number of Watts for the supporting Circuit Switch Equipment (CSE) is determined by the number of modules/cabinets equipped. Please see the Meridian 1 product chapter f o r exact calculations. 3.6.3 Heat Dissipation BTU Heat dissipation is a function of AC power. used to determine the air-conditioning load. 19 Heat dissipation may be Userguide April 20, 1990 Heat dissipation (BTU/hr) is calculated as 3.415 x 'One ton of air System P o w e r ( w a t t s ) conditioning 12,000 sq. follows: ft. of is required equipment for room every: area. Other factors to consider: Lights Other equipment People 3.7 MERIDIAN 1 EQUIPMENT PROVISIONING Interfacing Meridian Mail to the Meridian 1 requires the following supporting hardware: 3.7.1 ROM Card In the following system types, an enhanced ROM card must be added t o s u p p o r t t h e C o m m a n d a n d Status L i n k ( C S L ) : SL-1 Type ROM Card --------------------------------------------QPC662 QPC573 QPC571 (w/out memory enhancement) (w/memory enhancement) A n y system t h a t d o e s n o t a p p e a r i n t h e l i s t d o e s n o t r e q u i r e a R O M card. The proper card type and number are provisioned based on System Options input 21 (Model Indicator). 3.7.2 ESDI Card One Enhanced (ESDI) port is required for each Meridian Mail system interfacing to the Meridian 1. T h e M e r i d i a n Mail M o d u l a r ESDI card. This card allows the Meridian Option uses the the Command 1 C P U a p a t h t o t a l k t o t h e M e r i d i a n Mail s y s t e m and Status Link. T h e E S D I c a r d w i l l b e p r o v i s i o n e d b y w a y of t h e Meridian Mail base hardware packages. The ESDI card can be housed in any slot in the Meridian 1 that is capable of supporting a normal Serial Data Interface (SDI) card. 20 . Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 3.7.3 Other Equipment Two c o m p o n e n t s a r e r e q u i r e d w h e n p r o v i s i o n i n g t h e M e r i d i a n M a i l Shelf Option in a PE cabinet: a Power Distribution Unit and a The actual equipment provisioned depends on type Cooling Unit. mount used, cantilever versus center mount. Cantilever: QBL21 Power Distribution Unit Cooling Unit Power Distribution Unit Cooling Unit Center: These items are not required if the Meridian Mail Shelf Option is to be housed in the QCA55 SL-1 XT CE Cabinet in the place of a network group shelf. Refer to the Meridian 1 Product Chapter for more information on CE shelf and PE shelf housing within and XT systems. 3.8 MERIDIAN 1 IMPACT S e v e r a l areas o f i m p a c t t o t h e c i r c u i t s w i t c h m u s t b e a d d r e s s e d : m e m o r y , real time, network cards, ports, and traffic. 3.8.1 Memory Meridian 1 memory is divided into three segments: Program Store, Protected Data (PDATA) and Unprotected Data (UDATA). Program Store Impact is due to the required software: Basic Message Center (SWOOOOA) Auxiliary Processor Link Link Basic ACD Features Meridian Mail Link 3.8.1.2 Protected Data/Unprotected Data The ACD configuration used in Meridian Mail impacts both Protected D a t a a n d U n p r o t e c t e d D a t a i n t h e same m a n n e r - a s e x i s t i n g M e r i d i a n 1 features: Voice Processor Ports impacts ACD Agent memory M e r i d i a n M a i l c o n f i g u r a t i o n i m p a c t s A C D Q u e u e memory 21 Autoguote Userguide 3.8.1.3 Protected April 20, 1990 Data: Additional impact for Meridian Mail specific Voice Processor Port (TN) ESDI Port Command and Status Link/Other 3.8.1.4 Unprotected items is g i v e n la.50 23.00 263.00 below: words words words Data: Additional impact for Meridian Mail specific in words of memory: items is g i v e n 15.25 Voice Processor Port (TN) Command and Status Link 367.00 below words words 3.8.2 Real Time T h e n u m b e r o f c a l l s t o M e r i d i a n Mail p e r h o u r i s u s e d t o c a l c u l a t e r e a l time impact. The total calls per hour is the sum of the Voice Menu calls and the non-Menu Meridian Mail calls. The number of Voice Menu calls is determined using input usage in the following equation: + + + The number of non-Menu calls per hour is the smaller of the following values: Number o f n o n - M e n u p o r t s x 6 0 o r , Number of registered Voice Messaging users + 2 x ( N u m b e r o f M e r i d i a n Mail P C U s e r s ) The first equation assumes that one call per non-Menu port per minute during the busy hour is used, and the second assumes that one call per r e g i s t e r e d V o i c e M e s s a g i n g user a n d t w o c a l l s p e r r e g i s t e r e d M e r i d i a n Mail PC user during the busy hour. Using the smaller number ensures the impact of small Meridian Mail systems is not overestimated. The actual number of CPU seconds used for Meridian Mail is calculated as follows: Number of Meridian where, ART Mail Calls p e r Hour x Average Real Time per VM ART Call. Average Real Time is typically expressed in milliseconds d e p e n d s o n t h e M e r i d i a n 1 system t y p e . 22 -- ART Userguide April 20, ART (ms) System LE ST/N 21 XL XN 1682 1401 1401 364 340 221 221 If the total real time impact of Meridian Mail exceeds 1050 seconds an error message display and (50% of 2100 CPU seconds capacity), the quotation process will stop. 3.8.3 Network Cards Meridian Mail interfaces to the Meridian 1 switching matrix directly through a network loop (QPC414). The number of network loops needed to support the Meridian Mail system depends on the number of Meridian mail nodes. Each node can house up to 12 voice processor ports. A single dedicated network loop can support up to 2 Meridian Mail nodes, and two dedicated network loops can support up to 5 nodes. The Meridian Mail Modular Option packages contain network cards; 1 for each of the 4 port base packages and 2 for the 24 port base packages. Refer to the Meridian 1 Product Chapter for more information on Common Equipment cards and network loops. 3.8.4 Traffic Autoquote assumes 28 CCS will be added to the total system busy hour traffic for each voice processor port provisioned. F o r m o s t systems, this traffic will be added to total Grade of Service traffic. For M e r i d i a n 1 systems p r o v i s i o n e d a s t o t a l l y n o n - b l o c k i n g , t h e n u m b e r o f voice processor ports will be added to the total non-blocking ports. In either case, network provisioning may or may not be impacted by the Meridian Mail requirements depending on the size of the Meridian Mail system and the amount of traffic on the switch. R e f e r t o t h e M e r i d i a n 1 P r o d u c t C h a p t e r f o r more i n f u r m a t i o n o n n e t w o r k loops and traffic engineering. 3.8.5 Meridian Mail I n t e g r a t i o n Considerations Differences of integration with the Meridian 1 between the various M e r i d i a n M a i l O p t i o n s a r e c o v e r e d in t h e f o l l o w i n g s u b s e c t i o n s . 23 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 3.8.5.1 Meridian Mail Modular Option The Meridian Mail Modular Option resembles any other Meridian 1 module. The number of modules provisioned depends on the size of the system. The following table summarizes the module provisioning: Ports 13-20 21-36 37-48 Modules 1 2 4 5 The Meridian Mail Modular Option requires at least one pedestal and top cap, and side covers if it is to be used as a stand alone system-.‘ When integrated with a Meridian 1 System 21, 61, or 71, the AUX LOAD function will determine the appropriate number of pedestals, top caps, side covers, and spacer kits necessary. Please refer to the Meridian 1 Product Chapter in this User Guide for more information on using the "AUX LOAD" f u n c t i o n i n c o n j u n c t i o n w i t h t h e " M M " g e n e r i c . 3.8.5.2 Meridian Mail X-Cabinet The Meridian Mail X-Cabinet is a stand-alone cabinet includes all necessary power equipment to function. that that grows The 36 port packages contain an expansion assembly the system to asecond tier. The 48 port packages include two expansion that grow the system into three total assemblies tiers. 3.8.5.3 Meridian Mail Option The Meridian Mail Option tier includes a full tier with one half dedicated to the Meridian Mail portion and the other half as a Peripheral Equipment (PE) shelf backplane. The PE shelf backplane can power card and a QPC659 Dual Loop Buffer card be equipped with a Option tier can be to make it a functional PE shelf. The The provisioned as any tier on any cabinet except for the first tier. Option tier does not have a base which allows it to sit directly on the floor; it requires a base tier beneath it. 3.8.5.4 Meridian Mail Shelf Option -- The Meridian Mail Option shelf requires cooling and power. When provisioned in a PE cabinet, a power distribution unit and cooling unit With these m u s t b e p r o v i d e d ( r e f e r t o Section 3 . 7 . 3 , O t h e r E q u i p m e n t ) . t w o u n i t s , t h e M e r i d i a n Mail O p t i o n r e q u i r e s t w o v e r t i c a l P E s h e l f positions. T h e M e r i d i a n M a i l O p t i o n may b e h o u s e d i n a n network shelf position if less than six network shelves are housed in the CE cabinet. 24 Autoquote Ueerguide April 20, 1990 4. REPORTS T h i s s e c t i o n p r o v i d e s i n f o r m a t i o n o n m o s t r e p o r t s available w i t h t h e An explanation and example of each Meridian Mail quotation model. report is included. 9 17 21 Price Summary Engineering Summary Input Listing Equipment List Circuit Switch Impact Power Summary A sample of report 15 Discount Summary will not appear in the User Guide; t h i s r e p o r t s u b t o t a l s p r i c e b y d i s c o u n t c a t e g o r i e s . Only authorized users have access to any discounting information. T h e h e a d e r r e p o r t ( R e p o r t 9 9 9 9 ) w i l l p r i n t o u t automatically w h e n reports are requested; this report may also be requested-like any other report. Within each subsection there are explanations of the contents of the report being discussed. The mechanics of using Autoquote are not included in this product chapter. Refer to the Introduction and Overview chapter for detailed information on how to use the Autoquote system. 25 Autoguote Userguide 4.1 Report 1 April 20, 1990 Price Summary T h i s r e p o r t s u b t o t a l s Commercial L i s t P r i c e ( C L P ) b y p r o d u c t g r o u p . C L P s u b t o t a l s are f o r q u o t e d items l i s t e d i n R e p o r t 9 E q u i p m e n t L i s t . SUMMARY PRICE --- QUOTE: 00000002 SL-1 EQUIPMENT MERIDIAN MAIL HARDWARE MERIDIAN MAIL SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION 5785.00 108800.00 9500.00 459.00 $ FOR USE ONLY BY PERSONNEL AUTHORIZED BY NTI. 26 124544.00 NOT FOR PUBLIC DISCLOSURE. Autoquote Userguide 4.2 Report 4 April 20, 1990 Engineering Summary This report is divided into three parts: Voice Messaging Usage, Dedicated Voice Port Services, and Voice Storage each part will be discussed separately. 4.2.1 Voice Messaging Usage REGISTERED USERS refers to the number of individuals which have access to the voice mail system. INPUT TRAFFIC (CCS) refers to the total Voice Messaging traffic on the system based on inputs. REQUIRED PORTS refers to the number of Voice Messaging ports required to (This may include Menu traffic if support the system based on inputs. the user indicates shared usage.) DESIRED VU PORTS PROVISIONED is the number of Voice Messaging ports provisioned based on the override input (Systems Option input 51). 27 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 4.2.2 Dedicated Voice Port Services VOICE MENUS is the total number of Voice Menus supported on the system. (These ports will appear under Voice Messaging Usage, above, if service is shared.) V O I C E M E N U T R A F F I C ( C C S ) i s t h e t o t a l m e n u t r a f f i c o n t h e system b a s e d on inputs. (This line will appear under Voice Messaging Usage if service is shared.) REQUIRED PORTS is the number of dedicated voice processor ports required t o s u p p o r t t h e system t r a f f i c . DESIRED VOICE MENU PORTS PROVISIONED is the number Of menu voice processor ports provisioned based on the override input (Systems Option input 53). MERIDIAN MAIL PC TRAFFIC (CCS) is the Meridian Mail PC voice m e s s a g i n g t r a f f i c o f f e r e d t o t h e system b a s e d o n i n p u t s . REQUIRED MERIDIAN RAIL PC PORTS is the number of voice processor ports required to support Meridian Mail PC traffic based on inputs. OTHER ACCESS GATEWAY PORTS is the number of voice processor ports required to support other Access Gateway applications. A C C E S S G A T E W A Y P O R T S P R OV I S I O N E D i s t h e n u m b e r o f v o i c e processor ports provisioned based on the override input. (System Options Input 54). DESIRED T O T A L R E Q U I R E D ACCESS G A T E W A Y P O R T S i s t h e n u m b e r o f v o i c e p r o c e s s o r ports required to support all Access Gateway applications based on inputs. 4.2.3 Voice Storage VOICE MESSAGING, VOICE STORAGE, USERS STORAGE and ACCESS APPLICATIONS STORAGE are all the individual requirements for the associated application. TOTAL REQUIRED is the total voice storage requirements based on inputs). o f s t o r a g e p r o v i s i -o- n e d D E S I R E D V O I C E STORAGE i s t h e n u m b e r of based on the override input (Systems Option input 52). 28 Userguide R4 - - - E N G I N E E R I N G S U M M A R Y - - - April 20, 1990 QUOTE: * TOTAL VOICE PROCESSOR PORTS USED VOICE MESSAGING USAGE REGISTERED USERS INPUT VM'TRAFFIC (CCS) REQUIRED PORTS PORTS PROVISIONED 00000002 20 137 8 10 DEDICATED VOICE PORT SERVICES VOICE MENUS VOICE MENU TRAFFIC (CCS) REQUIRED PORTS DESIRED VOICE MENU PORTS PROVISIONED 4 13 2 2 NETWORKING PORTS 2 OTHER ACCESS GATEWAY PORTS DESIRED ACCESS GATEWAY PORTS 6 VOICE STORAGE VOICE MESSAGING VOICE MENU STORAGE ACCESS APPLICATIONS STORAGE TOTAL REQUIRED (HOURS) DESIRED VOICE STORAGE HOURS ---- 10 10 1 21 29 Userguide 4.3 Report 6 Input April 20, 1990 Listing This report lists all inputs used to engineer and provision the Mail system quoted. Default values and input adjustments will Actual "saved" inputs can be viewed reflected in this report. loading an existing quote. The inputs will be stored'as shown report if the quote is "saved" after running reports. R6 --- LISTING --- QUOTE: Meridian be when on this 00000002 SOFTWARE OPTIONS 001 1.0 MERIDIAN MAIL . 002 003 004 050 051 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 VOICE MENUS OPTION MERIDIAN MAIL NETWORKING SECURED MESSAGING MERIDIAN MAIL ADMIN PLUS SOFTWARE ACCESS DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE PORTS/SERVICES USAGE 001 350.0 39.0 1.6 005 2.0 010 4.0 10.0 011 5.0 25.0 012 10.0 25.0 013 15.0 25.0 014 20.0 25.0 020 1.0 021 1.0 050 5.0 1.0 VOICE NETWORKING PORTS VOICE MENUS (No.,Hours) VOICE MENU USAGE VOICE MENU USAGE VOICE MENU USAGE VOICE MENU USAGE VOICE MENU USAGE INDICATOR NETWORKING USAGE INDICATOR CONSOLE USAGE (ACCESS) SYSTEM OPTIONS 002 1.0 005 1.0 021 12.0 047 1.0 051 10.0 052 65.0 053 2.0 054 6.0 DISTRIBUTION LISTS POWER OPTION (O=AC, MODEL INDICATOR MERIDIAN MAIL MODULAR OPTION INDICATOR VOICE MESSAGING PORTS (OPTIONAL OVERRIDE) HOURS VOICE STORAGE (OPTIONAL OVERRIDE) VOICE MENU PORTS DEDICATED (OPT. OVERRIDE) (OPTIONAL OVERRIDE) ADMIN PLUS ACCESS 30 Autoquote Userguide 4.4 Report 9 April 20, Equipment This report lists all items which are included in the price quoted. If a hardware or software item is not listed in this report, it is not included in the price. Package and assembly codes are used wherever possible. For each of these items, the quantity, equipment code, description, type code, unit Commercial List Price (CLP) and extended CLP are displayed. In addition, the leftmost field of the report displays if the item in question is in a controlled release status. An asterisk (*) indicates that the item is on a controlled release basis. The number in the column is the Autoquote equipment type code. It is used to designate logical groupings of hardware and software. The prices in the following report are not actual prices but are put in as an example, refer to the Meridian 1 Communications Systems Pricing Manual for pricing information. --- EQUIPMENT LIST --- QUOTE: 00000002 UNIT DED QNTY 1 1 4 * 1 * 1 3 * 1 1 17 1 1 1 * 1 EQP CODE PO699724 PO706431 SW7005 60010 60013 PO702575 PO702577 DESCRIPTION PEDESTAL ASSEMBLY DC TOP CAP DC MODULE SIDE COVER M-MAIL MOD OPT 4PT 36HR DC M - M A I L M O D 1 2 T O 1 6 E X P ( L R G ) DC NETWORK VOICE PROCESSOR MERIDIAN MAIL OPTION NETWORK PKG MOD OPT BASE SW M-MAIL USER GUIDES (15) MOD OPT VOICE MENUS NETWORKING SECURED MESSAGING SW ADMINPLUS SW ACCESS DEVELOPMENT SW TP 101 101 H49 D14 D14 5910.00 595.00 105.00 35800.00 39000.00 11000.00 7000.00 3100.00 32.00 2600.00 2300.00 2200.00 1600.00 620.00 * INDICATES CONTROL RELEASE; PROPER AUTHORIZATION REQUIRED FOR THESE ITEMS. F O R U S E O N L Y B Y P E R S O N N E L A U T H O R I Z E D B Y N T I . N O T F O R P U B- -L I C D I S C L O S U R E . 31 EXTEN 595.00 420.00 35800.00 39000.00 33000.00 7000.00 3100.00 544.00 2600.00 2300.00 2200.00 1600.00 620.00 Autoquote Userguide 4.5 Report 17 Circuit Switch April Impact This report details the items which will be affected on the Meridian 1 circuit switch supporting the Meridian Mail system. Memory i s t h e f i r s t a r e a a d d r e s s e d i n t h e r e p o r t . The U-data, P-data, and Program Store values listed reflect the addition of all required If the software options plus the ACD configuration and TN requirements. existing Meridian 1 system is already equipped with one or more of these f e a t u r e s , t h e m e m o r y r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r a d d i n g M e r i d i a n Mail will be less. T h e required s o f t w a r e o p t i o n s t o s u p p o r t M e r i d i a n M a i l a r e l i s t e d n e x t . Note that Auxiliary Processor Link software is applicable to Release 10 or later. REAL TIME capacity is also affected by the Meridian Mail integration. The impact is listed as TOTAL SECONDS and PERCENT of capacity; the parameters used to calculate these values are also included. OTHER INFORMATION l i s t s t h e n u m b e r o f S e r i a l D a t a I n t e r f a c e ( S D I ) s l o t s required to house the ESDI card. VOICE MESSAGING TRAFFIC (CCS) i s t o t a l t r a f f i c a d d e d t o t h e M e r i d i a n 1 b e c a u s e o f M e r i d i a n M a i l system. 32 Userguide CIRCUIT SWITCH IMPACT --MEMORY UNPROTECTED DATA PROTECTED DATA PROGRAM STORE April 20, 1990 QUOTE: 00000002 2555 1128 33,144 ACD AGENTS ACD QUEUES 20 4 SOFTWARE REQUIRED OPTIONS: MERIDIAN BASE SOFTWARE (SWOOOOA) AUXILIARY PROCESSOR LINK IVMS LINK BASIC ACD FEATURES MERIDIAN MAIL LINK NOTE: 109 35 AUXILIARY PROCESSOR LINK IS ONLY REQUIRED FOR RELEASE 10 OR LATER. REAL TIME TOTAL SECONDS PERCENT (OF 2100 SEC) NUMBER OF VM CALLS REAL TIME PER VM CALL (ms) 133 7 600 121 OTHER INFORMATION SLOTS (for ESDI) VOICE MESSAGING TRAFFIC 1 560 (CCS) Autoquote Userguide 4.6 Report 21 April 20, 1990 Power Summary This report contains information concerning several aspects of power. (AMPS) is the current load of the system. (WATTS) i s t h e t o t a l u t i l i t y p o w e r r e q u i r e d f o r t h e s y s t e m . HEAT OUTPUT is the heat output of the system. AC AC QUOTE: POWER SUMMARY --CURRENT 00000002 16.0 (AMPS) POWER (WATTS) HEAT OUTPUT 800 2732 34 . Userguide 5. APPENDIX 1: MERIDIAN MAIL April 1990 INPUT FORM QUOTATION REQUEST SALESMAN: TYPE QUOTE: INDUSTRY CODE: END-USER NAME: END-USER LOC: CUTOVER DATE: MODEL/GENERIC SOFTWARE CODE: SOFTWARE RELEASE: OPTIONS MERIDIAN MAIL VOICE MENUS OPTION MERIDIAN MAIL NETWORKING SECURED MESSAGING GUEST VOICE MESSAGING MERIDIAN MAIL ADMINPLUS SOFTWARE ACCESS DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE PORTS/SERVICES USAGE VOICE MESSAGING USERS NETWORKING PORTS VOICE MENUS (No.,Hours) VOICE MENU USAGE VOICE MENU USAGE VOICE MENU USAGE VOICE MENU USAGE VOICE MENU USAGE INDICATOR NETWORKING USAGE INDICATOR CONSOLE USAGE (ACCESS) MERIDIAN MAIL PC USERS (ACCESS) OPTIONS SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION LISTS SPOKEN NAMES MERIDIAN MAIL MODULAR OPTION POWER ( O = A C , MODEL MERIDIAN MAIL MODULAR OPTION 3 5 1 2 3 Userguide April 20, MERIDIAN MAIL X INDICATOR MAIL X) OPTION INDICATOR SYSTEM PURCHASE INDICATOR N U M B E R OF V O I C E M E S S A G I N G P O R T S (OPTIONAL OVERRIDE) . HOURS VOICE STORAGE (OPTIONAL OVERRIDE) (OPTIONAL OVERRIDE) DEDICATED VOICE MENU PORTS CONSOLE ACCESS PORTS (OPTIONAL OVERRIDE) 36 Meridian 1 AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 MERIDIAN ACD-MAX AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE CHAPTER. 1. 2. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . * . . . - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 PRODUCT 1.2 VALID 1 DESCRIPTION......................... . . . . . . 1 MODELS........................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INPUT 3 CLASSES.....................................3 2.2 INPUT CODES, DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES . . . . . 3 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 3. 3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING 4 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3.1 3.2 ACD-MAX SYSTEMS...................................7 3.3 ACD-MAX SOFTWARE.............................. . . . . 8 3.4 ACD-MAX HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8 a 3.4.1 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 Printers.....................................- ...... ................... ..a 3.4.3 Terminal Concentrators/FM 3.4.3.1 Single Tower Configuration: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9 ...9 3.4.3.2 Dual Tower Configuration: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.4 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 10 3.4.5 Tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 CIRCUIT 3.5.1 3.5.2 SWITCH REQUIREMENTS......................1 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial Interface (SDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 : R E P O R T S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -. - . . . . . . . . . . Price 4.1 Report 1 4.2 Report 6 4.3 Report 9 5. APPENDIX 1: Input 13 Summary.........................13 Listing.........................14 Equipment INPUT FORM . 0 10 List........................15 . . * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Autoquote U s e r g u i d e April 20, 1990 Userguide 1. April 20, 1990 INTRODUCTION This chapter of the Meridian 1 Communication Systems Autoquote User Guide provides information on quoting the ACD-MAX. It includes the following sections: Section Section Section Section 1: 2: 3: 4: Introduction Inputs Engineering/Provisioning Reports The mechanics of using Autoquote are not included in this product Refer to the Introduction and Overview chapter for detailed chapter. information on how to use the Autoquote System. 1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ACD-MAX is a PC based stand alone Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) system providing call report capabilities to the smaller user who requires sophisticated reporting. ACD-MAX provides real time displays with exception highlighting, ad hoc reports and scheduled historical reports. 1.2 VALID MODELS There are two valid Meridian Mail Autoquote models. Model Generic Code Release ACD-MAX On-line Input Form MAX MAXF Neither of the models has an associated release; i.e. enter RETURN at the release prompt. 1 Userguide April 20, 1990 Autoguote Userguide April 20, 1990 INPUTS 2. This section covers all inputs associated with the ACD-MAX generic. following subsections are contained wi-thin this section: Input Input Classes Codes, Descriptions, The And Default Values 2.1 INPUT CLASSES inputs are organized into the three following input classes: ACD-MAX Configuration ACD-MAX Software ACD-MAX Hardware The letter designation is used to select the input class from the input menu. 2.2 INPUT CODES, DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES The following section contains information on each ACD-MAX input. Descriptions and defaults are included where appropriate. 2.2.1 Configuration T h e f o l l o w i n g i n p u t s are u s e d t o d e t e r m i n e t h e a p p r o p r i a t e A C D - M A X system and to determine traffic and memory values. 1 Number of ACD Agents Enter the number agent positions on the ACD-MAX; the maximum is 500 agents. . 2 Number of Supervisory Terminals Enter the total number of Supervisory Terminals desired on the system. These will include the Terminals and One any PC's that will be used as Color-Graphics Terminals. terminal is required, and a maximum of 32 terminals is supported. 3 N u m b e r o f ACD Q u e u e s Enter the Number of ACD Queues to be supported on the system. A maximum of 30 queues.can be supported. Userguide April 20, 1990 4 C a l l s per Hour Enter the maximum number of calls per hour to be handled by the ACD-MAX system. A maximum of 10000 calls per hour are (3000 on a Single Tower). supported on a Dual Tower system Dual Tower Required Enter a one (1) to ignore Autoquote calculations on system A one (1) will automatically provision a dual tower sizing. system. 2.2.2 Software Software inputs are used to provision optional software that can be used t o e n h a n c e t h e ACD-MAX s y s t e m . 1 Configuration Control Enter a one (1) if Configuration Control software is Enter a zero (0) to remove the software. desired. 2 Custom Calculator Enter a one (1) if Custom Calculator software is desired. Enter a zero (0) to remove the software. 3 Networked ACD Enter a one (1) if Networked ACD software is desired. a zero (0) to remove the software. Enter 2.2.3 Hardware The following inputs are used to provision peripheral hardware for the ACD-MAX system. . 1 Amber Terminal E n t e r t h e n u m b e r of A m b e r T e r m i n a l s d e s i r e d . 2 HP -- Printer Enter the number of 3 HP Printers desired. Printer Enter the number of 4 DeskJet Printers desired. Printer E n t e r t h e number o f D e s k J e t P r i n t e r s d e s i r e d . 4 telemanuals.com Ueerguide 5 BP LaserJet April 20, 1990 Printer Enter the number of LaserJet Printers desired. 6 Supervisor Color Graphic Cables Enter the number of Color Graphic Terminals will be used on the system. This input to provision cables for the Color Graphic 7 Additional 3M Backup Tapes Enter the number of additional tapes desired for backup of t h e ACD-MAX s y s t e m . Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 Autoguote Userguide 3. April 20, 1990 ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING This section contains information about the engineering and provisioning following subsections rules used to configure the ACD-MAX system. are contained within this section: Overview ACD-MAX Systems ACD-MAX Software ACD-MAX Hardware Circuit Switch Requirements 3.1 OVERVIEW An ACD-MAX system consists of a Base system and additional peripheral The equipment provisioned is determined by the user inputs hardware. The Autoguote will provision the minimum system and Autoquote defaults. possible base on user inputs. 3.2 ACD-MAX SYSTEMS There are two packages available of ACD-MAX; the Single Tower and Dual Tower versions. Some important information about the two systems is given below: System Single Tower Dual Tower Maximum Terminals Maximum Printers 8 2 32 8 For the Single Tower configuration, all of the peripheral equipment will One reside on the tower via the 8 port terminal concentrator. additional terminal concentrator may be added to a Single Tower system. In the Dual Tower configuration, all printers and the high speed link cable will reside on the first tower. All terminals and the optional configuration control cable will reside on the second tower. Userguide April 20, 1990 3.3 ACD-MAX SOFTWARE The appropriate base software will be provisioned with the ACD-MAX system. Any optional software will only be provisioned if asked for The following table summarizes the through the software inputs. software options by system: Software Single Tower System Dual Tower System Base Software Configuration Control Custom Calculator Networked ACD Note: Configuration Control software requires two additional cables, and One PO700816 one port on the Terminal Concentrator to function. with Configuration Control Cable, and one A0365365 Printer Cable Modem Control). 3.4 ACD-MAX HARDWARE In addition to the basic system, additional peripheral equipment may be The discussion of additional hardware will be added to the system. Terminals, Printers, Terminal discussed in the following sections: Concentrators, Cables, and Tapes. 3.4.1 Terminals Up to 32 supervisory terminals may be supported on the Dual Tower These may be the Amber system, 8 on the Terminals provisioned through Hardware Input 1, or they may be Color Graphic Terminals (PC's). The Color Graphic PC's must be purchased separately, but require a Color Graphics Cable provisioned through Hardware Input 6. The total number of terminals is entered in Configuration Input 1. 3.4.2 Printers Any of printers may be added to the ACD-MAX as long as it does not exceed a total of 8 supported by the Dual Tower system (2 on the Single Tower). The printers are provisioned via Hardware Inputs 2 through 5. Each printer also requires a printer cable that will be Cables provisioning is covered later in provisioned with that printer. this section. 3.4.3 Terminal The 8 port Terminal Concentrator (TC) is used to connect all peripheral 8 Autoquote Userguide April 20, devices to the system. The Single Tower provides one, and the Dual Tower provides two with the system, one for each tower. All Terminal Concentrators provisioned will have Modem Control functionality. (A0368534) The following equations are used to determine the number of that will be provisioned. In the equations-below, if Configuration Control id equipped then the value is equal to one (1), if not equipped, then it is equal to zero (0). HSL Cable refers to the High. Speed Link Cable used to interface with the Meridian 1, and will always equal to 1. The value used for Communications Port in the Dual Tower Configuration is 1. 3.4.3.1 Single Tower Configuration: = Terminals + Printers + Configuration Control + HSL Cable If the equation is the system. then no additional will be added to then one (1) additional TC will be added to If the equation is the Single Tower system. 3.4.3.2 Dual Tower Configuration: Because there are two towers, the separately for each tower. 1st Tower will be calculated Printers + HSL Cable + Communications Port If the 1st Tower equation 6 than no additional TC will be provisioned for the first tower. If the 1st Tower equation 6 than one (1) additional TC will be provisioned on the first tower. 2nd Tower Terminals + Configuration Control If the 2nd Tower equation 8 than no additional provisioded on the second tower. will be If the 2nd Tower equation and 16 than one (1) additional will be provisioned for a total of two on the-second tower. TC If the 2nd Tower equation and 24 than two (2) additional will be provisioned for a total of three on the second tower. If the 2nd Tower equation and 32 than three (3) additional w i l l b e p r o v i s i o n e d f o r a t o t a l of f o u r o n t h e s e c o n d t o w e r . Autoquote Userguide April 20, 3 . 4 . 4 Cables One cable All cables provisioned will have Modem Control functionality. is needed for each Terminal, each Printer, and special cables are needed for Color Graphic Supervisory Terminals and for the Configuration Control software option. All cables will be provisioned automatically with the associated hardware that is The following cable summarizes the cables used when provisioning an MAX system: A0353364 A0356365 A0365366 PO700816 Supervisor Color Graphic PC Cable (with Modem Control) (with Modem Control) Printer Cable (12 ft.) for the for the (w/Modem Control) Terminal Cable (50 Configuration Control Cable Note: Configuration Control software requires one Configuration Control cable and one Printer Cable to function. 3.4.5 Tapes One tape is provided with each ACD-MAX system for daily backup. Three tapes are recommended for each ACD-MAX system. Additional tapes are provisioned via Hardware Input 7. 3.5 CIRCUIT SWITCH REQUIREMENTS 3.5.1 Software There is certain required software and some optional software that is provisioned on the Meridian 1. Required Software: Basic ACD Features Advanced ACD Features ACD Reports Load Management ACD Link ACD-D/MAX Reports Enhancements Note: ACD-D/MAX Reports Enhancements should be ordered for-all systems running Release 13 o r higher. Optional Software: Enhanced ACD Overflow ACD Timed Overflow 10 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 Serial Data Interface (SDI) The ACD-MAX is connected to the Meridian 1 via an port and a High Speed Link cable. The High Speed Link cable is provided in the ACD-MAX system package, and the port will be provisioned on the Meridian provisioned. when ACD Load Management 11 Userguide April 20, 1990 Autoquote Userguide 4. April 20, 1990 REPORTS This section provides information on most reports available with the Meridian Mail quotation model. An explanation and example of each report is included. 9 Price Summary Input Listing Equipment List The header report (Report 9999) will print Out automatically when reports are requested; this report may also be requested like any other report. W i t h i n e a c h s u b s e c t i o n t h e r e are e x p l a n a t i o n s o f t h e c o n t e n t s o f t h e report being discussed. The mechanics of using Autoquote are not included in this product Refer to the Introduction and Overview chapter for detailed chapter. information on how to use the Autoquote. 4.1 Report 1 Price Summary This report subtotals Customer List Price (CLP) by product group. subtotals are for quoted items listed on the Report 9 Equipment List. SUMMARY PRICE --- QUOTE: APPLICATION/PERIPHERAL DEVICE HARDWARE APPLICATION/PERIPHERAL DEVICE SOFTWARE TOTAL CLP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FOR USE ONLY BY PERSONNEL AUTHORIZED BY NTI. 13 NOT 00000023 54404.00 53350.00 107754.00 PUBLIC DISCLOSURE. Autoquote Userguide 4.2 Report 6 Input April 20, 1990 Listing This report lists all inputs used to engineer provision the system quoted. Default values and input adjustments will be reflected in this report. A c t u a l "saved" inputs can be viewed when loading an existing quote. The inputs will be stored as shown on this report if the quote is "saved" after running reports. R6 - - - I N P U T L I S T I N G - - - QUOTE: 00000023 CONFIGURATIONS 001 165.0 002 12.0 003 4.0 003 1200.0 NUMBER OF ACD AGENTS NUMBER OF SUPERVISORY T E R M I N A L S NUMBER OF ACD QUEUES MAXIMUM NUMBER OF C A L L S P E R H O U R SOFTWARE 001 1.0 002 1.0 003 1.0 CONFIGURATION CONTROL CUSTOM CALCULATOR NETWORKED ACD HARDWARE 001 8.0 002 2.0 005 1.0 006 2.0 007 4.0 AMBER TERMINAL HP RUGGEDWRITER PRINTER HP LASERJET SERIES II PRINTER SUPERVISOR COLOR GRAPHIC ADDITIONAL 3M TAPES FOR BACKUP 14 Autoquote Userguide 4.3 Report 9 Equipment April 20, 1990 List This report lists all items which are included in the price quoted. If a hardware or software item i s n o t l i s t e d i n t h i s r e p o r t , i t i s n o t Package and assembly codes are used wherever included in the price. possible. For each of these items, the quantity, equipment code, description, type code, unit Commercial List Price (CLP) and extended CLP are displayed. In addition, the leftmost field of the report displays if the item in question is in a controlled release status. An asterisk (*) indicates that the item is on a controlled release basis. column is the Autoquote equipment type code. It The number in the is used to designate logical groupings of hardware and software. The prices in the following report are not actual prices but are put in as an example, refer to the Meridian 1 Communications Systems Pricing Manual for pricing information. . --- EQUIPMENT LIST . QUOTE: 00000023 UNIT QNTY * * * 1 2 2 a * 4 * 12 * 3 * 2 * 1 EQP CODE A0368534 A0353378 A0354417 A0362144 A0314597 A0365366 A0356365 A0353364 A0356365 DESCRIPTION TP HP VECTRA BASIC SYSTEM DUAL 8 PORT W/MODEM CONTROL HP RUGGEDWRITER PRINTER TERMINAL AMBER HP LASERJET SERIES II PRINTER 3M TAPE CARTRIDGE . T E R M I N A L C A B L E 5 0 FT. PRINTER FT. CABLE/SUP. COLOR GRAPHIC PC PRINTER CABLE/12 FT. DUAL TOWER ACD-MAX SOFTWARE CONTROL OPTION (DUAL) CUSTOM CALCULATOR OPTION (DUAL) ACD-MAX NETWORKING OPTION (DUAL) 42000.00 950.00 1884.00 112 112 112 552.00 5670.00 35.00 67.00 45.00 75.00 36.00 29200.00 9965.00 6850.00 9945.00 EXTENDED CLP 42000.00 1090.00 3768.00 4416.00 5670.00 140.00 804.00 135.00 150.00 36.00 29200.00 9965.00 6850.00 9945.00 * INDICATES CONTROL RELEASE; PROPER AUTHORIZATION REQUIRED FOR THESE ITEMS. FOR USE ONLY BY PERSONNEL AUTHORIZED BY NTI. NOT FOR DISCLOSURE. Autoquote Ueerguide April 20, 1990 Userguide 5. APPENDIX 1: April 20, 1990 INPUT FORM ACD-MAX QUOTATION REQUEST FORM SALESMAN: TYPE QUOTE: INDUSTRY CODE: E N D - U S E R NAME: END-USER LOC: CUTOVER DATE: MODEL/GENERIC CODE: SOFTWARE RELEASE: [C] CONFIGURATIONS INPUT CLASS 31 Number of ACD Agents Number of Supervisory Terminals Number of ACD Queues C a l l s P e r Hour [S] SOFTWARE INPUT CLASS Configuration Control Custom Calculator Networked ACD [H] HARDWARE INPUT CLASS Amber Terminal HP Printer HP Printer HP DeskJet Printer HP LaserJet Printer Supervisor Color Graphic Additional 3M Tapes for Backup 17 1 2 3 telemanuals.com Meridian I AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE MERIDIAN MS-1 Userguide April 20, MERIDIAN MS-1 MEETING COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE CHAPTER 1. 2 . INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................... 1 1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..l 1.2 VALID MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..l INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 INPUT 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.2 INPUT CODES, DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES.....3 Option.......,......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.2.1 System 2.2.2 Peripherals......... 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.1 SOFTWARE PROVISIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.1.1 MS-1 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.2 Reservations Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 HARDWARE PROVISIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5 3.2.1 Conference Bridge Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.2 Application Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3 Trunking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3.2 Ground Start Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3.3 E&M Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.4 Power Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.4.2 48V DC Power Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.4.3 (-) 48V DC Wiring Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.5 Miscellaneous Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.5.1 Digital Trunk Cable ................... 3.2.5.2 Connector Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.5.3 MS-l Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.5.4 Cabinet Door Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.5.5 Input Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.5.6 Vertical Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.5.7 Horizontal Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.6 Terminal Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 2 . 6 . 1 M4020 T e r m i n a l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.6.2 LAN Interface Unit (LIU) .................... 3.2.6.3 System Matrix Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.6.4 Parallel Printer Cable (10') ................ 3.2.6.5 Serial Printer Cable (10') .................. 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 Autoquote Ueerguide April 20, REPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Price Summary 4.2 Equipment List 4.3 Input Listing 5. APPENDIX 1: INPUT Report ........................... Report 9 . ....................... Report FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii 13 Autoguote Userguide 1. April 1990 INTRODUCTION This chapter of the Meridian Business Systems Autoguote User Guide Communication provides information on quoting the Meridian System. The mechanics of using Autoquote are not included in this product chapter.- Refer to the Introduction and Overview chapter for detailed information on how to use the Autoquote System. 1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Meridian MS-1 Meeting Communication System is a digital, audio teleconferencing system providing superior audio quality for up to eight simultaneous users. 1.2 VALID MODELS There are two Meridian MS-1 Autoquote models. Model Generic Meridian MS-1 On-line Input Form MS1 Release Since neither model has an associated release, simply enter a carriage return at the release prompt. 1 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 Autoquote Userguide 2. April 20, INPUTS This section covers all inputs associated with the Meridian MS-l generic. As with all Autoquote models, data input consists of responses to prompted entries and manual inputs associated with specific input codes. A blank input form is included in the back of this chapter. It is recommended that copies be used for preparing quotations. An on-line (Model/Generic input form is also available on the Autoquote system . 2.1 INPUT CLASSES Meridian MS-1 inputs are organized into two input classes: System Options Peripherals . When creating a new quote, Autoquote will prompt for each input class in the order listed above. The letter designation is used to make selections from the Input Menu. 2.2 INPUT CODES, DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES The following pages contain information on each Meridian MS-1 input: and default values where appropriate. codes, descriptions, 2.2.1 System Options All System Options inputs accept one entry. 1 Number of Ports Enter the number of value determines the or more conference) system package, 18, 2 Trunk ports desired for the system. This maximum number of participants (in one supported at one time. The appropriate 24, or 48 port, be provisioned. S t a r t , 3 = 4 - W i r e E&M) This input indicates the type of trunking to be utilized. two (2) for Analog Ground Enter one (1) for Digital Start, or three (3) for 4-Wire E&M trunks. 3 Power Indicator Enter one (1) to provision AC power equipment or two (2) to provision -48V DC equipment. 3 Autoquote Userguide 50 Reservations April 20, Software Enter one (1) if Reservations functionality is desired. 2.2.2 Peripherals All Peripherals inputs accept one entry. 1 M4020 Terminals Enter the number desired. five terminals. 20 Additional Interface Unit The MS-1 supports a maximum of (LIU) Enter one (1) for an additional LIU. 30 . Matrix Printer to M4020 Enter one (1) if a System Printer is to be connected to a M4020 terminal. Only one System Printer may be requested per system. 32 System Matrix Printer to LIU Enter one (1) if a System Printer is to be connected to an Only one System Printer may be requested be per system. Userguide 3. April 20, 1990 ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING This section contains the engineering/provisioning rules used to generate Meridian MS-1 configurations. 3.1 SOFTWARE PROVISIONING The current Meridian MS-1 release offers base software features and one optional feature. 3.1.1 MS-1 Software Base software features are included in each Conference Bridge Assembly. The assembly provisioned is determined by the number of ports requested (System Options input 1). Ports 1-18 19-24 25-48 Assembly 18 Port 24 Port 48 Port MS-1 MS-l MS-1 Software Software Software 3.1.2 Reservations Software Reservations Software allows attendants to make reservations up This is quoted by entering a one for System to 12 months in advance. Options input 50. 3.2 HARDWARE PROVISIONING The following subsections summarize the hardware provisioned for different input parameters. 3.2.1 Conference Bridge Assembly One assembly is provisioned for each quote. The actual assembly is d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e number o f p o r t s r e q u e s t e d ( S y s t e m O p t i o n s i n p u t 1 ) . Ports 1-18 19-24 25-48 Assembly NTMS1800 NTMS2400 NTMS4800 18 Port 24 Port 48 Port C o n f e r e n c e B r i d g e Assembly Conference B r i d g e Assembly C o n f e r e n c e B r i d g e Assembly 3.2.2 Application Processor One 3 MB Applications Processor is required to support Reservations Software. It is quoted if a one is entered for System Options input 50. 5 Autoquote Userguide 3.2.3 April 1990 Trunk'ing An MS-1 system may be configured to support Ground Start, or 4-Wire E&M trunking. The appropriate hardware is provisioned as follows. 3.2.3.1 Digital Trunk Link SRU The Digital Trunk Link SRU is provisioned if a one is entered trunking. Two are quoted if a for System Options input 2, indicating 48 Port Conference Bridge Assembly is provisioned, otherwise only one is quoted. One cable is required for each Digital Trunk Link. 3.2.3.2 Ground Start Bundle Ground Start trunking is quoted if a two is entered for input number 2, indicating Ground Start trunking. T h e assembly p r o v i s i o n e d i s determined by the number of ports requested (System Options input 1). Ports l-18 19-24 25-48 Assembly 18 Port Ground Start Bundle 24 Port Ground Start Bundle 48 Port Ground Start Bundle 3.2.3.3 4-Wire E&M Bundle 4-Wire E&M trunking is quoted if a three is entered for input number 2, indicating 4-Wire E&M trunking. T h e assembly p r o v i s i o n e d i s d e t e r m i n e d by the number of ports requested, (System Options input 1). Ports 18 Port E&M Bundle Port E&M Bundle 48 Port E&M Bundle l-18 1 9 - 2 4 25-48 3.2.4 Power Equipment A n M S - l s y s t e m may be p r o v i s i o n e d w i t h e i t h e r AC or -48V DC power. The appropriate equipment is provisioned as follows. 3.2.4.1 AC Power Supply Each cabinet requires one AC Power Supply if AC power is requested b y e n t e r i n g a 1 f o r System O p t i o n i n p u t 3 . 3.2.4.2 (-) 48V DC Power Converter Each cabinet requires one -48V DC Power Converter if DC power is requested by entering a 2 for System Option input 3. 6 Userguide April 20, 1990 3.2.4.3 (-) 48V DC Wiring Harness One is provisioned for each -48V DC Power Converter quoted. 3.2.5 Miscellaneous Equipment Additional equipment is provisioned according to the following rules. 3.2.5.1 Digital Trunk Cable (50') One is provisioned for each Digital Trunk Link quoted. 3.2.5.2 Connector Kit Two are quoted if a 48 Port Conference Bridge Assembly is provisioned, otherwise only one is quoted. 3.2.5.3 MS-l Cabinet The number quoted depends solely on card slot requirements for the There are no power or thermal restrictions for equipment provisioned. t h e MS-l C a b i n e t s . The following guidelines specify the number quoted: All 18 port systems require two cabinets. Three cabinets are necessary for 24 port systems utilizing All other 24 port systems require two Wire E&M trunking. cabinets. Two cabinets are needed for 48 port systems with trunking, AC power, and no Reservations software. All other 48 port systems require three cabinets. 3.2.5.4 Cabinet Door Latch Each cabinet requires a Cabinet Door Latch. 3.2.5.5 Input Jumper One is provisioned for each quote. 3.2.5.6 Vertical Jumper One is provisioned for each quote. 3.2.5.7 Horizontal Jumper The number provisioned equals the number of cabinets quoted minus one. 3.2.6 Terminal Devices The following terminal devices are provisioned as follows. 7 Userguide April 3.2.6.1 M4020 Terminal The number quoted equals the number requested (Peripherals input 10). A m a x i m u m o f f i v e t e r m i n a l s m a y b e s u p p o r t e d b y a n MS-1 s y s t e m . 3.2.6.2 LAN Interface Unit (LIU) input 20) or a One is quoted if either a LAN Interface Unit System Matrix Printer (Peripherals input 32) to LIU is requested. A maximum of one LIU may be included in a quote. 3.2.6.3 System Matrix Printer quoted if either a System Matrix Printer to M4020 (System Options input 30) or System Matrix Printer to LIU (System Options input 32) is requested. A maximum of one may be supported by an MS-1 system. 3.2.6.4 Parallel Printer Cable (10') One is provisioned for each System Matrix Printer to LIU requested (System Options input 32). 3.2.6.5 Serial Printer Cable (10') O n e i s p r o v i s i o n e d for e a c h S y s t e m M a t r i x P r i n t e r c o n n e c t e d t o a M 4 0 2 0 terminal. 8 Userguide April 20, 1990 4. REPORTS This section provides information on most'reports available with the Meridian MS-l quotation model. An explanation of each report is also included. A sample of report 15 Discount Summary will not appear in the User This report provides discounting information which may vary for Guide. different users. 4.1 Price Summary Report 1 This report subtotals Commercial List Price (CLP) by product group. subtotals are for quoted items listed in Report 9 Equipment List. The Installation and Basic Monthly Maintenance prices are also listed. --- PRICE SUMMARY --MS-1 HARDWARE PERIPHERALS TOTAL CLP QUOTE: 00003574 36231.00 4255.00 40486.00 INSTALLATION 586.00 BASIC MONTHLY MAINTENANCE 323.00 Autoquote Userguide 4.2 Equipment List April 20, 1990 Report 9 This report lists all items which are included in the price quoted. If a hardware or software item is not listed in this report, it is not included in the price. Package and assembly codes are used whenever possible. For e a c h o f t h e s e items, t h e q u a n t i t y , p a r t n u m b e r , d e s c r i p t i o n , t y p e code, unit CLP and extended CLP are listed. The number in the Type Code equipment type code used to designate logical column is the groupings of hardware and software. The letter in the Type Code column is the product discount category. --- EQUIPMENT LIST --- QUOTE: 00003574 TYPE UNIT EXTENDED. . QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION CODE 1 NTMS1800 MS-1 18 PORT CONFERENCE BRIDGE 27025.00 27025.00 -- FOLLOWING IS A PARTIAL LIST OF ITEMS CONTAINED IN THE ABOVE SYSTEM. -- THEY ARE LISTED FOR REFERENCE ONLY. PRIMARY PROCESSOR SRU 1 5MB APPLICATIONS PROCESSOR SRU 1 1 80 MB DISK STORAGE SRU 3MB CONFERENCING SERVICE SRU 1 SRU 1 NETWORK SERVICES SRU 1 DIGITAL TONE RECEIVER 1 1 A0321335 CROSS CONNECT PANEL 1 A0328670 CABLE/ 25 PR, 25 FT. 1 M4020 DATA/VOICE TERMINAL -- ADDITIONS REQUIRED TO THE 18 PORT CONFERENCE BRIDGE ARE: 1 DIGITAL TRUNK LINE CABLE 5 0 ' F T . G31 2 AC POWER SUPPLY G31 2 MS-1 CABINET G31 2 MS-1 CABINET LATCH G31 DIGITAL TRUNK LINK CABLE FT. G31 1 CONNECTOR KIT 1 INPUT JUMPER G31 1 VERTICAL JUMPER G31 1 HORIZONTAL JUMPER 1 M4020 DATA/VOICE TERMINAL 1 A 0 3 1 7 0 7 3 SYSTEM MATRIX PRINTER 10 3500.00 1000.00 1320.00 .oo 70.00 6.00 330.00 330.00 330.00 2860.00 3500.00 2000.00 2640.00 .oo 70.00 6.00 330.00 330.00 330.00 1395.00 2860.00 Userguide 4.3 Input Listing April 20, 1990 Report 6 This report lists all inputs used to engineer and provision the Meridian MS-1 Default values and input adjustments will be reflected in this system quoted. Actual saved inputs can be viewed when loading an existing quote. report. The inputs will be stored as shown on this the quote is saved after generating reports. QUOTE: R6 - - - I N P U T L I S T I N G - - - . 00003574 BASE SYSTEM 18.0 001 1.0 002 003 1.0 NUMBER OF PORTS TRUNK TYPE POWER INDICATOR PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 2.0 010 030 1.0 TERMINALS M4020 SYSTEM MATRIX PRINTER on M4020 11 E&M) Userguide April 20, Ueerguide 5. APPENDIX 1: April 20, 1990 INPUT FORM NORTHERN TELECOM MBS QUOTATION SYSTEM MERIDIAN CONFERENCING SYSTEM VERSION: 88.01 SALESMAN: TYPE QUOTE: 1 INDUSTRY CODE: END-USER NAME: END-USER LOC: . 2 3 CUTOVER DATE: MODEL GENERIC CODE: MS1 SYSTEM OPTIONS NUMBER OF PORTS TRUNK TYPE POWER INDICATOR E&M) RESERVATIONS SOFTWARE PERIPHERALS TERMINALS LAN INTERFACE UNIT S Y S T E M M A T R I X P R I N T E R t o M4020 SYSTEM MATRIX PRINTER to LIU PERSONAL PRINTER - . -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13 Autoquote Ueerguide April 20, telemanuals.com Meridian AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE MERIDIAN MESSAGE CENTER I Autoguote Userguide April 20, 1990 MERIDIAN MESSAGE CENTER AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE CHAPTER' 1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 PRODUCT 1.2 2. VALID MODELS......................................1 INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 INPUT 2.2 INPUT CODES, 2.2.1 2.2.2 3. DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES.....3 System Option............... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Peripherals........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3.1.1 DTMF-ASCII Converter Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3.1.2 DTMF-ASCII Converter Box Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7 3.1.3 SL-1 RS232 Connection Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3.1.4 M4010 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3.1.5 NT220 Registry Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3.1.6 Registry Terminal Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7 3.1.7 Registry Terminal Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7 3.1.8 1200 Baud Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3.1.9 224 AT/D Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3.1.10 202 T Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3.1.11 Modem Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3.1.12 Printer Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3.1.13 Serial Ports...; .................................... 8 Ports ...................................... 8 3.1.15 M UX O p t i o n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..a 3.1.16 Conversion Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3.1.17 LAN Interface Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3.1.18 Lanlink SRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 4. REPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Price Report 4.2 Equipment List 5: APPENDIX 1: ........................ ....... . 4.3 Input Listing 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Report INPUT FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 15 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 Autoquote Userguide 1. April 20, 1990 INTRODUCTION This chapter of the Meridian Business Systems Autoguote User Guide provides information on quoting the Meridian Message Center. The mechanics of using Autoquote are not included in this product chapter. Refer to the Introduction and Overview chapter for detailed information on how to use the Autoguote System. 1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Meridian Message Center provides text messaging capabilities to business and medical applications. 1.2 VALID MODELS There are two Meridian Message Center Model Generic models. Release M e r i d i a n M e s s a g e C e n t e r MSG On-line Input Form MSGF return at the model has an associated release, simply enter a carriage release prompt. Ueerguide April 20, 1990 Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 INPUTS 2. This section covers all inputs Center the Meridian Message generic. As with all Autoquote models, data input consists of responses to prompted entries and manual inputs associated with specific input codes. A blank input form is included in the back of this chapter. It is recommended that copies be used for preparing quotations. An on-line input form is also available on the Autoquote system (Model/Generic "MSGF"). 2.1 INPUT CLASSES Meridian Message Center inputs are organized into two input classes: System Options Peripherals When creating a new quote, Autoquote will prompt for each input class in the order listed above. The letter designation is used to make selections from the Input Menu. 2.2 INPUT CODES, DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES The following pages contain information on each Meridian Message Center input: codes, descriptions, and default values where appropriate. 2.2.1 System O p t i o n s All System Options inputs accept one entry. 1 SYSTEM INDICATOR . ANSWERING, REGISTRY) Enter one (1) for the Basic Message Center system package, two (2) for the Physicians Answering system package, or three (3) for the Physicians Registry system package. DEMAND PRINT Enter one (1) if desired. MESSAGING 51 Enter one (1) if desired. Autoquote Userguide April 20, 52 PAGER INTERFACE Enter one (1) if desired. if desired. 5 3 P H Y S I C I A N S REFERRAL Enter one (1) 5 4 P R E - P R O G R A M M E D MESSAGES 55 REMOTE DEMAND PRINT Enter one (1) if desired. 56 USER CHANGE OF STATUS Enter one (1) if desired. 57 SL-1 AUTO SCREEN ACTIVATION Enter 6 0 SMDI AUTO one (1) if desired. SCREEN ACTIVATION LINES) Enter one (1) if required to support less than 1000 lines. 6 1 SMDI AUTO SCREEN ACTIVATION ( LINES) E n t e r o n e ( 1 ) i f r e q u i r e d t o s u p p o r t over 1 0 0 0 l i n e s . 2.2.2 Peripherals All Peripherals inputs accept one entry. 1 M4010 TERMINALS Enter the quantity desired. '2 REGISTRY TERMINALS (NT220) Enter the quantity desired. 3 REGISTRY TERMINAL ENCLOSURES Enter the quantity desired. 1 0 A D D I T I O N A L L A N I N T E R F A C E UNITS the quantity desired. ADDITIONAL Enter the UNITS desired. 4 Autoquote Userguide 12 April 8-PORT MUX OPTIONS Enter the quantity desired. 13 PAGING INDICATOR If paging functionality is desired, the type(s) of paging to be supported must be specified. Enter one (1) for Tone or D i g i t a l p a g i n g Only, t w o ( 2 ) f o r A l p h a n u m e r i c p a g i n g o n l y , or three (3) for both Tone/Digital and Alphanumeric paging. 30 SYSTEM PRINTERS to LIU Enter the number of system printers that are to be connected to a LAN interface unit. 31 SYSTEM PRINTERS to M4010 Enter the number of system printers that are to be connected t o a M4010. Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 Autoquote Userguide 3. April 20, 1990 ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING section contains the engineering/provisioning rules used to generate Meridian Message Center configurations. 3.1.1 DTMF-ASCII Converter Box One is required for each of the following software options: Demand P r i n t , Pre-Programmed Messages, and User Change of Status. Note that one is included in the Demand Print assembly. 3.1.2 DTMF-ASCII Converter Box Cable One is required for each DTMF-ASCII Converter Box 3.1.3 RS232 Connection Cable One is required for Auto-Screen Activation. in the Basic Message Center base package. Note that one is included 3.1.4 M4010 Terminal The number provisioned is equal to the number requested at Peripherals Two are included in all base system packages. input 1. 3.1.5 NT220 Registry Terminal The number provisioned is equal to the number requested at Peripherals input 2. One is included in the Physicians Registry base system package. 3.1.6 Registry Terminal Cable The number provisioned is equal to the number of NT220 Registry Terminals provisioned. One is included in the Physicians Registry base system package. 3.1.7 Registry Terminal Enclosure The number provisioned is equal to the number requested at Peripherals input 3. 3.1.8 1200 Baud Modem O n e i s i n c l u d e d i n every s y s t e m p a c k a g e . is required for Alphanumeric paging. An additional 1200 Baud Modem Userguide April 20, 1990 3.1.9 224 AT/D Modem One is required for Remote Demand Print. 3.1.10 202 T Modem One is required for SMDI Auto-Screen Activation. 3.1.11 Modem Cable One is required for each of the following modems: 1200 Baud Modem, 224 One is included in every base system AT/D Modem, and 202 T Modem. package. 3.1.12 Printer Cable One (Peripherals for each system printer to be connected to an LIU 30). input 3.1.13 Serial Ports One serial port is required for each of the following: NT220 Registry Terminal, SL-1 RS232 Connection Cable, 1200 Baud Modem, 224 Serial ports are Modem, 202 T Modem, and DTMF-ASCII Converter Box. f o u n d o n b o t h t h e L A N I n t e r f a c e U n i t a n d 8 - P o r t MUX O p t i o n . 3.1.14 Parallel Ports One p a r a l l e l p o r t i s r e q u i r e d f o r e a c h s y s t e m p r i n t e r t o b e c o n n e c t e d t o Parallel ports are found on an LIU, indicated with Peripheral input 20. b o t h t h e L A N I n t e r f a c e U n i t a n d 8 - P o r t M UX O p t i o n . 3.1.15 M UX O p t i o n E a c h 8 - P o r t M UX O p t i o n s u p p o r t s e i g h t s e r i a l p o r t s a n d o n e p a r a l l e l port. The number provisioned is the number requested at Peripherals input 12. 3.1.16 Conversion Cable O n e i s p r o v i s i o n e d f o r e a c h 8 - P o r t M UX O p t i o n . 3.1.17 LAN Interface Unit Each LAN Interface Unit (LIU) supports two serial ports and one parallel port. The number of required to support serial and parallel ports is calculated independently. where S SR to support serial ports. Serial ports required. Number of Options. telemanuals.com Autoquote Userguide P = (PR April 20, 1990 (8 * M)) where P LIU's to support parallel ports. PR = Parallel ports required. M = Number of M UX O p t i o n s . The maximum number of LIU's required to meet serial and parallel port requirements plus any additional requested at Peripherals input 10 determine the total number of LIU's provisioned. + A L = where L = Number of LIU's S = LIU's to support to support P A = Additional LIU's provisioned. serial ports. parallel ports. desired (Peripherals input 10). Note that one LIU is contained in each base system package. 3.1.18 SRV Each Lanlink SRU has eight ports to support the following: LAN Interface Unit, M4010 Terminal, and MUX O p t i o n . The number provisioned is determined as follows. S where S = Number of Lanlink SRU's provisioned. L = Number of LIU's provisioned. T = Number of Terminals provisioned. Number of M UX O p t i o n s p r o v i s i o n e d . Additional Lanlink SRU's desired (Peripherals input 11). A A maximum of four Lanlink SRU's may be configured on any one Message Note that one Lanlink SRU is contained in each base Center system. system package. telemanuals.com telemanuals.com Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 4 . REPORTS This section provides information on M e r i d i a n Message C e n t e r q u o t a t i o n m o d e l . is also included. reports available with the An explanation of each report A s a m p l e of r e p o r t 1 5 D i s c o u n t S u m m a r y w i l l n o t a p p e a r i n t h e U s e r This report provides discounting information which may vary for Guide. different Autoquote users. 4.1 Price Summary Report 1 This report subtotals Commercial List Price (CLP) by product group. s u b t o t a l s a r e f o r q u o t e d items l i s t e d i n R e p o r t 9 E q u i p m e n t L i s t . The Installation and Basic Monthly Maintenance prices are also listed. --- PRICE SUMMARY --- QUOTE: MESSAGE CENTER HARDWARE MESSAGE CENTER SOFTWARE TOTAL CLP 55780.00 5000.00 60780.00 INSTALLATION 1540.00 BASIC MONTHLY MAINTENANCE 638.00 11 telemanuals.com Userguide 4.2 Equipment List April 20, 1990 Report 9 This report lists all items which are included in the price quoted. If a hardware or software item i s n o t l i s t e d i n t h i s r e p o r t , i t i s n o t included in the price. Package and assembly codes are used whenever possible. For each of these items, the quantity, part number, description, type code, unit CLP and extended CLP are listed. The number in the Type Code column is the Autoquote equipment type code used to designate logical groupings of hardware and software. The letter in the Type Code column is the product discount category. EQUIPMENT LIST --- QUOTE: TYPE UNIT QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION CODE 1 NTMSG-01 MESSAGE CENTER SYSTEM G3 41400.00 -- FOLLOWING IS A LIST OF ITEMS CONTAINED IN THE ABOVE SYSTEM: PRIMARY PROCESSOR SRU 1 DISK STORAGE SRU 1 SMB SASI FILE PROCESSOR SRU 1 170MB DISK SRU 1 LAN INTERFACE UNIT 1 LANLINK SRU 1 AC POWER SUPPLY 2 MS-1 CABINET 2 INPUT JUMPER 1 HORIZONTAL JUMPER 1 VERTICAL JUMPER 1 1 A0321335 CROSS CONNECT PANEL 1 A 0 3 2 8 6 7 0 C A B L E / 2 5 P R , 2 5 FT. 1 SL-1 RS232 CONN CABLE 25 FT. DXMS OPERATING SYSTEM 1 DVIX V TIMESHARING SOFTWARE 1 MESSAGE CENTER SOFTWARE 1 SL-1 AUTO SCREEN ACTIVATION DEMAND PRINT MODULE 1 2 M4010 DATA TERMINAL 1 A0344322 1200 BPS MODEM CABLE/ RS232 MODEM 10 FT. 1 -- ADDITIONS REQUIRED TO THE MESSAGE CENTER SYSTEM ARE: LAN INTERFACE UNIT G3 1 1 LANLINK SRU G3 1 INTRA-OFFICE MESSAGING G3 8 M4010 DATA TERMINAL G3 2 10 FT. PARALLEL CABLE G3 12 950.00 3000.00 5000.00 1295.00 35.00 EXTENDED 41400.00 950.00 3000.00 5000.00 10360.00 70.00 telemanuals.com Autoquote Userguide 4.3 Input Listing April 20, 1990 Report 6 This report lists all inputs used to engineer and provision the Meridian Default values and input adjustments will Message Center system quoted. Actual saved inputs can be viewed when be reflected in this report. The inputs will be stored as shown on this loading an existing report if the quote is saved after generating reports. R6 --- INPUT SYSTEM 001 050 051 1.0 1.0 1.0 PERIPHERALS 001 10.0 030 2.0 LISTING --- QUOTE: SYSTEM INDICATOR DEMAND PRINT MESSAGING M4010 TERMINALS SYSTEM PRINTERS 13 telemanuals.com Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990 telemanuals.com Ueerguide 5. APPENDIX 1: April 20, 1990 INPUT FORM NORTHERN TELECOM MBS QUOTATION SYSTEM MERIDIAN MESSAGE CENTER SYSTEM VERSION: 88.01 SALESMAN: TYPE QUOTE: 1 INDUSTRY CODE: END-USER NAME: END-USER LOC: CUTOVER DATE: 2 3 MODEL GENERIC CODE: MSG SYSTEM OPTIONS SYSTEM INDICATOR 521 ANSWERING, DEMAND PRINT INTRA-OFFICE MESSAGING PAGER INTERFACE PHYSICIANS REFERRAL PRE-PROGRAMMED MESSAGES REMOTE DEMAND PRINT USER CHANGE OF STATUS SL-1 AUTO SCREEN ACTIVATION SMDI AUTO SCREEN ACTIVATION SMDI AUTO SCREEN ACTIVATION ( PERIPHERALS M4010 TERMINALS REGISTRY TERMINALS (NT220) REGISTRY TERMINAL ENCLOSURES ADDITIONAL LAN INTERFACE UNITS ADDITIONAL LANLINK UNITS 8-PORT MUX OPTIONS PAGING INDICATOR SYSTEM PRINTERS to LIU S Y S T E M P R I N T E R S t o M4010 15 REGISTRY) LINES) LINES) telemanuals.com
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No Warning : Error loading Encrypt objectEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools